Sme35190b Far2x07ser

Back
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
FAR-2107/2807 series
FAR-2117/2127
FAR-2817/2827
FAR-2827W
FAR-2137S/2837S
FAR-2837SW
Important;
This manual is intended for use by authorized
FURUNO service technicians for the installation
of this equipment.
Under no circumstances should the contents of
this manual be released to the user.
The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.
FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : 0798-65-2111
Fax : 0798-65-4200
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan

FIRST EDITION :MAR.
: MAR. 2005
B : SEP. 05, 2005
Pub. No. SME-35190-B
*00015324800*
( NAYO ) FAR-2107/2807 SER. *00015324800*
*00015324800*
*SME35190B00*
*SME35190B00*
*SME35190B00*
Following tables show normal value in RF Monitor display.
Keystroke: MENU>9>8>2 (Selftest)
FAR-2827W, 2x27
Monitor Item L: 48NM M2: 6NM M1: 3NM S2: 1.5NM S1: 0.125NM
TUNE IND 1.6 1.6 1.5 0.7 1.0
R MONITOR 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9
MAG CURRENT 4.6 3.6 2.8 2.5 1.9
HEATER 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.7 1.7
TUNE OUT 16.0 16.0 16.3 16.2 16.2
FAR-2837SW, 2x37S
TUNE IND 1.5 1.7 1.6 1.4 2.6
R MONITOR 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
MAG CURRENT 4.3 3.9 3.2 2.7 2.0
HEATER 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8
TUNE OUT 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.1 9.8
Remedy
Modify the RF unit as described in the attached sheet. RF unit modification kit is
available with the following code number
Model Code Number

12 kW/25 kW X-band (TR UP and TR DOWN) MOD-FAR-001
30 kW TR UP MOD-FAR-002
30 kW TR DOWN MOD-FAR-003
Factory modification
From March 2005
FAR-2xx7 series Radar Modifications
1. 10kW/25kW X band Radar
1. 12 kW/25 kW X-band Radar

1.1 Necessary Parts
Table 1.1 Parts list
Necessary parts Q’ty Modification No.
RFC cover: 27/27W 1 pc. Fig. 1.1
Spacer for RFC cover: M3 x 15 7 pcs. Fig. 1.1
Shield mesh for IF-RFC cable: 150 mm 1 pc. Fig. 1.2
Metal clamp: 9 mm 1 pc. Fig. 1.2
Jumper wire: 145 mm 1 pc. Fig. 1.3
Cable tie 100 mm 2 pcs. Fig. 1.3
1.2 Modification procedure

1.1.1 Addition of RFC cover
1. Replace the fixing screw of RF board with spacer.
2. Add RFC cover to the RFC board fix with the above screws.
Fig. 1.1 RFC cover
1.1.2 Add shield mesh to the interconnection cable between RFC and IF boards.
1. Run the cable avoiding the M8 bolt, which fixes the RF module as in Fig. 1.1.
2. Fix the cable by the metal clamp as in Fig. 1.2.
3. Tighten the both ends of shield mesh with a cable tie, then protect it with vinyl
tape.
Fig. 1.2 Add shield mesh-1 Fig. 1.3 Add shield mesh-3
1
1. 10kW/25kW X band Radar
3. Link the magnetron chassis and the GND of MD board with jumper wire.
Fig. 1.4
Fig. 1.5
Fig. 1.6
2
2. 30 kW TR UP modification
2. 30 kW TR UP Radar
2.1 Necessary Parts

RFC cover: 37S 1 pc. Fig. 2.1
EMI core: RFC13 1 pc. Fig. 2.1
EMI core: RFC8 2 pcs. Fig. 2.1
Cable tie: 100 mm 6 pcs. Fig. 2.1
EMI core: RFC10 1 pc. Fig. 2.3
Cable clump 1 pc. Fig. 2.3
M3 x 12 screw 1 pc. Fig. 2.3
Microwave absorbent: 150 x 60 1 pc. Fig. 2.4
2.1 Addition of RFC cover

1. Set up the RFC cover and cable ties as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1 RFC cover
2. Replace the fixing screws with the spacer.

3. Disconnect the plug P803.
4. Add EMI cores to the cables as shown in Fig. 2.2.
RFC13
RFC8 (J802)
(J803, J804, J805)
Fig. 2.2 Add EMI core
3
5. Fix the RFC cover by the screws.
Cable tie is not

supplied one.
Fig. 2.3
6. Fit the cables by the EMI cores and bind it by the cable tie.
Cable ties in photo are

not supplied one.
Fig. 2.4
7. Connect J803.
2.2 Jumper to magnetron and ground line of MD board

Add jumper wire between the chassis of magnetron and pulse transformer as in Fig. 2.5.
Fig. 2.5
4
2.3 Addition of EMI core to the interconnection cable between

RFC and IF board.
Use M3 x 12 screw and fix the EMI core with cable clump.
Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7

EMI core w/cable clump
and screw
2.4 Adhere the microwave absorbent inside the MD cover as in Fig. 8

Adhere the microwave absorbent inside the MD cover. Keep 75 mm of clearance from
top of the cover.
75 mm
microwave absorbent
Fig. 2.8 MD cover
5
3. 30 kW TR Down modification
3. 30 kW TR DOWN Radar
3.1 Necessary Parts

RFC cover: 37SW 1 pc. Fig. 3.1
Shield 350 mm for IF-RFC cable 1 pc. Fig. 3.2
Metal clump: 9 mm 1 pc. Fig. 3.2
EMI core RFC: 10 1 pc. Fig. 3.2
EMI gasket: 170 mm 2 pcs. Fig. 3.3
EMI gasket: 90 mm 2 pcs. Fig. 3.3
Microwave absorbent 1 pc. Fig. 3.6
Cable tie 100 mm 2 pcs.
3.1 Addition of RFC cover
1. Replace the fixing screw with the spacing nuts of the RFC cover.
2. Disconnect the plug P803.
3. Fix the RFC cover by the screws. (For inner most two, use spacer instead of screw.)
4. Connect J803.
Fig. 3.1 RFC cover added
6
3.2 Shielding to IF-RFC interconnection cable

1. Add the shield to IF-RFC cable.
2. Use metal clump to ground the shield at both sides.
3. The shield should not be applied to the cable inside EMI core.
4. Tighten the both ends of shield with the cable tie and then protect it with vinyl tape.
Fig. 3.2 shield to IF-RFC cable
3.3 EMI gasket for IF amp case

Add an EMI gasket to the IF amp case.
EMI gasket 85 mm
EMI gasket 175 mm
Fig. 3.3 EMI gasket
7
3.4 Jumper to magnetron and MD board GND

Add jumper wire between the chassis of magnetron and the ground of MD board.
Use original screws to fix the jumper.
Fig. 3.4
3.5 Soldering of magnetron heater cable to the pulse transformer

1. Disconnect the magnetron heater cable from the terminal board and pulse transformer.
2. Remove the terminal board.
3. Cut and shorten the heater cable and solder it to the pulse transformer.
Before modification After modification
Fig. 3.5
8
3.6 Addition of microwave absorbent

Adhere the microwave absorbent inside the RT cover.
65 mm
Microwave absorbent
75 mm
Fig. 3.6 RT cover (inside view)
9
2/4
Changes to be made on Ver. 2.22 SPU

The eliminated problems are;
1) Keyboard locks up when the route (in RTE sentence) contains 31 or more waypoints,
including own ship’s number (00).
Note: Maximum 30 waypoints can be processed as one route in FAR2xx7 radar.
When connecting to GP-90 for external route navigation, the number of waypoint
should be 29 or less for one route.
2) Own ship’s vector is not updated when COURSE vector is selected through
[MENU]-9-7-6, while the radar is operating in cross mode in Interswitch function.
3) After CU/RESET operation in CU-Off center mode, the plotter display does not
overlay the radar picture exactly.
4) REVERSE selection of wheel drive through [MENU]-9-7-2 is not backed up when
power is removed.
5) Range ring and Heading line is presented by dot line when Gyro Error is generated.
6) Setting of AUTO STC (STC level) is not restored when PM or SART operation is
turned off.
Changes to be made on Ver. 1.03 DRAW FPAG (0005 in selftest screen)

Following bugs are fixed.
1) The third color bar from the top in the factory test display is displayed in different color.
2) The 12th color of echo trail is presented by darker color.
Changes to be made on Ver. 1.20 RFC

1) Tuning search is performed when the pulselength is changed.
2) Check sum is added to the data from the RFC to the SPU.
3) The RFC setups MIC tuning voltage every five seconds.
4) TUNE IND voltage less than 50 % of maximum level is ignored during Tune Tracking
function.
5) RF error due to check sum does not appear even if RFC 1.20 or newer is used with
older version of SPU 2.14 or older. Tentative versions SPU 2.17 gives RF error if the
RFC ver 1.10 or older is connected.
Changes to be made on Ver. 01.22 RFC

1) Small search of Auto tuning is activated when the sector blanking area, resulting in the
burred echo. This happens with Ver.2.20 SPU and Ver.2.20 RFC.
2) Gain and STC control is disabled when the mode is changed to STBY, then to TX
within six seconds.
3/4
How to read program versions
1. Press [2], [3] and [4] keys in this order while pressing [1:HL OFF] key.
2. Select “4: FACTORY TEST”. The FACTORY TEST screen looks like below.
FPGA and RFC

program version
FPGA program version and RFC program version are displayed as below.
1 2 3
004F 0009 0004 Version of FPGA on SPU board
0009 001F Version of RFC program and FPGA on RFC board
DO NOT use RFC FPGA of Ver.0015. It should be updated to 0017 or 1F (replace RFC
board). With Ver.0015, the data from SPU board may be partially lost at initial power
on.
4/4
History of RFC board
As of March 2005, the current RFC board is 03P9346-33A.
When RFC 03P9346-33A (with J806) is used:

- In X-band, J806 is not used (open).
- In S-band having MD board 03P9244-55E, connect J806 to J816 on MD board.
- In S-band having MD board 03P9244-33E, J806 is not used.
When RFC 03P9346-11 (without J806) is used:

- In S-band having MD 03P9244-55E, J816 from 03P9244 is not used. The noise ring
suppression does not work in this case.
J806 (2p) is added here on

03P9346-33A. 03P9346-11A
Table 1 History of RFC Board
RFC board 03P9346-00 03P9346-00A 03P9346-11A 03P9346-33A

J806: 2P connector
(Improvement of None None None Added
Noise-ring)
X-Band radar Available
Common Common Common
S-Band radar N/A
RFC program Ver. 1.08 1.09 1.09 1.09 to 2.22
03P9244-55E
MD board for (J816 is
03P9244-33E
S-Band radar connected to
J806 on RFC.)
How to change DVI I/F board
To replace DVI I/F board;
1. Place the monitor face down on a soft flat surface.
2. Remove 28 screws from the back of the monitor.
3. Unplug CN10, CN14, and CN16 and remove five screws from DVI I/F board.
4. Remove CN1 metal reinforcement from the connector, loosening two Hex screws.
5. Fix the CN1 metal reinforcement onto the replacement board, DVI I/F board.
6. Reverse steps 1 to 3.
DVI I/F board
Four M4 x 8
(24 other screws
are M4 x 10.)
Fig. 1 MU-231CR, Rear view Fig. 2 MU-231CR, Cover removed
CN14 CN10
CN16
Fig. 3 DVI I/F board Two Hex screws
Program version
label
CN1 metal
reinforcement
Fig. 4
3/3
How to check modification on Inverter board
Diodes, D23 and D24 are removed from Inverter board to disable low-current protector.
Use the following steps to gain access to diodes.
1. Take steps 1 and 2 on the previous page.

2. Unplug J3 on 03P9360 and CN10 on DVI I/F board.
3. Remove the aluminium cover.
4. Make sure that D23 and D24 are removed. If not, unsolder these diodes.
5. Reverse the above steps.
J3
03P9360
DVI I/F board

CN10
Fig. 5 03P9360 and DVI I/F boards enlarged
D23
D24
Fig. 6 D23 and D24 on Inverter board

7) Ten ARPA symbol marks are added. To change the symbol mark, press
TARGET DATA key more than twice within two seconds. - RADAR type
B/C/W
8) NORMAL/12H/24H is added in TRAIL menu > 8 TRAIL LENGTH. When 12H

or 24H is selected, TRAIL time selection at the bottom of the screen is
disabled, but the trail time is set through TRAIL menu > 9 TRAIL HIDE:
START 00:00 END 00:00 in steps of 00:30 (minutes) for 12 H or 01:00 (hour)
for 24H. - Radar type: B/C/W
9) Target Track can be activated for individual target when MENU > 5 > 0 AUTO
TARGET TRACK is set to OFF. - Radar type: B/C/W
Procedure:
1. Roll the wheel to select TARGET TRACK ON cursor menu, and the
cursor in the radar screen is highlighted.
2. Close the menu box.
3. Select a target by the cursor and press the left button.
4. Repeat step 3 for other targets.
5. Press the right button to terminate target selection.
When MENU > 5 > 0 AUTO TARGET TRACK is set to ON, 15 targets are
automatically tracked.
10) Added is 15 minutes and DRAW as options to OWN TRACK interval (MENU >
5 > 3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL). When DRAW is selected, own track is
displayed, and track data is not stored in the memory. - Radar type: all
New options: OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
11) Track can be erased by selecting a color. - RADAR type: A/B/C/W

New options:
MENU > 5 > 8 > 2 OWN TRACK:
RED/GRN/CYA/MAG/WHT/30%/50%/80%/ALL
MENU > 5 > 8 > 3 TARGET TRACK:
RED/GRN/CYA/MAG/WHT/30%/50%/80%/ALL
12) For W (Washington ferry) type only

(a) IL (Index line) mode is selectable to true or relative by using the right
button.
(b) MENU > 2 > 4 INDEX LINE BEARING is changed to INDEX LINE 1:
1/2/3/6.
(c) MENU > 2 > 5 INDEX LINE 2: 1/2/3/6 is added.
(d) MENU > 7 > 8 DATE-TIME: OFF/UTC/LOCAL is added. Date and time is
displayed under SOG.
Factory modification
12kW Sets: 317-1468, 1498, 1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1566, 1575, 1576, 1578, 1579,
1580, 1581, 1583, 1584, and after
25kW and S-band Sets:
4318-1737, 1743, 1898, 2169, 2171, 2211, 2230, 2238, 2312, 2329, 2330, 2357, 2362,
2376, 2377, 2378, 2382, 2383, 2384, 2385, 2386, 2388, and after
Contents
Introduction ..................................................................................... 1
1. Calling up an operational menu...................................................................................1
2. Do not turn off the power immediately after changing the setting ..............................1
3. Changing of IP address ................................................................................................1
4. Display of HDG, SPD and POSN................................................................................1
5. Notes for setting .........................................................................................................1
6. Checking on NMEA data interface..............................................................................2
7. Loop Back test .............................................................................................................2
8. ERROR/ALM..............................................................................................................2
9. Program updating ........................................................................................................2
10. Connection of sub monitor ........................................................................................2
11. LAN connection.........................................................................................................3
12. Connection with ECDIS ............................................................................................4
13. Compatibility of RPU-013.........................................................................................4
Chapter 1. Configuration ........................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Samples ..........................................................................................................1-2
1. FAR-2127 and FAR-2827 ...........................................................................1-2
2. FAR-2137S and 2837S ...............................................................................1-2
3. FAR-2827W ................................................................................................1-3
4. FAR-2837SW .............................................................................................1-3
1.1.2 Inter-switch ....................................................................................................1-4
1.2 Configuration ...........................................................................................................1-5

1.2.1 System configuration table ............................................................................1-5
1.2.2 Processor unit: RPU-013 ...............................................................................1-8
1.2.3 Cable ..............................................................................................................1-9
1. Cable length for each unit ...........................................................................1-9
2. LAN cable ...................................................................................................1-9
3. Extending cables between Antenna unit and Processor unit ......................1-10
1.2.4 Antenna unit ..................................................................................................1-11
1. Applicable model: FAR-2117, 2127, 2817, 2827, 2117-BB and 2127-BB 1-11
2. Applicable model: FAR-2827W .................................................................1-12
3. Applicable model: FAR-2137S, 2837S and 2137S-BB ..............................1-13
4. Applicable model: FAR-2837SW ...............................................................1-15
1.3 Specifications ...........................................................................................................1-16

1.3.1 TR unit and Antenna Radiator .......................................................................1-16
1.3.2 Monitor unit ...................................................................................................1-18
1.3.3 Current power consumption ..........................................................................1-19
1.4 List of Functions ......................................................................................................1-20
1
Contents
Chapter 2. Location of Parts ......................................................... 2-1

2.1 Processor Unit: RPU-013 ........................................................................................2-1
2.2 Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................2-11
2.2.1 FAR-2xx7 ......................................................................................................2-11
2.2.2 FAR-2827W scanner unit ..............................................................................2-20
2.2.3 FAR-2837S scanner unit ................................................................................2-24
2.2.4 FAR-2827SW scanner unit ............................................................................2-30
2.3 Monitor Unit ............................................................................................................2-34
2.4 Control Unit .............................................................................................................2-37
2.5 Optional Unit ...........................................................................................................2-40
2.6 Radar Console ..........................................................................................................2-45

2.6.1 RCN-003/004: Standard type ........................................................................2-45
2.6.2 RCN-001/002: Slim type ...............................................................................2-48
Chapter 3. Menu Tree .................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Overview of Menu Operations ................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Access the menus ...........................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Arrangement of icon boxes ............................................................................3-2
3.1.3 HDG/SPD/POS display .................................................................................3-4
3.2 Box Menu ................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................3-5
3.2.2 Content ...........................................................................................................3-9
[HDG] .............................................................................................................3-9
[OS POSN] .....................................................................................................3-9
[SPEED] .........................................................................................................3-10
[TGT LIST] ....................................................................................................3-10
[CURSOR] .....................................................................................................3-11
[ARP] ..............................................................................................................3-12
[AIS] ...............................................................................................................3-13
[PICTURE] .....................................................................................................3-15
[BRILL] ..........................................................................................................3-17
[TRAIL] ..........................................................................................................3-18
[MARK] .........................................................................................................3-19
[ANT INFORMATION] .................................................................................3-20
3.3 Main Menu Tree ......................................................................................................3-21

3.3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................3-21
3.3.2 List of main menu ..........................................................................................3-28
1. Main menu ..................................................................................................3-28
2. Initialize menu ............................................................................................3-35
3. Factory menu ..............................................................................................3-38
2
Contents
Chapter 4. System Setting ............................................................ 4-1

4.1 Optional Menus .........................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Overview of [FACTORY] Menu ...............................................................................4-2
4.3 Overview of [INITIALIZE] Menu.............................................................................4-3
4.4 Initialize Setting.........................................................................................................4-13

4.4.1 CABLE ATT ADJ............................................................................................4-13
4.4.2 TIMING, MBS, RING SUPPRESSION..........................................................4-14
4.4.3 DEFAULT ANT HIEGHT, NEAR/MID/FAR STC CURVE ..........................4-15
4.4.4 ANT REVOLUTION ......................................................................................4-17
4.4.5 RADAR NO. .................................................................................................4-19
4.4.6 RADAR ...........................................................................................................4-20
4.4.7 Inter -switch .....................................................................................................4-21
1. [ANT-X] -> 9: INTER SW PRIORITY .......................................................4-21
2. Additional information for the Inter SW ......................................................4-21
3. Main operations for each function................................................................4-23
4.4.8 MODEL ...........................................................................................................4-24
4.4.9 TYPE: IMO/A/B/C/W .....................................................................................4-25
4.4.10 PM GAIN ADJ. .............................................................................................4-28
1. Procedure for adjustment..............................................................................4-28
2. Turning on the performance monitor............................................................4-29
4.4.11 OWN SHIP INFO ..........................................................................................4-30
4.4.12 ARP PRESET................................................................................................4-31
1. Setting of TTM OUTPUT ............................................................................4-31
2. Setting of ARP PRESET ..............................................................................4-31
3. [ARPA SENSOR DATA] .............................................................................4-31
4.4.13 NETWORK ...................................................................................................4-34
1. Checking of IP address ...............................................................................4-34
2. Changing of IP address ...............................................................................4-35
4.4.14 INS ................................................................................................................4-38
4.5 Jumper Setting of Terminal Board.............................................................................4-39

4.5.1 Jumper of AIS port: [J655]..............................................................................4-40
4.5.2 Jumper of HDG Sensor Prot: [J656]. ..............................................................4-40
4.6 Setting of Monitor Unit .............................................................................................4-41
4.7 Setting of AD-100 or GC-10 .....................................................................................4-42

4.7.1 Setting List.......................................................................................................4-44
4.7.2 Location of Parts..............................................................................................4-47
4.8 Addition to the Memory Card I/F: CU-200 ...............................................................4-48

1. Setting...........................................................................................................4-48
2. Confirmation of IP address...........................................................................4-49
3
Contents
4.9 Selection of NAV DATA Input: [OS POSN] .............................................................4-50

4.9.1 Setting of [OS POSN] -> 1: NAV AID ...........................................................4-50
4.9.2 Setting of [OS POSN] -> 3: SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT.................................4-51
4.10 Setting of RGB BUFF Board: 03P9229B................................................................4-55

4.10.1 Jumper Setting. ..............................................................................................4-55
4.10.2 Output of RGB BUFF board on FAR-2127...................................................4-56
4.10.3 Setting of the Video Channel in the VDR .....................................................4-57
4.11 Alarm Output Setting...........................................................................................4-58

4.11.1 SYSTEM FAIL alarm output setting .............................................................4-58
1. RCU-014.......................................................................................................4-58
2. RCU-015 and 016.........................................................................................4-59
3. Operation of SYSTEM FAIL ALARM ........................................................4-59
4.11.2 Setting of Alarm Output ................................................................................4-61
4.12 Change of Power Input Type ...................................................................................4-64

4.12.1 Changing AC Power Input.............................................................................4-64
1. Jumper setting and adjustment .....................................................................4-64
2. Circuit setting ...............................................................................................4-65
4.12.2 Changing DC Power Input.............................................................................4-65
1. Jumper setting...............................................................................................4-66
4.12.3 Chang of power (AC <-> DC) .......................................................................4-66
4.13 Change of Antenna Speed: RSB-096 and RSB-097................................................4-67

4.13.1 Combination of PWR board and gearbox......................................................4-67
4.13.2 Change and adjustment of antenna speed......................................................4-68
4.14 Change of Transmission HV setting: HV-9017.......................................................4-69

4.14.1 Setup ..............................................................................................................4-70
4.15 Checking of Thermal Relay Setting.........................................................................4-72

4.15.1 PSU-007.........................................................................................................4-72
4.15.2 Thermal Relay of RTR-082 ...........................................................................4-73
4.16 Sub Monitor.............................................................................................................4-74

4.16.1 Connection to “Slave” ...................................................................................4-74
1. Selection of connecting ports........................................................................4-74
2. Change of the connecting ports ....................................................................4-75
3. Slave output signal........................................................................................4-76
4. Video signals of S-band radar: Slave-1, 2 (J617, 618-#8pin).......................4-77
5. Examples of S-band radar monitors .............................................................4-79
4.16.2 When using as slave radar ...........................................................................4-81
1. Adjustment of monitor input level................................................................4-81
2. Timing adjustment ........................................................................................4-82
3. Switching for the sub monitor ......................................................................4-82
4.17 Connecting to the FEA-2x07...................................................................................4-83
4
Contents
Chapter 5. Updating Program......................................................... 5-1

5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Program file ...................................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Preparation .....................................................................................................5-3
1. To check program numbers; .......................................................................5-3
2. Connection of PC to Processor unit (RPU-013) .........................................5-4
3. Notes for updating ......................................................................................5-4
5.2 Updating Program ....................................................................................................5-6
5.3 Updating with a Card ...............................................................................................5-9
Chapter 6. Maintenance ................................................................ 6-1

Hazardous Voltage .........................................................................................................6-1
Working on the Scanner Unit Mast ...............................................................................6-1
6.1 Self-test ....................................................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Description .....................................................................................................6-3
1. Self-test screen-1 ........................................................................................6-3
2. Self-test screen-2 ........................................................................................6-9
6.2 FACTORY TEST .....................................................................................................6-18

6.2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................6-18
6.2.2 Contents .........................................................................................................6-19
6.3 LED Check ..............................................................................................................6-23

6.3.1 Processor unit: RPU-013 ...............................................................................6-23
1. SPU board ...................................................................................................6-23
2. NET-100 .....................................................................................................6-24
3. PWR board .................................................................................................6-25
4. TX-HV board ..............................................................................................6-27
5. GC-10 board ...............................................................................................6-28
6. DVI I/F board ..............................................................................................6-28
6.3.2 RF unit ...........................................................................................................6-29
6.3.3 Control unit ....................................................................................................6-30
1. RCU-014 .....................................................................................................6-30
2. RCU-015/RCU-016 ....................................................................................6-30
6.4 Error Messages ........................................................................................................6-31

6.4.1 Messages of ALERT BOX ............................................................................6-31
6.4.2 AIS ALARM message ...................................................................................6-36
5
Contents
6.5 Replacement of Major Parts ....................................................................................6-37

6.5.1 Configuration of boards .................................................................................6-37
1. Processor unit: RPU-013 ............................................................................6-37
2. Antenna unit ...............................................................................................6-38
3. Control unit: RCU-014, RCU-015, RCU-016 ............................................6-39
4. Monitor unit: MU-231CR, MU-201CR .....................................................6-39
5. Card Interface unit: CU-200 .......................................................................6-39
6.5.2 Replacement of boards incorporated in RPU-013 .........................................6-40
1. SPU board ...................................................................................................6-40
2. PWR, HV and FIL board ............................................................................6-41
6.5.3 Replacement of major parts of TR unit .........................................................6-42
1. Guarantee of Antenna Motor and Magnetron .............................................6-42
2. Replacement of Magnetron .........................................................................6-42
3. References ...................................................................................................6-43
4. Replacement of MIC ...................................................................................6-44
6.6 Saving to Card I/F Unit: CU-200 .............................................................................6-45

6.6.1 Contents to be saved for CU-200 ..................................................................6-45
6.7 Battery Replacement of GC-10 ................................................................................6-48
6.8 Connection of EG-3000 ...........................................................................................6-49
Chapter 7. Block Description ........................................................ 7-1

7.1 Overview .................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Interface .........................................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 Overall block diagram ...................................................................................7-2
7.2 Antenna Unit ............................................................................................................7-5

7.2.1 RFC board (03P9346A) .................................................................................7-5
1. Control signals ............................................................................................7-5
2. Control between RFC board and MD board ...............................................7-6
3. Control between RFC board and IF board ..................................................7-6
4. Monitor of TR unit .....................................................................................7-6
5. HD and B.P .................................................................................................7-6
6. Memory used for RFC board ......................................................................7-6
7.2.2 MD board (03P9244) .....................................................................................7-8
1. TX trigger ...................................................................................................7-9
2. Short pulse and V TRIG signal ...................................................................7-10
3. TX PROTECT signal ..................................................................................7-10
4. RF circuit ....................................................................................................7-11
7.2.3 IF board (03P9335) ........................................................................................7-13
7.2.4 B.P GEN board (03P9347) ............................................................................7-16
1. B.P signal ....................................................................................................7-16
2. HD signal ....................................................................................................7-17
7.2.5 PWR (RF) board (03P9348) ..........................................................................7-18
6
Contents
7.2.6 MSS board (MSS7497) .................................................................................7-21

7.2.7 Turning operation ..........................................................................................7-23
1. Automatic tuning operation ........................................................................7-23
2. Manual tuning .............................................................................................7-24
3. Tuning indicator presentation .....................................................................7-24
7.2.8 Automatic STC (SEA AUTO) .......................................................................7-25
7.3 Processor Unit (RPU-013) .......................................................................................7-27

7.3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................7-27
7.3.2 TB board (03P9342) ......................................................................................7-28
1. Block diagram .............................................................................................7-28
2. Connector ....................................................................................................7-30
7.3.3 SPU board (03P9337) ....................................................................................7-32
1. Block diagram .............................................................................................7-32
2. IF-VIDEO MIX signal input .......................................................................7-35
3. Structure of screen ......................................................................................7-36
7.3.4 Signal processing ...........................................................................................7-37
1. Echo trail processing: [TRAIL] menu ........................................................7-38
2. Wiper processing (WIPER) ........................................................................7-39
3. Zoom ...........................................................................................................7-41
4. Signal processing of [PICTURE] menu .....................................................7-41
5. Examples of factory setting for each “Picture” ...........................................7-51
7.3.5 Power board ...................................................................................................7-63
1. Power supply specifications .......................................................................7-63
2. Block diagram of power board ...................................................................7-64
3. Block description of AC power board (03P9339) ......................................7-66
4. Block description of DC power board (03P9338) ......................................7-68
5. Power-on of monitor unit (MU-201CR, MU-231CR) ................................7-68
7.3.6 TX-HV board (HV-9017) ..............................................................................7-69
7.3.7 NET-100 board (03P9332) ............................................................................7-70
7.4 Control Unit .............................................................................................................7-71
7.5 Monitor Unit ............................................................................................................7-73

7.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................7-73
7.5.2 Block diagram of monitor unit ......................................................................7-74
1. MU-201CR .................................................................................................7-74
2. MU-231CR .................................................................................................7-75
7.5.3 List of monitor units ......................................................................................7-76
7
Contents
Chapter 8. Q & A ............................................................................ 8-1
1. How to call up the INITIALIZE and FACTORY menus ...........................................8-1

2. How to change the language display (Japanese/English)
See page.4-2. ..............................................................................................................8-1
3. Which cable should be used for LAN CA, Cross CA or Straight CA?
See page.3, 7-70 and the Operator’s Manual of “HUB-100”. ..................................8-1
4. What is the maximum cable length usable between each unit?
See page.1-9. ..............................................................................................................8-2
5. How can I extend the LAN CA to 30 m or longer?
(What is the maximum cable length?) .......................................................................8-2
6. Can antenna cables for FR-1425 and FR-2120 be used for
FAR-2127 and FAR-2137S? ......................................................................................8-2
7. What types of the color LCD monitor can be used for connection?
See page.4-41 and 7-76. ............................................................................................8-2
8. Can any number be assigned for the radar in the setting of
[Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4: RADAR NO.?
See page.4-19. ...........................................................................................................8-2
9. How many units can connect for the Inter-switch function?
See page.4-19, 4-21 and 4-23. ....................................................................................8-3
10. What kinds of operations are allowed when switching to another
radar by the Inter-switch?
See page.4-21 and 4-23. ............................................................................................8-3
11. How to connect the external alarm
See page. 4-58 to 4-63. ............................................................................................8-3
12. Is there any specific order in the connection of RCU-014, 015 and 016.
See page.7-71. ............................................................................................................8-3
13. How to install the De-icer. .......................................................................................8-3
14. Can the FAR-2xx7 serve as a sub monitor?
See page.4-20, 4-23 and 4-81. ..................................................................................8-3
15. Can the same ports be used for connecting a sub monitor?
See page.4-74. ..........................................................................................................8-4
16. Can the Radar-buoy connect? ..................................................................................8-4
17. Which format should be used for HDG, AD format or NMEA format?
See page.4-42. ..........................................................................................................8-4
18. How many CU-200 can be connected?
See page. 4-48. .........................................................................................................8-4
19. Which chart card is read when 2 chart cards are inserted into CU-200? .................8-5
20. Can the PSU-007 use commonly for different supply voltages?
See page.4-72. ..........................................................................................................8-5
21. Is RPU-013 used commonly for X-band and S-band?
See page.4-69. ..........................................................................................................8-5
22. To change the power source type for temporary use.
See page.4-64. ..........................................................................................................8-6
23. Give the information on the loss of a waveguide. ...................................................8-6
24. Sometimes the setting is not saved.
See page.4-1. ............................................................................................................8-6
8
Contents
25. When the power is restarted immediately after turning the power off,
the ST-BY status starts within 3 minutes. ...............................................................8-6
26. What is the difference among the IMO, A, B, C and W types?
See page. 4-25. ........................................................................................................8-7
27. When the [1:HL OFF] key is pressed, the range ring and all marks disappear.
Is this normal? .........................................................................................................8-7
28. Where is the power switch of MU-201CR and MU-231CR located?
See page.7-74. .........................................................................................................8-7
29. The power cannot be turned on.
See page.6-25. .........................................................................................................8-7
30. NAV data is not inputted.
See page.4-27, 4-50, 6-9 to 6-16. ............................................................................8-7
31. Is there a priority order for NAV-data connecting ports on the TB board?
See page.6-11. .........................................................................................................8-8
32. The position and speed data displayed in red.
See page.3-4 and 6-12. ...........................................................................................8-8
33. Show the list of error message.
See page.6-31. .........................................................................................................8-8
34. Show the manual method for CABLE ATT ADJ.
See page.4-13. .........................................................................................................8-8
35. The sensitivity (gain) has become lower.
See page.3-15, 4-28, 6-42 and 7-51. .......................................................................8-8
36. ARPA targets are quickly lost.
See page.4-8. ...........................................................................................................8-9
37. The antenna does not rotate on FAR-2837SW.
See page.4-24. .........................................................................................................8-9
38. The antenna rotation speed cannot be switched although RSB-097 is installed.
See page.4-68. .........................................................................................................8-9
39. Screen is blank even if the RCU-015 is turned on. ...................................................8-9
40. The [BRILL] box menu is not displayed. And the brilliance cannot be adjusted
even by turning the BRILL control.
See page. 4-41 and 7-73. ........................................................................................8-10
41. The monitor size and picture size does not match each other.
See page. 4-41 and 7-73. ........................................................................................8-10
42. NMEA data is shared in the LAN connection.
See page. 4-51. ........................................................................................................8-10
43. The number of mark points .....................................................................................8-10
44. Can marks and lines created on GD-280 and GD-680 be used? .............................8-10
45. What can be saved on a memory card CU-200?
See page.6-45 to 6-47. ............................................................................................8-10
46. How to erase the MARK. ........................................................................................8-11
47. How to display echoes in color
See page.3-17 and 4-25. .........................................................................................8-11
48. How to create the NAV line
See Chapter 5 of the Operator’s Manual. ...............................................................8-11
49. The NAV LINE from GPS cannot be displayed. .....................................................8-11
9
Contents
50. Is it possible to make the setting of AIS static information and to send AIS
messages from the FAR?
See page.3-13. .........................................................................................................8-12
51. What are the conditions for the loss of AIS targets? ...............................................8-12
52. Show the symbol marks of the AIS and ARPA.
See the Operator’s Manual of the FAR. ..................................................................8-13
53. How should the setting be made on radar side when the ECDIS is connected?
See page.4-83. .........................................................................................................8-13
54. How to display the BARGE MARK
See page.4-38. .........................................................................................................8-13
55. How to connect the EG-3000
See page.6-49. .........................................................................................................8-14
56. How to set “Video Channel” on the VDR side
See page.4-55 and 4-57. .........................................................................................8-14
57. How to update a program
See Chapter 5. .......................................................................................................8-14
58. What boards can be used commonly for X-band and S-band?
See page.5-2 and 6-37 to 6-39. ...............................................................................8-14
59. What are components needing periodic replacement?
See page.6-42, 6-48 and 2-14. ................................................................................8-14
60. How to determine the power cable size. ..................................................................8-15
61. How to measure the frequency of the X-band radar ................................................8-15
62. Can SC-60/120/50/110 be connected with the IMO-type radar for heading data? ..8-15
63. The trackball of the control unit does not move smoothly. .....................................8-16
64. Proper menu setting is not known. How can the setting be reset to the default?
See page.4-1. ...........................................................................................................8-16
65. Although noise appears on the screen, echoes are not displayed.
See page.6-7. ...........................................................................................................8-16
66. Radar echo alignment is abnormal in azimuth direction.
See page.4-24. .........................................................................................................8-17
67. A message related to a communication error between Processor and TR or
Control unit is displayed in the ALERT box. How can the lines between the units
be checked?
See page.6-2 and 6-31 to 6-36. ...............................................................................8-17
68. The ALERT BOX displays VIDEO error.
See page.4-77 and 6-32. .........................................................................................8-18
69. Give the information on SYSTEM FAIL alarm.
See page.4-58. .........................................................................................................8-18
70. Echoes are reversed left to right on the S-band radar. .............................................8-19
71. How to adjust the Magnetron after being replaced.
See page.6-43. .........................................................................................................8-19
72. Give basic information on radars. ............................................................................8-20
1) Comparison between S-band and X-band ..................................................8-20
2) Range resolution: ........................................................................................8-20
3) Minimum range: .........................................................................................8-20
4) Bearing resolution ......................................................................................8-21
5) Propagation distance (Radar horizon) ........................................................8-21
10
Contents
6) Equation of wave propagation ....................................................................8-21

7) False echoes..................................................................................................8-22
Appendix 1) Sentences ................................................................. AP-1

AP1.1 OVERVIEW of NMEA-0183 Ver-3.00 ..............................................................AP1-1
1.1.1 Overview of connection .................................................................................AP1-1
1. Connection ..................................................................................................AP1-1
2. Data configuration ......................................................................................AP1-1
3. Talker names list .........................................................................................AP1-4
AP1.2 Configuration of NMEA Ver-3.00 Sentence ......................................................AP1-5

1.2.1 ACK - Acknowledge Alarm ..........................................................................AP1-5
1.2.2 BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint .....................................................AP1-5
1.2.3 BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint – rhumb line ................................AP1-6
1.2.4 DTM - DTM - Datum reference ....................................................................AP1-6
1.2.5 DBS - Depth below surface ...........................................................................AP1-7
1.2.6 DBT - Depth below transducer ......................................................................AP1-7
1.2.7 DPT - Depth ...................................................................................................AP1-7
1.2.8 GGA - Global positioning system fix data ....................................................AP1-8
1.2.9 GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude ..............................................AP1-9
1.2.10 HDT - Heading, true ....................................................................................AP1-9
1.2.11 MWV - Wind speed and angle ....................................................................AP1-9
1.2.12 MTW - Water temperature ..........................................................................AP1-10
1.2.13 RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information ...........................AP1-10
1.2.14 RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data .................AP1-11
1.2.15 RTE - Route .................................................................................................AP1-11
1.2.16 VBW - Dual ground/water speed ................................................................AP1-12
1.2.17 VHW - Water speed and heading ................................................................AP1-12
1.2.18 VDR - Set and drift ......................................................................................AP1-12
1.2.19 VTG - Course over ground and ground speed .............................................AP1-13
1.2.20 VWR - Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle .....................................AP1-13
1.2.21 VWT - True wind speed and angle ..............................................................AP1-13
1.2.22 WPL - Waypoint location ............................................................................AP1-14
1.2.23 ZDA - Time and date ...................................................................................AP1-14
1.2.24 ALR - Set alarm state ..................................................................................AP1-14
1.2.25 VDM - UAIS VHF data-link message .........................................................AP1-15
1.2.26 VDO - UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report .........................................AP1-15
1.2.27 AAM - Waypoint arrival alarm ...................................................................AP1-16
1.2.28 ABM - UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message .......................AP1-16
1.2.29 BBM - UAIS Broadcast binary message .....................................................AP1-17
1.2.30 OSD - Own ship data ...................................................................................AP1-17
1.2.31 RSD - Radar system data .............................................................................AP1-18
1.2.32 TLL - Target latitude and longitude .............................................................AP1-18
1.2.33 TTM - Tracked target message ....................................................................AP1-19
1.2.34 VSD - UAIS Voyage static data ..................................................................AP1-19
11
Contents
AP1.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA(FAR) to ECDIS(FEA.) ..................AP1-20

1.3.1 OSD - Own Ship Data ...................................................................................AP1-20
1.3.2 PAESP - Position Adjust ...............................................................................AP1-20
1.3.3 TTM - Target .................................................................................................AP1-21
1.3.4 PFEC, RAssd - Antenna Location .................................................................AP1-21
1.3.5 RSD - Radar System Data .............................................................................AP1-22
AP1.4 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS(FEA) to ARPA(FAR.) ..................AP1-23

1.4.1 GLL - Position ...............................................................................................AP1-23
1.4.2 GGA - Position ..............................................................................................AP1-23
1.4.3 FUGLL - Future Position ...............................................................................AP1-23
1.4.4 DTM - Datum ................................................................................................AP1-24
1.4.5 OSD - Own Ship Data ...................................................................................AP1-24
1.4.6 ZDA - UTC Time ..........................................................................................AP1-24
1.4.7 DPT - Depth ...................................................................................................AP1-25
1.4.8 MWV - Wind .................................................................................................AP1-25
1.4.9 PAESP - Position Adjust Acknowledge ........................................................AP1-25
1.4.10 PAESC - Curved EBL .................................................................................AP1-25
1.4.11 PAESF - Fix Target Acquire/Cancel ...........................................................AP1-26
1.4.12 PLSPL - Chart Segment ...............................................................................AP1-26
1.4.13 PLSPS - Chart Symbol ................................................................................AP1-26
1.4.14 PAESW - Waypoint List .............................................................................AP1-27
1.4.15 PAESN - Notebook .....................................................................................AP1-27
Appendix 2) Specifications ........................................................... AP-2

1. ANTENNA RADIATORS .........................................................................................AP2-1
2. RF TRANSCEIVER ..................................................................................................AP2-1
3. DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................................................................AP2-2
4. INTERFACE ..............................................................................................................AP2-2
5. POWER SUPPLY ......................................................................................................AP2-3
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................AP2-3
7. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................AP2-4
Parts List ........................................................................................ D-1
Contents of Drawings .................................................................... S-0
12
Introduction
Introduction
This section describes minimum information required for settings and on equipment.
1. Calling up an operational menu: See page.4-1.

- INITIALZIZE menu:
Press the [Menu] key 5 times while holding down the [1: HL OFF] key.
- FACTORY menu:
Press the [2], [3] and [4] keys in order while holding down the [1: HL OFF] key.
2. Do not turn off the power immediately after changing the setting: See
page.4-1.
Do not turn off the power immediately after changing the setting of an “box” menu
and [Menu]. Wait for 6 seconds at least and then turn off the power. If the power is
turned off immediately after changing the setting, the setting may not be saved.
3. Changing of IP address: See page.4-19, 34 and 48.

After changing the radar number and the IP address setting of CU-200, restart the
units connected to the LAN including HUB-100.
4. Display of HDG, SPD and POSN: See page.3-5.

The display differs depending on the settings and sentences in use.
5. Notes for setting

Items that must be set up after installation are:
- All INITIALIZE menus in [Menu] –> 0: INITIALIZE See chapter 4
To be specific, make the following settings.
[Menu] -> 0 -> 2: Echo ADJ
[Menu] -> 0 -> 4: InstallationNote)
[Menu] -> 0 -> 5: Own ship Info
[Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 7 -> 3: ANT Select
- [Menu] –> 1 -> 2: TUNE INITIALIZE : See page.7-23.
- [OS POSN] : See page.3-9, 4-50 and 6-13.
- [HDG] : See page.3-9 and 6-16.
- [SPD] : See page.3-10 and 6-16.
Note:
After making the “INSTALLATION” settings in the [INITIALIZE] menu,
restart the power.
1
Introduction
6. Checking on NMEA data interface: See page.6-9.

Execute “[Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2: TEST” to check inputted NMEA data. The display
box <GPS-1> displays GPS data inputted from the [NAV] port (J606) and the box
of <GPS-2> displays GPS data inputted from a port other than the [NAV] port.
NAV data of the <SPEED> and <HEADING> boxes are displayed when
there is a data input from any port. There is no restriction in data display by
NMEA Versions. However, data handling differs according to the setting of radar
types such as IMO and A types.
7. Loop Back test: See page.6-21.

When there is such a problem in the interface as no gyro or the NMEA data cannot
be received or no communication is allowed with the INS through the serial port, it
is required to identify whether the problem is on the destination side or on the FAR
side.
8. ERROR/ALM: See page.6-31.

Is not the ALERT-BOX displaying an error of the EPFS, the GYRO and etc.?
The causes of an error may differ depending on the presence of input, input
sentences and the setting of a radar type. For instance, the radar type is set as the
IMO, NMEA Version 3 or later is required.
9. Program updating: See Chapter 5.

Programs are updated by connecting the serial port of the computer and the
RS-232C port of the TB board of RPU-013. The cable to be used is a cross cable
(female-female, 9 pin D-sub).
When the serial port number of the PC is other than COM-1, specify COM-1 on
the side of the computer. Or rewrite to change the port number of each program
batch file so as to match with the COM port number of the computer. While
updating the DRAW program, never turn off the power or cancel updating halfway.
10. Connection of sub monitor: See page.4-74.

When connections are made to the sub monitor, Slave-1 outputs full-log video
signals and Slave-2 outputs semi-log video signals. Full-log outputs are video
signals with GAIN and STC not controlled while semi-log outputs are video
signals with GAIN and STC controlled.
2
Introduction
11. LAN connection: See page.7-70.

Use cross cables for the LAN connection between FAR and FAR, and FAR and
CU-200. For connection via HUB-10, either a cross cable or straight cable can be
used. HUB-100 has the Auto-MDIX function and automatically recognizes a cable.
Use cables of Category 5.
Straight Cable Cross Cable

Pear Pin No. Signal
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal
1 TXP 1 TXP 1 RXP
(White-Green) (White-Green) (3 White-Orange)
1-2
2 TXN 2 TXN 2 RXN
(Green) (Green) (6 Orange)
3-6 3 RXP 3 RXP 3 TXP

(White-Orange) (White-Orange) (1 White-Green)
4 NC 4 NC 4 NC
(White-Blue) (White-Blue) (4 White-Blue)
4-5
5 NC 5 NC 5 NC
(Blue) (Blue) (5 Blue)
3-6 6 RXN 6 RXN 6 TXN

(Orange) (Orange) (2 Green)
7 NC 7 NC 7 NC
(White-Brown) (White-Brown) (7 White-Brown)
7-8
8 NC 8 NC 8 NC
(Brown) (Brown) (8 Brown)
Note: To make the LAN cable, see the Operator’s Manual of HUB-100 for details.
1. Cut neatly except for the leaving 11 mm. Then, fold the shield and the drain wire of
the cable. Moreover, insert into the plug housing
2. Insert until you can find the edge of cable from the housing.
3. Use the crimping tool to finish.
11 mm
Crimp the drain wire.
shield and the drain wire 8 pins
Fold the shield and wind it to the external of the cable. 1 pin
Fold the train line along with the shield.
And then, Cut neatly except for the leaving 11 mm.
Crimping
3
Introduction
12. Connection with ECDIS: See page.4-83.

For related setting, select SERIAL or LAN in the setting of “[Menu] –> 0 -> 8 ->
5: INS”, and select TRUE in the setting of “[Menu] –> 0 -> 6 -> 2: TTM
OUTPUT”. The setting should be made according to the ECDIS connecting port.
The SERIAL setting is the connection with the [TRACK CONTROL] port (J620)
on the TB board and the LAN setting is the connection with the LAN port.
13. Compatibility of RPU-013: See page.4-69 and 6-40.

The RPU-013 can be used commonly for X-band and S-band but uses a different
PWR board according to the ship’s main and antenna revolving speed and a
different HV-TX board according to the output power (12 kW/25 kW and 30 kW).
4
Chapter 1. Configuration
1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
1) The system consists of a Processor unit, Monitor unit, Control unit and
Transceiver/Antenna unit. Communication between Transceiver/Antenna unit and
Processor unit, and Control unit by means of serial data (RS-422)
2) The ARPA and the Video plotter functions are incorporated in the SPU board as
standard.
3) The ARPA can acquire a maximum of 100 targets, and AIS can handle a maximum
of
1,000 targets.
4) The video signal for display complies with the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)
standard.
5) The system also has Inter-switch function using the LAN.
6) The antenna cable is a new type RW9600 (13C+2C2V), and the previous type
(24C+2C2V) is not compatible.
7) The I/O terminal block is assembled on the TB board in the Processor unit.
8) Other than the Antenna radiators are not compatible with existing radar systems.
MU-201CR (20.1 inch)
MU-231CR (23.1 inch)
Antenna unit (Monitor unit)
Antenna unit
HUB-100
(HUB)
LAN: 100 Base-T

RCU-014 RCU-016
RPU-013 RPU-013 (STD CONT unit) (Remote CONT unit)
(Processor unit) (Processor unit)
Fig. 1.1.1 Example of System Configuration
Table 1.1.1 System Overview
Transmission
Model Display Unit Band Remarks
Output
FAR-2137S 20.1 inch S-band 30 kW 2 unit type TR up
FAR-2837S 23.1 inch S-band 30 kW 2 unit type TR up
FAR-2837SW 23.1 inch S-band 30 kW 3 unit type TR down
FAR-2827W 23.1 inch X-band 25 kW 3 unit type TR down
FAR-2137S-BB S-band 30 kW 2 unit type TR up
FAR-2117/2127 20.1 inch X-band 12/25 kW 2 unit type TR up
FAR-2117/2127-BB X-band 12/25 kW 2 unit type TR up
FAR-2817/2827 23.1 inch X-band 12/25 kW 2 unit type TR up
1-1
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Samples
1. FAR-2127 and FAR-2827
Monitor unit
Antenna unit
(MU-201 or 231CR)
Power (AC or DC)

RW-9600
DVI
Power (AC or DC) Remote CONT unit

(RCU-016)
Processor unit
(RPU-013) STD CONT unit (RCU-014) or
Trackball CONT unit (RCU-015)
Fig. 1.1.2 FAR-2127 and FAR-2827
2. FAR-2137S and 2837S
Antenna unit
Monitor unit
(MU-201/231CR)
ANT
Power
(3 phases) Power (AC)
RW-9600
ANT Power (AC)
DVI
Power supply unit Remote CONT unit

(PSU-007) ANT ON (RCU-016)
Processor unit
Power (AC)
Fig. 1.1.3 FAR-2137S and FAR-2837S
1-2
1.1 Overview
3. FAR-2827W
Antenna unit
ANT Power (1 phase)
MPYCY-19 Waveguide
Monitor unit
Transceiver unit
(MU-231CR)
(RTR-081)
Power (AC)
RW-9600
DVI
Power (AC) Remote CONT unit

(RCU-016)
Processor unit
Fig. 1.1.4 FAR-2827W
4. FAR-2837SW
Antenna unit
ANT Power
(3 phases) Waveguide
Monitor unit
Transceiver unit (MU-231CR)
ANT power (AC) (RTR-082)
Power (AC)
RW-9600
DVI
Power (AC) Remote CONT unit

(RCU-016)
Processor unit
Fig. 1.1.5 FAR-2837SW
1-3
1.1 Overview
1.1.2 Inter-switch
For example, when Processor units are connected with the LAN via Hub, each
Processor unit can control the other Transceiver unit. Maximum eight Processor/Display
units can be controlled via Hub as Fig.1.1.6, and any of four Transceiver units are
selected from a Processor/Display unit by clicking the icon of ANT-X.
“X” means a radar number, for example, when switching the radar from No.1 to No.2,
operations for GAIN, STC, FTC and Range change are interlocked with each other and
can operate from either side. When connecting with the Card interface (CU-200), you
can read/write/share the data from respective Radars.
This Inter-switch function is executed by using the IP address associated with the Radar
number. Each Radar number can set on [Menu] -> 0 -> 4:RADAR NO., note that The
RADAR NO. 1 to 4 are Radars (with Antenna unit) and the No.5 to 6 are the monitors
(without Antenna unit).
Monitor x 4
HUB-100: No.2 FAR-2xx7 series

No.1 FAR-2xx7 series (8 port HUB)
CU-200
LAN: 100BASE-Tx
(Devices are identified by the No.4 FAR-2xx7 series
No.3 FAR-2xx7 series
IP address.)
Fig. 1.1.6 Example of Connection with LAN
1-4
1.2 Configuration
1.2 Configuration
1.2.1 System configuration table
Table 1.2.1(1/3) System Configuration
Radar Model: FAR-

Item Remarks
2xx7 2827W 2x37S 2837SW
10 ft
XN-5A X X
(For RSB-109)
4 ft
XN-12AF X X
(For RSB-096/097)
6.5 ft
Antenna Radiator XN-20AF X X
(For RSB-096/097)
8 ft
XN-24AF X X
(For RSB-096/097)
SN-30AF X X 10 ft
SN-36AF X X 12 ft
24 rpm
RSB-096 (I) X
(For XN-12AF/20AF/24AF)
42 rpm
RSB-097 (I) X
(For XN-12AF/20AF/24AF)
RSB-098 (I) X 21/26 rpm (200/220 VAC)
Gearbox RSB-099 (I) X 21/26 rpm (380/440 VAC)
RSB-100 (I) X 45 rpm (220 VAC/50 Hz)
(I); A de-icing device RSB-101 (I) X 45 rpm (220 VAC/60 Hz)
Built-in possible RSB-102 (I) X 45 rpm (440 VAC/60 Hz)
RSB-103 (I) X 24 rpm
RSB-104 (I) X 21/26 rpm (200/220 VAC)
RSB-105 (I) X 21/26 rpm (380/440 VAC)
24 rpm
RSB-109 X
(For XN-5A)
RTR-078 X X-band/12 kW
Transceiver unit RTR-080 X S-band/30 kW
RTR-082 X S-band/30 kW
Different SPEC;
- AC/DC power source,
Processor unit RPU-013 X X X X
- TX output,
- ANT revolution
RCU-014 X X X X Standard control unit
Control unit RCU-015 X X X X Trackball control unit
RCU-016 X X X X Remote control unit
MU-201CR X X 20.1 inch color LCD
Monitor unit MU-231CR X X X X 23.1 inch color LCD
FMD-8010 X X X X
PM-31 X X For X-band
PM monitor
PM-51 X X For S-band
1-5
1.2 Configuration
Radar Model: FAR-

Item Remarks
2xx7 2827W 2x37S 2837SW
115/230 VAC, 1 Ph. 50/60 Hz
RU-3424 (X) -> 24 VDC (20 A Max.)
(For 25 kW//RPU-013)
100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1 ph.
Rectifier RU-3423 X X X X 50/60 Hz -> 24 VDC (7A Max)
(For MU-2x1CR)
115/230 VAC, 1 ph. 50/60 Hz
RU-1746B-2 (X) -> 24 VDC (13 A Max.)
(For 6/12 kW//RPU-013)
440 VAC
RU-1803 X X X X 1 ph. 50/60 Hz -> 100 VAC
(For MU-2x1CR/RPU-013)
100/110/200/220 VAC
RU-3305 X X X X 1 Ph. 50/60Hz ->100 VAC
(For De-icer)
Transformer unit 110 VAC 3 Ph. 60 Hz
RU-5693 X X
->220VAC (For Motor)
220 VAC, 3 Ph. 50 Hz
RU-6522 X X
->200 VAC, 50Hz (For Motor)
440 VAC, 3 Ph. 50/60 Hz
RU-5466-1 X X -> 220 VAC, 60 Hz,
200 VAC, 50 Hz (For Motor)
Power-supply unit PSU-007 X For ANT Motor power control
Gyro converter GC-10-2 X X X X Within RPU-013 unit
Card I/F CU-200-FAR X X X X
RAM card 00RAM08MC-005 X X X X For CU-200
Switching hub HUB-100 X X X X x 8 ports
DVI-RGB ASSY + RGB Buff
DVI-RGB
OP03-180 X X X X (For VDR/RGB EXT
conversion Kit
Monitor)
BNC connector
DSUB-BNC-1 X X X X For VDR
converter
External buzzer OP03-21 X X X X
Cable Assy.
Between Processor XH10P-W-6P X X X X L=1.5/10/20/30 m
and Control unit
Cable Assy.
XH10P-W-5P-
Between Control X X X X L=1.5/10/20/30 m
A
units
Cable Assy. DVI-D/D
Between Processor SINGLE LINK X X X X L=5/10 m
and Monitor unit 5M or 10M
Antenna SIG. cable RW-9600 X X X X 15/30/40/50 m（Max.100 m）
Extension for
Junction box RJB-001 X X
RW-9600
LHPX-20D- S-band
X
ASSY. 20/30 m (Coaxial cable: CX-20DF)
Waveguide
FR-9 X X-band (flexible)
WRJ-9 X X-band
1-6
1.2 Configuration
Radar Model: FAR-

Item Remarks
2xx7 2827W 2x37 S 2837 SW
CP03-28900 X X X X FR-FTPC-CY-10 m Modular:
LAN cable kit
CP03-28910 X X X X FR-FTPC-CY-20 m MPS588-C,
(with armor)
CP03-28920 X X X X FR-FTPC-CY-30 m 2pcs
Accessories FP03-09820 X X For MU-201CR
Hanger assy. FP03-09830 (X) X (X) X For MU-231CR
For Monitor unit;
Hand grip FP03-09840 X X X X
MU-201CR and MU-231CR
Flush mount kit FP03-09870 X X X X For RCU-014/015/016
OP03-183 X X X X For RCU-014 & MU-201CR
Coupling Pedestal OP03-184 X X X X For RCU-014 & MU-231CR
OP03-185 X X X X For RCU-014
1-7
1.2 Configuration
1.2.2 Processor unit: RPU-013

As for FAR-2xx7 series, the processor unit (RPU-013) is commonly used. However,
PWR board and TX-HV board are different.
- PWR board depends on Power source and antenna motor type: Antenna revolution.
- TX - HV board depends on the output power (12 kW or 25 kW more).
ANT unit / TR unit
PSU-007 Scanner unit
DVI-D Monitor
- MU-201CR
Option (5/10m) - MU-231CR
GYRO 25msec
GC-10 or
AD-100(AD Format)* DVI-D Monitor
- MU-201CR
HDG Sensor(IEC61162-2)* *AD-100 or HDG Sensor (5/10m) - MU-231CR
LOG(IEC61162-1) RS-232C
RPU-013 PC
NAV(IEC61162-1)
Pro Rem Pro Remote Rem

Video/HD/BP/Trig Key STD Control unit Control unit
Master Radar (RCU-014) (RCU-016)
or ALM
Pro Rem
(Total L. 31.5m)
Sub display-1 Video/HD/BP/Trig Trackball
(Full-log) Control unit
(RCU-015)
ALM
Sub display-2 Video/HD/BP/Trig (0.85m)
(Semi-log) ALM/ALM ACK
Option Ship’s ALM System
DVI RGB I/F
Option Network
(100Base-T) RPU-013
RGB EXT. Monitor
RGB Buff
R/G/B/V/H
(75 ohm Co-X x5) DSUB-BNC RPU-013
VDR Convertor
(Max. 100m) HUB-100 Radar No. 1 - 8
(Max. 8 port)
Card I/F
(CU-200)
2 slots
AC PWR 100VAC
100/220VAC 03P9339-
A/B/C/D
440VAC
RU-1803 IEC61162-2
100VAC U-AIS
DC PWR
24VDC or
03P9338-
A/B/C/D LAN
100/220VAC
RU-3424 ECDIS
24VDC INS
Track control (ECDIS)
Fig. 1.2.1 Connection of Processor Unit
1-8
1.2 Configuration
1.2.3 Cable
1. Cable length for each unit
FURUNO
RW-9600
15/30/40/50m, Max. 100m 10/20/30m
HUB-100
(LAN cable: FR-FTPC-CV )
DVI-D
5/10m MU-201CR
DVI-D/D MU-231CR
SIGNAL LINK 5M/10M 10/20/30m
RPU-013
(LAN cable: FR-FTPC-CV )
DVI-D
NETWORK
10/20/30m
(LAN cable: FR-FTPC-CY)
CU-200
10m (Power cable: MJ-A3SPF0015-100)
RPU-013
J602: J501: J502: J501:
Key Prossessor Remote Prossessor
RCU-014
RCU-016
1.5/10/20/30m Power 1.5/10/20/30m
SW
(XH10P-W-5P) (XH10P-W-5P-A)
or
J521: J522:
Prossessor Remote
RCU-015
Power
1.5/10/20/30m SW
Max. 31.5m
Fig. 1.2.2 Cable Length for Each Unit
2. LAN cable
The cross cable is used when RPU-013 and RPU-013 are connected or RPU-013 and
CU-200 without a HUB are connected.
When the HUB-100 is used, either a straight cable or cross cable can be used between each
unit. All the ports of HU-100 are automatically recognized straight/cross cable (Auto-MDIX).
SPU p.c.b SPU p.c.b CARD CPUp.c.b

LAN 100Base-Tx LAN LAN LAN
NET-100 NET-100 NET-100 INS
cross cable
CU-200
No.1 FAR-2xx7 series No.2 FAR-2xx7 series
SPU p.c.b
LAN
100Base-Tx NET-100
8 ports
SPU p.c.b
LAN 100Base-Tx LAN 100Base-Tx No.x FAR-2xx7 series
NET-100 HUB-100
cross cable cross cable
CARD CPUp.c.b
or or
straight cable straight cable NET-100
No.x FAR-xx7 series LAN
CU-200
Fig. 1.2.3 LAN Cable
1-9
1.2 Configuration
3. Extending cables between Antenna unit and Processor unit

The Antenna cable; RW-9600 for connecting between the Transceiver/Antenna unit and
Processor unit is available in 15/30/40/50 m. (Available for max.100 m.)
Besides, extending the cable more than 100 m (Available for max.300 m.) is possible
with the Junction boxes: RJB-001 as shown below.
Applicable Model: FAR-2117, 2127, 2817 and 2827
RPU-013 Antenna Unit
Terminal p.c.b
RJB-001 RJB-001 Terminal p.c.b
RW-9600 TB-1 TB-1 RW-9600 TB801
J613
1. TX-HV 1. TX-HV DPYCY-6 1 1. TX-HV
2. N.C 2. N.C 2 2. N.C
3. GND DPYCY-6 3 3. 24V(+)
J610
1. 24V(+) 4. 24V(+) 4 4. 24V(-)
2. 24V(-) 5. 24V(-) 5 5. Motor(+)
DPYCY-6
3. Motor(+) 6. Motor(+) 6 6. Motor(+)
4. Motor(+) 7. Motor(-) 7 7. Motor(-)
5. Motor(-) 8. Spare 8 8. Motor(-)
6. Motor(-) 9. Spare 9 9. SPU RF D-A
TTYCYS-4
7. SPU RF D-A 10. SPU RF D-A 10 10. SPU RF D-B
8. SPU RF D-B 11. SPU RF D-B 11 11. RF SPU D-A
9. RF SPU D-A 12. SPU SPU D-A 12 12. RF SPU D-B
10. RF SPU D-B 13. SPU SPU D-B 13 13.Sig. GND
11. Sig. GND 14. Sig. GND 14 14. GND
12. GND 15
15. Spare
TB-2 TB-2 TB802
RG-12/UY
J609
1. IF Vido in 1. IF-OUT 1 1. IF Vido in
2. GND 2. GND 2 2. GND
RW-9600 RW-9600
Max. 15m 70 - 270m Max. 15m
Total: 100 - 300m
Fig. 1.2.4 Extension of Antenna Cable for FAR-2xx7
Applicable Model: FAR-2137S and 2837S

110 - 440VAC
3 50/60Hz TPYCY-2.5 Antenna Unit
PSU-007 TB902
1. Motor 3ph u
2. Motor 3ph v
(Max. 50m)
DPYCY-1.5
3. Motor 3ph w
RPU-013
J604 1. +12V
2. ANT ON N
RJB-001 RJB-001 Terminal p.c.b
RW-9600 TB-1 TB-1 RW-9600 TB801
J613 1. TX-HV 1. TX-HV DPYCY-6 1 1. TX-HV

2. N.C 2. N.C 2 2. N.C
3. GND DPYCY-6 3 3. 24V(+)
J610
1. 24V(+) 4. 24V(+) 4 4. 24V(-)
2. 24V(-) 5. 24V(-) 5 5.
3. 6. 6 6.
4. 7. 7 7.
5. 8. Spare 8 8.
6. 9. Spare 9 9. SPU RF D-A
TTYCYS-4
7. SPU RF D-A 10. SPU RF D-A 10 10. SPU RF D-B
8. SPU RF D-B 11. SPU RF D-B 11 11. RF SPU D-A
9. RF SPU D-A 12. SPU SPU D-A 12 12. RF SPU D-B
10. RF SPU D-B 13. SPU SPU D-B 13 13. Sig. GND
11. Sig. GND 14. Sig. GND 14 14. GND
12. GND 15. Spare 15
TB-2 TB-2 TB802

RG-12/UY
J609
1. IF Vido in 1. IF-OUT 1 1. IF Vido in
2. GND 2. GND 2 2. GND
Terminal p.c.b
RW-9600 RW-9600
Max. 15m 70 - 270m Max. 15m
Total: 100 - 300m
Fig. 1.2.5 Extension of Antenna Cable for FAR-2x37S
1-10
1.2 Configuration
1.2.4 Antenna unit

1. Applicable model: FAR-2117, 2127, 2817, 2827, 2117-BB and 2127-BB
Table 1.2.2 Configuration of 12 kW and 25 kW X-band Radar
Transceiver Gear box Radiator

Model Motor De- Type
Type Output Type rpm PM
(24 VDC) icer (Length)
FAR-2117 RSB-096 D8G-516 24 XN-12AF
FAR-2117-BB RTR-078 12 kW (4 ft)
FAR-2817 RSB-097 D8G-571 42 XN-20AF
Yes
FAR-2127 RSB-096 D8G-516 24 (6.5 ft)
PM-31
FAR-2127-BB RTR-079 25 kW XN-24AF
FAR-2827 RSB-097 D8G-571 42 (8 ft)
FAR-2127-5A XN-5A
RTR-079 25 kW RSB-109 D8G-516 24 No
FAR-2827-5A (10 ft)
The optional De-icer must be incorporated in the factory. (not a field job)
The De-icer power is 100 VAC, 1 φ , 50/60 Hz. When the De-icer power is except for 100
VAC, a transformer unit (RU-3305) is used.
When mounting a performance monitor (PM-31), change the Gearbox cover with the
PM-31. The antenna revolution speed depends on the type of the Gearbox and the PWR
board of the Processor unit.
FURUNO
PM-31
For De-Icer
DPYCY-1.5
RW-9600
100VAC 1 50/60Hz
100/110/200/220VAC
1 50/60Hz RU-3305
(Transformer)
RU-3305
Scanner
RPU-013
Fig. 1.2.6 Configuration of 12 kW and 25 kW X-band Radars
1-11
1.2 Configuration
2. Applicable model: FAR-2827W

Table 1.2.3 Configuration on 25 kW X-band Waveguide Type Radar

Model Motor Type
Type Output Type rpm PM De-icer
(24 VDC) (Length)
XN-20AF
FAR (6.5 ft)
RTR-081 25kW RSB-103 D8G-516 24 PM-31 Yes
-2827W XN-24AF
(8 ft)
The De-icer must be incorporated in the factory. (not the field job)
When mounting a performance monitor (PM-31), change the Gearbox cover with the
PM-31.
The Gearbox and Transceiver unit (RTR-081) are connected by a waveguide. Install the
Transceiver unit in such a way as to minimize the length of the waveguide for minimizing
the signal loss by the waveguide. And, it has to keep more than specified bent radius
because the loss becomes greater.
FURUNO
PM-31
DPYCY-1.5
For De-Icer
Wave guide
- WRJ-9 or
MPYCY-19
100VAC 1 50/60Hz
- FR-9
100/110/200/220VAC
1 50/60Hz RU-3305 Length of Waveguide:
. (Transformer)
Recommended dimension is less than 30 m.
T/R unit Specification of bend radius for FR-9
RTR-081 - E side radius: more than 200 mm
- H side radius: more than 400 mm
- Torsion: 10 deg./m or less
RW-9600
Scanner
RPU-013
Fig. 1.2.7 Configuration of 25 kW X-band Waveguide Type Radar
1-12
1.2 Configuration
3. Applicable model: FAR-2137S, 2837S and 2137S-BB

Table 1.2.4 Configuration of 30 kW S-band Type Radar

Model Motor Type
Type Output Type Motor rpm PM De-icer
power (Length)
200 VAC
21
3 Ph. 50 Hz
RSB-098 RM7398
220 VAC
26
3 Ph. 60 Hz
380 VAC
21
FAR 3 Ph. 50 Hz SN-36AF
RSB-099 RM7435
-2137S 440 VAC (12 ft)
RTR-080 30 kW 26 PM-51 Yes
-2837S 3 Ph. 60 Hz SN-30AF
-2137S-BB 220 VAC (10 ft)
RSB-100 RM-9519
3 Ph. 50 Hz
220 VAC
RSB-101 RM-9520 45
3 Ph. 60 Hz
440 VAC
RSB-102 RM-9521
3 Ph. 60 Hz
The De-icer must be incorporated in the factory. (not the field job)
The performance monitor (PM-51) is built in the Gearbox. The PM-51 can be mounted
in the field job. The antenna revolution speed depends on the type of the Gearbox and
the PWR board of the Processor unit.
Use a transformer unit when the specifications of Antenna motor power are different
from ship’s power supply.
The Antenna motor power is supplied to the Gearbox via the Power supply unit,
PSU-007. The PSU-007 is composed of Relays and Thermal switches.
A note should be taken that an Antenna radiator; SN-30AF (10 ft) of 21/26 rpm does not
adapt with the IMO radar in terms of the bearing discrimination. However, the HSC is
adapted.
SCANNER UNIT
RPU-013 J604 TB1 PSU-007

+12V
RU-xxxx
Note:
Motor ON
Relay
Set the operating current of the
Thermal relay according to the
K2 Thermar
relay
K1 3 OUT
type of the Antenna motor.
3 IN
Ship’s Main
Fig. 1.2.8 Configuration of PSU-007
1-13
1.2 Configuration
FURUNO
Transformer unit
DPYCY-1.5
For De-Icer
TPYCY-2.5(Motor)
100VAC 1 50/60Hz
Max. 100m
100/110/200/220VAC
RW-9600
1 50/60Hz RU-3305
(Transformer)
200VAC 3 50Hz PSU-007

220VAC 3 60Hz TPYCY-2.5
(Transformer)
110VAC 3 60Hz RU-5693
Power ON
220VAC
(Transformer)
220VAC 3 50Hz RU-6522

200VAC PSU-007 Scanner
(Transformer)
440VAC 3 50Hz RU-5466-1 RPU-013

200VAC
380VAC 3 50Hz
440VAC 3 60Hz
Fig. 1.2.9 Configuration of 30 kW S-band Radar
Table 1.2.5 List of Specifications of Transformer unit
Transformer
Input Output Gear box (ANT motor) / rpm
unit
RU-5693 110 VAC 3 φ 60 Hz 220 VAC 3 φ 60 Hz RSB-101 (RM-9520) / 45
RU-6522 220 VAC 3 φ 50 Hz 200 VAC 3 φ 50 Hz RSB-098 (RM7398) / 21
440 VAC 3 φ 60 Hz 220 VAC 3 φ 60 Hz RSB-101 (RM-9520) / 45
RU-5466-1
440 VAC 3 φ 50 Hz 200 VAC 3 φ 50 Hz RSB-098 (RM7398) / 21
1-14
1.2 Configuration
4. Applicable model: FAR-2837SW

Table 1.2.6 Configuration of 30 kW Waveguide Type S-band Radar

Model Type
Type Output Type Motor rpm PM De-icer
(Length)
RM-7398
21
(200 VAC/3 Ph/50 Hz)
RSB-104
RM-7398 SN-30AF
26
FAR (220 VAC/3 Ph/60 Hz) (10 ft)
RTR-082 30 kW PM-51 Yes
-2837SW RM-7435 SN-36AF
21
(380 VAC/3 Ph/50 Hz) (12 ft)
RSB-105
RM-7435
26
(440 VAC/3 Ph/60 Hz)
As for the description on the De-icer and Performance monitor; PM-51, the same as
given in the above clause “3. FAR-2x37S” is applied. The Gearbox and Transceiver unit;
RTR-082 are connected by a waveguide. Install the Transceiver unit in such a way as to
minimize the length of the waveguide for minimizing the loss of the waveguide. And, it
has to keep more than specified bent radius because the loss becomes greater.
FURUNO
Length of waveguide:
LHPX-20D-ASSY
For De-Icer
DPYCY-1.5
TPYCY-2.5(Motor)
MPYCY-12(Cont)
100VAC 1 50/60Hz Recommended dimension is less than 30 m.

100/110/200/220VAC
1 50/60Hz RU-3305
(Transformer)
Specifications of bend radius for
For ANT motor power supply LHPX-20D
200VAC 3 50Hz - Bend radius (single): more than R150 mm
220VAC 3 60Hz TPYCY-2.5
T/R unit - Bend radius (repeated): more than R250 mm
(Transformer) RTR-082
110VAC 3 60Hz RU-5693
220VAC
RW-9600
(Transformer)
220VAC 3 50Hz RU-6522

200VAC
(Transformer)
Scanner
440VAC 3 50Hz RU-5466-1
200VAC
380VAC 3 50Hz RPU-013

440VAC 3 60Hz
Fig. 1.2.10 Configuration of 30 kW S-band Waveguide Type Radar
1-15
1.3 Specifications
1.3 Specifications
1.3.1 TR unit and Antenna Radiator
Table 1.3.1 List of Transceiver Unit
Type of T/R Unit RTR-078 RTR-079 RTR-080 RTR-081 RTR-082

FAR-2117 FAR-2127 FAR-2137S
Model FAR-2827W FAR-2837SW
FAR-2817 FAR-2827 FAR-2837S
Output 12 kW 25 kW 30 kW 25 kW 30 kW
Frequency 9410+30 MHz 9410+30 MHz 3050+30 MHz 9410+30 MHz 3050+30 MHz
MAF1425B
Magnetron MG5436 MG5223F MG5436 MG5223F
or MG4010
T/R unit arrangement UP UP UP DOWN DOWN
Tx/Rx switching
Circulator + Diode Limitter Circulator + TR Limiter
method
Modulation method FET Switching
Type of
Semi-Log
IF amplification
IF frequency 60 MHz
Table 1.3.2 List of Antenna Radiator
Type of Antenna
XN-5A XN-12AF XN-20AF XN-24AF SN-30AF SN-36AF
Radiator
2817 2817
2817
2827 2827 2137S 2137S
2127-5A 2827
FAR- 2117 2117 2837S 2837S
2827-5A 2117
2127 2127 2837SW 2837SW
2127
2827W 2827W
Antenna length 10 ft 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 10 ft 12 ft
Rotation diameter 334 cm 140 cm 220 cm 270 cm 320 cm 386 cm
TX frequency 9.410 MHz 9.410 MHz 9.410 MHz 9.410 MHz 3.050 MHz 3.050 MHz
Horizontal beam width
0.75 deg. 1.9 deg. 1.23 deg. 0.95 deg. 2.3 deg. 1.8 deg.
(-3 dB point)
Vertical beam width 20 deg. 20 deg. 20 deg. 20 deg. 25 deg. 25 deg.
Side lobe
(maximum value) -28 dB -24 dB -28 dB -28 dB -24 dB -24 dB
Less than +10 deg. -32 dB -30 dB -32 dB -32 dB -30 dB -30 dB
More than +10 deg.
Gain 32 dB 27.5 dB 30.0 dB 31.5 dB 26.2 dB 26.8 dB
Radiator Slotted waveguide array
Polarization Horizontal
1-16
1.3 Specifications
Table 1.3.3 Transmitted Pulse Width and PRF
Pulse Range (NM)

Width
(u-sec) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 3 6 12 24 48 96
B.W: 40 MHz
PRF: 3000 Hz
S1: 0.07
*ARPA 32 NM: 2200 Hz
*2nd: 3000 Hz
B.W: 40 MHz
PRF: 3000 Hz
S2: 0.15
*ARPA 32 NM: 2200 Hz
*2nd: 3000 Hz
B.W: 10 MHz
M1: 0.3 PRF: 1500 Hz
*2nd: 500 Hz
B.W: 10 MHz
M2: 0.5 PRF: 1000 Hz
*2nd: 500 Hz
B.W: 10 MHz
M3: 0.7 PRF: 1000 Hz
*2nd: 500 Hz
B.W: 3 MHz
L : 1.2 PRF: 500 Hz
*2nd: 500 Hz
Note:
- B.W (Band Width):
IF frequency: Receiving bandwidth of 60 MHz.
- PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency):
The Repetition Frequency is not constant to avoid Radar interface from other radars.
The Jamming range is approximately ± 10 % of the Repetition Frequency. When the
Antenna is stopped, the Repetition Frequency is constant.
- ARPA 32NM:
The Repetition Frequency is changed when the ARPA tracking distance is set to
32 NM on [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 9: MAX RENGE.
- 2nd: Repetition Frequency of the 2nd trace mode
The Repetition Frequency is changed when the setting on [Menu] -> 1 -> 1: 2ND
ECHO REJ is ON.
1-17
1.3 Specifications
1.3.2 Monitor unit

Table 1.3.4 List of Monitor Unit
Monitor Unit MU-231CR MU-201CR

Monitor size 23.1 inch 20.1 inch
Monitor type Color LCD
Arrangement Desktop or Flush Mounting
Display area 470.4 x 352.8 mm 399.36 x 319.49 mm
Effective monitor
340 mm 308 mm
diameter
Effective display
340 mm 250 mm
diameter classification
20 inch: SXGA (1280x1024 pixels)
Resolution
23 inch: VXGA (1200x1600 pixels)
Indication Monotone/Multi Colors, 32 tones
Input power 100 to 230 VAC or 24 VDC
Table 1.3.5 Range Scale and Range Ring
Range scale 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 3 4 6

Range ring 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.5 1 1
The Number of rings 5 5 5 3 6 6 4 6
Range scale 8 12 16 24 32 48 96
Range ring 2 2 4 4 8 8 16
The Number of rings 4 6 4 6 4 6 6
Note:
The ranges in the meshed frames are not available for IMO/A type. For changing the
Model Type, change the setting of “IMO/A, B, C and W” on [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 7.
Type.
1-18
1.3 Specifications
1.3.3 Current power consumption

Table 1.3.6 Current Consumption
MU-231CR/MU-201CR: RPU-013:
Monitor Unit Input Voltage Processor Unit Input Voltage (100 knot)
Model: FAR-
24 VDC 100 - 115 VAC 220 - 230 VAC
24 VDC 100 - 230 VAC
24/42 rpm* 24/42 rpm* 24/42 rpm*
2117 0.7 A 7.6/8.5 A 2.6/3.0 A 1.6/1.7 A
2.3 A
2127 (100 VAC) 8.8/9.7 A 3.0/3.4 A 1.8/1.9 A
2817 0.9 A 7.6/8.5 A 2.6/3.0 A 1.6/1.7 A
3.2 A
2827 (100 VAC) 8.8/9.7 A 3.0/3.4 A 1.8/1.9 A
2117-BB 7.6/8.5 A 2.6/3.0 A 1.6/1.7 A
2127-BB 8.8/9.7 A 3.0/3.4 A 1.8/1.9 A
2137S 0.7 A (100 VAC) 3.0 A 1.5 A
2837W 3.2 A 1.6 A
2837S 0.9 A (100 VAC) 3.0 A 1.5 A
2837SW 3.0 A 1.5 A
2137S-BB 3.0 A 1.5 A
Note: 24/42 rpm: Current by the Antenna revolution
Table 1.3.7 Current Consumption of 30 kW S-band Radar Antenna Motor
Antenna Motor Input Voltage (100 knot)

Model: - 200 VAC 3 Ph. 50 Hz - 380 VAC 3 Ph. 50 Hz 220 VAC 220 VAC 440 VAC
FAR- - 220 VAC 3 Ph. 60 Hz - 440 VAC 3 Ph. 60 Hz 3 Ph. 50 Hz 3 Ph. 60 Hz 3 Ph. 60 Hz
21/26 rpm 21/26 rpm 45 rpm: HSC 45 rpm: HSC 45 rpm: HSC
2137S 3A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
2837S 3A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
2837SW 3A 1.5 A
2137S-BB 3A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
1-19
1.4 List of Functions

Table 1.4.1 (1/5) List of Functions
Function Description Remarks

TUNE Auto/Manual Executed by Antenna unit
Continuously variable in Manual mode only, 100
GAIN Executed by Antenna unit
steps
A/C SEA Auto/Manual Executed by Antenna unit
- Executed by the Processor unit in
the Automatic mode
A/C RAIN Auto/Manual
- Executed by Antenna unit in
the Manual mode
OFF/1/2/3
1: 2 sweep correlation
INT Reject
Noise REJ. OFF/ON: Digital processing
OFF/1/2
Wiper 1: Noise rejection type
2: Target detection type
OFF/1/2/3
The echo is stretched a fixed
1: Bearing direction
Echo stretch distance range from the sweep
2: Distance direction
center.
3: Distance + Bearing direction
OFF/1/2/3
1: Suppression of clutter and accumulation of
steady echo - small
Echo average
2: Suppression of clutter and accumulation of
steady echo - large
3: Accumulation of echoes
Setting items:
User program PICTUER 1/PICTUER 2/PICTUER IR/ES/EAV/NOISE REJ/
3/PICTUER 4/NEAR/FAR/NEAR BUOY/ AUTO STC/AUTO RAIN/
（Setting of
FAR BUOY/ROUGH SEA/SHIP/HARBOR/ VIDEO CONTRAST/PULSE
picture icon） COAST WIDE/SEA CONDITION/
STC RANGE
- Trail length:
Continuously changed for each 30 seconds
from OFF/30 seconds up to 30 min./Continue.
- Selection of Relative/True Trail/Previous
- The trail length is correctly
screen display
displayed within the selected
- Range interlocked/not interlocked
elapsed time.
Echo trails - Trail Copy (Enabled only when “Range
interlocked” is selected, and enabled when the
- Only true trail in the TM mode
range is changed within one third or 3 times.)
- Trail gradation
Change coupled with echo and background
color
- Selection of Monotone/Gradual shading
1-20

Two times zoom/Three times zoom
Zoom Zoomed area is marked by a box.
Screen fixed/GND fixed/Target tracking
Brightness 100 steps Adjusted by the encoder.
Panel brightness 16 steps
Range scale nm/km/sm/kyd IMO, A type: nm
Range and bearing Relative/Range and bearing
+ Cursor Brightness in 16 steps.
True/LL/X-Y/Fishing ground
Watch alarm IN/OUT
The pulse width determined by the selected
Pulse length
Range.
2nd Sweep Echo Reject OFF/ON
Blind sector setting Maximum angle 135°in two areas
Presentation mode HU/HU-TB/CU/NU/TM
Display mode Radar/Rader + Plotter/Plotter B/C type only
Desired position within 75% of
Off Center OFF/ON
radius.
- Distance is continuously
Two VRMs changeable.
VRM
** Unit of distance: nm/km/sm/kyd** - Mark brightness in 16 steps
- IMO, A type: nm
Two EBLs - Bearing is continuously
EBL ** Relative/true (Only True except for HU changeable.
and HU-TB modes) ** - Mark brightness in 16 steps
Heading line Erased only while pressing the [HL OFF] key. Mark brightness in 16 steps
Stern line Erased only while pressing the [HL OFF] key. Mark brightness in 16 steps
Range ring Erased only while pressing the [HL OFF] key. Mark brightness in 16 steps
Index line The bearing and range can be set. Mark brightness in 16 steps
OFF/ON
Own ship symbol Ship length, ship width, Rader and GPS antenna Mark brightness in 16 steps
position set in the INITIALIZE menu.
Settable items:
ECHO COLOR/BKGD COLOR/
CHARACTER/CURSOR/ECHO/
TRAIL/HL/RING/
BEARING CURSOR/EBL/
BRILL BRILL1>BRILL2>BRILL3>BRILL4
VRM/INDEX LINE/
ARPA SYMBOL/
AIS SYMBOL/
LL GRID/MARK/CHART/
PANEL DIMMER
1-21

- Targets:
The manual acquired targets: 100. In other
words, the total of the manual acquired
targets and the auto acquired targets: 100
The maximum number of 100 targets
- Vector time
OFF/30 S/1 M/3 M/6 M/15 M/30 M
Vector can be changed between REL and TRUE.
- Past position display:
10 points/Target selectable
- Activating the guard zone
No.1 Triangle guard zone:
Range between 3 and 6 NM
No.2 Triangle guard zone:
ARPA Within 24 NM or 32 NM
- or Polygonal guard zone:
10 points or less within a range of
24/32 NM
- Tracking range:
0.1 to 32 NM.
- Maximum Antenna revolution
42 rpm (X-band) or 45 rpm (S-band)
- Trial maneuvering
- Tracking parameter:
- Initial vector presentation time
60 sec. or less, selectable
- Data display
Range/Bearing/Course/Speed/CPA/TCPA/BCR/
BCT
- Reference target vector
3 points can be inputted.
- Maximum number of Target:
1000 points
- Vector time
OFF/30 S/1 M/3 M/6 M/15 M/30 M/
Vector can be changed between REL/TRUE.
AIS display
- Past position display
10 points/Target
- Data Display
Range/Bearing/Course/Speed/CPA/TCPA/BCR/B
CT/HDG/ROT
1-22

Radar map Maximum number of points memorized: 20,000
Coast line Data:
FURUNO/C-MAP/Navionics/ERC
- Mercator projection
- Effective plot area
Latitude 85 deg. or less
- Number of stored points
Own ship trail 20,000/Mark 20,000
- ARPA other ship trail:
15 targets x 1,000
Plotter display
- Waypoint
200 points
- Route:
30 routes
-Number of waypoints per route
30/ Route
- Selection of destination
- Memory card (CU-200):
2 slots
AD-10 adjustment
Color cannot be used on IMO/A
Echo color Selectable (Yellow/Green/White/Color)
type.
Background color Selectable (Black/Light blue/Dark blue)
Mark color Selectable in combination with background color
Character color Selectable in combination with background color
LAN (100 base-Tx)
Inter-switch ** Displays for other radar can be
function
selected by clicking the icon of ANT-X.
Checking
Can be checked on the Performance Monitor Appeared by PM echo on screen
Output/Sensitivity
Fault/Error
detection and Can be monitored in the self test display Refer to chapter 6
Monitoring
1-23

GUARD ALARM/TIMER ALARM/
GURAD ZONE/LOST TRGT/CPA LIMIT/
AUTO ACQ TRGT FULL/
- Visible and Audible alarm
MAN ACQ TRGT FULL/
- The output for external alarm
Alarm ARPA SYSTEM ERROR/
can be selected by [Menu] ->3
AZIMATH/HEAD LINE/TRIGGER/
-> 6 to 9.
VIDEO/GYRO/LOG/EPFS/XTE/ARRIVAL/
WPT/DEPTH/OPERATOR FITNESS/
SYSTEM ERROR/KEYBOARD ERROR
Antenna height set 5/7.5/10/15/20/25/30/35/40/45/50 m or more
Near range STC set Selecting curve: 2/2.5/3/3.5
Middle range
Selecting curve: 3/4/5/6
STC set
Far range STC set Selecting curve: 6/7/8
Sea conditions set 1/2/3/4/5
STC operating
+10
range set
Cable Attenuation Auto/Manual
correction
Tuning initialize Auto/Manual
MBS adjustment 0 to 255
Radar display/
Selection: MAIN/SUB
Monitor display
SPU and PC:
Demo Mode OFF/EG/SPU/PC
FURUNO development
Type of Mode IMO/A/B/C/W Selected when installing.
Switching of Model Available (X-band and S- band/Output power) Selected when factory setting.
Wheel direction Forward/Backward
- Processor unit: SPU board
1. Mini-card on SPU board
2. RS-232C
- TR unit: RFC board
Software Ver-up
Via Processor unit as the mentioned above
(RS-232C)
- Control unit:
Only factory is available.
Note:
See chapter 4 for details of setting radar type IMO/A/B/C/W.
1-24
Chapter 2. Location of2.1 Parts
Processor Unit
2.1 Processor Unit: RPU-013

DVI-D Connectors for
LCD Display Unit
(Both are identical.)
F1
100 VAC: 10 A (125 V)
220 VAC: 5 A (250 V)
LAN Port (RJ45) for 24 VDC: 20 A (125 V)
FAR-21X7/28X7,
Network Hub (HUB-100),
CARD I/F (CU-200) or
INS
Fig. 2.1.1 Radar Processor Unit, Bottom View
Fan (blowing air in)

MMS-06C24DS/24VDC 0.09A
Fig. 2.1.2 Processor Unit, Top View
2-1
2.1 Processor Unit
Fig. 2.1.3 Processor Unit with hinged cover opened
HV9017 Board
HV-9017A: 12 kW (330 V)
HV-9017B: 25 kW (550 V)
SPU Board
03P9337
PRW Board
AC Power Supply:
03P9339A/B/C/D
DC Power Supply:
03P9338A/B/C/D NET Board
NET100 基板
* 03P9338A/B: 12V SPEC 03P9332
03P9332
(No shipping.)
FIL Board (Line Filter)

AC SPEC: 03P9341
DC SPEC: 03P9352
Fig. 2.1.4 Processor Unit with Shield Covers Removed
2-2
2.1 Processor Unit
LAN Port
(100 BASE-T)
Digital Video Output

(DVI-D)
GND Terminal
Power Supply Terminal
Fig. 2.1.5 Processor Unit, bottom chassis
DVI-RGB I/F Board
DVI-RGB I/F Board

RGB BUFF Board Stopper
(03P9229B)
Hinge
** Possible to separate
between bottom and
GC-10 Board upper chassis.
(64P1106A, Optional)
Terminal Board
GYRO Input Terminal
(03P9342)
(Optional)
Fig. 2.1.6 Processor Unit, bottom chassis
2-3
2.1 Processor Unit
S1 (Selection of monitor type)

Model 1 2 3 4
FAR-21x7 (MU-201CR) OFF OFF
FAR-28x7 (MU-231CR) ON OFF OFF
FAR-21x7-BB OFF ON
CR4 (Blinks every second.)
CR8
(Blinks every Mounting part
0.5 second.) MAIN CPU of NET-100.
(U21)
ARPA CPU
(U74)
DVI-D J204
S2
(Reset SW)
DVI-D J205
DRW CPU
(U19)
CR2/CR3 (Always ON)

TP58 (2Vp-p)
R401 CR5 (Blinks every second.)
(Used to adjust OP Video
CR Check for
IN level, 2Vp-p at TP58)
CR2 VCC (+5 V)
CR3 3.2 V
CR4 MAIN CPU (U21)
CR5 DRW CPU (U19)
Note: CR8 ARPA CPU (U74)
See page.5-2 for SPU Ver-22.
Fig. 2.1.7 SPU Board, 03P9337 Ver.11
2-4
2.1 Processor Unit
100BASE-T
(RJ-45)
CR1 (LED-B)
(Blinks when LAN port is used.)
CR2 (LED-A)
(Lights when data flows through LAN port.) ** This board is also used in CU-200.
Fig. 2.1.8 NET-100 Board, 03P9332
2-5
2.1 Processor Unit
TP1: Main Inverter Output Voltage (34.7 to 35.3 VDC)

TP2: SW Reg. Common Line
TP3: Sub Inverter SW Freq. (42.75 to 47.25 kHz)
TP4: Main Inverter SW Freq. (42.75 to 47.25 kHz)
VR1 (Main Inverter Output Adj.)
CR23 (GRN)
CR21 (RED)
JP1 (COM/300 V/ 500 V)
Suffix mark
A SPEC (12 kW) B SPEC (More than 25 kW)

JP1 COM-300 V COM-500 V JP2 (COM/300 V/330 V)
JP2 COM-330 V COM-330 V
Fig. 2.1.9 HV-9017 A/B Board
100 VAC: 10 A (125 V)

220 VAC: 5 A (250 V) Fuse 20 A
Fig. 2.1.10 AC FIL Board, 03P9341 Fig.2.1.11 DC FIL Board, 03P9352
2-6
2.1 Processor Unit
Setting of Antenna Rotation Speed

24 rpm: 144 Hz at TP17 with R168, J161 and J162 opened
42 rpm: 252 Hz at TPI7 with R168, J161 and J162 shorted
JP161 (42 rpm)
JP162 (42 rpm) TP13
R168 (RT) TP17 (BP)
TP14 (32 V)
TP15
R106
J105 J106 TP12 (14 V)
TP16 (5 V)
TP11 (12 V)
TP18
TP19
J104
CR63 (MTR)
TP9
CR64 (RF)
TP2 CR65 (Tx-HV)

(PR0V) J103
R48 (45kHz)
TP-1 (S-5 V)
CR23 (IN-ER)
R88 TP3 (PR12 V)
TP4（PR5 V）
TP5 (PR5 V)
TP7
R21 (OVER)
TP6
J101
CR23: Input Over/Low-Voltage

CR63: ANT Motor Overcurrent
J108
CR64: ANT24 V Overcurrent
220 VAC: No jumper
CR65: TX-HV Overcurrent
100 VAC: Jumpers between 1-2, 4-7 and 5-8.
Board Name Power Supply Antenna speed
03P9339A 100 VAC 24 rpm
03P9339B 100 VAC 42 rpm
03P9339C 220 VAC 24 rpm
03P9339D 220 VAC 42 rpm
Fig. 2.1.12 AC PWR Board, 03P9339A/B/C/D
2-7
2.1 Processor Unit
Setting of Antenna Rotation

24 rpm: 144 Hz at TP17 with R168, J161 and J162 opened
JP161 (42 rpm) 42 rpm: 252 Hz at TP17 with R168, J161 and J162 shorted
JP162 (42 rpm)
R168 TP17 (B.P)
J105 J106
R106
TP19
TP14（32 V）
TP18
J104
CR63 (MTR)
TP9
CR64 (RF)
CR65 (Tx_HV)
TP8 J103
R88 (12 V) TP1 (S_5 V)
CR23 (1N-ER)
TP13 R26 (45 kHz)
TP3 (PR12 V)
TP7
TP10 (GND)
TP12 (-14 V)
J101
TP6 TP2
TP11 (12 V) CR23: Input Over/Low-Voltage

CR63: ANT Motor Overcurrent
CR64: ANT24V Overcurrent
Board Name Power Supply Antenna Speed
03P9338A 12-24 VDC 24 rpm
CR65: TX-HV Overcurrent
03P9338B 12-24 VDC 42 rpm
03P9338C 24 VDC 24 rpm
03P9338D 24 VDC 42 rpm
Fig. 2.1.13 DC PWR Board, 03P9338A/B/C/D
2-8
2.1 Processor Unit
J654 (SPU) J652 (PWR)
J651 (HV)
12 kW: 310-350 V
25 kW: 520-580 V
PSU PSU
J613 (SCANNER)
J601 (RS-232C) J614 (CARD I/F)

(9P D-SUB)
J615 (OPTION)
J610 (SCANNER) J616 (From Master)
J617 (To Slave 1)

J602 (KEY)
J604 (PSU)
J618 (To Slave 2)
J606 (HEADING)
(IEC-61162-2) J656
J619 (ECDIS)
J603 (GC-10)
J611 (AIS)
J606 (NAVIGATOR)
J655
J622 (KEY)
J607 (LOG) J620 (TRACK CONTROL)
J621 (SERIAL I/F)
J608 (AD CONVERTER) J612 (EXT
J656: HEADING (IEC-61162-2)

Selection of 110-ohm terminator on HDG line. (Default: Jumper between 1 and 2; terminated)
J655: AIS (IEC-61162-2)
Selection of 110-ohm terminator in AIS line. (Default: Jumper between 1 and 2; terminated)
Fig. 2.1.14 TB Board, 03P9342
2-9
2.1 Processor Unit
a..
b..
L=20 mm 231-131
L=19 mm
734-230
c.
Fig. 2.1.15 WAGO Connector and Terminal Opener
2-10
2.2 Scanner Unit
2.2 Scanner Unit

2.2.1 FAR-2xx7
Performance Monitor (PM-31)

Antenna
Fig. 2.2.1 Scanner Unit (RSB-096 with PM-31)
2-11
2.2 Scanner Unit
FAN (24 VDC)

Internal heat is agitated.
J921 (TX_HV)
RTR-079 (25 kW)
VR1 (Power Adj.)

This hole is used to access VR1 on MD board
(03P9244) for magnetron current adjustment at factory.
Fig. 2.2.2 Scanner Unit with Cover Removed (1)
IF Board (03P9335A)
PM-31 Connection
J921 (HV)
Fig. 2.2.3 Scanner Unit with Cover Removed (2)
2-12
2.2 Scanner Unit
O-Ring Rotary Joint
Guide Pin Hole Guide Pin Hole
Fig. 2.2.4 Antenna Bracket
PM-31 Antenna
(03P9361)
PM-31/B3RX1626
Fig. 2.2.5 Performance Monitor, PM-31
2-13
2.2 Scanner Unit
Motor Brush Holder (x2)
Motor Brush (MG120-5x6x11)

Wear Line
(When bush wears to white line, it must be replaced.)
Motor Type Antenna Speed Scanner Unit Fig. 2.2.6 Antenna Motor
D8G-516 24 rpm RSB-096
D8G-571 42 rpm RSB-097
Magnet for Heading Lead Switch
Antenna Turning Gear
Gear Retainer
Rotary Joint
Fig. 2.2.7 Antenna Motor Gear
2-14
2.2 Scanner Unit
Heading Lead SW
J916
(HD/B.P) B.P GEN Board (03P9347)
IF AMP Board OUTPUT

Terminal
J918 (FAN 24V)
RT TB Board (03P9349)
J914 (ANT 24V)
J915 (TX_HV)
TB801 TB803
J917
3 Units are used.
TB804 (FAR-2837SW: RTR-082)
(Antenna Motor Power Supply)
Fig. 2.2.8 Antenna Terminal Board
B.P GEN Board (03P9347)
Antenna Drive Gear
Fig. 2.2.9 Antenna Drive Gear
2-15
2.2 Scanner Unit
RFC Board (03P9346A) Circulator

Diode Limiter
IF Board (03P9335A) PWR (RF) Board

- 03P9348A: 12 kW
- 03P9348B: 25 kW
MIC (RU-9601)
Fig. 2.2.10a RTR-079 (25 kW)
Fig. 2.2.10 b RTR-079 (25 kW)
2-16
2.2 Scanner Unit
IFAMP OUT
（J823） J3
1. Mag.Cur
3. GND
CR9
(RTR-078 and -079 use the board.) (Blinks every second,
CPU (U19) operations)
Fig. 2.2.11 RFC Board, 03P9346A
Mag. Heater Volt ADJ. (J833-#11)

R28 (Maｇ. H)
マグネトロン
MG5439 R32 (Mag. L)
J833
R62 (ADJ)
(MIC
マグネトロン TUNNIING, +32
V at J833#6)
MG4010 or MAF1425B
03P9348A: 12 kW
03P9348B: 25 kW
03P9348C: 30 kW (S-band)
R57 (-12V at J833-#1)
Fig. 2.2.12 PWR(RF) Board, 03P9348
2-17
2.2 Scanner Unit
J823 (IF Output) J824 (IF Input)
Fig. 2.2.13 IF AMP Board, 03P9335A
60 MHz IF Output
VR1 (Power)
Used to adjust magnetron
current at factory.
03P9244A: X band 12 kW
03P9244B: X band 25 kW
03P9244E: S band 30 kW
Fig. 2.2.14 MD Board, 03P9244A/B
2-18
2.2 Scanner Unit
MD Board
(03P9244B)
Pulse Transformer
(RT9023)
Magnetron
(MG5436)
Fig. 2.2.15 RTR-079 (25 kW)
MD Board
(03P9244A)
Magnetron
(MG4010 or MAF1425B) Pulse Transformer
(RT9025)
Fig. 2.2.16 RTR-078 (12 kW)
2-19
2.2 Scanner Unit
2.2.2 FAR-2827W scanner unit
TB Board (03P9349)
Waveguide Joint
DC Motor (D8G-516, 24 rpm)

Cable Grand
De-Icer
Fig. 2.2.17 (a) RSB-103
Heading Lead SW
Drive Gear
Scanner Turning Gear B.P GEN Board (03P9347)
TB804
(Antenna Motor Power Supply)
Fig. 2.2.17(b) RSB-103
2-20
2.2 Scanner Unit
Fig. 2.2.18 (a) RSB-103 Waveguide
Magnet for Heading Lead Switch
Gear Retainer
Waveguide
Fig. 2.2.18 (b) RSB-103 Waveguide
2-21
2.2 Scanner Unit
Waveguide Joint
RF Unit
TB Board (03P9349A)
Cable Entry
Fig. 2.2.19 RTR-081 (FAR-2827W, 25 kW)
Added 2P connector:
IF AMP Board
Ver.33A and after
(03P9335A) RFC Board (03P9346A)
MIC: RU-9601
or RU-9603 TR Limiter
PWR (RF) Board (03P9348B)
Fig. 2.2.20 Removed from RF Unit
2-22
2.2 Scanner Unit
Pulse Transformer (RT9023) Magnetron (MG5436) Magnetron Cooling Fan
MD Board
(03P9244B)
Fig. 2.2.21 (a) RTR-081 RF Unit with Shield Cover Removed (1)
Fig. 2.2.21 (b) RTR-081 RF Unit with Shield Cover Removed (2)
2-23
2.2 Scanner Unit
2.2.3 FAR-2837S scanner unit
Performance Monitor Antenna
Antenna Motor (SW)

Cable Gland
Fig. 2.2.22 RSB-098
IF AMP Board
(03P9335B) with
shield cover removed
MIC (RU-9427)
TB Board (03P9349A)
Antenna Motor
(RM-7398)
Fig. 2.2.23 RSB-098 with Cover Removed
2-24
2.2 Scanner Unit
TB Board (03P9349A)
Fig. 2.2.24 RSB-098 with TB Board Removed
PM-51
Diode Limiter
Fig. 2.2.25 RSB-098 with MIC removed
2-25
2.2 Scanner Unit
RFC Board (03P9346-33A)
Antenna Motor Power

Supply Terminal
MSS-7497 Board
PWR(RF) Board (03P9348C)
Fig. 2.2.27 RSB-098 with RFC Board Chassis Removed
2-26
2.2 Scanner Unit
Magnetron (MG5223F)
MD Board (03P9244E)
Pulse Transformer (RT9273)
Fig. 2.2.28 RSB-098 with Shield Cover Removed
Magnetron Cooling Fan
Fig. 2.2.29 RSB-098 with Magnetron Removed
2-27
2.2 Scanner Unit
Antenna Motor SW
Circulator
Fig. 2.2.30 RSB-098 with Pulse Mounting Chassis Removed Transformer

And MD Board
B.P GEN Board (03P9347)
Fig. 2.2.31 RSB-098, Rotary Joint
2-28
2.2 Scanner Unit
Antenna Motor Mounting Plate MD Board
Antenna Motor
(MSS-7497 Board Removed)
TB Board
Fig. 2.2.32 RSB-098 Antenna Motor
2-29
2.2 Scanner Unit
2.2.4 FAR-2827SW scanner unit

MSS-7497 Board
TB for Antenna Motor Power Supply
Antenna Switch
Waveguide Flange
2-30
2.2 Scanner Unit
Antenna Motor (RM-7398) B.P GEN Board (03P9347)
Fig. 2.2.35 RSB-104 with MSS-7497 Board Removed

Antenna Motor
Mounting Plate
TB Board (03P9349A)
2-31
2.2 Scanner Unit
Cable Clamp Waveguide Joint
Fig. 2.2.37 RTR-082（FAR-2837SW: 30 kW）
MD Board (03P9244E)
PWR (RF) Board

(03P9348C)
Magnetron (MG5223F)
RFC Board (03P9346-33A)
TB Board (03P9349A)
IF AMP Board (03P9335B)
with a shield cover removed
Use this hole to adjust breaker current.
Fig. 2.2.38 RTR-082 with Cover Removed
2-32
2.2 Scanner Unit
MD Board (03P9244E)
図 2.2.37 RTR-0828 マグネトロン、TB 基板取り外し

PWR Board (03P9348C)
RFC Board (03P9346A) Waveguide Flange
Circulator
MIC Wiring
Antenna Motor Breaker
Shield Cover
(Current Adjustment)
MIC
(RU-9427)
TR Limiter
Fig. 2.2.39 RTR-082 with Magnetron Removed
2-33
2.3 Monitor Unit
2.3 Monitor Unit

- MU-201CR (20 inch LCD)
- MU-231CR (23 inch LCD)
534 (598)
Hanger
4-( φ )13
454 (505)
35° 409
(451)
Hanger Stay
2-M10 x 30
Hanger Mounting Hole (x4)

with Cover (M6 x 25) 352 (351)
Fig.2.3.1 Monitor Unit (MU-201CR/MU-231CR)
Power Supply Terminal
VIDEO IN
(DVI-D)
Fuse
100 VAC: 2 A
220 VAC: 2 A
24 VDC: 6 A
GND Terminal Cable Clamp
Fig. 2.3.2 Connections on LCD Display Unit
2-34
2.3 Monitor Unit
Fuse (2 A)
Power Supply DVI I/F Board
AC: DC-DC Board (03P9359) (SLB-FRN3-A)
DC: PWR Unit (RKW-12-13RE)
Noise Filter
LF-205A (AC)
MXB-1206-33 (DC)
LED1 (Always ON)
Fig. 2.3.3 Monitor Unit (MU-201CR) with Cover Removed
LCD Board
(201PW023-H)
Inverter Board
(210PW021-C)
LCD Unit
(NL128102AC31-02)
Fig. 2.3.4 LCD Unit in MU-201CR
2-35
2.3 Monitor Unit
Fan
(MMS-06C12DS 12VDC 0.17A)
FIL Board
(03P9360)
Power Supply
AC: DC-DC Board (03P9359)
DVI I/F Board
DC: PWR Unit (RKW-12-13RE)
(BSM-501 FN1)
Noise Filter
LF-205A (AC)
MXB-1206-33 (DC)
Fig. 2.3.5 Monitor Unit (MU-231CR) with Cover Removed
LCD Unit
(FLC59UXC8V-04)
Inverter Board
(NA19002-4241)
LCD Board
(NA21808)
Fig. 2.3.6 LCD Unit in MU-231CR
2-36
2.4 Control Unit
2.4 Control Unit

XH10P-W-5P
L=1.5/10/20/30 m
Left Button
Wheel
Right Button
Power Switch
Trackball
Fig. 2.4.1 Standard Control Unit (RCU-014J) Japanese version
Fig. 2.4.2 Standard Control Unit (RCU-014E) English version
2-37
2.4 Control Unit
J505 (For PROGRAM update port, J502 (REMOTE) for RCU-016

Factory use)
Cable Clamp
J501 (PROCESSOR) for PRU-013
J506 (EMRI) for EMRI Trackpilot
J507 (SYSTEM FAIL)

CR10 (Option of CPU,
U8, Blinks every second)
U8(CPU) Buzzer Board (03P9362)
PNL Board (03P9343)
Trackball J504 (TB) S36 (DIP SW)
S36 Function
SYSTEM FAIL ALARM
JP1 #1
(ON: Output from J507)
Open (Write Program) RELAY STATUS
Short (Ordinary) #2
(ON: Reversed polarity of the above signal)
#3 Not used
#4 Not used
Fig. 2.4.3 Standard Control Unit (RCU-014) with Cover Removed
2-38
2.4 Control Unit
Power Switch
RCU-015: Provided
RCU-016: Not provided
XH10P-W-5P-A
L=1.5/10/20/30 m
Fig. 2.4.4 Trackball /Remote Control Unit, RCU-015/016
J521 (PROCESS0R)
- RCU-013 Connector CR11(U5 CPU RUN)
- RCU-016 connects with RCU-015 Blinks every second.
(Remote Panel.)
トラックボール部
JP1
Open (Write Program)
Short (Default)
J527 (SYSTEM FAIL)
J522 (REMOTE) J524 (TB)

- RCU-015 connects with RCU-016
(PROCESSOR.) ■ PNL 基板 (03P9344)
J525 (PROGRAM, Factory use)

S6 (DIP SW)
S6 Function
SYSTEM FAIL ALARM ON/OFF
#1
(ON: Output from J507)
RELAY STATUS
#2
(ON: Reversed polarity of the above signal)
Fig. 2.4.5 Trackball/Remote Control Unit (RCU-015/016) with Cover Removed
2-39
2.5 Optional Unit
2.5 Optional Unit
LAN Port
(100BASE-T)
Mini Card Slot (x2) for
C-MAP, NAVIONICS,
and FURUNO chart card. Power Supply
(12 VDC)
Port A Port B
Fig. 2.5.1 Card Interface Unit, CU-200
S1 (DIP SW)
#1: INIT #3: IP1
#2: IP2 #4: IP0
CR2 (U12 CPU RUN,
When two CU-200s are installed, on Blinks every second.)
S1-#4 2nd units is set to ON.
NET-100 Board
(03P9332)
CARD CPU Board

(03P9333)
Fig. 2.5.2 CU-200 with Cover Removed
2-40
2.5 Optional Unit
100 – 230VAC
Fuse (1 A)
Port Number: 1 to 8
(Lights when in use.)
Link/Act
FDx/Col
10M/100M
RJ45
Fig. 2.5.3 HUB-100
Flip up rotary-lock (a) to release lock

and remove flat cable.
(a)
03P9364
Fig. 2.5.4 HUB-100 with Cover Removed
2-41
2.5 Optional Unit
LED1 (Always lights.)
Fuse (2 A)
Fig. 2.5.5 DVI I/F Board
A J5 B A J4 B
(Jumper) (Jumper)
A J6 B
Fig. 2.5.6 RGB Buffer Board (03P9229B)
2-42
2.5 Optional Unit
SW3 (Baud Rate, Version and Talker)
R42 (+5.2 V ADJ, TP1) CR22 (+5.2 V)

Supplied Power
JP4 JP8: BATT Backup

JP5
SW1
(Gear ratio, Type of
JP2
gyrocompass and
(Stator Voltage)
frequency)
TP1:+5.2V
JP3 JP9
(Rotor Voltage)
J1
(Type of gyrocompass) SW2
(Rotor Voltage, Stator
Voltage, Self-test,
NMEA Transmitting
interval, CPU reset)
JP6/7 (AD Output Interval,

F1-4 (2 A Fuse) 25 ms/200 ms)
(S1-S3/R1 COM)
J5
(Rotor Signal Input)
J7-12:
J4 (Stator Signal Input) Data Output Port 1-6
J7, J8, J9 (25 ms)
J10, J11, J12 (200 ms)
J6
(NMEA Output Port)
CR21 (CPU RUN,
OK when blinking)
Fig. 2.5.7 GC-10 Board (64P1106A)
2-43
2.5 Optional Unit
*This unit is used to extend

the antenna cable.
Fig. 2.5.8 Junction Box (RJB-001)
Antenna Motor Power Supply Current Adjustment
Fig. 2.5.9 FAR-2137S/2837S Power Supply Control Unit (PSU-007)
2-44
2.6 Radar Console
2.6 Radar Console

2.6.1 RCN-003/004: Standard type
600
1100
960
RCN-003 (23-inch Display)

RCN-004 (20-inch Display)
*The dimension of both consoles is
the same.
570
Fig. 2.6.1 RCN-003
Service Window in the rear panel
Cable Entry (Both sides)
Fig. 2.6.2 RCN-003, Side View Fig. 2.6.3 RCN-003, Rear View
2-45
2.6 Radar Console
Mounting of CU-200
Mounting screw for RCU-014 Unit (x4)
Put the panel lower part by pinching.
Fig. 2.6.4 RCN-003 with Cover Removed
Cable Entry Ground Terminal

Mounting ECDIS
(Non Rader Console)
Mounting PSU-007
GYRO Input Terminal

PSU-007 (Right side of TB Board)
Power-Supply Terminal Output
TB Board
Power Supply Terminal Board
Fig. 2.6.5 Wiring in RCN-003
2-46
2.6 Radar Console
For VDR BNC connector converter
Foe De-Icer breaker
Fig. 2.6.6 RCN-003 (FAR-2827)
PSU-007
Fig. 2.6.7 RCN-003 (FAR-2837S)
2-47
2.6 Radar Console
2.6.2 RCN-001/002: Slim type

600
1100
790
788
400
Fig. 2.6.8 RCN-001 (1/2) Fig. 2.6.9 RCN-001 (2/2)
RCN-001 (23 inch Display)

RCN-002 (20 inch Display)
*The dimension of both consoles is
the same.
Mounting CU-200
RPU-013 Power Supply Terminal Board
Cable Entry
Fig. 2.6.10 RCN-001 with Cover Removed
2-48
2.6 Radar Console
TB Board
Ground Terminal
Fig. 2.6.11 RPU-013, Open View (1/2) Fig. 2.6.12 RPU-013, Open View (2/2)
2-49
Chapter 3.13.Overview
Menu Tree
of Menu Operation
3.1 Overview of Menu Operations

3.1.1 Access the menus
- MAIN menu
Press the [MENU] key or place the cursor on the [MENU] box and click the left
button.
- Box marked with [ ]
Place the cursor on the box and click the right button.
HDG, SPD, OS POSN, ARPA, AIS, TRAIL, TARGET LIST, BRILL,
MARK, PICTURE, ANT, CURSOR*)
* To access the CURSOR menu, place the cursor on the display area of the
radar and click the right button.
Optional Menu for service engineer.

- INITIALIZE menu
Press the [MENU] key five times while pressing the [1:HL OFF] key.
- FACTROY menu
Press the [2], [3] or [4] key while pressing the [1:HL OFF] key.
Note:
1. When the “+” cursor is changed, it shows any selection is made.
The menu selection screen has a timeout of 30 seconds and the Menu box disappears.
2. After you change the some setting, wait for six seconds before turning off the power.
Otherwise, it is not saved.
3. There is a Menu guidance box (xxx/xxx) in the lower right of the screen.
090
100
ARP,
110
AIS DATA BOX
120
130 TARGET ARPA OFF

AIS
OFF
DISP
MANU
LIST
VECTOR TRUE 30M
140 GZ1 PAST POSN REL 3M
GZ2 CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN
150 ALARM1
160
ALARM2 ALERT BOX
180 170 CU/TM Guidance
VRM1>3.682NM< RESET
VRM2 5.221NM
ALARM TARGET
ACK
CURSOR Box
DATA & ACQ MENU
Left-click Right-click
Fig. 3.1.1 Position of Guidance Box
3-1
3.1 Overview of Menu Operation
3.1.2 Arrangement of icon boxes
Reference Point Box

Trial Maneuver (Elapsed time shown
when trial maneuver is active.)
PICTURE Box, Main Picture Settings SET and DRIFT Boxes
PULSE LENGTH Box
ANTENNA Box CURSOR DATA Box
PRESENTATION MODE Box GAIN Setting
RANGE Box A/C SEA Setting Note: Speed, Set and
DISPLAY MODE Box A/C RAIN Setting Drift values not shown.
Heading Marker TUNING Setting
6 NM
/1
DISPLAY
RADAR 4 REF POINT
GAIN
SEA AUTO
25
22 HDG4 000.0°T Heading
HEAD UP TB RM 350 000 010
ANT POSN RAIN
TUNE AUTO
19
SPD4 0.0kt BT WT
MAN Speed, Source
ANT 1 X-BAND 4 340 020
34°40. 649 N
SB 0.0kt Starboard Speed
PULSE S1
330 030 + 135°18. 303 E COG 00.0°T Course over Ground
4 SET 000. 0°T SOG 0.0kt GPS Speed over Ground,
PICTURE4 320 040 DRIFT 0. 9kt OS POSN 4
IR OFF
34°40.00N Source
ES OFF Heading TRIAL OFF DGPS 135°24.00E Position
EAV OFF 310 Line 050 MENU Box
AUTO RAIN MENU
OFF
Index
ALIGN Chart Align ON
300 060 Range
Line ZOOM or ARP
Rings DATA BOX
290 070
280 Guard ZOOM, ARP,

080
Zone
Cursor or AIS DATA BOX
270 No. 1 090
EBL
TARGET LIST
260 OS 100
Box
No. 2 Symbol ARP,
250 EBL 110
AIS DATA BOX
No. 2
No. 1 VRM ARP ACQ
240 VRM MODE Box
120
IL1 ON Stern North AIS DISP Box
032. 0°T 230 Marker 130
5. 60NM
MARK 4
Marker
4 ARPA
TARGET
LIST
OFF 4 AIS DISP4
OFF AIS Message Arrival
VECTOR TRUE 30M
220 140 GZ1 PAST POSN REL 3M
GZ2
+ CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN
210 150 ALARM1
190.0°T, 5.75NM ALERT BOX
4
ALARM2
BRILL1 26 200
190 180 170
160 TRUE TRAIL OFF 4
HL CU/TM
OFF EBL1 >280.9°T< VRM1>3.682NM< RESET
TX WATCH Origin Mark ALARM TARGET
STBY EBL2 240. 8°R 11 : 28 VRM2 5.221NM ACK DATA & ACQ
CURSOR
MENU
WATCH Box CU/TM Guidance

EBL2 Box (Alarm watch RESET, Box
EBL1 Box time) ALARM ACK
Box CPA LIMIT Box
TX/STBY Box PAST POSN Box
HL OFF Box VECTOR Box
BRILL Box VRM2 Box
MARK Box VRM1 Box
Bearing and range to mark TRAIL MODE Box
IL (Index Line) Box ALARM Box
Index line orientation,
Index line interval Guard Zone (GZ) Box
Fig. 3.1.2 Screen presentation
3-2
AIS Targets
To erase a Lost target of AIS,

press the [ALARM ACK] key.
Expanded data
Click the left button on the
data display area.
ARPA Targets
[ARPA TARGET DATA]
Own ship vectot

- ARPA: ON
- Vector: True
3-3
3.1.3 HDG/SPD/POS display

HDG Heading
SPD Speed, Source
SB 0.0 kt Log Speed
COG Course over Ground
SOG Speed over Ground, Source
OS POSN
DGPS Position
Fig. 3.1.3 HDG/SPD/POS Display
Table3.1.1 HDG/SPD/POS Display
Data
Input Data Display Remarks
Display
Select AD-10 or SERIAL in [HDG] box
HDG HDT, AD-10 xxx.x deg T (TRUE)
menu
VBW>VHW xx.x kt WT/Log Select LOG (WT) in [SPD] box menu
Select LOG (WT) in [SPD] box menu
VBW>VHW
xx.x kt WTC/Log Select SET DRIFT -> ON in [SPD] box
Set and drift entry
menu
VBW xx.x kt BT/Log Select LOG (BT) in [SPD] box menu
VTG>RMC xx.x kt BT/GPS Select GPS in [SPD] box menu
SPD
When REF is selected in [SPD] box
Reference speed setting xx.x kt BT/REF menu and REF (reference target) is
acquired
Manual xx.x kt WT/MAN Select MANUAL in [SPD] box menu
Select SET DRIFT -> ON in [SPD] box
Set and drift entry xx.x kt WTC/MAN
menu
VBW
(When LOG (WT) or Show the speed in the X-axis direction
LOG (BT) is selected in of the ship speed on two axes. Speed in
the SPD Menu. the Y-axis direction is a HDG element
VTG>RMC and display in the “SPD.”
SB xx.x kt
（Calculated from
SB: Starboard.
VTG>RMC when GPS
Port side speed is displayed with
is selected in the SPD
minus sign.
menu.）
COG VTG>RMC COG Displays NAV Data (GPS)
Select GPS-1, 2 or LAN in the [OS
SOG VTG>RMC SOG
POSN] box menu.
PPS (GPS PPS mode, fix valid)
RTK (Real Time Kinetic.
Satellite system used in RTK
GGA mode with fixed integers)
Switching by Mode indicator in the
F-RTK (Float RTK. Satellite
POS sentence.
system used in TRK mode with
floating integers)
GGA> RMC > GLL GPS
GGA> RMC >GLL DGPS
Manual DR
3-4
3.2 Box Menu
3.2 Box Menu

3.2.1 Overview
Table 3.2.1 Overview of Box menu
Pop-up
Box Cyclic change Description
Menu
The range of 4, 8, 16 and 32 NM are not
RANGE UP/DOWN of RANGE
available on the IMO and A type radar.
DISPLAY DISPLAY>DISPLAY+PLOTTER PLOTTER mode is not available on the
MODE > PLOTTER IMO and A type radar.
HEAD UP RM >
HEAD UP TB RM>
PRESENTATION
COURSE UP RM>
MODE
NORTH UP RM>
NOTRH UP TM)
Note:
ANT1>ANT2>ANT3>
ANT [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 2, 3 YES
ANT4>SUB
[ANT] box menu -> 8
PULSE PULSE NARROW to
LENGTH PULSE WIDE
The following items can set in each
Picture menu.
- INT REJECT
- ECHO STRATCH
PICTURE1> PICTURE2> - ECHO AVERAGE
PICTURE3>PICTURE4> - NOISE REJ
PICTURE NEAR>FAR>NEAR BUOY> - AUTO STC YES
FAR BUOY>ROUGH SEA> - AUTO RAIN
SHIP>HARBER>COAST - VIDEO CONTRAST
- SEA CONDITION
- ANT HEIGHT
- STC RANGE
- PULS WIDE
Note:
MARK MARK, WPT YES
Specify in the [MARK] box menu
IL1 is displayed in full lines and IL2 in
dotted lines. The Line setting of range
and bearing is performed with the EBL
IL (Index Line) IL1> IL2
and VRM or wheel.
Note:
[Menu] -> 2 -> 4, 5, 6
You can make all the brilliance settings
BRILL1> BRILL2> BRILL3> of the pop-up menus in this box. Four
BRILL YES
BRILL4> types of settings are available in any
desired combination.
BRILL BAR
Cont’d
3-5
3.2 Box Menu
When this turned on, the EBL bearing is

displayed.
Note:
In the setting [Menu] -> 2 -> 8, 9, the
EBL 1, 2 EBL ON/OFF
relative and true bearing can be toggled
in the HD-UP and Cursor gyro modes.
The other presentation modes are true
bearing.
Count-down starts from the time set by
[Menu] -> 3 -> 4, and an alarm sounds
when “0” is reached. Place the cursor on
WATCH “Count-down” the [WATCH] box and click the left
button, and then the counting is reset.
Clicking the [ALARM ACK] box reset
the counting is also by.
Temporarily erases the heading line and
HL OFF HL OFF
marks while pressed.
Toggling between STBY and TX, and
TX/STBY TX>STBY
ending the ARPA test.
GAIN Adjusts the sensitivity of radar receiver.
Allows the adjustment of sea clutter in
SEA AUTO>MANUAL
the MANUAL mode, and it is saved.
RAIN Allows the adjustment of the rain clutter.
Allows the adjustment of tuning in the
MANUAL mode. A position of ▲
mark with respect to bar length shows
TUNE AUTO>MANUAL the tuned voltage value from 5 to 25 V
and the display on bar shows tuning
level.
Note:
[Menu] -> 1 -> 3
When the SET and DRIFT data is turned
off, the second cursor data is displayed.
R/NM > L/L > NM/NM On the IMO and A type radars, only one
CURSOR Data
(Range>L/L>X-Y-axis) cursor data is available.
When selecting R/NM, TTG is displayed
in the first cursor.
The SET/DRIFT is displayed when
SET/DRIFT setting in the [SPD] box
menu is turned ON.
SET：000.0 to 359.9 deg. When this is turned off, the second
SET/ DRIFT
DRIFT:00.0 to 19.9 kt cursor data is displayed except on the
IMO and A type radars.
Note:
[SPD] box menu -> 3
Cont’d
3-6
3.2 Box Menu
When STATIC or DYNAMIC mode is

selected in the [Menu] -> 4 -> 4 -> 2,
[TRIAL] box is displayed.
When toggling “TRIAL OFF” to “SET”
DYNAMIIC
in the [TRIAL] box, [CSE] and [SPD]
- OFF>SET>START
TRIAL boxes are displayed.
STATIC
In TRIAL MANEUVER, the movement
- OFF>WORK
of ARPA targets and the own ship is
simulated. During the execution, the “T”
mark is displayed below the display
area.
CSE (TRIAL) 000.0 to 359.9 deg. Ture
SPD (TRIAL) 00.0 to 99.9 kt
1 [ECHO], 2 [MARK],
MENU To access the MAIN menu. YES
3 [ALARM] --- >>
Displays the list of ARPA and AIS target
data. By clicking the lift button on a
target in the left, the target is selected.
TARGET LIST YES
Note:
The sort order is specified on the
[TARGET LIST] box menu.
Sets the Guard Zoon; GZ of the ARPA
and AIS. This is also for the setting of an
automatic acquisition area of the ARPA.
For setting the GZ, turn the ARPA on.
- GZ 1:
Sets the GZ range between 3 NM
GZ 1, 2 OFF>WORK>SLEEP and 4 NM.
- GZ 2:
A GZ or polygon having 10 points
or less that can be set to anywhere.
Note:
When GZ1 is available, GZ2 can set.
[Menu] -> 4 -> 2, 3
Sets the Alarm Zoon that is audible and
visual alarms when ships, landmasses,
etc. are inward or outward in a set area.
- ALARM 1:
IMO type radar, sets an Guard alarm a
range between 3 and 6 NM.
Expect to the IMO type radar, sets as
ALARM 1, 2 OFF>WORK>ACK
no limit.
- ALARM 2:
Set anywhere.
Note:
When Guard alarm-1 is available,
Guard alarm-2 can set.
[Menu] -> 3 -> 2, 3, 5, and 6 to 9
Cont’d
3-7
3.2 Box Menu
OFF>00:15>0030>01:00> -- >
TRAIL MODE Can be set for each 30 seconds. YES
30:00>CONT
When this function is turned on, the
VRM 1, 2 VRM ON/OFF
VRM is displayed.
While CU is active, CU is reset by
clicking the lift button. While TM is
CU/TM RESET
active, TM is reset by clicking the lift
button.
Alarm acknowledge; silence the audible
ALARM ACK
alarm
HDG [HDG] box menu is displayed. YES
SPD [SPD] box menu is displayed YES
OS POSN [OS POSN] box menu is displayed YES
On the bases of the radar ANT position
or conning position; changes the origin
RFE POINT ANT POSN>CONN POSN point of range ring and cursor data.
Note:
Position entered in the [Menu] -> 0 -> 5.
Note:
ARPA OFF/ON [ARPA] Menu,
ARPA YES
(ON：MANU, AUTO MANU) [Menu] -> 4, [Menu] -> 0 -> 6
[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 4
Turns on and off AIS target display.
When [Menu] -> 4 -> 8: AIS
FUNCTION setting is turned off, this
AIS AIS DISPLAY ON/OFF YES
box display is erased.
Note:
[Menu] -> 4 -> 6, 7, 8, 9
Incoming AIS message, an envelope
mark is displayed when “3. AUTO DISP
AIS MSG Arrival
MSG” setting in the [AIS] box menu is
turned on.
VECTOR TRUE>
VECTOR REL
Sets the vector mode and vector time of
VECTOR 30 SEC>1 MIN>2 MIN>
the ARPA and AIS.
3 MIN>6 MIN>12 MIN>
15 MIN>30 MIN
Sets the interval of past position plotting
time of the ARPA and AIS target.
OFF>30 SEC>1 MIN>2 MIN>
PAST POSN Note:
3 MIN>6 MIN>
[Menu] -> 4 -> 5-> 4, 5
[Menu] -> 4 -> 6-> 5, 6
When clicking [CPT LIMT] box icon,
CPA LIMIT CPA ON/OFF
[CPA] and [TCPA] boxes are added.
0.5 NM> ---- > 20 NM
Note:
CPA (0.5 – 10 NM/0.5 NM,
[Menu] -> 3 -> 6 to 9
10 – 20 NM/1 NM step)
1MIN> --- > 60 MIN Note:
TCPA LIMIT
(1 min step) [Menu] -> 3 -> 6 to 9
The guidance box corresponds to the
Guidance [ xxx / xxx ]
right and lift click operation.
3-8
3.2 Box Menu
3.2.2 Content
[HDG]
Table 3.2.2 HDG Box Menu
Menu Submenu Description

Allows the selection of the heading data.
- AD-10: AD format (25 msec)
- SERIAL: HDT (IEC61162-2: 38.4 kbps)
1 HDG SOURCE AD-10/SERIAL
Without the HDG data, the radar operation is
restricted only to the Head-up mode and the ARPA
and AIS functions do not work.
Sets the “Heading” when GC-10 is incorporated in
2 GC-10 SETTING 000.0° the RPU-013 unit. Set “1. HDG SOURCE” listed
above to “AD-10.”
[OS POSN]
[OS POSN MENU]
1 NAV AID
GPS1/GPS2/
DEAD RECKONING*/
LAN
2 MANUAL L/L
00 ° 00.00 N
000 ° 00.00 W
3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
OFF/ON
* Not available on IMO radar.
Table3.2.3 OS POSN Box Menu

Select the connected ports of NAV data input;
-GPS 1:NAV port（J606）
-GPS 2:SPEED LOG (J607), HEADING SENSOR
GPS1/GSP2/
(J605), TRACK CONTROL (J620), LOG (J607)
1 NAV AID DEAD RECKONING/
-LAN: the NMEA data entered via the NETWORK.
LAN
-DEAD RECKONING:
When [Menu] -> 4 to 8: AIS FUNCTION is turned on,
“DEAD RECKONING” is disabled as for IMO type.
00°00.000 N When “DEAD RECKONING” is selected in “1 NAV
2 MANUAL L/L
000°00.000 E AID” listed above, the own ship position is entered.
3 SIO DATA Sets whether to output the NAV data in use to the LAN
OFF/ON
LAN OUTPUT port or not.
3-9
3.2 Box Menu
[SPEED]
[SPEED MENU]
1 SHIP SPEED
LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/
GPS/MANUAL*/REF*
2 MANUAL SPEED
0.0kt
3 SET DRIFT
OFF/ON*
* Not available on IMO radar.
Table 3.2.4 SPEED Box Menu

Allows the selection of ship speed data.
The sentences are;
LOG (WT): VBW>VHW, LOG (BT): VBW
GPS: VTG>RMC
Note:
The speed of the own ship is calculated with
LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/GPS/ reference to static targets like a buoy. Up to three
1 SHIP SPEED
MANUAL/REF static targets (R1-R3) can be specified, and
averaged value is displayed as XX BT/REF in the
[SPD] box menu. The target is acquired in one
minute after it is specified. The target is displayed
as “R1,” for instance.
In the IMO radar, the manual speed and reference
speed are not available.
When “MANUAL” is selected in “1 SHIP SPEED”
2 MANUAL SPEED 0.0 kt
listed above, the ship speed is entered.
“SET DRIFT” should be entered in setting other
than BT. In the IMO radar, when [Menu] -> 4 -> 8:
AIS FUNCTION is set to ON, “SET DRIFT” is kept
3 SET DRIFT OFF/ON
OFF. Expect for the IMO type radar, when this
menu box is turned off, it changes to the 2nd cursor
data box.
[TGT LIST]
Table 3.2.5 TGT LIST Box Menu

CPA/TCPA/BCR/BCT/
RANGE/SPEED Sets the order for sorting ARPA and AIS targets in
1 SORT BY
(CPA/TCPA/BCR/BCT/ the target list.
RANGE/SPEED)
3-10
3.2 Box Menu
[CURSOR]
[CURSOR MENU]
2
TARGET DATA & ACQ/
TARGET CANCEL/
ARP TGT DATA & ACQ/
TARGET TRACK ON/*
TARGET TRACK OFF/*
REF MARK/
EBL OFFSET
OFFCENTER/
ZOOM/
MARK DELETE/
CHART ALIGN
8
*Not available on IMO radar.
Table 3.2.6 CURSOR Menu

TARGET DATA & ACQ/
TARGET CANCEL/
ARP TGT DATA & ACQ/
TARGET TRACK ON/
Place the cursor in the radar display area and click
TARGET TRACK OFF/
2 the right button, and then the menu as shown in the
REF MARK/
data fields will be displayed.
EBL OFFSET/
OFF CENTER/ZOOM/
MARK DELETE/
CHART ALIGN
3-11
3.2 Box Menu
[ARP]
[ARP TARGET MENU]
1 ARP SELECT
MANUAL 100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
2 ALL CANCEL
NO/YES
3 REF TARGET VECTOR
OFF/ON
Table 3.2.7 ARP Box Menu

The FAR-2xx7 series can acquire a maximum of
100 targets, the number of auto/manual acquire
targets are determined by the ARP SELECT
MANUAL 100/
1 ARP SELECT setting.
AUTO 25/50/75/100
For instance, AUTO-25 means 25 targets in the
automatic acquire and 75 targets in the manual
acquire.
2 ALL CANCEL NO/YES Erases all ARPA targets.
When the setting is made as [SPD] box menu ->
3 REF TARGET 1.SHIP SPEED -> REF, and when REF TARGET is
OFF/ON
VECTOR selected and acquired, this menu is used for turning
on and off the vector of the target. (Relative)
3-12
3.2 Box Menu
[AIS]
[AIS TARGET MENU] [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS 1 BACK

NO/YES 2 ADDRESS TYPE
ADDRESSED/BROADCAST
2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS 3 MESSAGE TYPE
NO/YES SAFETY/BINARY
3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE 4 MMSI NO. 000000000
OFF/ON 5 CHANNEL
4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES] A/B/A or B/A and B
5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE] 6 OPEN FILE 1
6 [VOYAGE DATA] 7 SAVE FILE 1
7 [STATIC DATA] 8 EDIT
8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES] 9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
[VOYAGE DATA]
1 BACK
2 NAVIGATION STATUS
00
UNDER WAY
USING ENGINE
3 ETA
00/000/0000 00:00
4 DESTINATION
5 DRAUGHT
00m
6 CREW
0000
[STATIC DATA]
1 BACK
TYPE OF SHIP
000
ALL SHIP OF THIS TYPE
CALL SIGN
NAME
EXT GPS ANT POSN
A: 000m B: 000m
C: 00m D: 00m
Table 3.2.8 AIS Box

Menu

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS NO/YES Sets all AIS targets to the sleeping mode.
2 ACTIVE ALL TRGTS NO/YES Sets all AIS targets to the active mode.
When “AUTO DISP MESSAGE” is set to on, an
3 AUTO DISP envelope mark is displayed in the [AIS] box.
OFF/ON
MESSAGE When radar received AIS message (MSG6, 8, 12
and 14) from AIS, shown an envelope mark.
Displays messages received in the AIS. The types of
messages displayed are MSG6, 8, 12 and 14, and the
4 [RECEIVED last five messages can be saved. Messages received
MESSAGE] in the AIS are sent to the radar by the AI VDM
sentence. The ZDA sentence is used for the data and
time of the received message.
Cont’d
3-13
3.2 Box Menu
AIS messages created here are set to the AIS with

the AI ABM, the BBM sentence and then
1 BACK
transmitted from the AIS.
2 ADDRESSED TYPE
- MSG 12: ADDRESSED SAFETY Related MSG.
3 MESSAGE TYPE
- MSG 6: BINARY ADDRESSED MSG.
4 MMSI NO
5 [TRANSMIT - MSG 14: SAFETY Related BROADCAST MSG.
5 CHANNEL
MESSAGE] - MSG 8: BINARY BROADCAST MSG.
6 OPEN FILE
7 SAVE FILE
6 OPEN FILE: Opens saved MSG.
8 EDIT
7 SAVE FILE: Saves edited MSG.
9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
Number of files: 10
The set voyage information listed in the data field.

1 BACK
- Setting data to the AIS:
2 NAVIGATION STATUS
The AIS is set “Voyage Data” with the AI SSD
3 ETA
6 [VOYAGE DATA] and the VSD.
4 DESTINATION
- Setting data to the FAR:
5 DRAUGHT
This information is displayed with the AI VDO
6 CREW
except for the CREW.
1 BACK
TYPE OF SHIP/ The set static information listed in the data field.
7 [STATIC DATA]
CALL SIGN/NAME/ The AIS set “Static Data” with the AI VDO.
EXT GPS POST
Displays the contents of the AI ALM sentence
outputted from the AIS. Then “AIS ALARM” is
8 [AIS ALM MESSAGE]
displayed in the Alert box, you can check the details
in here.
3-14
3.2 Box Menu
[PICTURE]
Optimum picture setting can be made individually according to the sea conditions, for
instance, for seeing a far target or the near target. See the next page for the default setting.
Setting values are not dependant on the type of IMO, A, B C and W.
[PICTURE MENU]
1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3 [PULSE MENU]
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3 1 BACK
2 0.5NM
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON S1/S2
3 0.75NM
5 AUTO STC
S1/S2/M1
OFF/ON
4 1.5NM
6 AUTO RAIN
S1/S2/M1
OFF/1/2/3/4
5 3NM
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
S2/M1/M2/M3
1/2/3/4/
6 6NM
A/B/C
M1/M2/M3/L
8 [PULSE]
7 12 -24NM
9 [CONDITION]
M2/M3/L
0 DEFAULT (ENTER X 3)
[CONDITION MENU]
1 BACK
2 SEA CONDITION
1/2/3/4/5
3 ANT HEIGHT
5/7.5/10/15/20/
25/30/ 35/40/45/
more 50 m
4 STC RANGE
+00
Table 3.2.9 PICTURE Box Menu

Rejects radar interfering from other ships
1 INT REJECT OFF/1/2/3
** OFF -> 1 -> 2-> 3: Strong **
The number of dots of echo display is increased to
stretch echoes.
- ES1: Enlarged in the bearing direction for long
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3 range detection.
- ES2: Enlarged in the range direction.
- ES3: Enlarged in the bearing direction and range
direction.
EAV1 and 2 are used when there are heavy sea
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3 clutters. EAV3 is used for long-range to enhance
weak echoes.
Turns on and off the rejection of noise such as white
4 NOISE REJ OFF/ON
noise. Echoes are integrated to reduce noises.
One scan is divided into 32 sectors and the STC
curve is automatically generated for each section.
5 AUTO STC OFF/ON
Use manual A/C SEA control to adjust the STC
level.
Allows setting for the FTC function.
Echoes are differentiated. Use manual Auto Rain
6 AUTO RAIN OFF/1/2/3/4
control more than 20 to as well.
** OFF -> 1 -> 2-> 3 -> 4: Strong **
Cont’d
3-15
3.2 Box Menu
Adjusts the contrast of echoes.

Sets the gradient of the video level projected as
1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST echo. When this is set to 4 (Dynamic range; Small)
A/B/C
and Curve C, weaker echoes can be clearly
presented.
1 BACK 2 0.5NM
3 0.75NM 4 1.5NM
8 [PULSE] Sets the pulse length of each range.
5 3NM 6 6NM
7 12-24NM
1 BACK
STC operation optimum according to the conditions
2 SEA CONDITION
9 [CONDITION] can be achieved by changing SEA CONDITION,
3 ANT HEIGHT
ANT HEIGHT and STC RANGE.
4 STC RANGE
To return the setting back to the default, double click
0 DEFAULT the left button or press the [ENTER] key three
times.
Table3.2.10 “PICTURE” default setting
INT ECHO ECHO NOISE AUTO AUTO VIDEO

REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST
PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2/B
PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF 3/B
PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 2/B
PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 2/A
NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 3/B
FAR 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF 3/C
NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF 3/B
FAR BUOY 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF 3/C
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 2/A
SHIP 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 3/C
HARBOR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 3/B
COST 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 3/B
Pulse Condition
0.5 0.75 1.5 3 6 12-24 Sea STC
NM NM NM NM NM NM Condition Range
PICTURE 1 S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 2 +0
PICTURE 2 S1 S1 M1 M2 M3 L 2 +0
NEAR S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 2 +0
FAR S1 S1 M1 M3 L L 3 +0
NEAR BUOY S1 S1 M1 M2 L L 2 +0
FAR BUOY S1 S1 M1 M3 L L 2 +0
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 4 +0
SHIP S1 S1 M1 M2 M3 L 2 +0
HARBOR S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L 2 +0
COST S1 S1 M1 M2 M3 L 2 +0
3-16
3.2 Box Menu
[BRILL]
[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)] [BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]
1 ECHO COLOR** 1 BACK

YEL/GRN/ 2 BRG CURSOR
WHT/COLOR*1 3 EBL **: Settings for brilliance sets BRILL2-BRILL4
2 BKGD COLOR** 4 VRM BRILL2: ECHO COLOR: YEL
BLK-GRN/ 5 INDEX LINE BKGD COLOR: BLK-RED
BLK-RED/ 6 ARP SYMBOL BRILL3: ECHO COLOR: YEL
BLU-CIR/ 7 AIS SYMBOL
BKGD COLOR: BLU-CIR
BLU/BRT-BLU 8 L/L GRID
3 PANEL DIMMER 9 MARK BRILL4: ECHO COLOR: YEL
4 CHARACTER 0 CHART*2 BKGD COLOR: BLU
5 CURSOR
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL
8 HL
9 RING *1: Not available on IMO and A type radar.
0 NEXT *2: Not available on IMO radar.
Table3.2.11 BRILL Box Menu

BRILL 1/2
Allows the setting of echo color.
1 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/WHT/COLOR The “COLOR” setting is not available on IMO and
A type radars.
BLK-GRN/BLK-RED/BLU-C
2 BKGD COLOR Allows the setting of background color.
IR/BLU/BRT-BLU
3 PANEL DIMMER
4 CHARACTER
5 CURSOR
Adjusts the respective brilliance
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL
8 HL
9 RING
0 NEXT
BRILL 2/2
1 BACK
2 BRG CURSOR
3 EBL
4 VRM
5 INDEX LINE Adjusts the respective brilliance
6 ARP SYMBOL The “0. CHART” is not available on the IMO-type
7 AIS SYMBOL radars.
8 L/L GRID
9 MARK
0 CHART
3-17
3.2 Box Menu
[TRAIL]
[TRAIL MENU]
1 TRAIL MODE
REL/TRUE
2 TRAIL GRAD
SINGLE/MULTI
3 NARROW TRAIL*
OFF/ON
4 TRAIL LEVEL
1/2/3/4
5 TRAIL RESTART
OFF/ON
6 TRAIL COPY
OFF/ON
7 OS TRAIL
OFF/ON
* Not available on IMO and A type radar.
Table 3.2.12 TRAIL Box Menu

Allows the setting of the TRAIL MODE. For the
1 TRAIL MODE REL/TRUE
TRUE mode, L/L and Gyro data are required.
Sets whether to present the trail display in monotone
2 TRAIL GRAD SINGLE/MULTI
or gradual shading.
This function is not available on IMO and A-type
3 NARROW TRAIL OFF/ON
radars.
Allows the setting of the echo level for trails.
4 TRAIL LEVEL 1/2/3/4
** OFF -> 1 -> 2-> 3 -> 4: echo level high **
You may clear all target trails and restart the trail
process. Target trails are cleared, and trail process
5 TRAIL RESTART OFF/ON
restarts from time count zero at the current target
trail plot interval.
This is a function to allow copying the trail echo
when the range is changed. The effective range is
6 TRAIL COPY OFF/ON three times or one third of the previous range. If the
trail is set out of this effective range, the trail is
restarted.
7 OS TRAIL OFF/ON Turns on and off the own ship trail.
.
3-18
3.2 Box Menu
[MARK]
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No.)/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POS
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00 00.000 N
000 00.000 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK
0/20000
OWN TRACK
0/20000
TGT TRACK*
0/15000
* Not available on IMO and A type radar.
Table 3.2.13 MARK Box Menu

Set the method for displaying the origin mark.
- GND: The entered mark position is geographically
fixed.
- SEA: The entered mark position is displayed in
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND/SEA correlation with the own ship.
The own ship position and gyro data are required.
The mark number and symbol mark are specified in
“2 MARK KIND” listed below.
Allows the selection of ORIGIN MARK, MAP
MARK, WPT, OWN SHIP SHAPE to be entered.
To select a mark kind, place the cursor on a desired
ORIGIN MARK (No) [MARK] box menu and select it with the wheel.
ORIGIN MARK (SYM)
MAP MARK In the OWN SHIP SHAPE, you can modify the
WP1-50 default ship mark by specifying points (up to 10
2 MARK KIND
WP51-100 points) in the [MARK] box menu.
WP101-150 The ship mark display is toggled between ON and
WP151-198 OFF in [Menu] -> 2 -> 2.
OWN SHIP SHAPE
Entered marks can be deleted by selecting MARK
DELETE in [CURSOR] menu, placing the cursor on
the mark, and clicking click the left button.
Method of entering the mark position such as WPT
8 MARK POS COUSPR/OS/L/L
and MAP MARK specified in “2 MARK KIND.”
9 MAP DISPLAY OFF/ON Turns on and off the mark entered in MAP MARK.
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYN/ Not available on IMO and A type radars. Specifies
0 MAP MARK COLOR
MAG/WHT the color of MAP MARK and ORIGIN MARK.
3-19
3.2 Box Menu
[ANT INFORMATION]
[ANT INFORMATION]
ANT NO 1
BAND : X-BAND
MODEL: 25 UP
POS : FORE
ANT NO 2
BAND : X-BAND
MODEL: 12
POS : MAIN TOP
ANT NO 3
BAND :
MODEL :
POS :
ANT NO 4
BAND :
MODEL :
POS :
OWN RADAR NO. 1
8 SUB MONITOR*
OFF/ON
9 INTER SW PRIORITY
OFF/ON
*Not available on IMO and A type radar.
Table 3.2.14 ANT INFORMATION Box Menu

BAND Displays the information of the radars; band, output
ANT NO 1 MODEL and antenna position when radars are connected via
POS a network.
ANT NO 2
ANT NO 3 Ditto Ditto
ANT NO 4
Not available on IMO and A type radars.
When this menu is set to ON, “SUB” is added in the
8 SUB MONITOR OFF/ON [ANT X] box menu.
When you select “SUB,” you can monitor radar
signals from [J616]: Master.
Allows the setting of operation priority of radars
9 INTER SW PRIORITY OFF/ON
connected via LAN.
3-20
3.3 Main Menu Tree
3.3 Main Menu Tree

3.3.1 Overview
Table 3.3.1 Overview of Main menu tree
MAIN menu Submenu Description

1 BACK
In certain situations, echoes from great distance targets
may appear as false echoes (second-trace echoes) on the
2 2ND ECHO REJ screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one
TX interval later, or after the next radar pulse has been
transmitted.
TUNE INITIALIZE is executed by respective
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
pulse-lengths, and saves tuned value.
Retrieve from the conditions set in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 0:
PM GAIN ADJ and checks the degradation of radar TX
and receiving gain. After the checking is complete, change
the range or turn this function off.
Automatic setting value:
4 PM 24 NM/Long pulse/STC: Manual =0/FTC: 0/
AUTO FTC: OFF/ECHO STRETCH: OFF/
ECHO AVERAGE: OFF/TUNE: AUTO/
1 ECHO BRIND SECTOR: OFF/ IR: 2
GAIN: PM GAIN ADJ value
GAIN VR Enabled/FTC VR Disabled/STC VR Disabled
Allows an optimum setting for viewing the SART signals.
After the checking is complete, change the range or turn
this function off.
Automatic setting value:
5 SART
12 NM/Long pulse/PM OFF/ECHO STRETCH: OFF/
ECHO AVERAGE: OFF/AUTO FTC OFF/
TUNE: AUTO/BRIND SECTOR: OFF/IR: OFF
GAIN VR Enabled/FTC VR Disabled/STC VR Disabled
The wiper feature automatically changes intensity
brilliance of weak signals to facilitate picture observation,
6 WIPER
and its affect depends on the wiper setting used and
whether each averaging is turned on or off.
Allows the setting display area for the radar echo, e.g.
7 ECHO AREA “CIRCLE, WIDE and ALL”.
Not available on IMO and A type radars.
3-21
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
Sets whether to display the own ship mark or not. The own
ship mark corresponds to the dimensions of the own ship.
The size of the own ship mark is set in [Menu] -> 0 -> 5 ->
2: LENGTH/WIDE and “REF POINT” is calculated from
the values set in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 5: RADAR POS and
2 OWN SHIP MARK [Menu] -> 0 -> 5 -> 6: CONNING POS.
If the own ship mark gets smaller than 6 mm on the screen,
it will be represented with a small dot.
Note:
The own ship mark can be changed by specifying the
OWN SHIP MARK in [MARK] box menu -> 2
Sets whether to turn on or off the stern mark. The stern
3 STERN MARK
mark appears opposite to the heading line in a dot line.
Sets whether to display the bearing of the parallel index
line by the true bearing (T) or relative bearings (R.)
Parallel index line:
4 INDEX LINE BEARING
Two index lines (IL) are available. To adjust the index
line interval and bearing, place the cursor on IR and
make adjustments by EBL and VRM.
2 [MARK] Specifies the number of index lines. When one (1) is
5 INDEX LINE selected, “6.INDEX LINE MODE” as listed below is not
displayed.
When “VERTICAL” is selected, you can draw a line
6 INDEX LINE MODE perpendicular to the index line. “HORIZONTLA” is used
to erase a vertical line.
This menu box is displayed when “SERAL, LAN” is set on
[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5:INS.
7 [INS MARK]
This setting turns on or off the USER CHART, MARK,
LINE, ROUTE and NOTE BOOK from the INS.
This menu box is displayed when [Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5:
INS is set to “OFF.”
7 [BARGE MARK]
Allows the setting of the BARGE MARK and turning on
and off of the display.
8 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT Allows the setting of EBL offset.
9 EBL CURSOR BEARING This is a menu for IMO and A type radars.
This menu is for B and C type radars.
9 [EBL VRM, CURSOR SET] The unit of the VRM and the cursor range can be selected
from NM, SM, km and kyd.
0 RING Sets whether to display the range ring or not.
3-22
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
Turns on and off an alarm to be given when the target
2 GURD ALARM MODE
inward or outward the alarm range set in ALARM 1 and 2.
Adjusts the target echo level. It is dependent on the
adjustment of GAIN, STC and FTC. The setting “1”, the
3 GURD ALARM LEVEL
lowest echo detection level, allows detecting very weak
echoes.
This is a function to sound an alarm when the specified
time has elapsed. When you click the left button on the
4 WATCH ALARM [WATCH] box, the counting is reset. The counting is also
reset when you click [ALARM ACK] box or press
3 [ALARM] [ALARM ACK] key.
Adjusts the sound level of alarms outputted from the
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL Control unit. Alarms are also outputted from the remote
Control unit.
6 [ALARM OUT1] Outputs alarm signals to external equipment when
selected alarms such as Guard Zoon ALARM,
7 [ALARM OUT2]
SYSTEM ERROR and/or etc. Contact signals are
8 [ALARM OUT3]
outputted at the EXT ALM terminals, ALM-1, 2, 3, 4 on
9 [ALARM OUT4] the TB board. Normal Open and Close can also be set.
See Chapter 4 for details.
0 AUDIO ALARM Allows ON/OFF setting of the alarm sound
1 BACK
Sets whether to fix the Guard Zone by the true bearing (T)
2 GURD ZONE STAB
or relative bearing (R.)
Guard Zone No.1 allows the setting of a Guard Zone and
Guard Zone No.2 the setting of a polygon. The setting of
3 GURD POLYGON
Guard Zone No.2 is enabled only when Guard Zone No.1
has been set.
Allows the setting of Trial Maneuver to avoid collision.
Specify the DYNAMIC or STATIC mode and enter the
trial speed rate and trial turn rate corresponding to two ship
speeds. When the [TRIAL] box is active, COG and SOG
entry boxes are displayed. Enter appropriate values in
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
respective boxes. Simulation is performed on the basis of
entered data, trial speed rate and trial turn rate. “T” is
displayed during simulation and cleared in 3 minutes. The
entered data is also used for the calculation in [Menu] -> 8
4 [ARP/AIS]
-> 0 -> 3:TURNING LINE.
Allows the setting of symbol color, size, past position color
5 [ARPA SYMBOL]
and past position points of the ARPA.
Allows the setting of symbol color, size, past position
6 [AIS SYMBOL] color, past position points and ROT TAG LIMIT of the
AIS.
If two target symbols of AIS and ARPA are displayed, the
targets are not clearly viewed. To avoid this, AIS targets
7 [FUSION] alone are presented if AIS and ARPA targets meet
conditions set in this menu in terms of the range, bearing
etc.
Turns on and off the AIS functions. If this is set to OFF, the
8 AIS FUNCTION
AIS display in the [AIS] box is turned off.
Setting the condition of lost alarm of AIS
9 AIS LOST ALARM The condition is selected from Active target, All target and
Range. In addition, ALM-1 to 4 is not outputted.
3-23
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
Specifies the chart color
2 CHART COLOR
A chart is drawn in PLOTER and RADAR + PLOTER.
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
4 OWN TRACK COLOR Sets the track interval and track color of the own ship and
5 TRG TRACK INTERVAL other ship.
6 TRG TRACK COLOR
Sets whether to add the offset value after chart offset to the
5 PLOTTER L/L value of the cursor (+) or not. Offset the L/L position
on the radar map and radar screen.
7 CURSOL L/L ALIGN
During the offset, “ALIGN” is displayed if the cursor icon
is set to L/L. For offset, execute CHART ALIGN in the
[Cursor] menu.
Erases the own track, target track, mark, WPT and NAV
8 [DATA ERASE]
line.
Turns on and off the L/L line, past position, mark land
9 [DISPLAY] density, place name and buoy displayed on the plotter
screen.
[CARD1/2]
1 BACK
Selects the RAM card slot of CU-200.
2 DRIVE SELECT “A” is for the left slot and “B” for the right slot. When the
2nd CU-200 is added, the drives “C” and “D” are added.
Reads data from the RAM card. During reading the data, a
3 [READ CARD] message “WORKING IN PROGRESS” is displayed in
Alert box in the lower right screen.
4 [WR MARK] Each selected data is written on the RAM card.
6 CARD 5 [WR NAV LINE WPT] Mxxxxxxx: WR MARK
6 [WR OWN TRACK] Wxxxxxxx: WR NAV LINE WPT
7 [WR TARGET TRACK] Txxxxxxx: WR OWN TRACK
8 [WR SETTING DATA] Axxxxxxx: WR TARGET TRACK
Sxxxxxxx: WR SETTING DATA
Ixxxxxxx: WR INSTALLATION DATA
9 [WR INSTALLATION DATA] Note:
Writing operation can be checked by the message “WR
CARD DATA” in the Alert box in the lower right screen.
0 NEXT)
Cont’d
3-24
3.3 Main Menu Tree
[CARD2/2]
1 BACK
6 CARD 2 [FILE DELETE] Deletes a selected file stored on the RAM card.
3 [CARD INITIALIZE] Initializes the RAM card.
1 BACK
2 DEPT Allows displaying the following data in the data box. To
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE display them, turn on the setting in [Menu] -> 9 -> 2 -> 3:
4 DEPTH MARK NAV DATA.
5 CURRENT
6 WIND - DEPTH: DPT>DBT>DBS
7 TEMP - CURRENT: VDR
7 NAV DATA 8 DATE-TIME - WIND: MWV>VWT>VWR
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ - TEMP: MTW
- DATE & TIME: ZDA
- WPT DATA: Selects whether to display the WPT in
the relative bearing or true bearing.
0 WPT DATA
Note:
To display the NAV data, turn on the setting in [Menu] ->
9 -> 2 -> 3:NAV DATA.
[NAV LINE WPT 1/2]
1 BACK
Displays the navigation line received from external
2 NAV LINE DATA
equipment or from registered by the radar.
3 NAV LINE SELECT Selects the Navigation line to be displayed.
4 SKIP NEXT WPT Skips the next waypoint in the navigation waypoints.
5 NAV LINE WIDE Allows the setting of the navigation line width.
8 NAV LINE Allows registering waypoint up to 200 points.
WPT 6 [WPT SET] For registering waypoints, the cursor (+) or L/L are used.
A registered waypoint is also deleted in this box.
7 [WPT LIST] Displays the list of registered waypoints.
Allows the setting of the navigation line based on the
registered waypoints.
8 [NAV LINE SET]
Up to 30 navigation lines can be registered. A registered
navigation line is also deleted in this box.
9 [NAV LINE LIST] Displays the list of registered navigation lines.
Cont’d
3-25
3.3 Main Menu Tree
0 NEXT
[NAV LINE WPT 2/2]
1 BACK
Allows the setting of arrival ranges (presented in a circle)
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM of the set waypoints and ON/OFF setting of the alarm.
8 NAV LINE Displays the turning line. The ship data like the trial turn
WPT 3 TURNING LINE rate is registered in [Menu] -> 4 -> 4:TRIAL
MANEUVER.
Displays the registered waypoint number of the mark
4 DISP WPT NO.
displayed.
Displays the registered waypoint name of the mark
5 DISP WPT NAME
displayed.
1 BACK
Sets the kind of data to be displayed in the data box, zoom
OFF/ON (x2, x3) and number of ARPA and AIS.
Related NAV data is displayed by the setting in [Menu] ->
2 [DATA BOX] 7: NAV DATA.
For zooming, place the cursor in the display area, click the
right button, select ZOOM in the [Cursor] menu, place the
cursor at a spot to be zoomed and click the left button.
3 [F1] The specified operation setting can be registered to the [F1]
4 [F2] to [F4] keys and retrieve by pressing the registered key.
5 [F3] For instance, the setting can be as follows;
F1: INT REJECT ON, 2
6 [F4] to
F4: Heading line OFF
Allows specifying the Wheel-Direction and Key-Beep.
And
4 REMOTE KEY:
9 CUSTOMIZE/ - F*-KEY: Normal operation for functions of the
TEST remote control unit
- DISPLAY SELECT: When connected with the
network, [F1] to [F4] keys on the Remote Control
unit are assigned as [ANT X] toggling keys.
5 POP UP GUIDANCE:
When the cursor is placed on a box icon, the trackball
stops moving and a pop-up message shows the
7 [OPERATION]
contents of the icon.
6 OWN SHIP VECTOR:
Allows selecting the display of the own ship vector
(Heading or Course)
7 STERN UP:
A picture is rotated by 180 degrees so as to face the
stern upward on the screen.
8 SHATTLE FERRY: see the next page
The HDG value is added by 180 degrees so as to face
the stern upward on the screen, and the picture is also
turned by 180 degrees.
Cont’d
3-26
3.3 Main Menu Tree
SELF TEST:
Displays the program versions, key test and the serial
input data.
9 CUSTOMIZE/ ARPA TEST:
8 [TEST]
TEST Allow checking ARPA functions with echoes created by
CPU. During the execution, “XX” is displayed in the
display. To terminate, set it to ST-BY. If ARPA test is
executed, the ARPA track is cancelled.
Shuttle Ferry
A shuttle Ferry mode is for the ship that can be steered from the two locations, forward and
reverse. The orientation of radar is presentation rotated at 180 degrees by switching
(contact closure signal) from external equipment via RS-232C port on the TB board of
RPU-013 as shown below.
Gyro: 000 deg. Gyro: 180 deg. Gyro: 000 deg.
Normal Reverse Stern up
When operations switched, “REVERSE” is displayed in red characters on the right of

“PRESENTATION MODE” box icon.
RPU-013
J601:RS-232C
Normal/Reverse SW
1. NC
Terminal p.c.b 2. RXD
3. TXD
4. NC
5. GND
6. NC
7. NC
8. NC
9. NC
This set-up is performed by “OFF/MODE-1/MODE-2.”.

- OFF: turn off the “SHUTTLE FERRY” function.
- MODE-1: Gyro data is inverted at 180 degrees.
- MODE-2: Gyro data is unchanged from the forward mode.
3-27
3.3 Main Menu Tree
3.3.2 List of main menu

Shaded settings are factory default. The TYPE column shows the type of IMO, A, B and C
radars. The type W (Washington state ferry) is not mentioned here since it is a special type
with some functions added to the B type.
1. Main menu
Table 3.3.2 Main Menu
MAIN menu Submenu (1) Submenu (2) Submenu (3) Type

1 BACK
2 2ND ECHO REJ OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE All

1 [ECHO] 4 PM
OFF/ON
5 SART OFF/ON
6 WIPER OFF/1/2
IMO/A
7 ECHO AREA CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL Not
available
1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK OFF/ON
3 STERN MARK OFF/ON
4 INDEX
REL/TRUE
LINE BEARING
5 INDEX LINE 1/2/3/6
6 INDEX LINE MODE VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL
7 [INS MARK] 1 BACK
Note: 2 USER CHART OFF/ON
When SERIAL and LAN 3 CURVED EBL OFF/ON
All
are
4 CHART SYMBOL OFF/ON
set in Menu -> 0 -> 8 ->
5:INS, [INS MARK] is 5 NOTE BOOK OFF/ON/DISPLAY
displayed. 6 RUTE OFF/CENT/ALL
1 BACK
2 [MARK] 2 BARGE MARK OFF/ON
7 [BARGE MARK]
3 BARGE SIZE LENGTH: xx ft / WIDE: xx ft
4 ARRANGEMENT
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
8 EBL OFFSET BASE
STAB NORTH
B/C
9 EBL CURSOR
REL/TRUE Not
BEARING
available
1 BACK
2 EBL 1 REL/TRUE
3 EBL 2 REL/TRUE IMO/A
9
4 VRM 1 NM/SM/km/kyd Not
[EBL,VRM, CURSOR SET]
5 VRM 2 NM/SM/km/kyd available
6 CURSOR BEARING REL/TRUE
7 CURSOR RANGE NM/SM/km/kyd
0 RING OFF/ON All
Cont’d
3-28
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
2 TARGET ALARM
IN/OUT
MODE
3 TARGET
1/2/3/4
ALARM LEVEL
OFF/6 M/10 M/12 M/15 M/
4. WATCH ALARM
20M
5 ALARM
LOW/MID/HIGH
SOUND LEVEL
1 BACK
2
TARGET ALARM/ All
WATCH ALARM/
GUARD ZONE/
LOST TARGET/
CPA LIMIT/
3 [ALARM]
AUTO ACQ TAG FULL/
6 [ALARM OUT1]
MAN ACQ TAG FULL/
7 [ALARM OUT2]
ARP SYSTEM ERROR/
8 [ALARM OUT3]
AZIMUTH/HEAD LINE/
TRIGGER/VIDEO/
GYRO/LOG/EPFS/XTE/
ARRIVAL WPT/DEPTH/
ALARM ACK OUT
IMO/A
9 ALARM OUT POLARITY NORMAL/INVERT Not
available
Ditto All
IMO/A
9 [ALARM OUT4]
9 ALARM OUT POLARITY NORMAL/INVERT Not
available
0 AUDIO ALARM OFF/ON All
1 BACK
2 GUARD ZONE STAB STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
OFF/STAB GND/
3 GUARD POLYGON
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
1 BACK
2 TRIAL OFF/STATIC/DYNAMIC All
0 kt 0.00 kt/s
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER] 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE
0 kt 0.00 kt/s
0 kt 0.0°/s
4 TRIAL TURN RATE
0 kt 0.0°/s
1 BACK
4 [ARP/AIS] RED:
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYA/ IMO
2 ARP SYMBOL COLOR
MAG/WHT Not
5 [ARP SYMBOL] available
3 ARP SYMBOL SIZE SMALL/STD/LARGE
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYA/
4 PAST POSN COLOR
MAG/WHT All
5 PAST POSN POINTS 5/10
1 BACK
RED:
6 [AIS SYMBOL] RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYA/ IMO/A
2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR
MAG/WHT Not
available
Cont’d
3-29
3.3 Main Menu Tree
3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE SMALL/STD/LARGE

4 ROT TAG LIMIT 000.1°/MIN
6 [AIS SYMBOL] RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYA/
5 PAST POSN COLOR
MAG/WHT)
6 PAST POSN POINTS 5/10
1 BACK
2 FUSION TARGET OFF/ON
4 [ARP/AIS] 3 GAP 0.000 NM All
7 [FUSION] 4 RANGE 0.000 NM
5 BEARING 0.0°
6 SPEED 0.0kt
7 COURSE 0.0°
8 AIS FUNCTION OFF/ON
OFF/ACTIVE TARGET/
9 AIS LOST ALARM
ALL TARGET/RANGE nm
1 BACK All
IMO
GRN/YEL/CYA/ORANGE/
2 CHART COLOR Not
GRAY
available
3 OWN
OFF/10S/30S/1M/2M/3M/6M
TRACK INTERVAL
All
4 OWN TRACK RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYA/
COLOR MAG/WHT
5 TRG
OFF/10S/30S/1M/2M/3M/6M IMO
TRACK INTERVAL
Not
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/CYA/
6 TRG TRACK COLOR available
MAG/WHT
7 CURSOL L/L ALIGN OFF/ON
1 BACK All
2 OWN TRACK 30%/50%/80%/ALL
IMO
3 TARGET TRACK 30%/50%/80%/ALL Not
8 [DATA ERASE]
available
4 MARK ALL ERASE NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE NO/YES
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE NO/YES All
5 [PLOTTER]
[DISPLAY (1/2)]
1 BACK
IMO,
OFF/ON Only
2 GRID A/B
Only
OFF/ L/L /GYOKU
C
3 OWN TRACK OFF/ON All
IMO
4 TARGET TRACK OFF/ON Not
9 [DISPLAY] available
5 MARK OFF/ON All
IMO
6 LAND DENSITY OFF/ON Not
available
IMO
7 PLACE MANE OFF/ON Not
available
8 COAST LINE OFF/ON
9 CONTOUR LINE OFF/ON All
0 NEXT
Cont’d
3-30
3.3 Main Menu Tree
[DISPLAY (2/2)]
1 BACK
2 NAV LINE (MAP) OFF/ON
5 [PLOTTER] 9 [DISPLAY] All
3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF/ON
4 PROHIBITED AREA OFF/ON
5 BUOY OFF/ON
[CARD1/2]
1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT A/B
3 [READ CARD]
1 BACK
4 [WR MARK] 2 NAME
M0000000 All
1 BACK
5 [WR NAV LINE WPT] 2 NAME
6 [CARD] W0000000
1 BACK
6 [WR OWN TRACK] 2 NAME
T0000000
1 BACK IMO
7 [WR TARGET
2 NAME Not
TRACK]
A0000000 available
1 BACK
8 [WR SETTING DATA] 2 NAME All
S0000000
1 BACK
9 [WR INSTALLATION
2 NAME
DATA]
I0000000
0 NEXT
6 [CARD] [CARD2/2] All
1 BACK
2 [FILE DELETE] 1 BACK
1 BACK
3 [CARD INITIALIZE]
2 INITIALIZE START NO/YES
1 BACK
2 DEPTH OFF/m/ft
3 DEPTH
10/20/50/100/200/500
GRAPH SCALE
4 DEPTH MARK 000 m
7 [NAV DATA] 5 CURRENT OFF/ON All
6 WIND OFF/m/s/KT
7 TEMP OFF/ON
8 DATE-TIME OFF/UTC/LOCAL
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ +00:00
0 WPT DATA OFF/REL/TRUE
[NAV LINE WPT(1/2) ]
All
1 BACK
WPT
MARK
OFF/EXT DATA/ :
8 2 NAV LINE DATA INTERNAL DATA/ IMO
[NAV LINE/ WPT MARK Not
WPT] available
3 NAV LINE SELECT --
OFF/ON
4 SKIP NEXT WPT All
0.00 NM
5 NAV LINE WIDTH 0.0 NM
Cont’d
3-31
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
2 WPT NO. SELECT 001
3 WPT NAME
6 [WPT SET]
--°--.--- N
4 WPT L/L
---°--.--- E
5 CLEAR DATA NO/YES
7 [WPT LIST] [WPT LIST1 (1/25) - (25/25)] 001 - 200
1 BACK
2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT 01
3 NAV LINE NAME
8 [NAV LINE SET] ――
8 [NAV LINE 4 NAVE LINE ENTRY to
―― All
WPT]
5 CLEAR DATA NO/YES
1 BACK
[NAV LINE LIST]
9 [NAV LINE LIST] 01
(1/30) - (30/30)
0 NEXT
0 NEXT
[NAV LINE WPT (2/2)]
1 BACK
OFF/ON
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM
0.00 NM
3 TURNING LINE OFF/ON/REVISED
4 DISP WPT NO. OFF/ON
5 DISP WPT NAME OFF/ON
1 BACK
1 BACK
3 NAV DATA OFF/ON
9 4 ZOOM OFF/2TIMES/3TIMES
[CUSTOMIZE/ STAB GND/ All
2 [DATA BOX]
TEST] STAB HDG/
5 ZOOM DISPLAY
STAB NORTH/
ARP TRACK
6 TARGET DATA 1BOX/2BOX/3BOX/LARGE
Cont’d
3-32
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
1 BACK
2
PICTURE/IR/ES/EAV/
NOISE REJ/
ANT SELECT/
PULSE LENGTH/
2 [ECHO]
A/C SEA SELECT/
AUTO RAIN SELECT/
TUNE SELECT/
ANT HEIGHT/
SEA CONDITION/
2ND ECHO REJ/PM/SART
1 BACK
ALARM ACK/STBY TX/
HL OFF/EBL OFF SET/
MODE/OFF CENTER/
CU TM RESET/INDEX LINE/
VECTOR TIME/
3 [STD KEY]
VECTOT MODE/ All
TARGET LIST/TRAIL/BRILL/
MARK/MENU/RANGE UP/
RANGE DOWN/ACQ/
TARGET DATA/
TARGET CANCEL
1 BACK
3 [F1] 2
9
DISP ARP/
[CUSTOMIZE/
DISP AIS/
TEST]
TARGET DATA & ACQ/
PAST POSN INTERVAL/
4 [ARP/AIS] REF MARK/
CPA LIMIT/CPA/TCPA/
GZ1/GZ2/
TARGET LIST SORT/
TRIAL MANEUVER/
ARP-AIS FUSION/
/AIS MESSAGE
1 BACK
2
ECHO COLOR/
BACK COLOR/RING/ TLL:
ALARM1/ALARM2/ IMO/
5 [OPERATION]
WATCH ALARM RESET/ A/B
ZOOM/MARK DELETE/ Not
CHART ALGN/ available
DISPLAY SELECT/
MOB/USER DEFAULT/TLL
PICTURE1/ PICTURE2/
PICTURE3/ PICTURE4/
6 [PICTURE] NEAR/FAR/NEAR BUOY/
FAR BUOY/ROUGH SEA/
All
SHIP/HARBOR/COAST
4 [F2]
5 [F3] Ditto Ditto
6 [F4]
Cont’d
3-33
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
2 WHEEL DRIVE NORMAL/REVERSE
All
3 KEY BEEP OFF/LO/MOD/HI
4 REMOTE KEY F*-KEY/DISPLAY SELECT
IMO/A
7 [OPERATION]
5 POP UP GUIDANCE (OFF/ON) Not
available
6 OWN SHIP VECTOR OFF/HDG/COURSE
7 STERN UP OFF/ON All
8 SHAUTTLE FERRY OFF/MODE1/MODE2
9 1 BACK
[CUSTOMIZE/ 1 BACK
TEST] 2 [SELF TEST]
2 START
1 BACK
2 ARP TEST START
8 [TEST] NOTE: All

THE DISPLAY IS CLEARER
3 [ARP TEST]
WHEN RUNNING ARP TEST.
RUN ARP TEST?

YES: SELECT 2 START
NO: SELECT 1 BACK
3-34
3.3 Main Menu Tree
2. Initialize menu
To access the Initialize Menu, press the [MENU] key five times while pressing the [1: HL
OFF] key.
Table 3.3.3 Default Setting Menu
Main Menu Submenu (1) Submenu (2) Submenu (3) Type

1 BACK
1 BACK
2 CABLE ATT ADJ AUTO/MANUAL 30 (0-73)
000.0
3 HD ALIGN
(0-359.9)
1
4 TIMMING ADJ
(0-4095)
0
5 MBS
2 [ECHO ADJ] (0-255) All
5/7.5/10/15/20/25/
6 DEFAULT
30/35/40/45/
ANT HIGHT
more 50 m
7 NEAR STC CRVE 2/2.5/3/3.5
8 MID STC CRVE 3/4/5/6
9 FAR STC CRVE 6/7/8
1
0 RING SUPPRESSION
(0-255)
1 BACK
START 000°
2 BLIND SECTOR 1
ANGLE 000°
START 000° All
3 [SCANNER] 3 BLIND SECTOR 2
ANGLE 000°
4 ANT REVOLUTION LO/HI/AUTO
5 ANT SW OFF/ON
6 ANT STOPPED STBY/TX
1 BACK
All
2 RADAR MAIN/SUB
IMO/A
3.RANGE UNIT NM/SM/km/kyd Not
4 [INSTALL- available
ATION] 4 RADAR NO 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
FORE/MAINTOP/
MAIN 2ND/
5 RADAR POSN
MAIN 3RD/AFT/
PORT/STAR BOAD
Cont’d
3-35
3.3 Main Menu Tree
6/12/25UP/
6 MODEL 25DOWN/50/30UP/
30DOWN/60
4 [INSTALL- 7 TYPE IMO/A/B/C/W
All
ATION] 8 ON TIME 000000.0H
9 TX TIME 000000.0H
0 PM GAIN ADJ 0-255
1 BACK
LENGTH 0 m
(0-999)
2 LENGTH/WIDTH
WIDTH 0 m
(0-99)
BOW 0 m
(0-999)
3 SCANNER POSN
PORT 0 m
(99)
BOW 0 m
5 [OWN
(0-999) All
SHIP INFO] 4 GPS1 ANT POSN
PORT 0 m
(0-99)
BOW 0 m
(0-999)
5 GPS2 ANT POSN
PORT 0 m
(0-99)
BOW 0 m
(0-999)
6 CONNING POSN
PORT 0 m
(0-99)
1 BACK
2 TTM OUTPUT OFF/REL/TRUE
3 MAX RANGE 24/32
All
16
4 ECHO LEVEL
(0-31)
5 QV DISPLAY OFF/ON
IMO
6 ARP W/O GYRO OFF/ON Not
available
6 [ARP
1 BACK
PRESET]
800M
2 LAND SIZE
(100-1000)
XN12AF/XN20AF/XN24AF/
3 ANT SELECT XN4A/XN5A/SN30AF/SN36AF/
7 [ACQ PRESET] All
SN4A/SN5A
5 SCAN
4 AUTO ACQ CORRE
(3-10)
1 SCAN
5 AUTO ACQ WEED
(1-5)
Cont’d
3-36
3.3 Main Menu Tree
1 BACK
2 GATE SIZE S/M/L/LL
3 FILTER RESPONSE 1/2/3/4
9 SCAN
4 LOST COUNT
(1-20)
8 [TRACK PRESET] 100 KTS
5 MAX SPEED
(40-150)
6 TRACKING MODE 1/2/3/4
TIME/SCAN/
7 START TIME TGT
50 SEC (20-100)
VECT
/20 SCAN (8-40)
1 BACK
DRIFT=OFF/xxx.x
CPU COUNTER=xxxxx
CPU STATUS=xxxxx
6 [ARP AUTO= x All
PRESET] MAN= x
LOST= x
SCAN= xxxx
MIN HIT= x
9 [ARP E LEVEL= x
SENSOR DATA] 0 NEXT
1 BACK
1= x
2= x
3= x
-------
30= x
31= x
32= x
2 DATA NO
0 DEFAULT
1 BACK
IP 172.031.003.006
RADAR MSK 255.255.000.000
GTW 000.000.000.000
IP 172.031.014.100
7 [NETWORK] All
CARD 1 MSK 255.255.000.000
GTW 000.000.000.000
IP 172.031.0.14.101
CARD 2 MSK 255.255.000.000
GTW 000.000.000.000
1 BACK
2 DEMO ECHO OFF/EG/SPU/PC
8 [OTHER] 3 EAV W/O GYRO OFF/ON All
4 ARP SELECT ARPA/ATA
5 INS OFF/SERIAL/LAN
3-37
3.3 Main Menu Tree
3. Factory menu
To access the Factory Menu, press the [2], [3] and [4] keys in sequence while pressing the
[1: HL OFF] key.
Table 3.3.4 Factory Menu
Main menu Submenu (1) Submenu (2) Submenu (3) Type

1 BACK
2 LANGUAGE E/J
9 FACTORY All
3 FACTORY DEFAULT
4 FACTORY TEST
3-38
Chapter 4. System Setting
4.2 Overview of [FACTORY] menu
When you change the setting of a menu or on-screen icon menu, wait for six
seconds or more before tuning off the power. If the power is turned off in less
than six seconds, the data is not saved in the flash memory. After changing the
INSTALLATION and FACTORYmenu, restart the power.
4.1 Optional Menus

Table 4.1.1 List of Optional Menus
Operation
Item
RCU-014 RCU-015, 016
Place the cursor on STBY-TX and
Press the [ENTER] key 5
Cancel the 3 minutes delay click the right button of the track
times while holding down the
function Note ball 5 times while holding down
[1:HL OFF] key.
the [F1] key.
Place the cursor on the menu and
INITIALIZE menu Press the [MENU] key 5
click the right button of the
(Call up the INITIALIZE times while holding down the
trackball 5 times while holding
menu) [1:HL OFF] key.
down the [F1] key.
Press the [2], [3] and [4] keys
FACTORY menu Press the [F2], [F3] and [F4] keys
in order while holding down
(Call up the FACTORY menu) while holding down the [F1] key.
the [1:HL OFF] key.
The brilliance is set to 50 when
Monitor brilliance Adjust of [BRILL] VR one key of [F1] to [F4] keys is
pressed for longer than 4 seconds.
Note: When the INITIALIZE menu or FACTORY menu is called up, the menu is
retained until the power is turned off.
If the power is turned on immediately after the power off, 3 minutes delay
counting is abbreviated.
Execute FACTORY DEFAULT by RCU-014

1. Call up the [FACTORY] menu.
While holding down the [1:HL OFF] key, press [2], [3] and [4] keys in order.
2. The [FACTORY] menu will be displayed. Select “3. FACTORY DEFAULT” and
press the [ENTER] key 5 times.
3. Turn off the power when the message “Wait now Formatting…” followed by
“Completed!! Power on Restart” is shown.
Execute FACTORY DEFAULT by RCU-015 and RCU-016

1. Call up the [FACTORY] menu.
Press the [F2], [F3] and [F4] keys in order while holding down the [F1] key.
2. The [FACTIRY] menu will be displayed. Select “3. FACTORY DEFAULT” and
click the left button of the track ball 5 times.
3. “Wait now Formatting…” is shown. After a while “Completed!! Power on Restart”
is shown, and then turn off the power.
4-1
4.2 Overview of [FACTORY] Menu
4.2 Overview of [FACTORY] Menu

Table 4.2.1 [FACTORY] Menu
Sub
Menu Sub Menu-1 Remarks
Menu-2
1 BACK
Switch the language display. (English/Japanese)
2 LANGUAGE E/J When changing the language display, turn off the
power once.
FACTORY Return all the settings to the factory default setting.
3 FACTORY
Select “FACTORY DEFAULT” and click the left
DEFAULT Note
button. Or clicking the [ENTER] key 5 times.
4 FACTORY
See page. 6-17.
TEST
Note:
Following wettings are retained even after “FACTORY DEFAULT” is executed.
1) [Menu] -> 0 [INITIALIZE] -> 4 [INSTALLATION]

-> 4 RADAR NO
-> 6 MODEL
-> 7 TYPE
-> 0 PM GAIN ADJ
2) [Menu] -> 0 [INITIALIZE] -> 7 [NETWORK]

-> RADAR, CARD-1, CARD-2
(IP Address, Subnet mask, default gateway)
3) [FACTORY] menu
[Menu] -> 2 [LANGUAGE]
4-2
4.3 Overview of [INITIALIZE] Menu

Table 4.3.1 Overview of [INITIALIZE]
Refer
Menu Sub Menu-1 Sub Menu-2 Remarks
to
1 BACK
1BACK
The level of video signals inputted into the processor unit differ
depending on the antenna cable length. This function compensates
the signal loss by the antenna cable.
AUTO/MANUAL 30
2 CABLE ATT ADJ - AUTO: Adjustment is automatically made by calculation based P.4-13
(Auto/Manual: 0 - 73)
on the noise level.
- MANUAL: Make adjustment so as to present a slight amount of
noise by setting GAIN to 80 and STC/FTC to OFF.
This is a function for the alignment of heading line to correct the
000.0
3 HD ALIGN bearing error of a target and its echoes. Limit the bearting error to 0.2
(0-359.9)
degrees or less.
Makes adjustment of TX delay by the electrical circuit and antenna
2 [ECHO ADJ] cable. Adjust range of echo so that a straight target such as a pier is
1 presented as an straight picture on short range. Or makes adjustment
4 TIMING ADJ
(0-4095) so as to allow main bang of about 5 mm radius (20 inch monitor) or
7 mm (23 inch monitor) from the center on the 0.5 NM range when P.4-14
MBS (listed below) is set to “0”.
Makes adjustment suppression for the main bang. Makes adjustment
0
5 MBS so that “MBS (listed above)” disappears on the S1 range of 1.5 NM
(0-255)
or less. (40 dB attenuation)
Selects the antenna height from the sea level. This setting affects
5/7.5/10/15/20/25/ the MANUAL and the AUTO STC operating range.
6
30/35/40/45/ Note: P.4-15
DEFAULT ANT HIGHT
more 50m The value set in this menu box is set as a default for the setting of
[PICTURE] -> 9 -> 3:ANT HEIGHT.
Cont’d
4-3
7 NEAR STC CRVE 2/2.5/3/3.5 Fine adjustment of STC curve by range. The STC curve is primary
8 MID STC CRVE 3/4/5/6 determined by the ANT HEIGHT setting and secondary by the
P.4-15
setting of [PICTURE] ->9: CONDITION and [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 6:
2 [ECHO ADJ] 9 FAR STC CRVE 6/7/8
MODEL.
1 Makes adjustment so that a ring-shaped picture outside the MBS
0 RING SUPPRESSION P.4-14
(0-255) range disappears. (20 dB attenuation)
1 BACK
START 000°
2 BLIND SECTOR 1 This is the only function to stop
ANGLE 000°
transmission in a specified bearing. Set
START 000° the bearing to suspend transmission.
When transmission is not suspended,
3 BLIND SECTOR 2 set the START and the ANGLE to 0
ANGLE 000°
degree.
In RSB-097 (42 rpm: DC motor), the antenna revolution can be

switched to 36 rpm or 42 rpm.
- LO: 36 rpm,
3 SCANNER - HI: 42 rpm
- AUTO: When the pulse length is S1 and S2: HI, and the pulse
4 ANT REVOLUTION LO/HI/AUTO length is M/L: LO
Note:
The antenna speed differs depending on the model of the antenna P.4-17
motor and the PWR board. The PWR board of 42 rpm type is used
with 03Pxxxxx-B and the D type radars, and with the motor
D8G-571.
Allows the ON/OFF setting of the antenna rotation. Normally set it
5 ANT SW OFF/ON
to ON.
Allows the setting of ST-BY or TX when the antenna rotation is
6 ANT STOPPED STBY/TX
stopped.
4-4
1 BACK
Sets whether to use the radar as a monitor (SUB) or not. When this is
P.4-20
2 RADAR MAIN/SUB set to SUB, transmission is disabled. Monitor signals are inputted
P.4-21
from the master radar to the terminal board J616: Master radar.
Sets measure of the Range ring
3 RANGE UNIT NM/SM/km/kyd
Note: IMO and A type not available
Sets the own radar: ANT number when it is connected with a
network. For viewing pictures from other antennas, you can switch
the display by selecting the [ANT INF] box (Inter-switch function).
Information on radars connected with the LAN can be checked on
4
the [ANT INF] box menu.
INSTALLATION P.4-19
4 RADAR NO 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 Note-1: Numbers are assigned as follows:
P.4-21
No. 1-4: With TR unit
No. 5-8: Without TR unit
Note-2: The radar IP address can be checked in “INITIALIZE Menu
-> 0 -> 7: NETWORK”. IP address is linked with the radar
number and automatically assigned.
FORE/MAINTOP/
Makes this setting for reference of the antenna location. This
MAIN2ND/
5 RADAR POSN information is shown on the [ANT INF] box menu.
MAIN 3RD AFT/
This setting is not used for signal processing.
PORT/STAR BOAD
Cont’d
4-5
For a model setting. Set a model according to the TR unit in use.

Pulse repetition rate (PRR) and the STC curve are determined
according to the setting.
6/12/25UP/
- X band: 6/12/25UP/25DOWN
6 MODEL 25DOWN/50/30UP/ P.4-24
- S band: 50/30UP/30DOWN/60
30DOWN/60
Note:
- UP: The TR model is incorporated in the antenna.
- DOWN: Separate TR unit.
This is the setting of radar specification.
Menu operation differs depending on types.
IMO: IMO type A: Semi-IMO type B: Non IMO type outside
7 TYPE IMO/A/B/C/W Japan. P.4-25
4 C: Japanese Fishing-boat type
INSTALLATION W: Washington state ferry type (Special type with some function
added to the B type)
Indicates the total operating time.
The ON time is counted on the SPU board. It is used as a guide for
8 ON TIME 000000.0H
replacing Magnetron. After the replacement of Magnetron, reset the
time.
Indicates the total transmission time.
9 TX TIME 000000.0H Approximately, the time for replacing is 3000-hour operations.
The transmission time is counted on the SPU board.
PM: Allows adjusting the performance gain (attenuation).
When you call up this menu, the range and signal processing are
0 PM GAIN ADJ 0-255 P.4-28
automatically set for PM. PM echoes can be checked in “[Menu] ->
1 -> 4: PM”. The higher is the figure, the lower is the signal level.
1BACK
5 LENGTH 0m Sets the ship’s mark size. The dimensions of the own ship mark
OWN SHIP (0-999) hould be used.
2 LENGTH/WIDTH P.4-30
INFO WIDTH 0m The own ship mark is displayed by “[Menu] -> 2 -> 2: OWN SHIP
(0-99) MARK -> ON”.
Cont’d
4-6
BOW 0m
This setting is the data for indicating the radar antenna position in the
(0-999)
3 SCANNER POSN own ship mark. If you select ANT POSN in the [REF POINT] box,
PORT 0m
the radar antenna position becomes the reference point.
(99)
BOW 0m Sets the GPS antenna position. This data is used for calculating the
(0-999) cursor position (latitude, longitude).
4 GPS1 ANT POSN
PORT 0m The input ports of the GPS are:
(0-99) - GPS1: NAV port (J606)
BOW 0m - GPS2: LOG (J607), TRACK CONTROL (J620), HDG (J605),
5 (0-999) RS-232 (J601), LAN (INS)
5 GPS2 ANT POSN P.4-30
OWN SHIP PORT 0m The GPS1 or the GPS2 can be switched in “1. NAV AID” of the [OS
INFO (0-99) POSN] box menu.
BOW 0m Sets the conning position.
(0-999) This setting is used for indicating the conning position in the own
ship mark. If you select CONN POSN in the [REF POINT] box, the
conning position becomes the reference point of rangering,
6 CONNING POSN VRM/EBL markers and cursor. But the picture position is not
PORT 0m
changed.
(0-99)
Selecting the CONN POSN as REF POINT, the range and bearing of
the target on the radar display and the target viewed from the
conning position coincide with each other.
4-7
Refer
Menu Sub Menu-1 Sub Menu-2 Sub Menu-3 Remarks
to
1BACK
This is the setting for outputting the tracking
data of the ARPA.
2 TTM OUTPUT OFF/REL/TRUE
Note: Specify the output port by “[Menu]
-> 0 -> 8 -> 5: INS”.
Sets the maximum acquisition range of the
3 MAX RANGE 24/32
ARPA.
No need for changing this setting.
16 There are 32 gradations for received echo
4 ECHO LEVEL
(0-31) levels. Set the threshold of the echo level to be
processed as ARPA.
Displays the echo processed by the ARPA
5 QV DISPLAY OFF/ON
echo.
Not displayed on the IMO type radar.
6 ARP PRESET As a general rule, the ARPA function does not
P.4-31
work without HDG data. This setting allows
6 ARP W/O GYRO OFF/ON
the ARPA to work without HDG, data and is
intended for use in installation on a fixed
position.
1 BACK
No need for changing this setting.
800M This is the setting of the target size. Targets
2 LAND SIZE
(100-1000) smaller than this setting are processed as the
ARPA target.
7 [ACQ PRESET]
XN12AF/XN20AF/
Since the horizontal beam width differs
XN24AF/XN4A/
depending on the antenna, the installed
3 ANT SELECT XN5A/SN30AF/
antenna type is selected so as to have the
SN36AF/SN4A/
appropriate ARPA echo.
SN5A
Cont’d
4-8
Acquire targets when the same echo is

4 5 SCAN repeatedly detected a set number of the
AUTO ACQ CORRE (3-10) scanning times in a row in the automatic
acquisition operation.
7 [ACQ PRESET] Set the number of echo dropouts in the
automatic acquisition operation, which is
*No need for changing related to the AUTO ACQ CORRE setting.
this setting. 1 SCAN For instance, if AUTO ACQ CORRE is set to
5 AUTO ACQ WEED
(1-5) “5” and also AUTO ACQ WEED is set to “1”,
the ARPA acquisition is started even if echoes
are not repeatedly detected 5 times in a row
but are detected 5 times with one dropout.
1 BACK
Specifies the tracking range. This is the setting
of estimated position of ARPA echoes. The
range differs dependeing on distance. When
6 ARP PRESET P.4-31
2 GATE SIZE S/M/L/LL the number of target swaps in the ARPA is
large, set GATE SIZE to “S”. And then, when
the number of lost targets is large, set GATE
SIZE “L or LL”.
8 [TRACK PRESET] 3 Set the process for tracking response of
1/2/3/4
FILTER RESPONSE turning echoes.
*No need for changing If there is no echo trace a set number of
9 SCAN
this setting. 4 LOST COUNT scanning times in a row, the target is
(1-20)
processed as a lost target.
100KTS Set the maximum relative speed for acquiring
5 MAX SPEED
(40-150) and tracking ARPA echoes.
Set a method for calculating the estimated
6 TRACKING MODE 1/2/3/4
position of ARPA echoes.
TIME/SCAN/ Set the time from the start of acquisition to the
7 START TIME TGT
50SEC(20-100) display of vector or the number of scanning
VECT
/20SCAN(8-40) times.
Cont’d
4-9
1 BACK
DRIFT=OFF
CPU
COUNTER=xxxxx
CPU STATUS=xxxxx
AUTO= x
Displays the ARPA status.
MAN= x
LOST= x
SCAN= xxxx
MIN HIT= x
E LEVEL= x
9 [ARP SENSOR DATA]
0 NEXT
6 ARP PRESET P.4-31
1 BACK
1= x
2= x
No need for changing the setting. Displays the
3= x
ARPA data for manufactural engineers. Select
-------
the data to be displayed in the “2. DATA NO”
30= x
listed below.
31= x
32= x
Allows the selection of data. The selected data
2 DATA NO
is displayed in the box shown above.
Returns the [ARPA PRESET] setting data to a
0 DEFAULT
default by clicking the left button 3 times.
4-10
Refer
Menu Sub Menu-1 Sub Menu-2 Remarks
to
1 BACK
You can check the IP address to use when the radar is connected
with LAN.
IP
Note: Set the radar number in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4: RADAR
172.031.003.0xx
NO”. The IP address is automatically assigned by the radar
MSK
RADAR number.
255.255.000.000
No.1: 172.031.003.006 --- No.8: 172.031.003.013
GTW
000.000.000.000
Remark:
IP, MSK, GTW addresses can be changed.
7 NETWORK IP
172.031.014.100 P.4-34
MSK
CARD 1 You can check the IP address of CU-200 connected with the radar or
255.255.000.000
the LAN.
GTW
When two CU-200 are connected via the LAN, set the DIP switch in
000.000.000.000
CU-200.
IP
172.031.014.101
Remark:
MSK
CARD 2 IP, MSK, GTW addresses can be changed.
255.255.000.000
GTW
000.000.000.000
1 BACK
Allows selecting demo echoes.
- EG: EG-3000/2000 - SPU: Future development
8 OTHER 2 DEMO ECHO OFF/EG/SPU/PC
- PC: Demo picture of the PC (Application should have been
installed on your PC.)
Set whether to activate the EAV function without HDG data or not.
3 EAV W/O GYRO OFF/ON
It is intended for use in installation on a fixed position.
Cont’d
4-11
The indication in [ARAP] and [ATA] box on the lower right display
4 ARP SELECT ARPA/ATA changes according to the setting. The trial maneuver function is not
available on the ATA.
Selects TTM output port.
OFF: Jxxx [ECDIS]
SERIAL: Jxxx [TRACK CONTROL]
LAN: Jxxx [NETWORK] This port is two way communication.
8 OTHER
Note:
5 INS OFF/SERIAL/LAN - Set “[Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 2.TTM OUTPUT” to “REL” or P.4-38
“TRUE”. The TTM is outputted.
- When this is set to OFF, “[Menu] -> 2 -> 7: [BARGE MARK]”
menu is displayed to allow the setting of BARGE MARK.
- When this is set to the SERIAL or the LAN, “[Menu] -> 2 -> 7:
[INS MARK]” menu is displayed to allow the ON/OFF setting
of the mark display from INS.
4-12
4.4 Initialize Setting

4.4.1 CABLE ATT ADJ
INITIALIZE -> 2: ECHO -> 2
The level of video signals inputted into the processor unit differ depending on the
antenna cable length. To adjust the loss correction for it, two types of adjustment
methods are available (AUTO or MANUAL). You can use the both of them. After the
AUTO adjustment, you can make a correction by the MANUAL adjustment.
The adjusted data is saved on the SPU board. Based on this data, “CABLE ATT ADJ” is
executed on the IF board of the TR unit.
When AUTO is executed, a message “CABLE ATT ADJ” is displayed. It takes about 5
minutes to complete the adjustment. Proper noise levels are automatically adjusted and
the adjusted data is saved on the SPU board.
XXX data=X
Step= 1 (-> 2)
att data=XX
LEVEL AVERAGE=XXX
CABLE ATT ADJ
Photo 4.4.1 Automatic Adjustment in Progress
In the MANUAL adjustment, set the 24 NM range, the long pulse, Gain to “80”, STC to
“0”, FTC/EAV/ES/ to OFF and IR to “2”, and then make adjustment so as that the grass
noise slightly appears.
Photo 4.4.2 Too Noisy Photo 4.4.3 Appropriate Noisy
4-13
4.4.2 TIMING, MBS, RING SUPPRESSION

INITIALIZE -> 2: ECHO -> 4, 5, 0
Timing control is executed on the SPU board, and MBS (40 dB attenuation) and ring
suppression (20 dB attenuation) control are executed by the IF board of the TR unit.
The adjusted data is saved on the SPU board.
Make the setting as follows

- RANGE: 0.125NM, S1 PULSE
- GAIN: 70
- SEA: 20-30
- RAIN: OFF
- EAV: OFF Note: Operating range
- IR: OFF MBS: 0.21NM
- MBS: 0 Ring Suppression: 0.22NM
Photo 4.4.4 Picture under the set condition
Timing not adjusted

Picture is absorbed.
Photo 4.4.5 Timing has not been adjusted Photo 4.4.6 Picture is absorbed due to too
much timing adjustment
Appearance of a slight amount of main

Main bang of radius 5-7 mm bang is desirable.
Erased by adjustment in RING

SUPPRESSION.
Photo 4.4.7 Proper timing adjustment, the Photo 4.4.8 The main bang disappears
main bang appears near the because of too much MBS adjustment.
center Adjust MBS so that a slight amount of
main bang appear. When ring-shaped
echoes appear outside the main bang,
make adjustments in RING
4-14 SUPPRESSION.
4.4.3 DEFAULT ANT HIEGHT, NEAR/MID/FAR STC CURVE

INITIALIZE -> 2: ECHO -> 6, 7, 8, 9
Parameters determining the STC curve are listed below.
Table 4.4.1 Setting Values Related to STC Curve
Item Setting Parameter Default Remarks

X band: 6/12/25UP/25DOWN At
MODEL INITIALIZE->4->6 X band
S band: 50/30UP/30DOWN/60 installation
STC RANGE [PICTURE]->9->4 -10 - +10 +0
Depends
SEA CONDITION [PICTURE]->9->2 1/2/3/4/5 on
Picture
ANT HIEGHT >

[PICTURE]->9->3, 5/7.5/10/15/20/25/30/35/ At
DEFAULT ANT 15
INITIALAIZE->2->6 40/45/more 50m installation
HIEGHT
NEAR STC CURVE INITIALIZE->2->7 2/2.5/3/3.5 3
MID STC CURVE INITIALIZE->2->8 3/4/5/6 4
FAR STC CURVE INITIALIZE->2->9 6/7/8Note 7
Set the antenna height for the setting of DEFAULT ANT HIEGHT, by “[PICTURE] ->
9 -> 3: ANT HIEGHT”. The STC curve is primary set by ANT HIEGHT.
The STC control is executed by the IF board of the TR unit.
Range Limit: 24NM

Gain (-)
[A/C SEA] VR ADJ
Far STC Curve [GAIN] VR ADJ

(6/7/8)
The STC effective range is

MID STC Curve
(3/4/5/6) restricted up to 24 NM by the RFC
Near STC Curve STC RANGE
(+10)
board. The larger is the gradient
(2/2.5/3/3.5)
coefficient of the STC curve, the
Fig 4.4.1 STC Curve larger are the changes
in attenuation.
By adjusting the [A/C SEA] knob, the STC curve moves up and down. The ANT
HIEGHT, SEA CONDITION and pulse length determine turning points of the curve.
And the setting of the STC RANGE changes the turning points of MID STC and FAR
STC. The higher is the antenna and the worse is the sea condition, the more the control
distance of (1<5) STC is extended.
For instance, if the antenna height is 30 m for the X-band radar, the NEAR turning point
is 4 to 5 NM and the MID turning point is 19 to 20 NM. In AUTO STC, the optimum
STC curve and movement of STC curve (upward and downward) are automatically
controlled according to a reception signal level and Range.
4-15
The photos shown below are given as examples for comparison of pictures when the
setting of the SEA CONDITION and the ANT HIEGHT are changed in FAR-2837S.
These are pictures when the range is set to 24 NM, and also AUTO STC, IR, ES and
EAV AUTO RAIN were set to OFF.
When SEA CONDITION is set to 4: bad sea condition, the effect of the STC becomes
greater.
SEA CONDITION: 1 SEA CONDITION: 4

ANT HIEGAT: 15 m ANT HIEGAT: 15 m
Photo 4.4.9 Photo 4.4.10
When the antenna height is set higher, the control range of the STC becomes longer.
SEA CONDITION: 2 SEA CONDITION: 2

ANT HIEGAT: 5 m ANT HIEGAT: 50 m
Note:
You can store the setting according to the sea condition in the [PICTURE] box menu
and assign it to fucntion keys in the [MENU] -> 9 -> 3, 4, 5 and 6.
4-16
4.4.4 ANT REVOLUTION

INITIALIZE -> 3: SCANNER -> 4
In case that the gearbox RSB-097 (42 rpm/DC motor: D8G-571) is used for the radar
FAR2xx7, the antenna speed can be switched to 36 rpm or 42 rpm. This is selected by
the ANT REVOLUTION menu.
- LO: 36 rpm,
- HI: 42 rpm
- AUTO: When the pulse length is S1 or S2: HI (42 rpm) and when it is M/L: LO
(36 rpm)
The type of the antenna motor and the PWR board determines the antenna speed. The
PWR boards for 42 rpm motor are 03P9339-B, 03P9339-D and 04P9338-D types.
See page. 4-67 for details.
Note: Power system for antenna motor

The ANT ON (High) signal from the SPU board is outputted in TX condition. It turns
on the power to the antenna motor.
1. In case that the antenna motor power is the DC type (RSB-097: FAR-2xx7)
ANT ON, ANT SPEED (H/L level), and B.P signals from the SPU board are
inputted to the PWR board, and the antenna rotation speed is kept constant.
See page.7-67.
ANT Motor
+24VDC 42rpm
MAIN CPU
ANT ON J610
BP ANT SPEED ANT +20VDC 36rpm
REG
Control (ANT Motor)
BP
U21
(Speed, ON/OFF) [SCANNER]
SPU-013 PWR
RPU-013
BP ANT SPEED
24 rpm: 144 Hz HI: 42 rpm
36 rpm: 216 Hz Low: 36 rpm
42 rpm: 252 Hz
Fig 4.4.2 Antenna DC Motor Power Control System
4-17
2. In case that the antenna motor power is the AC type (FAR-2137S/2837S)

The ANT ON signal controls the relay of the PSU-007.
ANT Motor
AC in AC power
RL
PSU-007
RPU-013 J604
+12V
MAIN CPU
ANT ON Q5
2SC3265Y
U21
SPU-013 Termional
Fig. 4.4.3 Antenna Motor Power Control System - 1
3. In case that the antenna motor power is the AC type (FAR-2837SW)

Set “INITILAIZE -> 4 -> 6: MODEL” to “30 DOWN”.
In this setting, ANT ON signals are outputted from the RFC board of RTR-082, and
relay controls the antenna motor power in RTR-082.
RSB-014
RSB-015
ANT MOTOR
ANT ON
RL RFC p.c.b
ANT Power (AC)
RTR-082
RPU-013
Fig. 4.4.4 Antenna AC Motor Power Control System - 2
4-18
4.4.5 RADAR NO.

INITIALIZE -> 4: INSTALLATION -> 4
This is the setting of the own radar (ANT) number. When the ANT number is specified,
the IP address is automatically assigned.
After you change the radar number, wait until a message “Completed!! Power on
restart” is displayed. And then, restart the power.
You can check the radar IP address set in “MENU->0 -> 7:NETWORK”.
See p.4-34 for setting the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, if necessaly.
Important:
To make the unit work as a radar, set the radar number to 1 to 4.
RADAR No. 1 to 4: With ANT unit
RADAR No. 1: 172.031.003.006
RADAR No. 2: 172.031.003.007
RADAR No. 3: 172.031.003.008
RADAR No. 4: 172.031.003.009
To make the unit work only as a monitor of the inter-switch, set the radar number 5 to 8.
RADAR No. 5 to 8: Without ANT unit
RADAR No. 5: 172.031.003.010
RADAR No. 6: 172.031.003.011
RADAR No. 7: 172.031.003.012
RADAR No. 8: 172.031.003.013
Note!!
When changing the IP address (RADAR NO.) of the radar connected with the
LAN, be sure to restart the power for other radars, HUB-100 and CU-200
connected to the LAN.
4-19
4.4.6 RADAR
This is the setting for using this unit as, a sub monitor by signals from the master radar
(external input of analog video).
See page.4-23 for major items that are operable in SUB mode.
Monitor J617: DISP-1

(FULL LOG)
RPU-013
(TB p.c.b) RPU-013
J618: DISP-2
(SEMI LOG) (TB p.c.b)
J616: Master
OP HD-IN, OP BP-IN, OP VIDEO-IN, OP TRIG-IN
Fig. 4.4.5 Monitoring of Video Signals from Master Radar
Note: [ANT-X] -> 8：：SUB MONITOR -- ON/OFF

B and C types
You can switch the setting to SUB in the [ANT-X] box menu without calling up the
INSTALLATION menu and easily video signal from the master radar.
Set “[ANT-X] -> 8: SUB MONITOR” to ON.
IMO and A types

The setting of “[ANT-X] -> 8: SUB MONITOR” is not available.
Call up the INSTALLATION menu and set to SUB.
Note:
When you turn on the power and switch the setting to SUB (Monitor) in the [ANT-X]
box, the standby display appears correctly to allow you to monitor pictures. When
you switch the unit to the own radar, 3 minute counting starts.
4-20
4.4.7 Inter-switch
To view pictures of other radars of FAR-2xx7 series connected to the LAN, switch the
radar No. (ANT NO.) to the number of the radar that you desire to view. On the
switched picture, you can perform operations such as STC, and Range change. For these
inter switch functions, the IP address linked with the set radar number is used. See
p.4-19 for the setting of the radar number. Basically, it uses that the transfer of pictures
are UDP, and then commands such as key operation are TCP.
To check the information of the radar antenna connected to the LAN, open the [ANT-X]
box menu. You can check BAND, MODEL and POS information of radars (1 to 4)
connected to the LAN.
1. [ANT-X] -> 9: INTER SW PRIORITY

This setting allows giving a priority to multiple radar operations connected to the LAN.
The setting is made in “[ANT-X] -> 9: INTER SW PRIORITY”. When it is set to ON,
you cannot perform operation from the OFF side of the unit viewing the pictures of the
same antenna. If the radar setting is the same, the priority is given to them and operation
is linked each other.
Operatable Operatable
No.1 Radar: No.2 Radar: No.3 Radar:
Priority ON Inoperatable Priority OFF Inoperatable Priority OFF
Fig. 4.4.6 Example of Priority of Inter SW
2. Additional information for the Inter SW

The figure in the next page shows two pictures of the radar connected to the LAN and
processing of control signals. Radar pictures and control signals are running on the
LAN.
For instance, if you switch the setting to the No.2 radar (ANT) from the No.1 radar,
picure on the No.2 radar side is shown on the No.1 radar.
Video signal processing such as Echo Stretch, Echo Average and Echo Trail can be
controlled on a processor unit that in side of the received video signals.
Signal processing such as the ARPA acquisition and tracking is performed on its own,
and output this on the network. In the ARPA, you can set the vector mode/time, track
interval, and TCPA/CPA on the switched side.
See the next page for operations among these radars.
4-21
No.1 Radar No.2 Radar Radar Monitor
RADAR echo RADAR echo RADAR echo

processing processing processing Note:
- HDG:
Operation/Display Operation/Displaye Operation/Display
Displays the data of the
other radar.
Network (LAN) - L/L:
Displays the data of its
own.
Fig. 4.4.7 Overview of Network Connection-1
No.1 Radar No.2 Radar
Displays picture data Sends picture data over LAN.
Receives and displays picture data.
Sends operation command over LAN. Operation
Sends same operation command over LAN.
Displays the processed

picture data Sends the manipulated picture data over LAN.
Receives and displays picture data.
Fig. 4.4.8 Overview of Network Connection-2
4-22
3. Main operations for each function

Table 4.4.2 Functions of LAN and SUB
FAR-2xx7 set
LAN connection
Main function as sub monitor
(Inter switch function)
(SUB function)
PULSE LENGTH Linked
RANGE Linked Enabled
A/C SEA Linked
GAIN Linked
A/C RAIN Linked Enabled
PICTURE Linked Enabled
TX/STBY Linked
ARPA ACQ Linked
TARGET CANCEL Linked
[ARPA]->1: ARPA SELECT Linked
[Menu]->0->6->7->3:ANT SELECT Linked
LOST ACK Linked
ARPA vector Linked
ARPA CPA/TCPA Linked
TUNE MANUAL Linked
TUNE AUTO Linked
[Menu]->0->3->2, 3:BLIND SECTOR Linked
[Menu]->0->4->5: RADAR POSN Linked Enabled
[ARPA]->2: ALL CANCEL Linked
REF POINT Linked
Image processing etc.
Individual operation Enabled
・ES ・EAV ・Echo trail ・Wipper
IR, Auto RAIN Linked
Zoom Individual operation Enabled
Vector time/Vector mode Individual operation
ARPA/AIS plot interval Individual operation
Receives data from the
ARPA acquisition and tracking
other dispaly
Displays data of the other
Guard zone
dispaly
Alarm zone Individual operation Enabled
Displays data of the other
HDG data Displays own data
dispaly
NAV data other than HDG data Displays own data Displays own data
[Menu]->3: TUNE INITIALIZE Own radar only
PM, SART Own radar only
OFF SET, HD OFF Individual operation Enabled
EBL, VRM Individual operation Enabled
IL Individual operation Enabled
Switch display mode and presentation mode Individual operation Enabled
Mark、BRILL operation Individual operation Enabled
Note: “Individual operation” mentioned in “LAN connection” column of the above

table refer to operations when INTER SW PRIORITY is set to OFF on the
respective radars. And “Linked” means that the setting on one side radar
makes the same setting on other radars.
4-23
4.4.8 MODEL
Functions change according to the setting of MODEL.
“A, B and C” in the table below represent parameters. For instance, the models
specified as “A” in the column of the STC curve use the same parameters.
Table 4.4.3 Main Functions Changed According to MODE
Main function
Transmission ANT ON
MODEL setting Transmission
STC pulse B.P output control
repetition
curve waveform calculation signal form
frequency
control RFC board
6 6kW X-band A A A NO A
FAR-2x17
12 A B A NO A
FAR-2x17BB
FAR-2x27
25UP A C A NO A
FAR-2127BB
25
FAR-2817W A D A NO A
DOWN
50 50kW X-band A E A NO B
FAR-2137S
30UP B F B NO A
FAR-2837S
30
FAR-2837SW B G B YES A
DOWN
60 60kW S-band B H B NO B
Note:
B.P output calculation
B.P inputted from the antenna is 256 pulse /rev. in the S-band radar and 360 pulse
/rev. in the X-band radar. This is automatically recognized by MODEL setting. The
B.P output at Slave port is 360 pulse /rev. on both S and X band radar.
ANT ON control signal from RFC board

Signals controlling the power line of the antenna motor of FAR-2837SW are ANT
ON signals outputted from the RFC board.
For instance, the ANT ON signals are not outputted when the “30UP” is set on
FAR-2837SW, therefore the antenna is not rotated.
4-24
4.4.9 TYPE: IMO/A/B/C/W

Specifications differ slightly according to the type setting. See table 4.4.4.
- IMO: IMO type - A: Semi-IMO type - B: Non IMO type outside Japan.
- C: Japanese Fishing-boat type
- W: Washington state ferry type
Note:
The W-type is added on the Ver-014 of the SPU program or later. The W-type
(Washington State Ferry type) is a special type with some specific ship function
added to the B type. The W-type has the function for some specific ship (Washington
State Ferry type), which is a function added to the B type.
Table 4.4.4(1/2) Functions for Radar Type (Differences in Main Menus)
Type
Differences in Main Menus
IMO A B C
Menu – 1:MARK – 7:ECHO AREA
NO NO YES YES
(ECHO AREA can be selected from CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL.)
Menu – 2:MARK – 9:EBL CURSOR
(Only when NM is selected for the unit of the range, switching between YES YES NO NO
REL and TRUE is enabled.)
Menu – 2:MARK – 9: [EBL,VRM, CURSOR SET]
(Selection of the unit of the range from NM/SM/km and kyd. And also, NO NO YES YES
switching between REL and TRUE.)
Menu – 3:ALARM – 6: [ALARM OUT1], 7, 8, 9 –> 9:ALARM OUT
POLARITY NO NO YES YES
(Setting of alarm output polarity)
Menu – 4:ARP/AIS – 5: ARP SYMBOL – 2: ARP SYMBOL COLOR ->
RED NO YES YES YES
(Restriction on ARP symbol color)
Menu – 4:ARP/AIS – 6: AIS SYMBOL – 2: AIS SYMBOL COLOR -> RED
NO YES YES YES
(Restriction on AIS symbol color)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 2: CHART COLOR
NO YES YES YES
(Setting of CHART COLOR)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 5: TGT TRACK INTERVAL NO YES YES YES
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 6: TGT TRACK COLOR
NO YES YES YES
(Selection of track color of other ship)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 8:[DATA ERASE] – 3:TARGET TRACK
NO YES YES YES
(Erasing of track of other ship)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 9: DISPLAY – 2:GRID – OFF/ON
YES YES YES NO
(To display grid or not)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 9: DISPLAY – 2:GRID – OFF/L/L/GYOKU
NO NO NO YES
(ON/OFF of GYOKU ”Fishing area” display)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 9: DISPLAY – 4: TARGET TRACK
NO YES YES YES
(To display of track of other ship or not)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 9: DISPLAY – 6: LAND DENSITY
NO YES YES YES
(To display the land density or not)
Menu – 5: PLOTTER – 9: DISPLAY – 7: PLACE NAME
NO YES YES YES
(To display the place name or not)
4-25
Table 4.4.4(2/2) Functions for Radar Type (Differences in Main Menus)
Type
Differences in Main Menus
IMO A B C
Menu – 6: CARD – 7: [WR TARGET TRACK]
NO YES YES YES
(To write the track of other ship or not)
Menu – 8:NAV LINE WPT – 2:NAV LINE DATA – WPT MARK NO YES YES YES
Menu – 9: CUSTOMIZE/TEST – 3: [F1], 4, 5, 6 – 5: [OPERATION] – 2 ->
NO NO NO YES
TLL (Presence or absence of TLL output)
Menu – 9: CUSTOMIZE/TEST – 7: [OPERATION] – 5: POP UP
GUIDANCE NO NO YES YES
(ON/OFF settting of pop up guidance)
Menu – 0:INITIALIZE– 4:INSTALLATION – 3:RANGE UNIT
NO NO YES YES
(Set measure the Range ring)
Menu – 0:INITIALIZE– 6:ARP PRESET – 6:ARP W/O GYRO
NO YES YES YES
(ARPA operation setting without GYRO data)
Table 4.4.5(2/2) Functions for Radar Type (Differences On-Screen Box Menus)
Type
Differences in Icon Menus
IMO A B C
[OS POSN] – 1:NAV AID – DEAD RECKONING
(On the IMO type, manual input is disabled when ON is set in NO YES YES YES
“[Menu]->4->8:AIS FUNCTION”)
[SPD] – 1:SHIP SPEED – MANUAL/REF
(On the IMO type, MANUAL/REF cannot be switched when ON is set in NO YES YES YES
[SPD] – 1:SET DRIFT – OFF/ON
(On the IMO type, SET DRIFT is disabled when ON is set in NO YES YES YES
[BRILL] (1/2 page) - 1: ECHO COLOR ! COLOR
NO NO YES YES
(On the IMO type, ECHO COLOR COLOR is unable.)
[BRILL] (2/2 page) - 0: NEXT! 0: CHART NO YES YES YES
[TRAIL] - 3: NARROW TRAIL
NO NO YES YES
(Setting of narrow trail)
[MARK] -0: MAP MARK COLOR
NO YES YES YES
(Specification of chart color. CHART is disabled on the IMO type.)
[ANT INF] – 8: SUB MONITOR
NO NO YES YES
(Easy ON/OFF switching between radar and sub monitor)
[COURSOL] – TARGET TRACK ON, TARGET TRACK OFF
NO YES YES YES
(ON/OFF setting of TARGET TRACK is not displayed on the IMO type)
4-26
Table 4.4.6 Functions for Radar Type
Differences in Functions Type Functions

IMO, A 0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/12/24/48/96
Range
B, C 0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1.5/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/32/48/96
IMO, A Rader/Rader+Plotter
Handling of chart
B, C Rader/Plotter/Rader+Plotter
IMO IEC61162 2nd ED NMEA Ver-3.0 (Equivalent)
NAV data
A, B, C IEC61162 NMEA Ver-1.5 (Equivalent)
DATUM error is displayed when there is no DTM (WSG-84)
IMO
sentence.
When handling DTM
DATUM error is not displayed even when there is no DTM sentence.
Sentence error
A, B, C However, when DTM data is discontinued, DATUM error is
displayed.
When DTM is WGS-84, ON/OFF of “[Menu]->4->8:
When handling AIS
IMO AIS FUNCTION” is enabled. When DTM is other than WGS-84, AIS
display, there is no DTM
function is turned off.
sentence error.
A, B, C No restriction
EPFS error display when IMO EPFS error is displayed.
GPS accuracy is changed. A, B, C EPFS error is not displayed.
ALARM 1 is set in a range of 3 to 6 NM. There is no restriction on
IMO
Range of Alarm Zone the range of ALARM 2.
A, B, C There is no restriction either on ALARM 1 and ALARM 2.
IMO, A One (1)
Cursor data box When “3: SET DRIFT” is set to OFF in the [SPD] icon menu, one
B, C
more cursor data box is added.
4-27
4.4.10 PM GAIN ADJ

The performance monitor function allows checking for the reduction of transmission
output, and reception sensitivity. Make adjustment of PM GAIN ADJ at the time of
installing, and when Magnetron or RF unit is replaced.
1. Procedure for adjustment

1. Select “[INITIALIZE] -> [INSTALLATION] -> 0. PM GAIN ADJ”
Note: When “ 0. PM GAIN ADJ ” is selected, the following items are

automatically set up.
- RANGE: 24 NM - AUTO FTC: OFF - BLIND SECTOR: OFF

- PULSE: LONG - IR: 2 - TUNE: AUTO
- ES: OFF - STC: 0 （STC VR Disabled）
- EAV: OFF - FTC: 0 （FTC VR Disabled）
2. Adjust [GAIN] VR so as to allow a small amount of noise. The gain at that time is
approximately “70”.
3. Adjust the PM gain by rotaging the wheel of the track ball so as to allow a slight
amount of the second ring. Numerical input (0 to 255) from the keyboard can also be
accepted for the PM GAIN. “255” is the maximum attenuation level (i.e. lowest
video input levels.)
10dB
Noise Level
First ring
No.1 Ring Echo No.2 Ring Echo
Make adjustment so as to allow a slight

amount of the second ring.
Fig. 4.4.9 PM Adjustment
4-28
2. Turning on the performance monitor

1. Set “[MENU] -> 1: [ECHO] -> 4: PM” to ON. Adjusted setting conditions are
automatically set up.
2. Check the transmission/reception performance by observing the strength of ring
echoes. If ring echoes look pale, the transmit/receive gain is reduced.
3. After checking is complete, set “[MENU] -> 1: [ECHO] -> 4: PM” to “OFF”. The
screen returns to the original display.
Note:
Why the second ring should be pale?
In the PM unit, the diference in gain between the 1st and 2nd rings is set to 10 dB.
Being pale the 2nd ring and making it the same level as the noise level means that the
1st ring echo is adjusted 10 dB higher than the noise level. If the 1st ring disappears, it
is known that the transmit, receive or transmit/receive gain is reduced by 10 dB. For
this reason, you can find the radar sensitivity from the status of the ring echoes.
Previous PM echo
For exmple, the figure below show the FAR-2805 PM picture, which allows
individual determination of degradation in reception and transmission performance
based on the PM echo.
The 1st ring echo is set to 12 NM and shows the degradation of reception and
transmission output according to its distance. Output is degraded by -3 dB/3 NM. The
interval between ring echoes is 3 dB. If the 4th ring disappears, for instance, you can
find that receive sentences have reduced to 3 dB.
12NM
0dB
-3dB
-6dB
-9dB
Fig. 4.4.10 Previous PM Echo
4-29
4.4.11 OWN SHIP INFO

INITIALIZE -> 5
“2: LENGTH/WIDTH” data is used to draw the OWN SHIP MARK.
“3: SCANNER POSN” and “6: CONNING POSN” data determine the origin of a radar
graphic data. The figures below show the origin of range ring by the selection of [REF
POINT]. The graphic data, VRM, EBL, ARPA target, cursor and positioning of AIS
target mark are caluculated from the [REF POINT]. Selecting the “CONN POSN”,
those data coincides with the crew’s eye even if the scanner position is away from the
conning position.
“4, 5: GPS ANT POSN” data is used for L/L calculation of the cursor position on the
screen. The displayed position data in the [OS POSN] is the GPS antenna position.
Note:
“[INSTALLATION] -> 5: RADAR POSN” data is used for video signal processing of
echo trails and echo averages.
SCANNER POSN CONNING POSN
Fig. 4.4.11 SCANNER POSN and CONNING POSN View
4-30
4.4.12 ARP PRESET

INITIALIZE -> 6
1. Setting of TTM OUTPUT
Specifies the ARPA output data among the “OFF/REL/TRUE”. The output port is
selected in “[INITIALIZE] -> 8 -> 5: INS”
- [J619]: ECDIS
- [J620]: TRACK CONTROL
- [NETWORK]: LAN
See page. 4-38 for details.
2. Setting of ARP PRESET

Basically there is no need for changing the default values in “ARP PRESET” -> 3, 4, 5,
6, 7 and 8 menus.
When restoring the setting of “6: ARPA PRESET” menu for the default setting, select
[Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> “0. DEFAULT” and click the left button of the track ball 3 times.
3. [ARPA SENSOR DATA]

This is a function for monitoring ARPA status.
ARPA data for

manufactural engineers
Fig. 4.4.12 Display of ARPA SENSOR DATA (1/2) and (2/2)
4-31
ARPA SENSOR DATA (1/2)
Table 4.4.7 ARPA SENSOR DATA (1/2)
ARPA SENSOR DATA

Description
(1/2)
DRIFT= OFF/xx.xKT Indicates the manually set drift.
When the ARPA CPU is activated, time is incremented up every
CPU COUNTER= xxxxx
second.
CPU STATUS= 00000 Indicates “0000” when the CPU is running.
AUTO= xx Indicates the number of auto acquisition targets.
MAN= xx Indicates the number of manual acquisition targets.
LOST= xx Indicates the number of lost targets.
Indicates the interval of inputted heading data. Antenna revolution:
SCAN= xxxx Approximately 250 for 24 rpm. 12000 at the maximum when the
antenna is stopped. (60 rpm X 100)
Indicates the minimum number of echoes to be received successively
MIN HIT= xx
before acquisition.
Indicates the echo detection level.
E LEVEL= xxx
Set in “[ARPA PREST] - 4.ECHO LEVEL”.
ARPA SENSOR DATA (2/2)

[ARPA SENSOR DATA (2/2)] displays the ARPA data that is used by manufactural
engineers. When a data number to be displayed is specified in “2. DATA NO”, the data
is displayed. For instance, the data No. 0 is for the data regarding the number of input
echoes.
Note: Overview of ARPA software
Displayed data
Radar video signal
Echo Momentum
echo Interface
Detection estimate Monitor
ANT rotation signal sorting unit
unit unit
LOG/GYRO/GPS
Fig. 4.4.13 Overview of ARPA Software
How to process a lost target

When the target echo under tracking is not detected in consecutive nine scannings
(preset can be changed), that target is processed as a lost target and ARPA symbol
changes accordingly. A lost target can be re-acquired if the target echo is detected
before ARPA symbol is cancelled.
4-32
Table 4.4.8 Overview of ARPA Software
Part of processing Related setting Overview
Echo detection 3 MAX RANGE

Detects echoes and finds the
(SPU FPGA: ARPA 4 ECHO LEVEL
position.
Front end) 5 QV DISPLAY
Echo sorting Sort echoes appropriate for a

7 [ACQ PRESET]
(SPU FPGA) target.
Finds the target position and

Momentum estimate
8 [TRACK PRESET] speed. (Averag in FILTER
(ARPA CPU)
RESPONSE)
Select REL or TRUE. Specify a port in the setting of

Interface 2 TTM OUTPUT
“OTHER -> 5 INS”.
4-33
4.4.13 NETWORK
INITIALIZE -> 7
1. Checking of IP address
IP address when connected with the LAN can be checked in this menu. The radar IP
address is automatically assigned by setting the radar number in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4:
RADAR NO.
Table 4.4.9 Default Values of Radar RADAR IP address
RADAR NO. IP address Subnet mask Default gateway

1 172.031.003.006
2 172.031.003.007
3 172.031.003.008
4 172.031.003.009
255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000
5 172.031.003.010
6 172.031.003.011
7 172.031.003.012
8 172.031.003.013
“CARD 1 IP ADDRESS” and “CARD 2 IP ADDRESS”are displayed when the card

interface unit: CU-200 is recognized (communicated with) by RPU-013.
See page. 4-48 for setting the “CARD 2 IP ADDRESS”.
When the CU-200 and the RPU-013 are not communicated, you cannot open [MENU]
-> 6: CARD menu.
The Drive (A/B and C/D) displayed in [MENU] -> 6 -> 2: DRIVE SELECT is
automatically assigned according to the card IP address.
Table 4.4.10 Drive Assignment
Drive assignment
CU-200 IP adress Subnet mask Default gateway [MENU]->[6 CARD]->
2. DRIVE SELECT
CARD 1 172.031.014.100 A (Left slot) / B (Right slot)
255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000
CARD 2 172.031.014.101 C (Left slot) / D (Right slot)
4-34
2. Changing of IP address
Never change the IP address except for special types specified below.
If the IP address is improperly changed, the system may fail to work properly.
In order to allow the Inter switch function of the radar to work properly between
networks, it is required to set up the IP address specified to the network, subnet mask,
default gateway and destination. Connection should be one-to-one connection according
to the 100 Base-Tx. Detailed equipment and specifications are not described here.
The IP address can also be changed on CU-200. (Only one network.) It cannot be shared
among multiple networks.
Note that IP address of CU-200 can be rewrite, and the program versions of CU-200 are
0359209-01.02 or later.
IP: 172.31.3.6 IP: 192.168.1.1
FAR-2xx7 FAR-2xx7
Router
Series Series Note:
The DESTINATION setting
Gateway: Gateway: has to set the IP address of
172.31.3.254 192.168.1.254
the other radar.
RADAR NO.(ANT) :1 RADAR NO.(ANT) :2
IP ADDRESS :172.31.3.6 IP ADDRESS :192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK :255.255.0.0 SUBNET MASK :255.255.0.0
GATEWAY :172.31.3.254 GATEWAY :192.168.1.254
DESTINATION :192.168.1.1 DESTINATION :172.31.3.6
Fig. 4.4.14 Example of Network Connection
Note 1: Changing the IP address of the radar
Procedure
1. Press the [Menu] key 5 times while holding down the [1] key to open the
“INITIALIZE” menu.
2. Select the radar number of the own radar in “INITIALIZE -> 4: INSTALLATION
-> 4: RADAR NO”.
3. When the message “Completed!! Power on restart.” is displayed, restart the power.
4. Press the [2], [3] and [4] keys in order while holding down the [1] key to call up the
“FACTORY” menu.
5. Press the [ENT] key 5 times while holding down the [1] key to call up the
4-35
Open “INITIALIZE -> 7: NETWORK” menu. You can find “2 [NETWORK SETTIG]”
menu added to the “NETWORK” menu.
6. When you open the “2 [NETWORK SETTIG]” menu, the “1 [RADAR]”, “2
[CARD 1]” and “3 [CARD 2]” menus are displayed.
7. Select “1 [RADAR]” and set the data of the IP address and Subnet mask.
8. When the setting is complete, select “YES” in “6 WRITE SETTING” and click the
left button. When “YES” is selected, the YES. is shown in the box.
9. When the message “Completed!! Power on restart.” Is displayed, restart the power.
10. Call up the “INITIALIZE” menu again and make sure that the address has been
changed in “8 NETWORK”.
How to Reset the Radar IP address to the Default

1. Press the [Menu] key 5 times while holding down the [1] key to call up the
2. Select “INITIALIZE -> 4: INSTALLATION -> 4: RADAR NO” and click the left
button.
3. When the message “Completed!! Power on restart.” is displayed, restart the power.
4. Call up the “INITIALIZE” menu again and make sure that the IP address has been
reset to the default in “8 NETWORK”.
4-36
Note 2: Changing the IP address of the CARD-1 and CARD-2

The IP address specified to the flash memory of CU-200 can be rewritten by the
operation from the radar.
Procedure
1. Follow the same steps 4 to 7 as for the procedure for changing the radar IP address.
2. Select [CARD x] to be changed and set the data of the IP address and Subnet mask.
3. When the setting is complete, select “YES” in “6 WRITE SETTING” and click the
left button. When “YES” is selected, the YES. is shown in the box.
4. When the “YES” display returns to the normal display, restart the power.
5. Call up the “INITIALIZE” menu again and make sure that the IP address has been
changed in “8 NETWORK”.
Note:
Even if the IP address is changed, allocation of the drive is specified A/B for
CARD-1 and C/D for CARD-2.
How to Reset the Card IP Address to the Default

See page.4-49.
1. Set “INIT” of the DIP SW: S1 of CU-200 to ON and turn on the power.
2. Wait until CR2 beside the DIP SW starts to blink.
3. Restart the power.
4. Call up the “INITIALIZE” menu again and make sure that the setting has been reset
to the default in “8 NETWORK”.
Note
After the IP address of CU-200 connected with the LAN is changed, be sure to
restart the power for other radars and HUB-100 connected with the LAN.
4-37
4.4.14 INS
INITIALIZE -> 8: OTHER -> 5
This is for the selection of the port of the INS (Integrated Navigational System).
Set [Menu] -> 0 ->6 -> 2:TTM OUTPUT to “REL” or “TRUE”.
Table 4.4.11 TTM OUTPUT and INS Setting
TTM OUTPUT INS

setting setting IN/OUT DATA
Port
OFF REL TRUE OFF SRIAL LAN
J619: ECDIS X X X OUT TTM
J620: TRACK CONTROL X X X IN/OUT ECDIS*
LAN（NETWORK） X X X IN/OUT ECDIS*
* ECDIS-related sentence
ECDIS-related input sentence (INS)
GLL, GGA, FUGLL, DTMOSD, ZDA, DPT, MWV, PAESP, PAESC, PAESF,
PLSPL, PLSPS, PAESW, PAESN
NAV data-related input sentence (NAV)

GGA, GLL, RMC, RMA, BWR, BWC, RMB, ZDA, DPT, DBT, DBS, MTW,
MWV, VWT, VWR, VDR, WPL, RTE, DTM, VBW, VHW, VTG, HDT
Output sentence
OSD / PAESP / TTM* / PFEC, RAssd / RSD
* To output TTM data
Set [Menu] -> 0 ->6 -> 2:TTM OUTPUT to “REL” or “TRUE”.
Note:
By the above setting, the items of [Menu] -> 2 -> 7 are changed.
- TTM OUTPUT: REL or TRUE
[Menu] -> 2 -> 7: [INS MARK]
Make the setting of USER CHART, CURVED EBL, CHART SYMBOL,
NOTE BOOK and RUTE associated with INS.
- TTM OUTPUT: OFF
[Menu] -> 2 -> 7: [BARGE MARK]
Make the setting of ON/OFF, BARGE MARK SIZE and ARANGEMENT for
the display of BARGE MARK.
4-38
4.5 Jumper Setting of Terminal Board
[J656]: HDG port jumper
[J655]: AIS port jumper
Fig. 4.5.1 Location of Jumpers on Terminal Board
The interface circuit of both ports is as shown below.
TERMINAL p.c.b
Set position
GND2
Floating
common
2 3 11 14
ST1 ST2 AIS port: [J655]
GND2 Vcc2
1 Vcc 420kHz HDG port: [J656]
A RDx-B
16
RD RO 3
28 R 330 x 3
B
1 2 RDx-A
AIS/HDG sensor
RE 15
27
RO2
17
(100Ω)
IEC-61162-2
LTC1535
Y TDx-B
DE 13
26
TD DI D
TDx-A
25 Z 12
SLO COMMON
4 GND 18
GND
Logic common
Fig. 4.5.2 Interface circuit of AIS and HDG Ports
4-39
4.5.1 Jumper of AIS port: [J655]

This port complies with IEC-61162-2 (38.4 kbps/RS-422).
This is the setting on whether to add terminator 100 ohm (330 ohm x 3) between AIS
RD-A and RD-B or not.
When multiple devices such as ECDIS and radar are connected to one TD-A/B port of
the AIS unit, install a terminator on a device that has the longest wiring among these
devices. This setting is intended to meet the specifications for the single-talker and
multi-listener stipulated in IEC61162-2.
Table 4.5.1 Setting of [J655]
Jumper plug AIS TD-A/B line

Factory setting
J655 Multiple connection Single connection
1 AIS RD-A Open Jumper
Jumper between 1 and 2
between 1 and 2
2 AIS RD-B Jumper between 2 and 3 (With terminator)
(With terminator)
(Without terminator)
3 N.C Open Open
- AIS TD
- HDG SENSOR
Terminator Terminator
Not used Used
FAR FAR
Fig. 4.5.3 Location of the Terminator
4.5.2 Jumper of HDG Sensor Prot: [J656]

This port is a type in compliance with IEC-61162-2. (38.4 kbps/RS-422)
This is the setting on whether to add terminator 100 ohm (330 ohm x 3) between HDG
RD-A and RD-B or not.
The setting is the same as for the AIS port mentioned above. So read the description
given above by replacing AIS with HDG.
Table 4.5.2 Setting of [J656]
Jumper plug HDG TD-A/B line

Factory setting
J656 Multiple connection Single connection
1 HDG-A side Open Jumper
Jumper between 1 and 2
between 1 and 2
2 HDG-B side Jumper between 2 and 3 (With terminator)
(With erminator)
(Without terminator))
3 N.C Open Open
4-40
4.6 Setting of Monitor Unit
4.6 Setting of Monitor Unit

This is the setting of S1 of the SPU board according to a connected monitor. It can be
checked by executing [MENU] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2: SELF TEST. See Page.6-4 for details.
Information related to the monitor is given in page.7-76.
Table 4.6.1 Setting of S1 on the SPU board
SXGA monitor: UXGA monitor:

S1 MU-201CR MU-231CR FAR-21xx-BB* Default
(FAR-21xx) (FAR-28xx)
1 OFF ON OFF OFF
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF
Normally OFF
4 OFF
* If S1-#1/2 is set to OFF/ON,

- Brilliance control signals included in the DVI signals are not outputted. Make adjustments of
the brilliance on the monitor side.
- The [BRILL] box bar display on the lower left screen disappears.
SXGA: Super eXtended Graphics Array

The resolution is 1280×1024 pixels, which is slightly larger than that of XGA (1024×768
pixels) in height and width. The resolution aspect ratio is 5:4.
UXGA: Ultra eXtended Graphics Array
The resolution is 1600×1200 pixels, which is larger than that of XGA (1024×768 pixels). The
pixel aspect ratio is 4:3.
SPU board
03P9337
Dip SW: S1
Fig. 4.6.1 Location of S1 on the SPU Board
4-41
4.7 Setting of AD-100 or GC-10

This is the setting for AD-100 or GC-10 (64P1106-99).
This board outputs both of the AD format and the NMEA data. Basically make the
setting so as to use data in the AD format.
- For input in AD format
Set the transmission cycle to 25 msec.
- For input in NMEA data
Set to Ver-2.0, 38,400 bps and transmission cycle to 25 msec.
For FURUNO technical information on the AD converter, refer to FQ4-2004-016.
RPU-013
Gyro compass J7(5p)

R1/R2 AD DATA/CLK
J5(3p) J8(5p) J608
J9(5p) (AD CONVERTER)
J4(5p)
GC Control
S1/S2/S3 J1(14p) J603(GC-10)
or Terminal p.c.b
NMEA Ver-2.0
HDT/38.4kbps/25msec
J6(4p) J656(HEADING)
GC-10
Fig. 4.7.1 Connection of GC-10
The related setting:

Table 4.7.1 Related Setting
For data input

Set item For input of NMEA data
in AD format
1: HDG SOURCE AD-10 SERIAL
[HDG] icon menu
2: GC-10 SETTING Set HDG value
Jumper plug of [J656]: See page.4-40
terminal board (38.4 kbps)
4-42
Table 4.7.2 Overview of Factory Setting

*” Ver” represents the version of the program.
Item Factory setting Recommended setting

Gyro type AC synchro
Excitation frequency 50/60 Hz
Rotor voltage 60 VAC to 135 VAC
Make the setting according
Stator voltage 60 VAC to 135 VAC
to the connected gyro.
Ratio 360x
30 VAC to 135 VAC
Supply voltage
40 VDC to 100 VDC
- NMEA Ver : 1.5
- Baud rate : 4800 bps When NMEA is used,
- Talker name* : AG (Ver-03, 04) - NMEA Ver-2.0
NMEA output : HE (Ver-05) - 38,400 bps
- Interval : 1 second - Output
interval 25 ms
- Sentence : HDT＋VHW
Self-test (Enable) Do not do self test (Disable) Set whichever desired
AD format data - J7, 8, 9 → 25 ms
Use at “25 ms”
transmission interval - J10, 11, 12 → 200 ms
Ver-05
AD-100: Enable Set as “Disable”
Power-off function* GC: Disable
This function is not
available for Ver-03 and 04.
Enable (Ver-03, 04)
(AD data is not output when the
disconnection of “Stator” is detected.
Detection of “Stator” the only 25 ms AD format data .)
Set as “Enable”
disconnection Enable (Ver-05)
(When the disconnection of “Stator”
is detected, all AD output data are
stopped.)
Note:
When the GC board of the Ver-05 is incorporated in RPU-013, and the power-off function is set to
“Enable” and when power-off is detected, all the output data are stopped. When this happens, set
the HDG value in the [HDG] box menu again.
How to Check the Program Number

A label showing the specification is attached onto U1 of the GC board. You can
check the program number from the suffix of the marking.
U1 Program Ver
64S4097-0 Ver-03
64S4097-1 Ver-04
64S4097-2 Ver-05
4-43
4.7.1 Setting List

Table 4.7.3(1/2) Setting List
In the factory setting, all the DIP switches are set to OFF and jumpers are set to #1 except that JP1 is set
to #1, #2 and #3.
Segment Setting contents Setting conditions

SW 1
SW1-#1 #2 #3
OFF OFF OFF 360 x
SW1-#1, #2, #3 Ratio ON OFF OFF 180 x
OFF ON OFF 90 x
ON ON OFF 36 x
SW1-#4 #5 #6
OFF OFF OFF AC synchrous
OFF OFF OFF DC synchrous
SW1-#4, #5, #6 Gyro type
ON OFF OFF DC step system
OFF ON OFF Full-wave pulsating current
ON ON OFF Half-wave pulsating current
SW1-#7 #8
OFF OFF 50/60 Hz
SW1-#7, #8 Frequency ON OFF 400 Hz
OFF ON 500 Hz
ON ON DC
SW 2
SW2-#1
ON 20 VAC to 45 VAC
SW2-#1 Rotor voltage OFF 30 VAC to 70 VAC
ON 40 VAC to 90 VAC
OFF 60 VAC to 135 VAC
SW2-#2 #3
ON OFF 20 VAC to 45 VAC
OFF OFF 30 VAC to 70 VAC
SW2-#2, #3 Stator voltage ON OFF 40 VAC to 90 VAC
OFF OFF 60 VAC to 135 VAC
ON OFF 20 VDC to 60 VDC
OFF OFF 40 VDC to 100 VDC
SW2-#4
SW2-#4 Self test ON: Self-test “YES”
OFF:Self- test “NO”
SW2-#5 #6 Interval Sentence
OFF OFF 1s HDT＋VHW
SW2-#5, #6 ON OFF 200 ms HDT
NMEA output interval
(See Table 4.7.4) OFF ON 100 ms HDT
setting and output
ON ON 25 ms HDT
sentence/Baud rate.
*The baud rate is determined according to the setting of
SW3-#2.
-OFF: Enable (When detected, AD outputs stop on 25 ms
Detection of “Stator”
SW2-#7 interval only.)
disconnection
- ON: Disable
SW2-#8 CPU reset Reset by switching ON -> OFF.
4-44
Table 4.7.3(2/2) Setting List
SW 3
SW3-#1
NMEA Ver SW3-#1 OFF: Ver 1.5 / ON: Ver 2.0
(See Table 4.7.5)
SW3-#2 Baud rate SW3-#2 OFF: 4,800 bps / ON: 38,400 bps
Ver03, 04:
SW3-#3 SW3-#3 OFF: AG / ON: HE
Talker name
(Setting according
Ver05:
to the program) SW3-#3 OFF: Disable / ON: Enable
Power-off function
Jumper: JP1 – JP7
#1, #2, #3 AC synchrous
JP1 Gyro type #2, #3, #4 DC synchrous
#4, #5, #6 DC step
#2 20 VAC to 70 VAC, 20 VDC to 100VDC
JP2 Stator voltage
#1 40 VAC to 135 VAC
#2 20 VAC to 70 VAC
JP3 Rotor voltage
#1 40 VAC to 135 VAC
- JP4-#2, JP5-#2
JP4 20 VAC to 45 VAC, 20VDC to 60 VDC
Operating voltage
- JP4-#1, JP5-#1
JP5 30 VAC to 135 VAC, 40 VDC to 100 VDC
JP6 AD format data
25 ms or 200 ms
JP7 TX interval
Table 4.7.4 NMEA output Interval, Output Sentences and Baud rate
SW2 setting Function

SW2-#5 SW2-#6 Output interval Output sentence Baud rate
OFF OFF 1s HDT＋VHW
Depends on the
ON OFF 200 ms HDT setting of SW3-#2.
OFF ON 100 ms HDT
ON ON 25 ms HDT Fixed at 38,400 bps
When 200 ms, 100 ms or 25 ms is selected for the output interval, the output sentence is HDT only.
When 25 ms is selected, the Baud rate is fixed at 38,400 bps.
4-45
Table 4.7.5 Setting of Baud Rate, Version and Talker Name
Fucntion setting
SW3 setting
NMEA version Baud rateNote-1 Talker name/Power-off function
OFF 1.5
SW3-#1
ON 2.0
OFF 4,800 bps
SW3-#2
ON 38,400 bps
AG (Heading/track
OFF
SW3-#3Note-2 Controller (autopilot) general)
ON HE (Heading sensor; gyro/north seeking)
OFF Disable
SW3-#3Note-3
ON Enable
Note-1 When the output interval is set to 25 ms (SW2-#5)and #6 are set to ON, the Baud rate is fixed at
38,400 bps.
Note-2 In the program Ver-03 and 04, the talker name is set here.
Note-3 In the program Ver-05, the power-off function is set and the talker name is fixed to HE.
4-46
4.7.2 Location of Parts
JP4, 5: Operating voltage setting
SW3:
JP4 Baud rate
Version
JP5 Ver03, 04: Talker name
Ver05: Power-off function
JP2: Stator voltage setting

SW2:
JP3: Rotor voltage setting JP3 JP2 - Rotor voltage
SW3
- Stator voltage
- Self test
- NMEA output interval
etc.
J1: Gyro type setting JP1 SW1:
- Ratio
- Gyro type
- Frequency setting
SW１ SW2
JP6, 7:
JP6 JP7 AD output interval
(25 ms/200 ms)
J5: Rotor signal input
J4: Stator signal input J6: J7-12:

NMEA output port Data output port
J7, 8, 9 -> 25 ms
CR21: CPU RUN J10, 11, 12 -> 200 ms
(OK when the LED blinks)
Fig. 4.7.2 Location of 64P1106-99 Board
4-47
4.8 Add to the Memory Card I/F: CU-200
4.8 Addition to the Memory Card I/F: CU-200

When the second CU-200 unit is connected to the network, the IP address of the second
unit should be changed. Up to two units can be connected to the network.
LAN
No.2 Note:
NETWORK
CU-200 When connecting RPU-013 and CU-200
RPU-013 HUB LAN
directly, Cross cables are used. When the
LAN No.1 HUB-100 is used for the connection,
(Straight cable)
CU-200
LAN either straight cable or cross cable can be
(Straight cable)
used. The HUB-100 automatically detects
LAN (Cross cable)
all the ports and cable types.
Fig. 4.8.1 Connection of CU-200
Table 4.8.1 Setting of IP address of CU-200
S1 No.1 CU-200 No.2 CU-200 Default

1 INIT OFF OFF OFF
2 IP2 OFF OFF OFF
3 IP1 OFF OFF OFF
4 IP0 OFF ON OFF
．Setting
1．
1. Turn the power off.
2. Set IP0 and INIT of DIP switch (S1) to ON.
3. Turn the power on and wait until CR2 starts to blink.
4. When CR2 starts to blink, turn the power off and return INIT of S1 to OFF.
5. IP address was changed from 172.031.014.100 to 172.031.014.101.
S1 (DIP SW)
#1: INIT #3: IP1 #2: P2 #4: IP0
CR2: CPU (U12) RUN

Blinks for every second.
NET-100 board
CARD CPU board

(03P9333)
Fig. 4.8.2 Location of S1 on CU-200
4-48
4.8 Add to the Memory Card I/F: CU-200
How to return the original setting

1. Turn the power off.
2. Set IP0 of DIP switch (S1) to OFF and INIT to ON.
3. Turn the power on and wait until CR2 starts to blink.
4. When CR2 starts to blink, turn the power off and return INIT of S1 to OFF.
5. IP address was changed from 172.031.014.101 to 172.031.014.100.
．Confirmation of IP address
2．
You can check the radar IP address, “Card 1 IP address” and “Card 2 IP address” on
“[MENU] -> 0 -> 7:NETWORK”.
“CARD x IP ADDRESS” appears when CU-200 is recognized.
Table 4.8.2 Assignment of IP address and Drive
Assignment of drive
CU-200 IP address
[MENU]->[6 CARD]->2. DRIVE SELECT
CARD 1 172.031.014.100 A (Left slot) / B (Right slot)
CARD 2 172.031.014.101 C (Left slot) / D (Right slot)
Note
After the IP address of CU-200 connected with the LAN is changed, be sure to
restart the power for other radars and HUB-100 connected with the LAN.
4-49
4.9 Selection of NAV DATA Input: [OS POSN]

4.9.1 Setting of [OS POSN] -> 1: NAV AID
NAV DATA input can be selected by switching the “1: NAV AID” on the [OS POSN] box
menu. The table below shows input ports according to the setting. See page. 6-13 for
handling of I/O sentences for each port.
When the “OS POSN” is set to GPS1 data, the NAV data from the NAV port (J606) is
used. When it is set to GPS2, data is used from ports in the priority order shown in Table
4.9.1.
Data to be used are following sentences.
GGA, RMC, GLL, VTG, DTM
The priority order for using sentences other than mentioned above is shown in Table 4.9.2.
To check the monitor related to the NAV data, execute [MENU] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2: SELF
TEST. Refer to page.6-9 for details.
Table 4.9.1 Priority of POS, COG, SOG and DTM Sentences

NAV data input method
Setting of TRACK
NAV LOG HEADING RS232C NETWORKNote NETWORKNote
[OS POSN] CONTROL
(J606) (J607) (J605) (J601) (LAN INS) (LAN NAV)
(J620)
GPS 1 1
GPS 2 5 4 3 2 1
- POS alone is manually inputted.
DR: DEAD - When the setting is changed to DR, the SOG/COG are inputted from the input port “OS
RECKONNING POSN” before it is set to DR. Once the power is restarted after setting to DR, they are
inputted from the J606 (GPS1) port.
LAN 1
Table 4.9.2 Priority of Other than POS, COG, SOG and DTM
Order of priority
TRACK
NAV LOG HEADING RS232C NETWORKNote NETWORKNote
CONTROL
(J606) (J607) (J605) (J601) (LAN INS) (LAN NAV)
(J620)
7 6 5 4 3 1 2
Note:
[NETWORK] port is assigned with the port number for the NAV data “10021”and the port
number for the INS data “10028”.
4-50
Remarks: In IMO type

When [MENU] -> 4 -> 8: AIS FUNCTION is set to ON,
- [OWN POSN] -> 1.NAV AID -> DEAD RECKNING is disabled.
- [SPD] -> 3. SET DRIFT is fixed to OFF.
When DTM sentence is WGS-84

- [Menu] -> 4 -> 8: AIS FUNCTION can be switched ON and OFF.
When DTM sentence is other than WGS-84
- [Menu] -> 4 -> 8: AIS FUNCTION is not displayed.
Acceptable sentences are:
- IEC-61162 Ed-2 (NMEA Ver-03) is acceptable and Check sum, Mode Indicator and
Status fields are checked. NMEA Ver-15 and 2.0 is receivable by the radar type A,
B, C or W.
4.9.2 Setting of [OS POSN] -> 3: SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT

The NAV data used by one radar can share to the other radar via LAN.
However, since HDG data is not shared, it should be inputted for each radar.
The radar setting on the sending side is as follows:
- Set [OS POSN] -> 3. SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT to “ON”.
- Set [OS POSN] -> 1. NAV AID to GPS input port GPS-1 or GPS-2.
In order to avoid data crash, the setting on the receiving side is as follows:
- Set [OS POSN] -> 3. SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT to “OFF”.
- Set [OS POSN] -> 1.NAV AID to “LAN”.
Note:
The LAN port is assigned with port numbers “10021” for NAV data and “10028” for INS
data.
Table 4.9.3 Setting of [OS POSN] -> 3.SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
[OS POSN] Setting Contents of transmission and reception of LAN port

TX: Outputs NMEA in use (Except for HDG)
ON
3. SIO DATA LAN RX: Receives data
OUTPUT TX: Stops output
OFF
RX: Receives data
4-51
Example of LAN connection setting

1. Setting for sharing NAV data from the radar No.1
Table 4.9.4 Sharing the NAV data via radar-1
No.1 No.2 No.x

[OS POSN]
(NAV data Tx) (NAV data Rx) (NAV data Rx)
1. NAV AID Select GPS data input port
LAN LAN
(GPS1/GPS2/LAN) (GPS1/GPS2)
3. SIO DATA LAN
ON OFF OFF
OUTPUT (ON/OFF)
No.x FAR- LAN
HDG data
xx.xx.xxx S
xxx.xx.xxx E NAV data
HUB
NAV data
NAV data NAV(L/L, SPD) data
NAV(L/L, SPD) data LAN
No.1 FAR- LAN No.2 FAR-
HDG data HDG data

xx.xx.xxx S xx.xx.xxx S
xxx.xx.xxx E xxx.xx.xxx E
INS Port No.10028 Input the HDG data for each radar.
NMEA Port No. 10021
Fig. 4.9.1 Example of LAN connection-1
2. Setting for sharing the NAV data from INS

This setting is based on the assumption, and NAV data is outputted via [LAN] port from
INS.
LAN LAN NAV(L/L, SPD) data

No.x FAR- ECDIS
INS
HDG data (ECDIS) HDG data
Input the HDG/NAV data.
xx.xx.xxx S
xxx.xx.xxx E NAV data NAV data
HUB
NAV data
NAV(L/L, SPD) data NAV data NAV(L/L, SPD) data
No.1 FAR- LAN LAN No.2 FAR- FAR
HDG data HDG data Input the HDG data for each
xx.xx.xxx S xx.xx.xxx S
xxx.xx.xxx E xxx.xx.xxx E radar.
INS Port No.10028
NMEA Port No. 10021
Fig. 4.9.2 Example of LAN connection-2
4-52
The setting of TTM OUTPUT and INS shown in the Table below is for running TTM
data over the LAN. It is not the setting for sharing NAV data.
Table 4.9.5 Sharing NAV Data via INS-2
No.1 No.2 No.x

Setting
(NAV Rx) (NAV Rx) (NAV Rx)
[OS POSN] -> 1. NAV AID
GPS 2Note GPS 2Note GPS 2Note
(GPS1/GPS2)
[OS POSN] ->
3.SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT OFF OFF OFF
(ON/OFF)
[INITIALIZE] ->6 -> 2.TTM
Select Select Select
OUTPUT
REL or TRUE REL or TRUE REL or TRUE
(OFF/REL/TRUE)
[INITIALIZE] -> 8 -> 5 INS
LAN LAN LAN
(OFF/SRIAL/LAN)
Note:
When inputting the POS data from INS to radars, set NAV AID setting to the GPS2 in the
respective radars.
3. Sharing NAV data with No.x radar from INS and with No.2 radar from No.1 radar
This setting assumes that NAV data is outputted from INS through the LAN port.
LAN LAN NAV(L/L, SPD) data

No.x FAR-
INS
HDG data (ECDIS) HDG data
xx.xx.xxx S NAV data
xxx.xx.xxx E
ECDIS
HUB
Input the HDG/NAV data.
NAV(L/L, SPD) data LAN

No.1 FAR- LAN No.2 FAR-
HDG data HDG data

xx.xx.xxx S xx.xx.xxx S FAR
xxx.xx.xxx E NAV data xxx.xx.xxx E
Input the HDG data for each
radar.
Fig. 4.9.3 Example of LAN Connection-3
4-53
The setting of TTM OUTPUT and INS shown in the Table below is for running TTM data
over the LAN. It is not the setting for sharing NAV data
Table 4.9.6 Sharing the NAV Data via INS-3
No.1 No.1 -> No.2 INS -> No.x

Setting
(NAV data Tx) (No.2: NAV data Rx) (No.x: NAV data Rx)
Select GPS data
[OS POSN] -> 1.NAV AID
input port LAN GPS2
(GPS1/GPS2/LAN)
(GPS1/GPS2)
[OS POSN] ->
3.SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT ON OFF OFF
(ON/OFF)
[INITIALIZE] -> 6 -> 2.TTM
Select Select Select
OUTPUT
REL or TRUE REL or TRUE REL or TRUE
(OFF/REL/TRUE)
[INITIALIZE] -> 8 -> 5 INS
LAN LAN LAN
(OFF/SERIAL/LAN)
4-54
4.10 Setting of RGB BUFF Board: 03P9229B

When inputting radar video signals to VDR, you should install the optional DVI I/F board
(SLB-FRN4-A), RGB BUFF board (03P9229-B) and RGB connector converter. The
monitor unit MU-201CR is connected with similar DVI interface board (SLB-FRN3-A),
which is not available for shared use.
DVI
RPU-013
J3(DVI) DVI
DVI I/F p.c.b MONITOR

J4(6p)
J9(10p)
Terminal p.c.b R/G/B/VS/HS

+12V
J615(5p)
75 Ohm Co-X
+5V/-12V
R Video
J1(13p)
R/G/B/VS/HS RGB CONNECTOR
G Video VDR
J3(3p) J2(15p) B Video
CONVERTER V Sync (VR-5000)
RGB BUFF p.c.b H Sync
Video Port
Fig. 4.10.1 Connection of VDR
4.10.1 Jumper Setting

Signals outputted to VDR are R, G and B video signals, and then V and H synchronizeing
signals. The items to be set are the polarity setting of synchronizing signals and input
voltage setting of the RGB BUFF board.
Table 4.10.1 Setting of RGB BUFF Board
VR-5000
Function Jumper Setting Factory setting
connection setting
H SYNC A-Comm. Reverse
J4 B-Comm.(Center) B-Comm.
polarity setting B-Comm. Retain
V SYNC A-Comm. Reverse
J5 B-Comm. (Center) B-Comm.
polarity setting B-Comm. Retain
Input voltage A - 5 V input B
J6 B
selection setting B - 12 V input (“-5V” is not used.)
Note: Comm: Jumper center
[A J5 B]: V SYNC polarity [A J4 B]: H SYNC polarity
[A J6 B]: Selecting Input

voltage
Fig. 4.10.2 Location of Jumper Plugs on RGB BUFF Board
4-55
Note: Differences of each RGB BUFF Board

Table 4.10.2 Setting of RGB BUFF Board
03P9229
Board 03P9229A 03P9229B
(FR-1500III,
Parts (FR-2xx5) (FAR-2xx7)
FR-1700)
R9 560 ohm 560 ohm 390 ohm
R10 560 330 390
R12 560 560 390
R13 560 330 390
R15 560 560 390
R16 560 330 390
R20 Not required 75 75
Label print None A B
4.10.2 Output of RGB BUFF board on FAR-2127
1.3
0V Note:
Each signal is measured under unloaded
condition.
Fig. 4.10.3 Video Signal Waveform
4.5 4.5
0V 0V
17 ms 15 us
RGB BUFF board RGB BUFF board
[J5]-B to “Retain”. [J4]-B to “Retain”.
Fig. 4.10.4 V-SYNC Signal Waveform Fig. 4.10.5 H-SYNC Signal Waveform
4-56
4.10.3 Setting of the Video Channel in the VDR
Table 4.10.3 Setting of the Video Channel in VDR
Item Setting
Channel # VD 1 VD 1 VD 1 VD 1
Channel ID FAR-28x7 FAR-21x7 FR-2105 FR2805
(Input the model name) (Input the model name) (Input the model name) (Input the model name)
Source NO.x RADAR NO.x RADAR NO.x RADAR NO.x RADAR
(Input the radar No.) (Input the radar No.) (Input the radar No.) (Input the radar No.)
Source type 1 1 1 1
Horizontal offsetNote-1 127 167 175 245
Vertical offset 37 37 40 17
Pll multiplier 847 847 847 1375
Horizontal sync
Negative Negative Positive Negative
polarityNote-2
Phase 192 192 192 48
Horizontal resolution 1280 1280 1280 1066
Vertical resolution 1024 1024 1024 800
VCO range 48 48 48 44
Save image to web Saved as JPEG Saved as JPEG Saved as JPEG Saved as JPEG
Debug level None None None None
15-bit 15-bit 15-bit
Color mask bit 6 - bit
(11111000 x 3) (11111000 x 3) (11111000 x 3)
Sample rate 15 Secs Fixed 15 Secs Fixed 15 Secs Fixed 15 Secs Fixed
Interlace type Alternate pixel Alternate pixel Alternate pixel Interlaced
Sync type Separate SYNC Separate SYNC Separate SYNC Separate SYNC
Radar model 1 – FR2115 1 – FR2115 1 – FR2115 0-User defined
Contrast/GAIN Red 128 128 128 100
Contrast/GAIN Green 128 128 128 100
Contrast/GAIN Blue 128 128 128 100
Brilliance/OFFSET
128 128 128 100
Red
Brilliance/OFFSET
128 128 128 100
Green
Brilliance/OFFSET
128 128 128 100
Blue
Note-1: Setting of horizontal offset

The setting differs according to the display screen size of S1-#1 and #2 of the SPU board. See
p.4-41.
Note-2: Setting of horizontal sync polarity
The setting of the polarity of synchronizing signal can also be made in the setting of JP-4 and 5
on the RGB BUFF board. If the polarity setting is not correct, discolored ares are appeared
when pictures reproduce on VDR.
4-57
4.11 Alarm Output Setting

4.11.1 SYSTEM FAIL alarm output setting
When the processor unit RPU-013 fails, SYSTEM FAIL ALARM detected by the control
unit is outputted from EXT ALARM terminal J612-#11/12 of RPU-013. The setting for
alarm output is executed as shown below.
1. RCU-014
Table 4.11.1 Setting of RCU-014:S36
Factory
S36 Function Setting
setting
SYSTEM FAIL ALARM
When RPU-013 and RCU-014 cannot ON Output
communicate with each other due to a
1 ON
problem on RPU-013, set whether to
output SYSTEM FAIL alarm signal from OFF Do not output
RPU-014 or not
Normally Close
ON In the event of alarm,
RELAY STATUS
relay is set to Open.
2 Setting of polarity of the alarm signal ON
Normally Open
(relay output).
OFF In the event of alarm,
relay is set to Close.
3 Unassigned OFF OFF
4 Unassigned OFF OFF
J507: SYSTEM FAIL
S36 (DIP SW)
Fig. 4.11.1 Location of RCU-014: S36
4-58
2. RCU-015 and 016

Table 4.11.2 Setting of RCU-014:S6
Factory
S6 Function Setting
Setting
SYSTEM FAIL ALARM ON Output
1 ON
The same as described for RCU-014 OFF Do not output
RELAY STATUS ON Normally Close
2 ON
The same as as described for RCU-014 OFF Normally Open
J527: SYSTEM FAIL
S6 (DIP SW)
Fig. 4.11.2 Location of S6 on RCU-015 and 16
3. Operation of SYSTEM FAIL ALARM

SYSTEM FAIL ALARM is outputted from the control unit (RCU-014) side. The control
unit regularly sends check signals to the processor unit (RPU-013). When there is no
response from the processor unit, the control unit judges as a communication error and
outputs “SYSTEM FAIL”. At this time, continuous beeps keep sounding and the LED of the
[ALARM ACK] key keeps blinking on the control unit. When there is a response of
“SYSTEM ALARM ACK” on the control unit keep blinking, from the alarm system side or
[ALARM ACK] key is pressed, beeping sounds on the control unit stops and the LED of
[ALARM ACK] key lights on. The I/O terminals of control unit are the same as those of
RCU-015.
Note:
When the communication with processor unit is disabled due to the problem on the control
unit side, “KEY” alarm is displayed in the ALARM box and the control unit gives beeping
sounds. The control unit does not output SYSTEM FAIL ALARM.
4-59
RPU-013 KEY RCU-014

J501
J602 REMOTE
TX/RX 0
J502
SYS FAIL H SYS FAIL H TX/RX 1
9 9
4 1
SYS FAIL C SYS FAIL N
10 10 SYS FAIL C
U21
3 2
MAIN CPU U12
EXT ALARM ACK N
J507 (PS7241 1B) U9
- ALARM 1 J622 SYS FAIL H U8 BZ
- ALARM 2 1 1
GND SYS FAIL C CPU SOUND
- ALARM 3 2
- ALARM 4
2 S36
U14
KEY (DIP SW) EMRI
SYS ACK N
SYS ACK H RADAR OK J506
1 to 8 9 12 11 3 1
GND
J612 GND 2
EXT
SYS FAIL 4
EXT ALARM ALARM ACK
ALARM SYSTEM
Fig 4.11.3 Diagram of System Fail Alarm Signal Output
Set as “Normally close”
SYSTEM FAIL ALARM --> NORMAL

SYSTEM FAIL ALARM SYSTEM FAIL ALARM
Power ON Occur resolved Power OFF
Closs
Delay
Power OFF Initializing 30sec 10sec

Open
BZ ON BZ OFF
[ALARM ACK] ON
BZ ON BZ OFF
Fig. 4.11.4 SYSTEM FAIL ALARM Sequence-1
Set as “Normally open”
SYSTEM FAIL ALARM --> INVERT

SYS FAIL ALARM SYS FAIL ALARM
Power ON Occur resolved Power OFF
Closs 10sec
Delay
Power OFF Initializing 30sec

Open
BZ ON BZ OFF
[ALARM ACK] ON
BZ ON BZ OFF
Fig. 4.11.5 SYSTEM FAIL ALARM Sequence-2
4-60
4.11.2 Setting of Alarm Output

This is the setting for outputting alarm detected by the processor unit (RPU-013). There are
four talarm ports. Respective alarm output items are set in [MENU] -> 3-> 6, 7, 8, 9:
ALARM OUT-1, 2, 3, 4.
Operations of the EXT ALARM terminals on the TB board are as follows.
- ALM-1, 2, 3: Normally Close. (During Power Off and Initializing - Close)
Driver is U10-12: PS7241 1B
- ALM-4 : Normally Open. (During Power Off and Initializing - Open)
Driver is U9: TLP176G TP
There is ALARM OUTPUT POLARITY in each setting item of Alarm OUTPU 1 to 4, and
then they can reverse the polarity of the alarm output.
RPU-013
SPU p.c.b
Terminal p.c.b
U31 EXT ALARM ACK N
I/F
MAIN CPU
4 ALARM1-0
Normal close 1
U21
3 ALARM1-1
Q4 2
U22 U12
I/F (PS7241 1B)
ALARM2-0
Same as
above ALARM2-1
(U11/Q3)
ALARM3-0
Same as KEY
above ALARM3-1
(U10/Q2) J602
SYS FAIL H
ALARM4-0 9
Normal open 1 4 SYS FAIL C
ALARM4-1 10
Q1
2 3
U9
(TLP176G TP)
SYS ACK H J622
1
ALARM 4
ALARM 3
ALARM 2
ALARM 1
GND
2
KEY
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 12 11
J612
EXT ALARM
ALARM SYSTEM
Fig. 4.11.6 ALARM Output Circuit
ALARM SYSTEM
RPU-013
400V max.
100mA max.
1
4 ALARM OUT x-0

1 2
3 ALARM OUT x-1

Q4 2
U12
(PS7241 1B)
Fig. 4.11.7 Connection of ALARM Output
4-61
Table 4.11.3 ALARM Output Setting
ALARM OUT 1, 2, 3, 4 Remarks

ALARM-1, 2: When applicable target within the TARGET
ALARM setting range is detected
TARGET ALARM Target alarm Note:
[Menu]->3->2:GURD ALARM MODE (IN/OUT)
[Menu]->3->3:GURD ALARM LEVEL (1-4)
When WATCH ALARM is set and the set time has been reached
WATCH ALARM Watch alarm Note:
[Menu]->3->4:WATCH ALARM (OFF/6/10/12/15/20 min)
When applicable target within the Guard Zone set in GZ-1 and 2
GUARD ZONE Guard
is detected
When the ARP target is lost (Even if the AIS target is lost, it is not
LOST TARGET Lost
outputted from ALM-1 to ALM-4.)
CPA LIMIT CPA When the setting targets in [CPA] and [TCPA] boxes are detected
AUTO ACQ TAG The number of auto When the number of automatically acquired targets set in [ARP]
FULL acquisition targets icon menu is reached
The number of
MAN ACQ TAG When the number of manually acquired targets set in [ARP] icon
manual acquisition
FULL menu is reached
targets
ARP SYSTEM
ARP system error When ARPA CPU stops
ERROR
Anatenna
AZIMUTH When BP from antenna cannot be detected on the SPU board
revolution signal
HEAD LINE Heding line When HP from antenna cannot be detected on the SPU board
When BP stops on the SPU board and trigger stops in normal
TRIGGER Trigger
operation
VIDEO Video When video signal from the TR unit can not be detected
When Gyro signals from [HDG SENSOR] and [GC-10] port
cannot be detected (AD format signal, HDT) or the gyro data is
GYRO Gyro
abnomal. *When the AD data is re-inputted, “HEAD SET” is
displayed. Adjust heading data, then change the Display mode.
LOG When LOG (BT) or LOG (WT) is selected in 1: SHIP SPEED of
Log
(LOG/EPFS) [SPD] box menu but the ship speed data is not inputted.
- When GPS1 or GPS2 is selected in 1: NAV AID of [OS POSN]
box menu but position data is not inputted
- When GPS is selected in 1:SHIP SPEED of [SPD] box menu but
EPFS Positioning system
ship speed data is not inputted from GPS
- Only IMO type
When GPS accuracy is changed
Deviation from When set in “[Menu]->8->5:NAV LINE WIDE” the ship’s position
XTE
NAV line is out of NAV line width. (e.g. from DGPS to GPS)
When entering the range set in [Menu]->8->4:ARIVALE WPT
ARRIVAL WPT Arrival at waypoint ALARM ship approaches to the waypoint within the range is out of
NAV line width. (e.g. from DGPS to GPS)
When the water depth is shallower than the setting in [Menu] -> 7
DEPTH Water depth
-> 4:DEPTH MARK
ALARM ACK When [ALALM] key is pressed, “ALARM” is turned on for a
ALARM ACK OUT
OUT second
Outputted every 5 seconds during operation
OPERATOR OPERATOR
Note: When OPERATOR FINESS setting is ON, other ALM
FINESS FINESS setting is all canceled.
4-62
Output of ALM-1, 2, 3
ALARM OUT POLARITY --> NORMAL
Power ON ALARM Occur ALARM resolved Power OFF
Closs
Delay
Power OFF Initializing
Open
BZ ON BZ OFF
[ALARM ACK] ON
ALARM OUT POLARITY --> INVERT
BZ ON BZ OFF
Closs
Delay
Open
BZ ON BZ OFF
[ALARM ACK] ON
BZ ON BZ OFF
Fig. 4.11.8 Output of ALM-1, 2, 3

Output of ALM-4
Closs
Delay

Open
BZ ON BZ OFF
[ALARM ACK] ON
BZ ON BZ OFF
ALARM OUT POLARITY --> INVERT

Closs
Delay

Open
BZ ON BZ OFF
[ALARM ACK] ON
BZ ON BZ OFF
Fig. 4.11.9 Output of ALM-4

Output of ALM-4
1sec
Power ON Power OFF
Closs Closs

Open
5sec
5sec
5sec
5sec
Key Operation Key Operation Key Operation Key Operation

Start Stop Start Stop
Fig. 4.11.10 Output of ALM-4: OPERATOR FINESS
4-63
4.12 Change of Power Input Type

The power specifications are:
RPU-013: 100 VAC, 220 VAC, 24 VDC
MU-201CR and MU-231CR: 100 VAC to 220 VAC, 24 VDC
F1
- 100 VAC: 10 A (125 V)
PWR board
- 220 VAC: 5 A (250 V)
- 24 VDC: 20 A (125 V)
FIL board
Fig. 4.12.1 Power Label of RPU-013
4.12.1 Changing AC Power Input

1. Jumper setting and adjustment
When changing the AC main type for the AC PWR board (03P9339A) and B (100 VAC),
and then C and D (220 VAC), it is required to make the setting of jumpers and make
adjustments of input overvoltage of this board.
R21: Adjustment of overvoltage VR
J108
220 VAC: Open
100 VAC: Jumper between 1-2, 4-7, 5-8
CR23：INPUT ERROR
Fig. 4.12.2 AC PWR Board
Table 4.12.1 Adjstment of over voltage protection circuit
4-64
Adjustment method
Overvoltage
Type Setting of J108 Setting of input power
protection Factory setting
voltage
adjustment
03P9339C, D
Open 288 VAC 282 to 294 VAC
(220 VAC) Point at which CR23
For is turned on by
03P9339A, B adjusting R21
1-2, 4-7, 5-8 144 VAC 141 to 147 VAC
(100 VAC)
Jumper
Note:
When the setting of “J108” is just changed without adjustments as menteioned above,
the operating voltage of the overvoltage protection circuit does not meet the specified
value.
- 220 VAC -> 100 VAC: approximately 130 VAC.
- 100 VAC -> 220 VAC: approximately 325 VAC.
Operation without re-adjustments may result in a failure of the equipment.
2. Circuit setting
The setting of J108 is the setting of the rectifier circuit and the voltage setting of the input
overvoltage protection circuit as shown below.
Doubler Rectifier
L31
CR26
+
AC IN C31
C26 R41 L32
= 280VAC
- C32 - 310VAC
CR8 J108
C27 R42
7/8 4/5
100VAC: Short
220VAC: Open
R19
J108 INPUT Voltage

Error DET
1 2
PR5V H
CR23
100VAC: Short
220VAC: Open VIN
U22
(RC9528)
4
PW CONT
R18
U11
Q12
R21
Q11
Fig. 4.12.3 AC PWR Board
4.12.2 Changing DC Power Input

P.C.Boards 03P9338A and 03P9338B are 12-24 V type. P.C.Boards (03P9338C and
03P9338D) are 24 V type. The setting of JP1 sets the input power type. This is the setting of
the operating voltage of the input power low volatage protection circuit. It is approximately
15 V in the 24 V type and approximately 8 V in the 12 to 24 V type.
4-65
1. Jumper setting
JP1:12V
JP1
Board Type
setting
03P9338A
Jumper 12-24 V
03P9338B
03P9338C
Open 24 V
03P9338D
Fig. 4.12.4 DC PWR Board
4.12.3 Change of power (AC <-> DC)

When you change the power between AC and DC, replace the FIL board and power fuse as
well as the PWR board together. See page. 6-41.
Table 4.12.2 When Change of Power
PWR board (ANT: rpm) FIL board

Power
AC type DC type AC type DC type
03P9339A (24 rpm)
100 VAC
03P9339B (42 rpm)
03P9341
03P9339C (24 rpm)
220 VAC
03P9339D (42 rpm)
03P9338C (24 rpm)
24 VDC
03P9338D (42 rpm)
03P9352
12 to 03P9338A (24 rpm)
24 VDC 03P9338B (42 rpm)
4-66
4.13 Change of Antenna Speed: RSB-096 and RSB-097

4.13.1 Combination of PWR board and gearbox
The model of antenna DC motor and the jumper setting of the PWR board determines the
antenna speed. The models applicable to this are RSB-096 and RSB-097 for FAR-2xx7.
S-band radars using the antenna AC motor are not applicable to this.
Table 4.13.1 Combination of PWR Board and Gearbox
PWR ANT speed PWR board setting Gearbox

Input power type
board (rpm) JP161 JP162 Model Motor
RSB-096
100 03P9339A 24 Open Open D8G-516
RSB-103
VAC
03P9339B 42/36Note: Short Short RSB-097 D8G-571
AC type
RSB-096
220 03P9339C 24 Open Open D8G-516
RSB-103
VAC Note:
03P9339D 42/36 Short Short RSB-097 D8G-571
RSB-096
12-24 03P9338A 24 Open Open D8G-516
RSB-103
VDC Note:
03P9338B 42/36 Short Short RSB-097 D8G-571
DC type
RSB-096
24 03P9338C 24 Open Open D8G-516
RSB-103
VDC
03P9338D 42/36Note: Short Short RSB-097 D8G-571
Note: The setting of menu box can change the antenna revolution to 42 rpm or 36 rpm. See the
next page for details.
- JP161/162 - JP161/162
- R168 - R168
- TP17 (B.P) - TP17 (B.P)
PWR (AC) board

PWR (DC) board
Fig. 4.13.1 Jumper Arrangement of AC/DC PWR Board
4-67
4.13.2 Change and adjustment of antenna speed

The PWR board of 42 rpm type is 03Pxxxxx-B and D types, and the PWR board of 24 rpm
type is 03Pxxxxx-A and C types.
When the Power SPEC is different from the Antenna motor SPEC, the desired antenna
speed cannot be achieved. For instance, if RSB-096 of 24 rpm type is used with the PWR
board of B and D types, the antenna motor power voltage becomes more than 30 V, which
can result in a damage of the antenna motor.
Change of SPEC
1. Make the setting of jumpers JP161 and 162
ANT speed PWR board setting

PWR board Gearbox
(rpm) JP161 JP162
03PxxxxA, C 24 Open Open RSB-096
03PxxxxB, D 42/36 Short Short RSB-097
2. Make adjustments of the B.P frequency according to the antenna speed. Connect the
frequency counter to TP17 and make adjustments at R168.
Adjustment
ANT speed
PWR board Adjusting
(rpm) Check point Adjusting value
position
03PxxxxA, C 24 144 + 5 Hz
R168 TP17 (B.P)
03PxxxxB, D 42/36 252 + 5 Hz (42 rpm)
To make adjustments of 03PxxxxB and D (42/36 rpm)

Set [MENU] -> 0 -> 3 -> 4: ANT REVOLUTION] to “AUTO”.
The antenna speed automatically changes according to the transmission pulse length.
Adjust the pulse length to 252 Hz at S2. See page. 4-17.
- S1, S2 -> 252 Hz: 42 rpm (Motor voltage, Approximately 24 VDC)

- M/L -> 204 to 288 Hz: 34 to 38 rpm (Motor voltage, Approximately 20 VDC)
RSB-097
42/36rpm
ANT Motor power
(24V/20V) RPU-013
BP
TP17
BP The antenna speed can be changed
SPU
p.b.c
ANT Speed
(Hi/Low) PWR p.c.b by “ANT Speed” signals.
(B/D type)
Fig. 4.13.2 Adjustment of Antenna Speed
4-68
4.14 Change of Transmission HV setting: HV-9017

The setting of jumpers JP1 and JP2 changes the transmission high voltage for TR units of 12
kW and 25 kW to 60 kW. TX output can be checked on “SER.NO.” of the nameplate of
RPU-013. The serial number differs according to the setting of the HV-9017 board.
- SER NO. 4317-xxxx -> 12 kW-type: HV-9017 A (310 to 350 V)
- SER NO. 4318-xxxx -> 25 kW or more: HV-9017 B (520 to 580 V)
Note:
The nameplate of a unit for overseas model includes the description of TX output. In Japanese
model, TX output is known from the description of “MODEL” and “APPROVED TYPE” on the
nameplate.
Nameplat of Japanese model
MODEL FAR-2127-20AF
RCS2FD9-25KP0N-4
R03019
Nameplat of oversea model
2003-12-19
2004-6
4318-0524
PROCESSOR UNIT MU-201CR
RPU-013 XN20AF-RSB-096
4318-0032
25kW. 30kW. 50kW. 60kW
Fig. 4.14.1 Example of RPU-013 Nameplate
HV-9017 board
J651: HV
Fig. 4.14.2 HV-9017 Board and HV Check points
4-69
4.14.1 Setup
Table 4.14.1 Setting of HV-9017
HV-9017
Radar type Transmission RPU-013
Jumper setting
(TR unit) output SER. NO. Type Adjustment Specification*
JP1 JP2
FAR-2x17
12 kW 4317-xxxx A COM-300V COM-330V Adjustment 310 to 350 V
(RTR-078)
FAR-2x27 of Main
25 kW Inverter
(RTR-079)
FAR-2x37S
30 kW Adjustments on
(RTR-080) the VR1 so that
4318-xxxx B COM-500V COM-330V 520 to 580 V
FAR-2827W 34.7-35.3 VDC
25 kW is achieved
(RTR-081)
between
FAR-2837SW TP1 and TP2.
30 kW
(RTR-082)
* As for the measurements, perform on the TB board: HV J651 and J482 on the HV-9017 board. Refer
to the previous page.
TP1 to TP4
VR1: Output voltage adjustment

Between TP1 and TP2
34.7 to 35.3 VDC
JP1
COM 300 V J482: HV output
500 V
Type JP1 JP2

A 300 V 330 V
B 500 V 330 V
C 300 V 260 V A/B type marking
D 300 V 300 V
E 500 V 300 V
JP2
COM 300 V
330 V
Fig. 4.14.3 HV-9017 Board
4-70
Transmission HV Protection Circuit

For instance, if the transmission high voltage 500 V for 25 kW type is used with 12 kW TR
unit, the protection circuit is activated to stop transmission.
High voltage is detected in TX high voltage input circuit on the MD board by dividing the
resistnace. The transmission high voltage detected in this way is compared with U22. If the
TX high voltage is higher than the specified value, TX triggers are stopped.
Tx-HV R1, 2 Mag.

Q1-4
R3, 4
From RFC p.c.b
TRIG 1-4 TRIG 1-4
R40 R40
X-band 12 kW TR unit: 39 kohm MD p.c.b

(03P9244)
X-band 25 kW TR unit: 18 kohm
S-band 30 kW TR unit: 18 kohm
R75
(CPU)
TX-HV PROTCT RF TXD/RXD
U19
R76
Including HV
RFC p.c.b DATA/ADD.
(03P9346) monitor signal
(GATE ARRY)
Compareter To MD p.c.b
R74
- TX-HV INHBIT N
U22 TRIG 1-4
R77 +
U17
REF 2P5
U4, 5
Fig. 4.14.2 Transmission HV Protection Circuit
Note:
1. TX pulse waveform differs depending on the setting of [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 6:MODEL.
Though this is not related to the operation of protection circuit, be sure to check the
MODEL setting.
2. To check TX high voltage on the TR unit side, set [MENU] -> 0 -> 3-> 5:ANT SW to
OFF and stop antenna rotaion. Then, execute a check.
3. The detected TX high voltage is inputted to U19 (CPU) and this value is used for “HV”
indication on the self-test display. The self-test is executed by [Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2 ->
2.
4-71
4.15 Checking of Thermal Relay Setting

4.15.1 PSU-007
In the FAR-2137S and 2837S, power is supplied to the antenna AC motor of the gearbox via
PSU-007. The threshold current of the thermal relay of PSU-007 is set according to the type
of the scanner unit.
SCANNER UNIT
RPU-013 J604 TB1 PSU-007

+12V
RU-xxxx See page 1-14.
Relay
Motor ON
K2 Thermar
relay
K1 3 OUT
3 IN
Ship’s Main
Fig. 4.15.1 AC Motor Power System Diagram
Thermal relay: Current adjustment position
Back of PSU-007:
Check-marked on relevant unit
Fig. 4.15.2 PSU-007
Table 4.15.1 Setting of Thermal Relay of PSU-007
Crurent
Applicable Type of thermal
Model name of PSU-007 AC motor power set
gearbox relay
value
PSU-007-70-23-S RSB-098 200 (50 Hz)/220 V (60 Hz) 3 φ 2.3 TR-ONH/3 1.7 A
PSU-007-80-10-S RSB-099 380 (50 Hz)/440 V (60 Hz) 3 φ 1.0 TR-ONH/3 0.8 A
PSU-007-72-28-50/60-S RSB-100 220 V (50 Hz) 3 φ 2.8 TR-ONH/3 2.2 A
PSU-007-72-28-50/60-S RSB-101 220 V (60 Hz) 3 φ 2.8 TR-ONH/3 2.2 A
PSU-007-82-12-60-S RSB-102 440 V (60 Hz) 3 φ 1.2 TR-ONH/3 0.8 A
Note: Figures at the end of the model name of the thermal realy represent the minimum
current.
4-72
4.15.2 Thermal Relay of RTR-082

In the FAR-2837SW, power is supplied to the antenna AC motor of the gearbox via
RTR-082. The operating current of the thermal relay of RTR-082 is set according to the type
of the scanner unit.
Table 4.15.2 Setting of Thermal Relay in RTR-082
Current Type of thermal

Gearbox AC motor power
set value relay
RSB-104 200 (50 Hz)/220 V (60 Hz) 3 φ 2.3 A TR-ONH/3 1.7 A
RSB-105 380 (50 Hz)/440 V (60 Hz) 3 φ 1.0 A TR-ONH/3 0.8 A
Note: Figures at the end of the model name of the thermal relay represent the minimum
current.
Adjuster port of thermal relay current
Fig. 4.15.3 RTR-082

Note:
Set INITILAIZE -> 4 -> 6: MODEL to “30DOWN”.
In this setting, ANT ON signals are outputted from the RFC board of RTR-082 and control
the antenna motor power control relay in RTR-082.
RSB-014
RSB-015
ANT MOTOR
ANT ON
RL RFC p.c.b
ANT Power (AC)
RTR-082
RPU-013
Fig. 4.15.4 RTR-082 Antenna Motor Power Control System Diagram
4-73
4.16 Sub Monitor
4.16 Sub Monitor

4.16.1 Connection to “Slave”
The TB board has [J617] and [J618] ports for the sub monitor. Each of these ports has
merits and demerits as shown in the Table below. Select a port appropriate for your
intended use.
RGB Buff p.c.b

(SLB-FRN4-A)
R VIDEO
DSub-BNC
Convertor
DVI/RGB IF
G VIDEO
(03P9229A)
DVI-D Monitor B VIDEO For VDR
H SYNC
V SYNC
+12V +5V, -12V

J615
J617: DISP-1
RPU-013 (FULL LOG)
(TB p.c.b)
J618: DISP-2 RPU-013
J616: Master J617: DISP-1
OP HD-IN, OP BP-IN, OP VIDEO-IN, OP TRIG-IN (FULL LOG)
J618: DISP-2 RPU-013

J618: DISP-2
(SEMI LOG) OP HD-2, OP BP-2, OP VIDEO-2, OP TRIG-2
J617: DISP-1 Radar

(FULL LOG) OP HD-1, OP BP-1, OP VIDEO-1, OP TRIG-1
Fig. 4.16.1 Sub Monitor Connecting Port
1. Selection of connecting ports

Table 4.16.1 Features of Sub Monitor Ports
Sensitivity and Type of sub monitor

Port Output signal
operation FAR-2XX7 series Other types
Lower sensitivity Lower sensitivity (-8 dB) than that
Overall
Full log* (-8 dB) than that of of main radar even after adjusting
sensitivity
(Video signal main radar the input video level to 4 Vp-p
J617
with GAIN and GAIN Adjustment with Adjustment with the knob is
(SLAVE 1)
STC not adjustment the knob is disabled enabled.
controlled, Adjustment with Adjustment with the knob is
STC
the knob is disabled enabled.
Despite the same sensitivity as for
Overall Same sensitivity as
Semi-log* the main radar, the video level is
sensitivity for main radar
(Video signal low. (Approximately 2 V)
J618
with GAIN and Adjustment with Adjustment with the knob is
(SLAVE 2) GAIN adjustmen
STC controlled the knob is disabled Enabled.
by main radar) Adjustment with Adjustment with the knob is
STC adjustmen
the knob is disabled Enabled.
* The jumper setting on the SPU board can switch Full-log and Semi-log.
4-74
4.16 Sub Monitor
2. Change of the connecting ports

The output of slaves 1 and 2 can change to the Semi-log or the Full-log output.
RPU-013
SPU p.c.b
AD/DATA OP HD OUT-1
ARPA/MAIN CPU HD
U30
SPU FPGA
OP HD OUT-2
OP BP OUT-1
BP
U46
J617, J618
U41
OP BP OUT-2
RF Tx/Rx SUB Display-1, 2
RFC p.c.b OP TRIG OUT-1
TRIG
U40
OP TRIG OUT-2
Echo data
8bit
SEL VIDEO SEL A/D
(U83) (U76)
HD IN
TEST ECHO BP IN
RF unit TRIG IN J616
FULL LOG OUT

Master Radar
SEMI LOG VIDEO

TP58 R401
OP VIDEO IN U85 OP VIDEO IN
LPF JP6 OP VIDEO OUT-1 (FULL LOG)

(L/C) JP5 U78 J617, J618
JP4 OP VIDEO OUT-2 (SEMI LOG) SUB Display-1, 2
Short Pulse FIL JP3 U78
(BW: 35MHz)
IF AMP p.c.b
MIdle Pulse FIL
Log AMP (BW: 10MHz)
(Video sig.)
IF input IF AMP MIX IF + Video MIX HPF Long Pulse FIL DET
(60MHz) (L/C) (BW: 2.5MHz) (U86)
U85
U87
IF AMP
(Liner: 60MHz)
BW A/B sel
GAIN/STC CONT
Fig. 4.16.2 Video Signal System Diagram
Factory setting Jumper

J3 J4 J5 J6
J617 Full
(SLAVE 1) log
Yes No No Yes
J618 Semi
(SLAVE 2) log
Fig. 4.16.3 Location of JP3 to JP6 on the SPU Board
4-75
4.16 Sub Monitor
3. Slave output signal
1. Bearing pulse: Slave-1, 2 (J617, 618-#4pin)
Model ANT rpm Frequency Remarks

24 rpm 144 Hz - BP GEN out
36 rpm 216 Hz 360 pulse/rev.
X-band
- Slave-1, 2 OUT
12 V 42 rpm 252 Hz
360 pulse/rev.
21 rpm 126 Hz - BP GEN out
26 rpm 156 Hz 360deg -> 256 pulse
S-band
- Slave-1, 2 OUT
45 rpm 270 Hz
360 pulse
5 V, 2 ms/div Note: B.P signals from the antenna are converted at FPGA on the
SPU board according to the MODEL setting.
Fig. 4.16.4 B.P Waveform (no load) and Frequency
Note:
If the setting of S-band and X-band is not correctly made in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 ->
6:MODEL, B.P echo presentation in azimuth direction is incorrect.
2. TX trigger: Slave-1, 2 (J617, 618-#6pin)
12 V 12 V
5 V, 1 ms/div 5 V, 5 us/div
Fig. 4.16.5 TX Trigger Waveform (no load)
4-76
4.16 Sub Monitor
3. Heading pulse: Slave-1, 2 (J617, 618-#2pin)

The pulse length changes according to the antenna speed. The heading pulse is turned
ON in a range of 0 to 90 degrees and the duty ratio is 1:3.
Model ANT rpm ANT/REV. HD ON

24 rpm 2.5 sec 0.62 sec
12 V X band 36 rpm 1.7 sec 0.42 sec
42 rpm 1.4 sec 0.36 sec
21 rpm 2.9 sec 0.71 sec
S band 26 rpm 2.3 sec 0.57 sec
45 rpm 1.3 sec 0.33 sec
Fig. 4.16.6 HD Pulse Waveform and Duty Ratio (no load)
4. Video signals of S-band radar: Slave-1, 2 (J617, 618-#8pin)
Picture of the Master

12 NM, Long pulse
GAIN: 70, STC: 82, FTC: 33
IR: OFF, ES: OFF, EAV: OFF
Auto FTC: OFF
ANT Stop
5 Vp-p
5.5 Vp-p
1 V, 10 us/div 1 V, 10 us/div
Trigger
ANT Stop Slave-1 #8 Open: Video (Full-log) ANT Stop Slave-2 #8 Open: Video (Semi-log)
Fig. 4.16.7 Video Signals of Slaves 1 and 2 of S-Band Radar -1
4-77
4.16 Sub Monitor

48 NM, Long pulse
GAIN: 70, STC: 82, FTC: 33
Auto FTC: OFF
5 Vp-p
5 Vp-p
1 V, 10 us/div
1 V, 10 us/div
Trigger
Slave-1 #8 Open: Video (Full-log) Slave-2 #8 Open: Video (Semi-log)
1 V/0.5 ms/div
1 V/0.5 ms/div
Slave-1 #8: Video (Full-log) Slave-2 #8: Video (Semi-log)
Fig. 4.16.8 Video Signals of Slaves 1 and 2 of S-Band Radar -2
4-78
4.16 Sub Monitor
5. Examples of S-band radar monitors

6 NM, M2 pulse
GAIN: 60, STC: 60, FTC: 15
Auto FTC: OFF
Fig. 4.16.9 Picture of the Master Radar
Video signal is not controlled

GAIN/STC by the master radar.
Fig. 4.16.10 Picture of the Slave-1

J617 Full Log
Video signal is controlled


J618 Semi Log
4-79
4.16 Sub Monitor

24 NM, Long pulse
GAIN: 60, STC: 60, FTC: 15
Auto FTC: OFF
Fig. 4.16.12 Picture of the Master Radar
Video signal is not controlled

Fig. 4.16.13 Pictureof the Slave-1

J617 Full Log
Video signal is controlled


J618 Semi Log
4-80
4.16 Sub Monitor
4.16.2 When using as slave radar

FAR-2xx7 requires the signals in Table 4.16.2 to operate as slave radar display.
Table 4.16.2 Input Types of Master Port
Level Read
HD 0V ----- +5 VDC to +12 VDC Negative edge
Duty: 50%
B.P 0V ----- +5 VDC to +12 VDC
360 pulses/REV.
Trigger 0V ----- +5 VDC to +12 VDC Positive edge
Video -5 V Negative
1. Adjustment of monitor input level

Make adjustments of R401 so that the level of TP58 becomes 2 Vp-p. External triggers
of the synchroscope are retrieved from J616-#6: MASTER RADAR.
R401 TP58
TP58: 2Vp-p
Tx Trigger
Fig. 4.16.15 TP58 on the SPU Board: Slave-1 Input Fig. 4.16.16 TP58/R141 on the SPU Board
4-81
4.16 Sub Monitor
2. Timing adjustment
Do the timing adjustments of slave display by [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> 4:TIMING ADJ. See
page.4-14 for adjustments.
3. Switching for the sub monitor

To display Full-log or Semi-log video signals inputted from the Master port [J616]:
- B ,C and W types,
Set “8. SUB MONITOR” to ON by clicking [ANT INF] box. You can switch
the setting between “ANT-x” and “SUB”.
- In case of IMO and A types:
Set [MENU] -> 0 -> 2:RADAR to “SUB”.
Note:
See page.4-20 for the details for operations when the setting is switched to the sub
monitor.
4-82
4.17 Connecting to the FEA-2x07
4.17 Connecting to the FEA-2x07

When FEA-2x07 is connected with FAR-2xx7, the setting items required on the
FAR-2xx7 side are as shown below. For the setting of installation parameters on the
FEA-2x07, see the Installation Manual of FEA-2x07.
Procedure
1. Call up the INITIALIZE menu. Press [MENU] key 5 times while holding down the
[HL OFF] key.
2. Make the following setting on the INITIALIZE menu.
1) Set 4 INSTALLATION -> 7 TYPE to “B”.
2) Make the setting of 5 OWNSHIP INFO -> 3 SCANNER POSN.
Note: Make the setting of GPS1 ANT POSN, GPS2 ANT POSN and
CONNING POSN as appropriate.
3) Set 6 ARP PRESET -> 2 TTM OUTPUT to “TRUE”.
4) Set 8 OTHERS -> 5 INS” to “SERIAL or “LAN”.
5) “7 NETWORK”
- Checking of IP address
When FAR-2xx7 and FEA-2x07 are interfaced with each other, set the IP
address as the installaion parameter (LAN RADAR) of FEA-2x07.
3. Select [MAIN MENU].
Set “2 MARK” to “7 INS MARK” and make the setting of the following items as
appropriate.
- USER CHART
- CURVED EBL
- CHART SYMBOL
- ROUTE
Note:
- OFF: NOTE BOOK is not displayed.
- ON: NOTE BOOK is displayed but NOTE BOOK display disappears when
any operation is performed.
- DISPLAY: Select this to recheck disappeared NOTE BOOK.
4．Call up [OS POSN] icon menu and set “1 NAV AID” to GPS2.
The conning position data of FEA-2x07 is inputted as the position data. Talker (II
and EC) set on ECDIS side is displayed as the talker.
4-83
Chapter 5. Updating Program
5.1 Overview of Updating
5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Program file
Programs to be updated are:
- Processor unit: SPU board
MAIN CPU, ARPA CPU, DRAW CPU and FPGA Program
- Transceiver unit: RFC board
RFC CPU
Each program is updated in the same connection and method. The table below shows
program folders and the contents of their files. The sizes of the files are just for
reference.
Table 5.1.1 List of Program Files
Program for Processor Unit: Program for Antenna Unit:

0359204-02.xx 0359202-01.xx
File Name Size File Name Size
Arparom.hex 174 kB Fr2107rf.bin 105 kB
Drawrom.hex 346 kB Uppg.exe 94 kB
Fpgarom.hex 1,030 kB Uprfc.bat 1 kB
Fr2107r.hex 2,025 kB Uprfc.txt 1 kB
Ldarpa.bin 23 kB
Lddraw.bin 23 kB
Ldmain.bin 23 kB
Ldfpga.bin 29 kB
upmain.bat 1 kB
Uparpa.bat 1 kB
updraw.bat 1 kB
upfpga.bat 1 kB
uppg.exe 94 kB
Note:
1. FPGAROM.HEX, LDFPGA.BIN and UPFPGA.BAT files are added from SPU
program Ver-14 and after. However, Updating FPGA Program restricts that “Ver” of a
SPU board is after “Ver.22.” Refer to the following page for how to recognize the
SPU board Ver.
2. The SPU program corresponding to the C-MAP is 0359223-02.14 and after. The
Fr2107rc.hex file is for the C-MAP file.
5-1
5.1 Overview
3. Batch file
SPU board: 0359204-02.xx
- uparpa.bat
uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999
- updraw.bat
uppg /lf lddraw.bin /hf drawrom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999
- upmain.bat
uppg /lf ldmain.bin /hf fr2107r.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999
Correspond to C-MAP
uppg /lf ldmain.bin /hf fr2107rc.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999
- upfpga.bat
uppg /lf ldfpga.bin /hf fpgarom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999
RFC board: 0359202-01.xx

- upｒｆｃ.bat
uppg /lf uprfc.txt /hf fr2107rf.bin /port 1 /cpu 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999
4. How to recognize Ver-22 and after of SPU board.
“Ver” is displayed under

the NET-100 board.
The connector of 8 pin is added.
A screw is added for

fixing.
Fig 5.1.1 SPU Board Ver-22
5-2
5.1 Overview
5.1.2 Preparation
1. To check program numbers;
Carry out self-test: [MENU]-9-8-2(SELF TEST).
Program numbers are displayed as below.
<SELF TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW
SPU 0359204-02.xx OK OK 0000
RFC 0359202-01.xx OK OK
KEY 0359203-01.xx OK OK
REMOTE1 *******-**.** ** **
REMOTE2 *******-**.** ** **
CARD 0359209-01.xx OK OK 0000 Program numbers are displayed.
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR
-12V -12V
3.3V 3.2
5V 4.8
12V 12.0
SCANNER MOTOR 0.0
RF UNIT MONITOR
TEMPERATURE
TUNE IND
HV
R.MONITOR
MAG CURRENT
HEATER
12V
-12V
5V
32V
TUNE OUT
TRIGGER FREQ
ANT SPEED
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28 0
88 0
To quit press [F1] key twice
Fig. 5.1.2 SELF TEST Screen
- SPU Processor unit (SPU board: MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU)

- RFC Transceiver unit (RFC board: RFC CPU)
- KEY Standard control unit: RCU-014
- REMOTE 1 Trackball control unit: RCU-015
- REMOTE 2 Remote control unit: RCU-016
- CARD Card I/F unit: CU-200
Note:
The program for KEY, REMOTE 1, and REMOTE 2 is the same.
5-3
5.1 Overview
2. Connection of PC to Processor unit (RPU-013)

Connect a cross cable 9P D-sub (female - female) between the serial port of the PC and
the RS-232C port of the Processor unit as shown below.
RS-232C Port
Fig. 5.1.3 Connection for Program Updating
3. Notes for updating

1) Never turn off the power during the updating the DRAW program. If updating is not
completed successfully, the screen shows nothing and re-updating is disabled. When
this occurs, the SPU board should be replaced or update by the Mini-program card is
required. See page5-9.
2) In updating the RFC program, if the next step does not start with the message “NOW
ERASING Message….” displayed for 30 seconds or more, try again.
3) The SPU board uses three CPU programs: MAIN, ARPA, and DRAW CPU and
FPGA Program. Each program is isolated.
4) The table below lists approximate time for updating.
Updating Updating
Updating Time Updating Time
Program Program
MAIN CPU 25 minutes FPGA 10 minutes
ARPA CPU 2 minutes RFC CPU 5 minutes
DRAW CPU 5 minutes
5-4
5.1 Overview
5) The preset data are not changed even after updating unless the program of the CPU
board is substantially changed. If CU-200 is installed, we recommend you to save
the preset data in the CU-200 card as a precaution. See p. 6-45 for details.
6) There is no need to set the data transfer speed of the serial port of the PC.
The communication speed is 9600bps while an updating program is booted and
38.4kbps after updating is started.
The protocols are as follows:
* Format) - Data bit: 8 - Stop bit: 1 - Parity bit: None
* Flow control) - None
7) When the serial port number of the PC is other than “COM-1,” change and overwrite
batch file to the same as a port number of the PC, or changing COM port of the PC
to “COM-1”.
For example, when updating is performed by means of “USB – RS-232C interface,”
may be serial port number (USB) of the PC is other than “1”.
Procedure for rewriting COM port of batch file

1. Open [Control Panel] – [System] – [Device Manager] and check the COM port
number of the installed “USB – RS-232C driver” (e.i. COM 4).
2. Select the batch file to update and open the batch file on [File] – “Edit.”
3. For example, when a batch file “uparpa.bat” of ARPA CPU open, a text “uppg
/lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999” is displayed.
4. Change “port 1” to the port number “port 4”, “uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf
arparom.hex /port 4 /sp 9600 /t 9999” as follow.
5. Select [File] – “Save” and save the edited text.
Note:
If the edited text cannot be saved, right-click the icon of the batch file, select
[Property] – “General” tag and check that the “Attribute” is not
check-marked in “Read only” box.
5-5
5.2 Updating Program

Procedure
1. Turn off the power to the radar.
2. Connect the cross cable 9P D-sub between the serial port of the PC and the RS-232C
port on the TB board of the Processor unit.
3. Open the program folder.

4. Double-click the icon of the batch file of the program, for example: upmain. bat.
Note:
The SPU board uses three CPU program: MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU and FPGA Program.
SPU Board RFC Board

0359204-02.xx 0359202-01.xx
uparpa.bat uprfc.bat
updraw.bat
upmain.bat
upfpga.bat
FPGAROM.HEX, LDFPGA.BIN and UPFPGA.BAT RFC: 0359202-01.xx

files are added from SPU program No.：0359204-02.14.
Note:
Do not turn off the power during update of DRAW CPU program.
5. The batch file runs automatically.
5-6
6. When the PC displays “[Waiting For Target Wake up…] Time: xx (sec),” turn on the
power to the radar.
e.i. Updating of DRAW CPU
[Waiting For Target Wake up …] is

displayed, turn on the power to the radar.
7. Updating starts automatically. While updating, the radar screen keep displaying
“Now Initializing….”
Displays the program file to be updated.
Displays the time in

updating.
5-7
8. When the PC displays “Upload complete,” updating is completed. On completion of

updating, the radar screen returns to the normal screen.
When “Upload complete” is displayed,

updating is complete.
9. Turn off the power and update a next program. Start from Step 4.
10. When all programs are updated, updating tasks are complete, turn off the power and
get the connection back as it was.
5-8
5.3 Updating with a Card

In the Mini-program card, related programs of the SPU board are saved.
Procedure
1. Turn off the radar power supply.
2. Insert a Mini-program card to the Card slot: J206 on the SPU board.
3. Turn on the radar power supply. Nothing is displayed.
4. Automatically, all programs of the SPU board start updating. The CR4 on the SPU
board switch the lights off in the updating. And also, nothing is displayed.
5. When the CR4 on the SPU board blinks, it is completed. It takes about 5 minutes
until the updating end. Nothing is displayed after the updating.
6. Turn off the radar power supply and remove the card.
When the CR4 on the

MAIN CPU blinks, it
is completed
Card slot: J206
Card
5-9
Chapter 6. Maintenance
6.1 Self-test
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
This equipment uses high voltage electricity which can SHOCK, BURN or use
DEATH. Always make sure the electrical power is turned off before attempting to
change a component or inspecting the inside of the equipment. A residual
charge may exist in capacitors, even with the equipment turned off. Always short
all supply lines to the chassis with an insulated screwdriver or a similar tool
before touching the circuit.
Working on the Scanner Unit Mast

Work on the scanner unit mast is dangerous, and doubly so if the proper
precautions are not taken.
1. Post an appropriate warning sign near the display unit to indicate that work
on the scanner unit is being performed, to prevent accidental application of
the power to the scanner unit.
2. Wear a safety helmet and always be aware of where the scanner radiator is.
How to provide transmission with antenna revolution stopped

1. Press the [MENU] key 5 times while pressing the [1/HL OFF] key to enter the
[INITIALIZE] menu.
2. Set “TX” in “[MENU] -> 0 -> 3 -> 6: ANT STOP STBY/TX”.
3. When the checking is complete, return the setting back to “STBY”.
6-1
6.1 Self-test
6.1 Self-test
The self-test executes in “[MENU] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2: SELF TEST”. The items of self-tests
are:
- Buzzer check
- Checking of program number
- Checking of PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR
- Checking of “RF UNIT MONITOR”
- Key checking
- Checking of input sentences of serial ports on the terminal board in the Processor
unit.
6.1.1 Overview
Procedure
1. The self-test can execute in “[MENU] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2 ->2: START”.
2. Beep sounds and the screen as below are displayed.
Checking of the program number, PROCESSOR UNIT, RF UNIT MONITOR and
key check executes on this screen.
<SELF TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW
SPU 0359204-02.xx OK OK 0000 Checking of the program number,
RFC 0359202-01.xx OK OK
KEY 0359203-01.xx OK OK ROM/RAM and DIP switches
REMOTE1 0359203-01.xx OK OK
CARD 0359209-01.01 OK OK 0000

-12V -12V
3.3V 3.2
5V 4.8 PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR
12V 12.0
SCANNER MOTOR 22.5
RF UNIT MONITOR
TEMPERATURE 33.2
TUNE IND 1.3
HV 517.4
R.MONITOR 1.4
MAG CURRENT
HEATER
2.5
4.1
RF UNIT MONITOR
12V 11.9
-12V -11.5
5V 4.8
32V 31.6
TUNE OUT 15.0
TRIGGER FREQ 1058
ANT SPEED 22.3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28 0
Key check
88 0
To quit press [F1] key twice
Fig. 6.1.1 Example of Self-Test Monitor Screen
6-2
6.1 Self-test
3. Press the [F1] key 2 times to go to the next screen.

4. This screen displays the input sentences of serial ports.
There is no restriction on the display by

Versions of input sentences.
Fig. 6.1.2 Example of Self-Test NMEA Check Screen
5. Press the [F1] key after checking.

6. The screen goes to the input sentence screen of the AIS and the INS. See page.6-10.
7. Press the [F1] key to return to the original screen after checking.
6.1.2 Description
1. Self-test screen-1
Display of program numbers

All types of S-band and X-band radars use the same program.
Table 6.1.1 Display of Program Numbers
Display Applicable program Program number

Processor unit
SPU 0359204-02.xx
(SPU Board: MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU)
RFC Transceiver unit (RFC Board: RFC CPU) 0359202-01.xx
KEY Standard control unit: RCU-014
REMOTE 1 Trackball unit: RCU-015 0359203-01.xx
REMOTE 2 Remote control unit: RCU-016
CARD Card I/F unit: CU-200 0359209-01.xx
6-3
6.1 Self-test
ROM/RAM, DIP SW
When executing “SELF TEST” or “FACTORY TEST”, ROM and RAM are checked.
See page.6-18 for “FACTORY TEST”.
OK or NG is displayed by the result of the Read/Write check of RAM, and Check-sum
check of ROM.
Table 6.1.2 ROM/RAM, DIP SW
Display ROM RAM DIP SW

SPU board: Displays the setting of S1
U48 U22: For Main CPU Setting of monitor size
SPU (Main, ARP, DRW U9: For DRW CPU - xx00: FAR-21x7
CPU program stored) U56: For ARPA CPU - xx01: FAR-28x7
- xx10: FAR-21x7-BB
RFC U28 U27
KEY U8 built-in U8 built-in
REMOTE 1 U5 built-in U5 built-in
REMOTE 2 U5 built-in U5 built-in
When communicating with CU-200,
“0000” is displayed. If not, “****” is
displayed.
CARD U6 U5
Note:
Displays the setting of S1 on the
CARD CPU board of the CU-200.
S1 (DIP SW) S1 (DIP SW)

#1: INIT #3: IP1
#2: IP2 #4: IP0
Fig. 6.1.3 Location of the DIP SW on CU-200 and SPU
6-4
6.1 Self-test

Monitor for the Processor unit: RPU-013.
Fig. 6.1.4 Diagram of Processor Unit Monitor
Table 6.1.3 Display of Processor Unit Monitor
Display Description
-12 V -12 VDC output on the PWR board.
3.3 V +5 VDC output on the PWR board is converted into +3.3 VDC and displayed.
5V +5 VDC output on the PWR board.
12 V +12 VDC output on the PWR board, which is adjusted by R26.
Antenna motor output voltage on the PWR board. +24 VDC antenna motor
voltage is displayed by X-band radar. The power supply to the antenna motor uses
a feedback circuit, which detects the antenna revolution speed and make the
revolution constant. Accordingly the voltage changes depending on wind pressure
applied on the antenna and voltage drop on the antenna unit cable. The voltage is
SCANNER
generally +21 VDC to +27 VDC.
MOTER
Note:
Both S-band radars and X-band radars output the antenna motor power of +24
VDC outputted from the PWR board. The S-band radar, however, do not use
the antenna motor power.
6-5
6.1 Self-test
RF UNIT MONITOR
Each monitor-value is detected in the transceiver unit.
Note that monitor values of TUNE IND, R. MONITOR, HEATER, TUNE OUT,
TRIGGER FREQ and MAG CURRENT vary with the setting of the Range/Pulse length.
See pages 6-42 for details.
TEMP OUT AD
U20
TEMP sensor RFC p.c.,b
R.MON(D MON) AD
RU MIC
IF TUNE
A/D
TUNE IND AD
Antenna IF AMP p.c.b TUNE
From/To SPU pc.b

32V AD
U17: RF RXD
12V AD U19:
Gate Arrey RFC CPU RF TXD
-12V AD
PWR p.c.b 5V AD
HEATER AD
TRIGGER 1-4
Mag. MD p.c.b
MAG CURRENT (MAG CURRENT LVL) AD
HV(HV PROTECT) AD
Pulse
Transformer
HD/BP ANT SPEED(B.P)

GEN p.c.b
Fig. 6.1.5 Diagram of Transceiver Unit Monitor
Table 6.1.4 Transceiver Unit Monitor Display
Display Description
TEMPERATURE Detects the temperature of the RFC board.
Tuning indicator voltage outputted from the IF AMP board. It is used for Auto-tuning
TUNE IND
and the tune indicator.
HV voltage outputted from the HV-9017 board in the Processor unit, which is applied
HV to the pulse transformer. In case of 12 kW: 310 to 350 VDC, and 25 kW or more: 520
to 580 VDC.
R.MONITOR DI MONITOR voltage from the MIC
MAG CURRENT Magnetron current, which is detected in the MD board.
HEATER Magnetron heater voltage outputted from the PWR (RF) board.
12 V +12 VDC voltages outputted from the PWR (RF) board.
-12 V -12 VDC voltages outputted from the PWR (RF) board.
5V +5 VDC voltages outputted from the PWR (RF) board.
+32 VDC voltages outputted from the PWR (RF) board. It is used for the power supply
32 V
of the TUNE circuit of the MIC.
TUNE OUT TUNE control voltage of the MIC. It varies with the MIC.
Shows the transmission trigger frequency. It varies with the pulse length/range and
TRIGGER FREQ
indicates the frequency between 450 Hz and 3000 Hz.
The antenna speed is set from the bearing pulse detected on the B.P GEN board. The
ANT SPEED revolution varies with the types of the gearbox, that is 24/42 rpm in X-band and
21/26/45 rpm in S-band.
6-6
6.1 Self-test
Example: RF Monitor display
FAR-2827W, 2x27
Table 6.1.5 FAR-2827W: RF Monitor Display
TUNE IND 1.6 1.6 1.5 0.7 1.0
R MONITOR 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9
MAG
4.6 3.6 2.8 2.5 1.9
CURRENT
HEATER 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.7 1.7
TUNE OUT 16.0 16.0 16.3 16.2 16.2
FAR-2837SW, 2x37S
Table 6.1.6 FAR-2837SW: RF Monitor Display
TUNE IND 1.5 1.7 1.6 1.4 2.6
R MONITOR 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
MAG
4.3 3.9 3.2 2.7 2.0
CURRENT
HEATER 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8
TUNE OUT 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.1 9.8
Note:
HEATER voltage is displayed about 1.4 V in the RF MONITOR, but actual heater
voltages are from 7.4 V to 9.4 V. The checkpoint is J833 - #11(+), #12(-) on RF PWR.
See page 6-44.
6-7
6.1 Self-test
Key check
Key check is a function for checking the panel keys.
The drawing on the left below corresponds to the arrangement of the keys, knobs and
trackball of RCU-014 and the drawing on the right corresponds to those of RCU-015
and RCU-016 (but the power key is excluded.)
The boxes numerically displayed are used for checking of the knobs and track ball
showing changes in a range between 0 and 255. Other boxes correspond to keys and the
corresponding key is highlighted when a box is pressed.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28 0
88 0
Excluding the Power key.
Press the [F1] key 2 times

to go to the next test.
RCU-014 RCU-016
Fig. 6.1.6 RCU-014 Key Check
When the Trackball control unit RCU-015 is connected with the Remote control unit
RCU-016, both units use the display on the right. The left-side display is not used.
RPU-015 RPU-016
Fig. 6.1.7 RCU-015 and 016 Key Check
6-8
6.1 Self-test
2. Self-test screen-2
The IEC-61162 sentences received can be checked on the screen. The sentences
displayed are fixed and the data of input sentence is shown. There is no restriction on
the display by IEC versions of input sentences.
<GPS1>: displays position-related data inputted from the [NAVIGATOR] port: J606 on
the TB board.
<GPS2>: displays position-related data inputted from ports other than the
[NAVIGATOR] port on the TB board.
Restrictions of the sentences differs with the setting of “[Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 7: Type”.
- When set to the IMO type: Acceptable sentences are IEC-61162 2nd Edition
(Same as NMEA Ver-03), check the Check Sum, Mode Indicator and Status
fields.
- When set to the type other than IMO: There is no restriction by NMEA
versions of input sentences (Same as NMEA Ver-1.5 and 2.0).
<SELF TEST>
<GPS1>
GGA GPGGA,,3512.150,N,13944.000,E,1,,,,,,
GLL
RMC
RMB Displays the GPS data inputted from
VTG
ZDA the [NAVIGATOR] port: J606.
DTM
BWR
BWC
<GPS2>
GGA
GLL
RMC Displays the GPS data inputted from
RMB ports other than the [NAVIGATOR]
VTG
ZDA port: J606.
DTM
BWR
BWC
<SPEED>
VBW
VHW
VDR
<HEADING>
HDT
<NAV DATA>
WPL Displays the data other than the GPS.
RTE
MWV
VWT
VWR
DPT
DBT
DBS
MTW
VDM
To quit press [F1] key
Fig. 6.1.8 Self-test NMEA Check Screen-1
6-9
6.1 Self-test
<SELF TEST>
<AIS>
VDO
Displays AIS data inputted from
VDM the [AIS] port: J611.
<INS>
ZDA
GGA
GLL
OSD
DPT
MWV Displays the data inputted via LAN or from J620selected
DTM
FUGLL by "[Menu]->0->8->5: INS"
PAESP
PAESC
- LAN setting -- [NETWORK] port
PAESF - SERIAL setting -- [TRACK CONTROL] port: J620
PLSPL
PLSPS
PAESW
PAESN
Fig. 6.1.9 Self-test NMEA Check Screen-2
Information for handling NMEA data

1) Talker name
VTG, DTM : GP only
Others : Not specified
Related to ECDIS : EI, EC, II
2) Data format
- Data : 8 bits - Stop bit : 1 bit
- Parity : None - Flow control: None
6-10
6.1 Self-test
3) Priority of ports
- The selection of input ports and priorities of GGA, GLL, DTM, RMC and VTG
sentences for position and SOG/COG is determined by the selection of GPS1 or
GPS2 in “1. NAV AID” of the “OS POSN” menu.
GPS-1: J606: NAVIGATOR
GPS-2: J607: LOG < J605: HDG SENSOR
< J620: TRACK CONTROL < J601: RS-232C
< LAN (INS)
- Other sentences
J606: NAVIGATOR < J607: LOG < J605: HDG SENSOR
< J620: TRACK CONTROL < J601: RS-232C < LAN (NAV)
< LAN (INS)
Table 6.1.7 IEC61161 Receive Sentences and Priorities
Description Sentence and order of priority

Speed (STW) VBW>VHW
Speed (SOG) VBW
Speed（POSITION） VTG>RMC
Course (COG) VTG>RMC
Heading (TRUE) PFEC, Gpatt>HDT>VHW
Own position GGA>RMC>GLL
Waypoint（L/L） RMB>BWR>BWC
Date ZDA
Datum DTM
Depth DPT>DBT>DBS
Temperature MTW
Wind direction/Wind speed MWV (T)>MVW(R)>VWT>VWR
Current VDR
Routes, Waypoint location RTE, WPL (both required)
Table 6.1.8 IEC61161 Transmission Sentences
Description Sentence
Target L/L TLL
Radar system data RSD
ARPA target data TTM
Waypoint arrival alarm AAM
6-11
6.1 Self-test
4) Display of Position Data and Ship Speed Data Box

When the position data and ship speed data are invalid, the data is displayed in red.
The conditions for it are as shown below.
The data varies with the input sentences. See p.3-4 for details.
HDG Heading
SPD Speed, Source When data is invalid in VBW
SB 0.0 kt Log Speed
COG Course over Ground
SOG Speed over Ground, Source The mode is No Fix, DR, Manual
OS POSN or SIM mode in GGA, GLL, VTG
DGPS Position
and RMC.
Fig. 6.1.10 HDG/SPD/POS Display
6-12
6.1 Self-test
5) Specifications of I/O ports Table 6.1.9(1/3) Specifications of I/O ports
Pin
Connector Signal I/O Hardware Sentences Remarks
No.
GGA, GLL, RMC, BWR, BWC, RMB,
ZDA, DPT, DBT, DBS, MTW, MWV,
2 RXD IN
J601: RS-232C VWT, VWR, VDR, WPL, RTE, DTM,
RS-232C (Fixed to 4800 bps) VBW, VHW, VTG, HDT, PFEC, GPatt
Note:
3 TXD OUT TLL, RSD, OSD
Not to be outputted on the IMO type.
It is recommended to use 38.4 kbps for HDT
RS-422
1 HDG A with higher rate (40 Hz per example) to allow
J605: IEC61162-1
the ARPA function.
HDG IN IEC61162-2
Related setting:
SENSOR (Variable between 4800
2 HDG B Note Used when “SERIAL” is selected in “[HDG]
and 38.4 kbps )
box menu -> 1.HDG SOURCE”.
GGA, GLL, RMC, BWR, BWC, RMB,
RS-422/C.Loop Position data sentences can be checked on
ZDA, DPT, DBT, DBS, MTW, MWV,
1 NAV A IEC61162-1 <GPS1> on the self-test screen.
J606: VWT, VWR, VDR, WPL, RTE, DTM,
IN IEC61162-2 Related setting:
NAVIGATOR VBW, VHW, VTG, HDT
(Variable between 4800 Used when “GPS1” is selected in
2 NAV B PFEC, GPatt
and 38.4 kbps Note) “[OS POSN] box menu -> 1.NAV AID”.
RS-422/C.Loop
J607: 1 LOG A IEC61162-1
LOG Position data sentences can be checked on
IN IEC61162-2
(Serial data <GPS2> on the self-test screen.
2 LOG B (Variable between 4800
only) Note
and 38.4 kbps )
J608: 1 AD DATA H
Related setting:
A/D 2 AD DATA C
IN C.Loop AD-10 Format Used when “AD-10” is selected in
CONVERTOR 3 AD CLK H
“[HDG] box menu -> 1.HDG SOURCE”.
4 AD CLK C
Note: Variable between 4800 and 38.4 kbps: The receive speed is detected on the radar side and both receive and transmit speeds are automatically
switched among 4800, 9600, 19.2 k and 38.4 kbps.
6-13
6.1 Self-test
Table 6.1.9(2/3) Specifications of I/O ports
1 AIS TD A
OUT ABM, BBM, SSD, VSD
2 AIS TD B
RS-422
J611: 3 AIS RD A On the IMO-type, the AIS is not displayed when
IEC61162-2
AIS DTM is other than WGS-84, “[Menu] -> 4 -> 8:
IN (Fixed to 38.4 kbps) ALR, VDO, VDM, ACK
4 AIS RD B AIS FUNCTION” cannot be set to ON. On other
type, the AIS is displayed even without DTM.
Related setting-1:
Select “REL” or ” TRUE” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 6
J619: 1 ARPA A IEC61162-1
OUT TTM -> 2.TTM OUTPUT”.
ECDIS (4800 bps)
Related setting –2:
2 ARPA B Select “OFF” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5.INS”.
RS-422
IEC61162-1 ECDIS-related sentences:
1 TRK TD A
OUT IEC61162-2 OSD, PAESP, TTM, PFEC, RAssd,
(Variable between 4800 RSD
and 38.4 kbps)
2 TRK TD B Select “REL” or ” TRUE” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 6
ECDIS-related sentences: -> 2.TTM OUTPUT”.
J620: GLL, GGA, FUGLL, DTM, OSD, Related setting –2:
TRACK 3 TRK RD A ZDA, DPT, MWV, PAESP, PAESC, Select “SERIAL” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5.INS”.
CONTROL RS-422/C.Loop PAESF, PLSPL, PLSPS, PAESW,
IEC61162-1 PAESN
IN IEC61162-2 NAV-related sentences: Position data sentences can be checked on the self-
(Variable between 4800 GGA, GLL, RMC, BWR, BWC, test screen.
between 38.4 kbps) RMB, ZDA, DPT, DBT, DBS,
4 TRK RD B MTW, MWV, VWT, VWR, VDR,
WPL, RTE, DTM, VBW, VHW,
VTG, HDT, PFEC, GPatt
6-14
6.1 Self-test
Table 6.1.9(3/3) Specifications of I/O ports
1 RSV1 TD A
IN Undefined
J621: 2 RSV1 TD B
SERIAL I/F 4 RSV2 TD A
OUT Disabled
5 RSV2 TD B
FURUNO network command Note-1
F-NET
Note-1:
ECDIS-related sentence:
Cannot be received when the FURUNO’s LAN
GLL, GGA, FUGLL, DTM, OSD, ZDA,
header is not added.
DPT, MWV, PAESP, PAESC, PAESF,
IN 100 Base-Tx Note-2:
PLSPL, PLSPS, PAESW, PAESN
The FURUNO’s LAN header is added and sent.
INS NAV-related sentence:
Port No. GGA, GLL, RMC, BWR, BWC, RMB,
Related setting-1:
10028 ZDA, DPT, DBT, DBS, MTW, MWV,
Select “REL” or “TRUE” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 6 ->
VWT, VWR, VDR, WPL, RTE, DTM ,
LAN: 2.TTM OUTPUT”.
VBW, VHW, VTG, HDT, PFEC, GPatt
FURUNO network command Note-2
F-NET
OUT 100 Base-Tx Select “LAN” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5.ISN”.
ECDIS-related sentence:
OSD, PAESP, TTM, PFEC,RAssd, RSD
IN 100 Base-Tx Sentences except for HDG data. Related setting:
NAV Select “ON” in “[OS POSN] -> 3.SIO DATA
Port No. NMEA sentences in use except for HDG LAN OUTPUT”.
10021 OUT 100 Base-Tx When connecting radars to the LAN, it is possible
data.
to send the own data to other radars.
6-15
6.1 Self-test
6) Setting of data box menus and input port

Table 6.1.10 Setting of Box Menus and Input Port
Menu Setting Input port Sentences for use

J606: NAVIGATOR
LOG (BT) J601: RS-232C VBW
J605: HDG SENSOR
J607: LOG
LOG (WT) J620: TRACK CONTROL VBW>VHW
LAN (INS)
Input from GPS1 or GPS2
selected in [OS POSN] box
menu
- GPS1
[SPD] J606: NAVIGATOR
SOG/COG Display
-> 1. NAV AID GPS - GPS2
VTG>RMC
LAN (INS)
J601: RS-232C
J620: TRACK CONTROL
J605: HDG SENSOR
J607: LOG
Manual input:
MANUAL
Not available on the IMO type
Calculated form selected
REF reference targets:
Not available on the IMO type
GPS 1 J606: NAVIGATOR GGA> RMC > GLL
LAN (INS)
J601: RS-232C
GPS 2 J620: TRACK CONTROL GGA> RMC > GLL
[OS POSN] J605: HDG SENSOR
-> 1.SHIP SPEED J607: LOG
DEAD Manual input:
RECKONING Not available on the IMO type
LAN (NAV):
LAN GGA> RMC > GLL
Port No.; 10021
NOTE:
[OS POSN] NMEA data other than HDG is
OFF/ON
-> 3.SIO DATA outputted when set to ON.
LAN OUTPUT
AD-10 Format:
AD-10 J608: AD CONVERTOR Set the transmission interval to
25 msec.
[HDG] J606: NAVIGATOR
HDT:
-> 1.HDG SOURCE J601: RS-232C
38.4 kbps is recommended.
SERIAL J605: HDG SENSOR
J605 (dedicated
J607: LOG
HDG SENSOR- port)
J620: TRACK CONTROL
6-16
6.1 Self-test
7) Acceptable sentences
Table 6.1.11 Acceptable Sentences
Sentence Description Sentence Description

AAM Waypoint Arrival Alarm TTM Tracked Target Message
ACK Acknowledge Alarm VBW Dual Ground/Water Speed
UAIS Addressed binary and
ABM VHW Water speed and Heading
safety related message
ALR Set Alarm State VDM UAIS VHF Data-link Message
UAIS Broadcast Binary UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel
BBM VDO
Message report
Bearing & Distance to
BWC VDR Set and Drift
Waypoint
Bearing & Distance to
BWR VSD UAIS Voyage Static Data
Waypoint-Rhumb Line
Course Over Ground and
DBS Depth below surface VTG
Ground Speed
DBT Depth Below Transducer VWT True wind speed and angle
Relative (Apparent) wind speed
DPT Depth VWR
and angle
DTM Datum Reference WPL Waypoint location
Global Positioning System Fix
GGA ZDA Time & Date
Data
Geographic
GLL FUGLL Future Position
Position-Latitude/Longitude
HDT Heading, True PAESP Position Adjust Acknowledge
MTW Water Temperature PAESC Curved EBL
MWV Wind Speed and Angle PAESF Fix Target Acquire/Cancel
OSD Own Ship Data PLSPL Chart Segment
Recommended Minimum
RMB PLSPS Chart Symbol
Navigation Information
Recommended Minimum
RMC PAESW Waypoint List
Specific GNSS Data
RSD Radar System Data PAESN Notebook
RTE Routes RTE-Routed PAESP Position Adjust Acknowledge
PFEC,
SSD UAIS SHIP Static Data Antenna Location
RAssd
TLL Target Latitude and Longitude
6-17
6.2 FACTORY TEST
6.2 FACTORY TEST

6.2.1 Overview
In the factory test, checking and test are performed for the program numbers,
ROM/RAM checks, I/O check and so on. The contents of tests and checking other than
described here are the same as described in “Self-test 6.1”.
Procedure
1. Press the [2], [3] and [4] keys while pressing [1:HL OFF] key.
2. Select “4: FACTORY TEST”. The FACTORY TEST screen as below is displayed.
<FACTORY TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW 1 2 3
SPU 0359204-02.xx OK OK 0000 0044 0003 0003
RFC 0359202-01.xx OK OK 0008 0017
KEY 0359203-01.xx OK OK
CARD 0359209-01.01 OK OK 0000
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR FTThe FPGA program numbers and

-12V -12V
RFC board version.
3.3V 3.2
5V 4.8
12V 12.0
SCANNER MOTOR 0.0
SIO
AIS --
HDG --
LOG --
*NAV --
TRK -- Results of loopback test
RS-232C --
KEY_IO OK
(Jumper is required for a port to be tested,
RF_IO OK or – is displayed.)
ALARM_IO 1000
Fig. 6.2.1 FACTORY TEST Screen
6-18
6.2 FACTORY TEST
3. Press the [F1] key to the next screen.

4. Beeps sound and the screen is changed to red (8 patterns). Press the [F1] key to stop
beeps, then the beeps stop and the green pattern is displayed on the screen. Every
time you press the [F1] key, the screen is changed to blue, white and then black.
Press the [F1] key to return to the radar screen.
Red pattern plus beeping Green pattern
Blue pattern White Black
Fig. 6.2.2 Screen Test
6.2.2 Contents
FPGA program numbers and version of RFC board
The FPGA program numbers of the SPU board and RFC board is displayed.
1 2 3 Display No.
004F 0007 0004 Version of FPGA on SPU board
0009 001F Version of RFC board and version of FPGA
Table 6.2.1 FPGA Program Numbers and Version of RFC Board
Display 1 2 3
SPU U46: SPU FPGA Ver U12: Echo FPGA Ver U13: DRW FPGA Ver
Note:
Displays version of the RFC board
by HEX and make the version
RFC U17: FPGA Ver
setting on JP3 to 6.
JP3 (BREV 0: 1), JP5 (BREV 1: 2)
JP6 (BREV 2: 4), JP4 (BREV 3: 8)
6-19
6.2 FACTORY TEST
Note:
The item “RFC” of the display No. 1 indicates the history of the hardware function of
the RFC board. The history setting is made by the setting of JP3 to 6. This setting does
not affect any function.
To replace the RFC board

- Ver-UP: No problem is posed. Upward compatibility is provided.
- Ver-Down: Avoid version-down. Otherwise, newly added functions may not work as
intended.
S-band is supported on “0009” or more.
RFC board
The 03P9345-33A is added

J806(2p) here. JP-3 to 6 is located on the
backside of the p.c.b.
Fig. 6.2.3 Arrangement of JP3 to 6 on RFC Board
Table 6.2.2 History of RFC Board
New:
RFC board 03P9346-00 03P9346-00A 03P9346-11A
03P9346-33A
J806: 2P connector
(Improvement of None None None Added
Noise- ring)
X-Band radar Available
Common Common Common
S-Band radar
RFC board Ver. 008 009 009 009
03P9244-55E
S-Band radar MD board 03P9244-33E
(J816 is added.)
The J806:2P connector for the S-band radar on the MD board is added in the 03P9346-33A and after.
- In the X-Band radar： J806 is not used.
- In the S-Band radar： Between J806 on RFC board and J816 on MD board are connected.
The MD board is in the 03P9244-55E, RFC board 03P9346-33A and after.
6-20
6.2 FACTORY TEST
Loopback test
The I/O ports are checked by the loopback test.
Procedure
1. Jumper the ports to be loopback on the TB board of RPU-013 as shown below.
** AIS port test ** ** NAV port test **

J611 AIS J606 NAVIGATOR J619 ECDIS
AIS TD-A 1 NAV H 1 1 ARPA TD A
AIS TD-B 2 NAV C 2 2 ARPA TD B
AIS RD-A 3 N.C 3 3 GND
AIS RD-B 4
AIS COMMON 5
** TRACK port test ** ** HDG port test **

J620 TRACK CONTROL J621 SERIAL I/F J605 HDG SENSOR
TRK TD-A 1 RSV1 TD A 1 1 HDG A
TRK TD-B 2 RSV1 TD B 2 2 HDG B
TRK RD-A 3 GND 3 3 GND
TRK RD-B 4 RSV2 TD A 4
GND 5 RSV2 TD B 5
GND 6
** RS-232C port test ** ** LOG port test **

J601 RS-232C J621 SERIAL I/F J607 LOG
N.C 1 RSV1 TD A 1 1 LOG A
RS-232C RX 2 RSV1 TD B 2 2 LOG B
RS-232C TX 3 GND 3 3 N.C
N.C 4 RSV2 TD A 4
GND 5 RSV2 TD B 5
N.C 6 GND 6
N.C 7
N.C 8
N.C 9
Terminal board
Fig. 6.2.4 Jumpers for Loopback Test
2. Press [2], [3] and [4] keys while holding down the [1:HL OFF] key.
3. The [Factory] menu is displayed. Select “4: Factory test”.
6-21
6.2 FACTORY TEST
4. The “FACTORY TEST” screen is displayed.

The checking items of the SIO are switched in sequence. If a port jumpered in Step 1
functions properly, “OK” is displayed. If not, “—” is displayed.
Table 6.2.3 Result in Loopback Test
Test Test
Result Description
item speed
38.4 Loopback test of AIS port J611. In the test, characters of
AIS OK / -
kbps “FAR2107” are sent. If they are received, it is judged as OK.
Characters of “FAR2107” are sent from the SERIAL I/F (TD)
38.4
HDG OK / - J621 to the HDG port J605. If they are received, it is judged as
kbps
OK.
38.4 Characters of “FAR2107” are sent from the J621: SERIAL I/F
LOG OK / -
kbps (TD) to the J607: LOG port.
38.4 Characters of “FAR2107” are sent from J619: ECDIS (TD) to
NAV OK / -
kbps J606: NAVIGATOR. If they are received, it is judged as OK.
38.4 Loopback test of TRK port. In the test, characters of “AR2107F”
TRK OK / -
kbps are sent. If they are received, it is judged as OK.
4.8 Loopback test of J601: RS-232C. In the test, characters of
RS-232C OK / -
kbps “FAR2107” are sent. If they are received, it is judged as OK.
19.2 The command of the test mode is sent to the control unit. If the
KEY IO OK / -
kbps program number comes back, it is judged as OK.
115.2 The command of the test mode is sent. If the program number
RF IO OK / -
kbps comes back, it is judged as OK.
During the test, the display changes in the order of
“1000->0100->0010->0001”. This change is synchronized with
the J612: EXT ALARM output (ON/OFF).
In ALARM-4 alone, ON/OFF operations are opposite to those of
1000-> ALARM-1 to 3.
ALARM 0100-> 1000: ALARM-1 (#1-2), 0100: ALARM-2 (#3-4),
―
IO 0010-> 0010: ALARM-3 (#5-6), 0001: ALARM-4 (#7-8),
0001 NOTE:
The polarity of ALARM-1 to 4 (ON/OFF) depends on the
setting of “[Menu] -> 3-> 6, 7, 8, 9-> 9: ALARM OUT
POLARITY”.
The setting item is not available on the IMO and A types.
6-22
6.3 LED Check
6.3 LED Check
： RPU-013
6.3.1 Processor unit：
1. SPU board
Table 6.3.1 LEDs on SPU board
Board Part number Normal status Function

Check for Vcc: +5 VDC supply from PWR
CR2 Light
board.
Check for Vcc: +3.3 VDC supply from PWR
CR3 Light
board.
SPU Blink
CR4 RUN check of Main CPU (U21)
(03P9337) every second
Blink
CR5 RUN check of DRW CPU (U19)
every second
Blink
CR8 RUN check of ARPA CPU (U74)
every 0.5 second
MAIN CPU
(U21) CR4
(Blink every second)
ARPA CPU
CR8 (U74)
(Blink every
0.5 second)
DRW CPU
(U19)
CR2/CR3 (Normally light)

CR5 (Blink every 1 second)
Fig. 6.3.1 Location of LEDs on SPU Board
6-23
6.3 LED Check
2. NET-100
This board is common to CU-200. LED operation is the same.
Table 6.3.2 LED of NET-100

NET-100 CR1 (LED-A) Light DATA: Displayed when there is data on LAN.
(03P9332) CR2 (LED-B) Blink LINK: Displayed when connected with LAN.
SPU board
PWR board TX-HV board
NET-100 board
CU-200
NET-100 board
RPU-013
Fig. 6.3.2 Location of Boards on RPU-013 and CU-200
100BASE-T
(RJ-45)
CR1 (LED-B): Blink
CR2 (LED-A): Light up
Fig. 6.3.3 Location of LEDs on NET-100
6-24
6.3 LED Check
3. PWR board
Table 6.3.3 LEDs on PWR board
Part Normal
Board Function
number status
Lights on when the over-current of antenna motor power
supply (+24 VDC) is detected. Restart the power to reset.
CR63
OFF Note:
(MTR)
Since the antenna motor of S-band radar is of AC motor
type, +24 VDC antenna motor power supply is not used.
Lights on when 4 to 5A, over-current of power supply for
CR64 (RF) OFF
TR unit (+24 VDC), is detected. Restart the power to reset.
Lights on when 5 to 7A, over-current of Tx-HV power
CR65 supply (+24 VDC), is detected. Restart the power to reset.
OFF
PWR (AC) (Tx-HV) The TX-HV board also has an over-current protection
(03P9339) circuit.
The LED is turned on when input over/low voltage is
and detected. Operation is restarted when the voltage comes
back to the specified voltage range.
PWR (DC)
(03P9338) AC type
Protection DC type
100 VAC 220 VAC
CR23 141 to 282 to
OFF Over 34 to
147 294 VAC
(IN ER) voltage 38 VDC
VAC
148 to - 24 VDC Spc.
170 VAC 13 to 17 VDC
Low 70 to
- 12 VDC Spc.
voltage 80 VAC
7.3 to 8.5
VDC
6-25
6.3 LED Check
CR63 (MTR)
CR63 (MTR)
CR64 (RF)
CR64 (RF)
CR65 (Tx-HV)
CR65 (Tx-HV)
CR23 (IN ER)

CR23 (IN ER)
PWR board DC (03P9338) PWR board AC (03P9339)
Fig. 6.3.4 Location of LEDs on PWR Board
6-26
6.3 LED Check
4. TX-HV board
Table 6.3.4 LEDs on TX-HV board

Lights when the protection circuit is activated
CR21: Red OFF by 0.7 A, over-current of TX-HV board.
HV9017
Restart the power to reset.
CR23: Green Light Lights in normal condition.
CR23（GRW）
CR21（RED）
Fig. 6.3.5 Location of LEDx on TX-HV Board
6-27
6.3 LED Check
5. GC-10 board
Table 6.3.5 LEDs on GC board

CR22 Light Check for +5 VDC output
64P1106-99 (A) Blink
CR21 Check for AD data output
every 0.2 second
CR22
CR21
Fig. 6.3.6 Location on LEDs on GC Board
6. DVI I/F board

Table 6.3.6 LEDs on DVI Board

SLB-FRN4-A LED 1 Light For connection of VDR or Monitor
SLB-FRN3-A LED 1 Light Incorporated in MU-201CR
LED1
Fig. 6.3.7 Location of LEDs on DVI I/F Board
6-28
6.3 LED Check
6.3.2 RF unit
Table 6.3.7 LEDs on RFC Board

RFC Blink
CR9 RUN check of CPU (U19)
(03P9346A) every 1 second
RTR-082: FAR-2837SW
RTR-079, 078: FAR-2xx7
RTR-081: FAR-2827W
Fig. 6.3.8 RFC Board, 03P9346A
The 03P9345-33A is added CR9

J806(2p) here. (Blink every 1 second)
Fig. 6.3.9 Location of RFC Board
6-29
6.3 LED Check
6.3.3 Control unit

1. RCU-014
Table 6.3.8 LEDs on PNL Board

Blink
03P9343 CR10 RUN check of CPU (U8)
every 0.5 second
2. RCU-015/RCU-016
Table 6.3.9 LEDs on PNL Board

Blink
03P9344 CR11 RUN check of CPU (U5)
every 0.5 second
CR10 (U8 CPU RUN)

Blink every second.
RCU-014
RCU-015, 016
CR11 (U5 CPU RUN)

Blink every second.
Fig. 6.3.10 Location of LEDs on Control Unit
6-30
6.4 Error Messages
6.4 Error Messages

6.4.1 Messages of ALERT BOX
When an alarm or error is detected, it is displayed in the ALERT BOX by
characters. And also, available alarm and ALM output are continuously displayed, and
outputted until the alarm condition is removed. The warning beeps stops when the
[ALM ACK] key is pressed.
090
100
ARP,
110
AIS DATA BOX
120
130 TARGET ARPA OFF AIS DISP

OFF
MANU
LIST
VECTOR TRUE 30M
140 GZ1 PAST POSN REL 3M
GZ2 CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN
150 ALARM1
ALARM2 ALERT BOX ALERT BOX
160
180 170 CU/TM
VRM1 >3.682NM< RESET
ALARM TARGET
VRM2 5.221NM ACK DATA & ACQ
CURSOR
MENU
------ SIGNAL MISSING ----- ------- ARPA ALARM -------

GYRO LOG EPFS TRIGGER COLLISION GUARD LOST
VIDEO AZIMUTH HEADLINE ARPA SYSTEM ERROR
DATUM MEMORY FULL TARGET-FULL(AUTO+MAN)Note-1
Note-1:
TARGET-FULL (AUTO), TARGET-FULL (MAN)
------ AIS ALARM ------ ------ OTHER ALARM -----

COLLISION LOST WT HEADING SET CHK INT-SW
ARPA FUSION RECEIVE WATCH ARRIVAL KEY RF
GUARD CPA/TCPA ANCHOR WATCH DEPTH XTE
TARGET-FULL AIS ALARM TARGET ALARM
----- WORK IN PROGRESS -----

TUNE INITIALZE PM
USER DEFAULT SART
Note-2: RD CARD DATA, FORMAT CARD DATA,
WR CARD DATA Note-2
DELETE CARD DATA
CABLE ATT ADJ Note-3
Note-3: POWER ON RESET
Fig. 6.4.1 Display in ALERT BOX
6-31
6.4 Error Messages
Table 6.4.1 List of SIGNAL MISSING Message
SIGNAL MISSING Description

Displayed when gyro signal cannot be inputted form [HDG SENSOR]
GYRO
and [GC-10] ports in the TB board.
Displayed when the ship speed data is not inputted when LOG (BT) or
LOG LOG (WT) is selected on “1:SHIP SPEED” of the [SPD] box menu.
LOG (WT): VBW>VHW, LOG (BT): VBW
Displayed under the following conditions:
- Position data is not inputted when GPS1 or GPS2 is selected on
1: NAV AID in the [OS POSN] box menu.
EPFS
- Ship speed data from GPS (VTG>RMC) is not inputted when GPS
is selected on 1:SHIP SPEED in [SPD] box menu.
- The accuracy of GPS is switched only on the IMO type.
TRIGGER Displayed when the trigger stopped in SPU board.
Displayed when IF video signal from TR unit is not detected at SPU
VIDEO
board.
Displayed when the antenna does not rotate, that is, B.P signal from the
AZIMUTH
antenna are detected on the SPU board.
Displayed when HD signal from the antenna is not detected on the SPU
HEADLINE
board.
Displayed under the following conditions:
- IMO type: DATUM error is displayed when there is no DTM
(WSG-84) sentence.
DATUM
- A, B and C types: DATUM error is not displayed even when there
is no DTM sentence. However, when DTM data is
received then lost, DATUM error is displayed.
Displayed when the number of stored points of MARK and LINE
MEMORY FULL
exceeds 20,000.
6-32
6.4 Error Messages
Table 6.4.2 List of ARPA ALARM Message
ARPA ALARM Description

Displayed when ARPA target within CPA and TCPA limit set in the
[CPT LIMIT] box menu is detected.
COLLISION
This is processed as a dangerous target and the symbol of the
applicable target is changed from a circle to a triangle in blinking red.
Displayed when an ARPA target comes in the guard zone set in
GUARD
[GZ1] and [GZ2] box menus.
When the target echo under tracking is not detected for preset scan
times, the target is processed as a lost target. If the echo is inputted
within the number of lost-targets times, it is not regarded as a lost
LOST
target. Even after the target becomes a lost target, tracking is
continued. And when applicable echoes are inputted again, it is not a
lost target any more.
ARPA SYSTEM ERROR Displayed when the ARPA CPU stops on the SPU board.
Displayed when the number of both auto and manual acquisition
TARGET-FULL
targets are reached to maximum number. (The number is set in the
(AUTO+MAN)
[ARP] box menu: 100 targets at a maximum.)
Displayed when the number of auto acquisition targets are reached to
TARGET-FULL (AUTO)
the maximum number. (The number is set in the [ARP] box menu.)
Displayed when the number of manual acquisition targets are reached
TARGET-FULL (MAN)
to the maximum number. (The number is set in the [ARP] box menu.
Table 6.4.3 (1/2) List of AIS ALARM Message
AIS ALARM Description

Displayed when an AIS active target within CPA and TCPA limit set
in the [CPT LIMIT] box menu is detected.
COLLISION
This is processed as a dangerous target and the applicable target is
presented in blinking red.
Displayed when a lost target is detected on the radar side. The
conditions of the lost targets are:
- When a target cannot be received in five report intervals of the
target
- When a target cannot be received for 6 minutes
Note:
- Conditions of the lost targets on the FA-100 are:
LOST When a target cannot be received for 3 minutes 20 seconds or
more, the target becomes a lost target. And, when it is not
received for 3 minutes 20 seconds or more, it is deleted from
the reception file.
- Conditions of the lost targets on the FA-150 depend on the speed:
For instance, the target becomes a lost target in 10 minutes
while the ship stops, and in 7 seconds when the speed is 23 kt
or more. When there is no reception for 400 seconds or more, it
is deleted from the reception file.
Cont’d
6-33
6.4 Error Messages
Table 6.4.3(2/2) List of AIS ALARM Message
Displayed when Speed Over Ground (SOG) cannot be calculated,

WT namely, when VHW (Water Speed and heading) is inputted and
“OFF” is set in “[SPD] box menu ->2: SET DRIFT”.
Displayed when “ON” is set in “[Menu] -> 4 -> 7:FUSION -> 2:
FUSION TERGET” and when ARPA targets are fused with AIS
ARPA FUSION
targets. The condition of fusion is determined by the setting in
“[Menu] -> 4 -> 7: FUSION -> 3, 4, 5, 6, 7”.
Displayed when AIS data (VDO) cannot be received from the AIS
unit.
RECEIVE Note:
In the FA-100 and the FA-150, VDO data normally outputs the
contents of MSG.1 every 1 second.
Displayed when an AIS target comes into the guard zone set in
GUARD
[GZ1] and [GZ2] box menu.
Displayed CPA and TCPA cannot be calculated since there is no
CPA/TCPA SOG/COG data. In this case, “ * ” mark is displayed for CPA and
TCPA data of the AIS data display.
Displayed when 1000 or more targets are received. Up to 1000 targets
TARGET-FULL
can be displayed on the radar screen.
Displayed when an ALM sentence is received from the AIS. The
AIS ALARM details can be checked on “8.AIS ALM MESSAGE” of [AIS] box
menu. See Table 6.4.6.
Table 6.4.4(1/2) List of OTHER ALARM Message
OTHER ALARM Description

GYRO alarm is displayed when “AD-10” is selected for 1.HEADING
data in the [HDG] box menu, and AD data is not received. When AD
HEADING SET
data is inputted after that, “HEADING SET” alarm is displayed.
** Heading data is inputted when a display mode is changed. **
CHK INT-SW Displayed when “LAN communication is disabled.”
Displayed when “[Menu] -> 3 -> 4: WATCH ALARM” is executed
WATCH
and the set time is reached.
Displayed when “[Menu] -> 8 -> 4: ARRIVAL WPT ALARM” is
ARRIVAL
executed and the set waypoint range is reached.
Displayed when communication is disabled between the CPU of the
control unit and the MAIN CPU on the SPU board in the processor
unit.
- “KEY” is displayed when TxD from the control unit cannot be
KEY
received on the control unit.
- “SYSTEM FAIL” is outputted from the control unit to the ALM
terminal when TxD from the processor unit cannot be received
on the control unit.
Displayed when communication is disabled between the TR unit
RF (RFC CPU) and the MAIN CPU on the SPU board in the Processor
unit.
Cont’d
6-34
6.4 Error Messages
Table 6.4.4(2/2) List of OTHER ALARM Message
Displayed when water depth is less than the depth set in “[Menu] -> 7
DEPTH
-> 4:DEPTH MARK”.
Displayed when the cross track error is out of the range set in
XTE
“[Menu] -> 8 -> 5: NAV LINE WIDE”.
Displayed when an applicable target enters or leaves the range set in
TARGET ALARM [ALARM1] and [ALARM2]. The setting of IN/OUT (Enter/Leave) is
made in “[Menu] -> 3 -> 2: TARGET ALARM MODE”.
Table 6.4.5 List of WORK IN PROGRESS Message
WORK IN PROGRESS Description

TUNE INITIALIZE Displayed when “[Menu] -> 1 -> 3: TUNE INITIALIZE” is executed.
Displayed when “[Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 0: PM GAIN ADJ and [Menu]
-> 1 -> 4: PM” is executed.
PM
Since the PM is turned on and automatically displays PM signals, the
setting of the range, pulse length and signal processing is optimized.
Displayed when “[Menu] -> 9 -> 3, 4, 5, 6 -> 5: USER DEFAULAT”
is selected and the user setting registered to the FUNCTION key is
read out.
USER DEFAULT
Note:
The user setting is registered by long pressing the FUNCTION key
and read out by short pressing the FUNCTION key.
Displayed when “[Menu] -> 1 -> 5: SART” is executed. Since SART
SART signals are automatically displayed, the setting of the range, pulse
length and signal processing is optimized.
WR CARD DATA Displayed when “[Menu] -> 6 -> 4～9: WR xx” is executed.
RD CARD DATA Displayed when “[Menu] -> 6 -> 3: READ CARD” is executed.
FORMAT CARD DATA Displayed when “[Menu] -> 6 -> 0 -> 3: INITIALIZE” is executed.
DELETE CARD DATA Displayed when “[Menu] -> 6 -> 0 -> 2: FILE DELETE” is executed.
Displayed when “AUTO” is executed in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> 2:
CABLE ATT ADJ
CABLE ATT ADJ”.
Displayed when the operation of “[Menu] -> 6 -> 3 -> Ixxxxxx” is
POWER ON RESET
performed. Read out of “9. WR INITIALIZE DATA”.
6-35
6.4 Error Messages
6.4.2 AIS ALARM message

Alarm messages sent from the AIS unit can be displayed by “8. AIS ALM MESSAGE”
in the [AIS] box menu. These messages are described by ALR sentences. When an
alarm is detected on the FA-100 or the FA-150, the ALM sentences are outputted every
25 seconds.
Table 6.4.6 List of AIS Alarm Message
Error display
AIS Description
Radar side
side
TX Tx malfunction Transmission malfunction, transmission stop
Possible cause: Antenna damage.
ANT Antenna VSWR exceeds limit
Continues operation is enabled.
TDMA Rx1 board malfunction. Transmission through
CH1 Rx channel 1 malfunction
the corresponding transmitting channel is stopped.
TDMA Rx2 board malfunction. Transmission through
the corresponding transmitting channel is stopped.
DSC Rx board malfunction. Transmission through
CH70 is stopped.
MKD connection lost MKD connection is disconnected. Continuous
MKD (MKD: Minimum Keyboard operation is enabled. (Actually this display is not
and Display) present.)
External EPFS lost
Data of an external navigation system is discontinued.
EPFS (EPFS: Electronic position
Continuous operation is enabled.
fixing system)
L/L No sensor position in use Position data for use is not present.
No valid SOG information
SOG SOG information is invalid data.
(SOG: Speed Over Ground)
No valid COG information
COG COG information is valid data.
(COG: Course Over Ground)
HDG Heading lost/invalid HDG data is discontinued / invalid.
No valid ROT information
ROT HDG data and $TI-ROT data are not present.
(ROT: Rate of Turn)
6-36
6.5 Replacement of Major Parts

6.5.1 Configuration of boards
“Common” means X-Band and S-Band.
：RPU-013
1. Processor unit：
Table 6.5.1 RPU-013 List of Boards Incorporated in RPU-013
Board Model Code Remarks

SPU 03P9337 00853646000 Common
03P9339A 00853639000 100 VAC, Antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9339B 00853640000 100 VAC, Antenna speed: 42 rpm
AC PWR
03P9339C 00853641000 220 VAC, Antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9339D 00853642000 220 VAC, Antenna speed: 42 rpm
Dedicated for 5 kW (Not shipped)
03P9338A
12-24 V, Antenna speed: 24 rpm
Dedicated for 5 kW (Not shipped)
DC PWR 03P9338B
12-24 V, Antenna speed: 42 rpm
03P9338C 00853643000 24 V, Antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9338D 00853644000 24 V, Antenna speed: 42 rpm
00853588000 100 AC type
AC FIL 03P9341
00853589000 220 AC type
DC FIL 03P9352 00853590000 DC type
HV9017A 00851732000 For 12 kW. HV: 330 V
HV
HV9017B 00851733000 For 25 kW - 60 kW. HV: 530 V
TB 03P9342 00853648000 Common
NET-100 03P9332 00853621000 Common with CU-200
GC-10 64P1106A 00441012000 Option
SLB-
DVI I/F 00014739600 Option
FRN 4-A
RGB BUFFER 03P9229B 00848030000 Option
6-37
2. Antenna unit
Table 6.5.2 List of Major Parts Incorporated in Antenna Unit
Board Type Code Remarks

03P9348A 00853628000 For X-Band, 12 kW
PWR 03P9348B 00853629000 For X-Band, 25 kW
03P9348C 00853960000 For S-Band, 30 kW
RFC 03P9346-33A 00854522000 Common (See p.6-19)
03P9335A 00853742000 For X-Band
IF AMP
03P9335B 00854333000 For S-Band
ANT motor: 200/220 VAC
MSS-7497 00851301000
(RSB-098, 100, 101, 104)
MSS
ANT motor: 380/440 VAC
MSS-7497A 00851302000
(RSB-099, 102, 105)
03P9244A 00851759000 For X-Band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
MD 03P9244B 00851760000 For X-Band, 25 kW (RTR-079, 81)
03P9244E 00853959000 For S-Band, 30 kW (RTR-080, 82)
BP GEN 03P9347 00853625000 Common
TB 03P9349A 00853962000 Common
RU-9601 00014715600 For X-Band radar
MIC
RU-9427 00014105900 For S-Band radar
MG4010 00015083900 For X-Band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
MAF1425B 00014687200 For X-Band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
Magnetron
MG5436 00014076200 For X-Band, 25 kW (RTR-079, 81)
MG5223F 00010908100 For S-Band, 30 W (RTR-80, 82)
RT-9025 00012382300 For X-Band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
Pulse
RT-9023 00012339400 For X-Band, 25 kW (RTR-079, 81)
transformer
RT-9273 00013673400 For S-Band, 30 W (RTR-80, 82)
PM31 00008043800 One set (Option)
X-Band PM31/B3RX1626 00853633000 PM body
PM For PM31
00853634000 With PM antenna
Scanner cover
PM51 00008126100 One set (Option)
S-Band
PM51/B3RX1012 00014926000 PM body
PM
PM51 ANT 00853869000
D8G-516 00063171500 For X-Band radar: 24 rpm
D8G-571 00013656600 For X-Band radar: 42 rpm
RM-7398 00011384005 For S-Band radar 200/220 VAC
Antenna motor RM-7435 00011439905 For S-Band radar 380/440 VAC
RM-9519 00014485002 For S-Band radar 220 VAC/50 Hz
Carbon brush
MG120-5x6x11 00063171600 For D8G-516/ D8G-571 motor
for DC motor
6-38
3. Control unit: RCU-014, RCU-015, RCU-016

Table 6.5.3 Board Incorporated in Control Unit

03P9343 00853636000 RCU-014
CONTROL
03P9344 00853638000 RCU-015, RCU-016
BUZZER 03P9362 00853637000 RCU-014
TRACK BALL TA4726N 00014713900 Common
4. Monitor unit: MU-231CR, MU-201CR

Table 6.5.4 Boards Incorporated in Monitor Unit

FLC59UXC8V-04 For MU-231CR
LCD Panel 00051554500
(03S9635) (LCD I/F, Inverter)
For MU-201CR
LCD Panel NL128102AC31-02 00015153700
(LCD I/F, Inverter)
FLCL-23
CCLF 00014946700
(03S9687) For MU-231CR
FAN MOTOR MMS-06C12DS-R02 00012840800
201MU-1
LCD 00014905900
(03S9632)
201LHS2F
Backlight unit 00015030400 For MU-201CR
(03S9723)
201PW21F
Inverter board 00015030500
(03S9724)
BSM501FN1 00015036400 For MU-231CR
DVI I/F
SLB-FRN3-A 00015073700 For MU-201CR
FILTER 03P9360 00853652000 For MU-231CR
12 V power supply PKW12-13RE-P MU-231CR/MU-201CR
(Common)
FIL LF-205A 00058841100
AC type
12 V power supply 03P9359 00014737600 MU-231CR/MU-201CR
(Common)
FIL MXB-1206-33 00012676000
DC type
5. Card Interface unit: CU-200

Table 6.5.5 Boards incorporated in CU-200
Board name Model Code Remarks

NET-100 03P9332 00853621000 Common with RPU-013
CARD CPU 03P9333 00853620000
CARD CON 03P9345 00853622000
6-39
6.5.2 Replacement of boards incorporated in RPU-013

1. SPU board
The SPU board is commonly used for X-band and S-band radars. When replacing the
SPU board, check and make the setting of the items listed in the table below at least.
Table 6.5.6 Check Items in Replacing SPU Board
Check item Remarks

#1: OFF #2: OFF
When connected with MU-201CR.
#3, #4: OFF
#1: ON #2: OFF
S1 setting When connected with MU-231CR.
#3, #4: OFF
#1: OFF #2: ON
Monitors other than those listed above.
#3, #4: OFF
Adjustment of Adjust R401 so that the level
When used with sub monitor.
video input of TP58: 2Vp-p
2. Echo ADJ Cable ATT
3. SCANNER Timing Heading
Do not forget to make the setting of
[Menu]-> 4. INSTALLATION
6.MODEL, 7.TYPE and RADAR NO.
0:INTIALIZE menu
5. OWN SHIP INFO
When connected with the network,
8. OTHER
make the setting of “5. INS”.
[Menu] ->1: Echo 2. TUNE INITIALIZE
[Menu] ->4: ARPA/AIS 8. AIS FUNCTION
1. NAV AID
[OS POSN] icon menu
3. SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
[HDG] icon menu 1. HDG SOURCE
[SPEED] icon menu 1. SHIP SPEED
6-40
2. PWR, HV and FIL board

When replacing the PWR board, pay attention to the gearbox type (antenna speed) and
power input type. When replacing the TX-HV board, pay attention to the radar output
power.
Table 6.5.7 Combination of PWR, HV and FIL Board
PWR board FIL board TX HV board

Power
25 kW or
input AC type DC type AC type DC type 12 kW
more
03P9339A
(ANT: 24 rpm)
100 VAC
03P9339B
(ANT: 42 rpm)
03P9341
03P9339C
(ANT: 24 rpm)
220 VAC HV9017B
03P9339D
(ANT: 42 rpm)
HV9017A
03P9338C
(ANT: 24 rpm)
24 VDC
03P9338D
(ANT: 42 rpm)
03P9352
03P9338A
12 to (ANT: 24 rpm)
24 VDC 03P9338B
(ANT: 42 rpm)
Note:
- Changes of the PWR board type can be coped with by the setting of jumper.
See p.4-64 for details.
- Changes of the HV board type can be coped with by the setting of jumper.
See p.4-70 for details.
6-41
6.5.3 Replacement of major parts of TR unit

1. Guarantee of Antenna Motor and Magnetron
The life of parts varies with operating conditions. The table below shows the estimated
lifetime to be used as a guide.
Table 6.5.8 The Life of Antenna Motor and Magnetron
Parts Type Approx. Remarks

MG4010 For X-Band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
MAF1425B For X-Band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
Magnetron 3,000 hours
MG5436 For X-Band, 25 kW (RTR-079, 81)
MG5223F For S-Band, 30 kW (RTR-80, 82)
D8G-516 For X-Band radar: 24 rpm
D8G-571 For X-Band radar: 42 rpm
RM-7398 For S-Band radar: 200/220 VAC
Antenna motor RM-7435 10,000 hours For S-Band radar: 380/440 VAC
RM-9519 For S-Band radar: 220 VAC/50 Hz
Carbon brush for
MG120-5x6x11 10,000 hours For D8G-516/ D8G-571 motor
DC motor
2. Replacement of Magnetron
The Magnetron is a ferromagnetic substance. When replacing the Magnetron, remove
your watch (a watch can be damaged) and remove it by using a non-magnetic
screwdriver. The outline of the replacing procedure is as follows:
Procedure:
1. Refer to the photo illustrating part layout in the following pages and remove the
magnetron.
- FAR-2xx7: page. 2-11 - FAR-2827W: page. 2-20
- FAR-2837S: page. 2-24 - FAR-2837SW: page. 2-30
2. Turn the power on and check the magnetron heater voltage.
3. Wait for about 30 minutes in the ST-BY state.
4. Put the radar in the send state in the long range and check the magnetron current.
5. Wait for about 30 minutes in the send state.
6. Execute tune initialize in “[Menu] -> 1 -> 3:TUNE INITIALIZE”.
7. Reset each preset time to “0” in “[Menu]->0->4->8:ON TIME, 9:TX TIME”.
6-42
3. References
1) Method for adjusting magnetron current
Basically, there is no need for adjusting the Magnetron current. Even if a Magnetron
is replaced, it is not needed to adjust it.
- Make a transmission at L pulse and adjust VR1 on the MD board so that voltage
between J3 - #1 and #3 on the RFC board is within the voltage range specified.
Magnetron current check

J3-#1. Mag.Cur,
-#3. GND
Fig. 6.5.1 RFC Board (03P9346)
Table 6.5.9 Magnetron Current
Model Magnetron current Note

FAR-2x17 2.6 to 3.1
FAR-2x27
4.1 to 4.7 Measured by
FAR-2827W
Long-pulse.
FAR-2x37S
7.2 to 8.0
FAR-2x37SW
6-43
2) Method for adjusting the heater voltage

Basically, there is no need for adjusting the heater voltage in the field. The heater
voltage is measured at J833-#11 and-#12 on the PWR (RF) board.
- In ST-BY, S1-M1 pulse state:

Adjust R28 on the PWR (RF) board so as to achieve the voltage specified.
- In TX, M2-L pulse state:
Adjust R32 on the PWR (RF) board so as to achieve the voltage specified.
Checking of
heater voltage
(J833-#11-#12)
R28(Maｇ. H)
Model HEATER
R32（Maｇ. L） Tx/L
FAR-2x17 7.4 to 7.6
STBY/S
FAR-2x27 Tx/L 6.5 to 7.5
FAR-2827W STBY/S 8.2 to 8.4
FAR-2x37S Tx/L 7.2 to 7.8
FAR-2x37SW STBY/S 9.1 to 9.3
Fig. 6.5.2 Adjustment of the Heater Voltage
4. Replacement of MIC
If the MIC is damaged, the R. MONITOR values are substantially varied.
When replacing the MIC alone, it may be damaged if radar waves from other ship get
into it. When replacing the MIC, be sure to do replacing works in a room or a ship so
as to prevent radar waves from getting into the MIC.
After the replacement, be sure to execute “TUNE INITIALIZE”.
- Setting of “TUNE INITIALIZE: [Menu] -> 1 -> 3:TUNE INITIALIZE”
6-44
6.6 Saving to Card I/F Unit: CU-200

6.6.1 Contents to be saved for CU-200
When the CU-200 is installed, the following items can be saved to the memory card in
“[Menu] -> 6: CARD”.
- 4. WR MARK (File name: Mxxxxxxx)

- 5. WR NAV LINE WPT (File name: Wxxxxxxx)
- 6. WR OWN TRACK (File name: Txxxxxxx)
- 7. WT TARGETTRACK (File name: Axxxxxxx)
- 8. WR SETTING DATA (File name: Sxxxxxxx)
- 9. WR INSTALLATION DATA (File name: Ixxxxxxx)
If the SPU board is replaced, retrieve the file written in “[Menu] -> 6 -> 3”.
When retrieve the INSTALLATION DATA file: Ixxxxxxxx, and if “POWER ON
RESTART” is displayed in the ALERT BOX, turn off the power once.
See the following pages for the items to be written in “8. WR SETTING DATA” and “9.
WR INSTALLATION DATA”.
1. [4. WR MARK] (File name: Mxxxxxxx)

Entered marks are saved. The number of points to be stored can be checked in the
[MARK] box menu. The maximum number of storable points is 20,000.
2. [5. WR NAV LINE WPT] (File name: Wxxxxxxx)

“[Menu] -> 8 -> 7:WPT LIST, 9: NAV LINE LIST” is stored.
3. [6. WR OWN TRACK] (File name: Txxxxxxx)

The own ship track is stored. The number of points to be stored can be checked in the
[MARK] box menu. The maximum number of storable points is 20,000.
4. [7. WT TARGET TRACK] (File name: Axxxxxxx)

The other ship track is stored. The number of points to be stored can be checked in
the [MARK] box menu. The maximum number of storable points is 15,000.
6-45
5. [8. WR SETTING DATA] (File name: Sxxxxxxx)
Table 6.6.1 Items to be Saved in WR SETTING DATA
Item Contents to be saved Remarks

Range Range setting value in [Range] box 0.125 to 48 NM
Setting value of presentation mode in HEAD UP RT to NORTH
Disp mode
[PRESENTATION MODE] box menu. UPTM
Function [PICTURE] -> 1 to 9
PI Setting display of index line
- Brilliance setting value in [Brill] box
Brill menu
- [BRILL] VR setting value
EBL EBL setting y
Gain [GAIN] VR setting
AC SEA Manual setting value by [A/C SEA] VR
AC AUTO Auto setting value by A/C SEA
AC RAIN Manual setting value by [A/C RAIN] VR
Manual and auto tune setting value in
TUNE
[TUNE] box.
Set Drift [Speed] box menu -> 3 3. Setting value of Set drift
Setting range of guard zone in [GZ1] and
Guard
[GZ2] box menu.
Setting range of guard alarm zone in
Guard Alarm
[ALARM1] and [ALARM2] boxes menu.
Trail Setting value of [Trail]
VRM Setting value of [VRM1], and [VRM2]
ARPA Setting value of [ARP]
AIS Setting value of [AIS]
Vector Setting value of [VECTOR]
Past Setting value of [PAST POSN]
ARPA CPA Setting value of [CPA] 0.5NM to 20NM
ARPA TCPA Setting value of [TCPA LIMI] 1M to 60M
Mark Setting value of [Mark]
SUB Monitor [ANT] box menu -> 8 8. SUB MONITOR
INTSW Priority [ANT] box menu -> 9 9. INTSW Priority
Echo [Menu] -> 1 -> 2, 6 2. 2ND echo REJ , 6. Wiper
4. Index line bearing,
5. Index line
6. Index line mode
7. [INS MARK] Note
9: [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]
0: RING
Mark [Menu] -> 2 -> 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 0 Note:

7. To display [INS MARK],
make the setting of “[Menu]
-> 0 -> 8 -> 5: INS” to other
than “OFF”.
Remark:
8: EBL OFFSET BASE is not
saved.
6-46
Alarm [Menu] -> 3: ALARM

ARP/AIS [Menu] -> 4 4. ARP/AIS
Plotter [Menu] -> 5 5. [Plotter]
NAV Data [Menu] -> 7 7. [NAV data]
2. NAV LINE DATA
NAV LINE WPT [Menu] -> 8 -> 2, 4, 5, 4. Arrival WPT alarm
5. NAV line wide
CUSTOMIZE [Menu] -> 9 8: Except for TEST
7. TYPE
INSTALLATION [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 7, 0
0. PM GAIN
2. Dem echo
5. INS -> OFF/Serial/LAN
OTHER [Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 2, 5
Remark:
3: “EAV W/O GYRO” is not
saved.
6. [9. WR INSTALLATION DATA] (File name: Ixxxxxxx)
Table 6.6.2 Items to be Saved in WR INSTALLATION DATA
Contents to be Saved Remarks

[Menu] -> 0 -> 2: ECHO All
[Menu] -> 0 -> 3: SCANNER All
2: RADAR
[Menu] -> 0 -> 4: INSTALLATION 5: RADAR POSN
6: MODEL
[Menu] -> 0 -> 5: OWN SHIP INF All
[Menu] -> 0 -> 6: ARP PRESET All
[Menu] -> 0 -> 8: OTHER 4: ARP SELCT
2: OWN SHIP MARK
[Menu] -> 2: MARK
3: STERN MARK
Data of OWN SHIP SHAPE
[MARK] icon menu 2: OWN SHIP SHARP
set here
[OS POSN] icon menu 1: NAV AID
1: SHIP SPEED
[SPD] icon menu
2: MANUAL SPEED
[AIS] icon menu 6: [VOYAGE DATA]
“FACTORY” Menu 2: LANGUAGE
Note:
The settings of “[Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4: RADAR NO” and “[Menu] -> 0 -> 7:
NETWORK” are not saved to the RAM card since they are unique data.
6-47
6.7 Battery Replacement of CG-10
6.7 Battery Replacement of GC-10
CAUTION!
Take care to avoid short-circuit of the battery. This could create a burn or
fire hazard. Do not dispose of battery in a fire or an incinerator; this may
cause an explosion!
The life of a battery is approximately 5 years although it varies with the operating
conditions of the unit. If “HDG” is represented by “000.0” every time the power is
turned off, the battery has come to the end of its life. Disconnect JP8 and replace the
battery. After the completion of the replacement, re-connect the JP8.
Battery model: CR 1/2 8L-F (Lithium battery)

Code No.: 000-103-769
Battery
JP8
Fig. 6.7.1 GC-10 Board
6-48
6.8 Connection of EG-3000
6.8 Connection of EG-3000

Follow the instructions given below for connecting EG-3000 for displaying demo
pictures. But GAIN and STC cannot be adjusted.
Adjustment of video signals

Make adjustments of R401 so that the level of TP58 on the SPU board achieves 2Vp-p.
See p.4-81.
Setting:
1. Select “EG” in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 2:DEMO ECHO”.
2. Select a type other than IMO type in “[Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 7:TYPE”.
3. Select “GPS1” in “1.NAV AID” of the [OS POSN] box menu.
4. Select “MANUAL” in “1.SPEED” in the [SPEED] box menu and enter the ship
speed in this menu.
B.P SW 360 deg.
OP VIDEO IN
TB J616 T.B.
EG-3000 1
GND
8 (NH-8P)
(03P9342)
2 7
MASTER
3
4
OP BP IN
5 4
OP HD IN
(NH-11P) 6 2
7 TB J617
8 (NH-8P)
OP TRIG 1
9 6
SLAVE 1
TB J615
+12V
10 1 (WAGO 5P)
GND
11 2 OPTION
NAV-A TB J606
1 1 (WAGO 3P)
NAV-B
2 2
EG NAV NAVIGATOR
(XH-5P) 3
4
5
AD DATA H TB J608
1 1 (WAGO 4P)
AD DATA C
EG AD-10 2 2
(XH-4P) 3
AD CLK H
3 AD CONVERTOR
AD CLK C
4 4
Fig. 6.8.1 Connection of EG-3000
6-49
Chapter 7. Block Description
7.1 Overview
7.1 Overview
The standard supply units are comprised of Processor unit, Monitor unit, Control unit
and Antenna unit (TR unit). Serial signals are used as control signals between each unit.
The ARPA and video plotter functions are incorporated in the SPU board as standard
and a performance monitor is integrated into the Antenna unit as an option. The inter
switch function operates via LAN connection.
7.1.1 Interface
The communication between TR unit and Processor unit is made via RS-422/115.2 kbps,
and the communication between Processor unit and Control unit via RS-422/19.2 kbps,
both using an asynchronous communication method.
The LAN ports of 100 Base-Tx allows the connection with CU-200 or radars of FAR
series. The connection via HUB-100 allows the connection with up to eight FAR-series
radars and up to two CU-200 units. (Maximum 8 ports)
INS (ECDIS) supports both LAN and serial port (RS-422/4800 bps) connection. See
page.6-13 for details of interface of each port.
Display uint U-AIS

38.4kbps
Sensor Remote
RS-422
Control unit
SXGA
Input Control unit

Transceiver unit (RCU-014/015) (RCU-016)
RS-422 RS-422 RS-422
115.2kbps 19.2kbps CONT p.c.b 19.2kbps
RFC p.c.b SPU p.c.b (03P9343) CONTp.c.b
(03P9346A) (Asyncronous) (03P9337) (03P9344) (03P9344)
(Asyncronous) (Asyncronous)
Serial
RS-422 100 Base-Tx Processor unit
4800bps
LAN (RPU-013)
INS
(ECDIS) Switching HUB
HUB-100:
8 port (HUB-100) Provided with the
Auto-MDIX feature and
LAN LAN LAN LAN automatically recognizes
Card I/F unit Card I/F unit a straight cable and cross
(CU-200) (CU-200)
SPU p.c.b --- SPU p.c.b cable.
(03P9337) (03P9337)
Processor unit Processor unit

(RPU-013) (RPU-013)
Fig. 7.1.1 Example of the Interface between units.
7-1
7.1 Overview
7.1.2 Overall block diagram
X-band: RSB-096/097, RTR-078/079

S band: RSB-098/099/100/101/102, RTR-080
From RFC
PM
PM Trig
PM Enable Antenna unit
ANT PM Leve
Motor +12/-12V
IF IF AMP*
D MON IF-VIDEO MIX X band: 03P9335A
HD SW Limitter MIC IF AMP* S band: 03P9335B
TUNE
(03P9335A/B)
PIN ATT
+5V
*S-30k up only
MSS Mag./
Pulse TR Cable ATT Data
(MSS-7497) B.W
(MSS-7497A) MBS Enable STC Detect
TUNE Gain TUNE IND
TUNE Gate DI MON out
TUNE
PSU-007 BP GEN MD STC Cont
(03P9347) (03P9244A/B) To PM
PIN ATT Cont
FET ATT
PM Trig
PM Enable Sample Hold
Trig1-4 PM Leve TEST SIG
HD V Trig +12/-12V TEST SIG Enable
BP Short pulse Mag. CUR +12/-12/5V
Heater
Motor 3ph Tx protect
+12V
RFC
(03P9346A)
+12 RF TX Data HEATER
12/25kW only -12V RF Rx Data -12/+5V
TX HV HEATER OFF
+12/+32V
HDG SENSOR PWR +24V

LOG (03P9348A/B/C)
PC +24V MOTOR V
25kW only
+24V
NAV DATA
ECDIS TB
AIS (03P9349A)
TRACK CONTROL
AD-10
ALARM IN/OUT
+24V
TX HV MU-201CR
RF TX Data
MOTOR IF-VIDEO MIX
RF Rx Data
MU-231CR
Processor unit (RPU-013) SXGA
DVI
SXGA DVI TRACKBALL

(RCU-015)
KEY TX/RD STD CONT REM CONTROL

+12V
POWER SW
(RCU-014) (RCU-016)
SYSTEM FAIL
ANT ON +12V
Slave Display 1 (FULL-LOG: HD/BP/Trig/Video)

Slave Display
Slave Display 2 (SEM-LOG: HD/BP/Trig/Video)

TB Slave Display
(03P9342)
Master (HD/BP/Trig/Video)
Master Radar
+12/-12/-5V
TRK RD OPHD/BP/Trig/Video RSV1 TD
EXT ALM ACK ANT 12V ON RSV2 TD
EXT ALM1-4 GC LED/HOLD/UP/DOWN RSV3 TD
KEY TX/RXD AIS TD/RD NAV RD
LED RS232 TX/RX LOG RD ARPA TD
HOLD -12/Vcc RF Tx/Rx Data AD-10
UP AD-10 GC 5V GYRO RD OP1 HD/BP/Trig/Video
DOWN +24/+12V OP2 HD/BP/Trig/Video
TX HV MOTOR
ANT ON
ANT SPEED R/G/B
BP
24V HV POWER H-SYNC
MONITOR/
GC-10 TX HV (AC: 03P9339) RGB V-SYNC
(64P1106A) (HV9017) DVI IF BUFFER VDR
(DC: 03P9338) 5/+12/-12V
MON MOTOR VLT SPU
POWER FAIL (03P9337) Max 8 port
LAN LAN
NETWORK HUB
Ship’s Main FIL (HUB-100)
(AC: 03P9341) NET-100
(DC: 03P9352) (03P9332)
CARD IF
(CU-200)
Fig. 7.1.2 Overall block diagram of FAR-2xx7, 2x37S
7-2
7.1 Overview
RSB-103
PM ANT
Motor
HD SW
BP GEN
PM Trig (03P9347)
PM Enable
PM Leve HD
+12/-12V
BP
TB
(03P9349A) Antenna unit
PM Trig
PM Enable
PM Leve
+12/-12V
RTR-081
T/R unit
IF
DI MON IF-VIDEO MIX
Limitter IF AMP
MIC (03P9335A)
TUNE
PIN ATT
+5V
Mag./
Cable ATT Data
Pulse transformer B.W
MBS Enable STC Detect
TUNE Gain TUNE IND
TUNE
MD STC Cont
(03P9244E) PIN ATT Cont
FET ATT
Sample Hold
Trig1-4 TEST SIG
V Trig TEST SIG Enable
Short pulse MUG. CUR +12/-12/5V
HD Heater
BP Tx protect
+12V
RFC
(03P9346A)
-12V RF Rx Data -12/+5V
+12/+32V HEATER OFF
HDG SENSOR PM Trig PM Trig PWR +24V

PM Enable
LOG PM Enable
PM Leve (03P9348)
PM Leve
+12/-12V Motor V +12/-12V 25kW only
PC TX HV
+24V
NAV DATA
ECDIS TB
AIS (03P9349A)
TRACK CONTROL
AD-10
ALARM IN/OUT
+24V
TX HV MU-201CR
RF TX Data
MOTOR IF-VIDEO MIX
RF Rx Data
MU-231CR
DVI
SXGA DVI TRACKBALL

(RCU-015)

+12V
POWER SW
(RCU-014) (RCU-016)
SYSTEM FAIL
ANT ON +12V

Slave Display

TB Slave Display
(03P9342)
Master Radar
+12/-12/-5V
TX HV MOTOR
ANT ON
ANT SPEED R/G/B
BP
24V HV POWER H-SYNC
MONITOR/
(DC: 03P9338) 5/+12/-12V
MON MOTOR VLT SPU
LAN LAN
NETWORK HUB
(AC: 03P9341) NET-100
(DC: 03P9352) (03P9332)
CARD IF
(CU-200)
Fig. 7.1.3 Overall block diagram of FAR-2x27W
7-3
7.1 Overview
RSB-104/105
PM
ANT
Motor
HD SW
BP GEN
(03P9347)
PM Trig
PM Enable
PM Leve HD
+12/-12V BP
TB
(03P9349) Antenna unit
RTR-082
T/R unit
IF
DI MON IF-VIDEO MIX
Limitter IF AMP
MIC (03P9335B)
Motor 3ph TUNE
PIN ATT
+5V
Mag./
Pulse transformer Cable ATT Data
B.W
MBS Enable STC Detect
TUNE Gain TUNE IND
TUNE
MD STC Cont
(03P9244E) PIN ATT Cont
FET ATT
Sample Hold
Trig1-4 TEST SIG
V Trig TEST SIG Enable
Short pulse MUG. CUR +12/-12/5V
Heater
HD Tx protect
BP +12V
RFC
(03P9346A)
-12V RF Rx Data -12/+5V
+12/+32V HEATER OFF
HDG SENSOR
LOG PM Trig PM Trig PWR +24V
PM Enable
PM Enable
PM Leve (03P9348)
PC PM Leve
+12/-12V
MOTOR ON +12/-12V TX HV 25kW only
NAV DATA +12V +24V
ECDS
AIS TB
TRACK CONTROL (03P9349A)
AD-10
ALARM IN/OUT
+24V
TX HV MU-201CR
RF TX Data
MOTOR IF-VIDEO MIX
RF Rx Data
MU-231CR
DVI
SXGA DVI TRACKBALL

(RCU-015)

+12V
POWER SW
(RCU-014) (RCU-016)
SYSTEM FAIL
ANT ON +12V

Slave Display

TB Slave Display
(03P9342)
Master Radar
+12/-12/-5V
TX HV MOTOR
ANT ON
ANT SPEED R/G/B
BP
24V HV POWER H-SYNC
MONITOR/
(DC: 03P9338) 5/+12/-12V
MON MOTOR VLT SPU
LAN LAN
NETWORK HUB
(AC: 03P9341) NET-100
(DC: 03P9352) (03P9332)
CARD IF
(CU-200)
Fig. 7.1.4 Overall block diagram of FAR-2x27SW
7-4
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2 Antenna Unit

7.2.1 RFC board (03P9346A)
The RFC board is used commonly for X-band and S-band radars. The version of the
RFC board can be checked in the “FACTORY TEST”. See page.6-19 for details.
1. Control signals
The RFC board and the SPU board of the Processor unit communicate with each other
through RS-422/115.2 kbps by the asynchronous communication method. The overview
of control signals is shown below.
Serial data sent from the SPU board to the RFC board includes GAIN, STC and TUNE
control signals. These signals are processed on the RFC board to control the MD board,
IF board, PWR (RF) board and MIC circuit of the TR unit. The RFC board converts
head line signals, bearing signals, TUNE IND voltage, Magnetron current, DI-Monitor
voltage, and each supply voltage monitored on the TR unit circuit into serial data and
send them to the SPU board.
TR/SCANNER unit
TUNNING
IF PIN ATT
MIC
(03P9335) IF(60MHz)
DI Monitor
Processor unit
(RPU-013) B.W
GAIN/STC IF-Video Sig.
MBS
TUNU
TUNE IND
DI Monitor
Mag.
TUNE GATE
FET ATT
PULTH WIDTH PIN ATT
GAIN GAIN PULSE
STC STC Transformer
FTC TX Trigger
VRM/EBL TUNU
Track Ball MBS
Key SW PM Lelvel/Enable
TRIG
CONT. Power SW RF Tx data TRIG
unit TRIG
SPU HD / BP
TUNE IND
TRIG
(03P9337) Mag.-Current RFC HEATER MD
DI-Monitor (03P9346A) Short pulse
(03P9244)
RF Rx data TX-HV PROTECT
MUG. Current
IF- Video SIg. MIX
V TRIG
Monitor Video Sig.
unit
-12V
+5V
+12V HD BP GEN
+32V BP
HEATER (03P9347)
PWR +24V PWR(RF)

(AC/DC) (03P9348)
Fig. 7.2.1 Overview of Control Signals
7-5
7.2 Antenna Unit
2. Control between RFC board and MD board

The RFC board outputs four TX triggers to the MD board to generate TX pulses
corresponding to pulse length set in the Processor unit. Changing the timing of each
trigger and pulse length controls the TX pulse length and waveform. The TX pulses are
S1, S2, M1, M2, M3 and L. When voltage higher than the specified TX high voltage
(TX-HV) is applied onto the MD board, the RFC board stops TX triggers.
3. Control between RFC board and IF board

The RFC board controls the IF board based on the control information from the SPU
board. This includes the control bandwidth, STC waveform output according to
GAIN/STC information, MBS, and the cable correction. The IF board outputs STC
DETECT signals to the RFC board to create an AUTO STC curve, which are converted
into serial data and sent to the SPU board.
4. Monitor of TR unit
The RFC board detects TUNE IND voltage, Magnetron current, DI-Monitor voltage,
and each supply voltage from the circuits. Detected signals are converted into serial data
and sent to the SPU board. By executing [Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2:Self Test, values
detected in the TR unit can be monitored. See page.6-6 for details.
5. HD and B.P
HD and B.P signals are sent from the B.P GEN board to the RFC board. B.P is
outputted at 265 pulses/rev on the S-band radar and 360 pulses/rev on the X-band radar.
These signals are subjected to waveform shaping on the RFC board, converted into
serial data and sent to the SPU board.
6. Memory used for RFC board

The table below shows major applications of the memory of the RFC board.
Table 7.2.1 Memory used for RFC board
Memory Application
The circuit of U17 (FPGA) is
written on it. When the power
ISP PROM
U26 XC18V01S020I is turned on, the program is
(In System Programming)
sent to the FPGA to start the
FPGA.
U28 MBM29LV800BA 90 PFTN 8 M Flash-ROM RFC CPU program
U27 μPD441000LGU B85A 1 M SRAM: RFC CPU work memory
7-6
7.2 Antenna Unit
RFC (03P9346A) PIN ATT CONT

PIN ATT CONT
FET ATT
U10 FET ATT
TUNE GATE
TUNE GATE
SAMPL HOLD
SAMPL HOLD
MSB ENABLE
MSB ENABLE
TEST SIG ENABL
TEST SIG ENABL IF
HD U14 U30 HD TEST SIG (03P9335)
BP GEN 2.5V
(03P9347) BP U14 U30 BP
Data D0-7 U16 STC-CONT
(D/A)
STC DETECT
2.5V
Data D0-7 U7 U5
RF RX data U15 RF RX (A/D)
U5
SPU RF TX data U15 RF TX
U17
(FPGA) V TRIG
U6 96MHz
Q1, Q5, Q6 TRIG 1
CLOCK
XC2100E-6TQ144I Q2, Q7, Q8 TRIG 2
RPU-013 BVER 0-3 Q3, Q9, Q10 TRIG 3
Q4, Q11, Q12 TRIG 4 MD
JP3 -J P5 SHORT (03P9244)
3.3V
Vcc INT TX HV INHBI TX-HV PRTECT
U25 U22
2.5V
M3 - L
MAG DETECT S - M2 U8 MAG-CUR-IN
HEATER
U26
(EEPROM)
Data D0-7
ADD. AD1-19
U23
PM Trig PM Trig
PM Enable
PM PM LEVL
INT BP/INT HD
INT UART RX
INT UART TX
FPGA Reset
CLK 16MHz
+12V 3.3V
U28 U27
INT TRG
2P5(2.5V)
U4/U5 (Flash ROM) (RAM)
Rer. VOL
CS/WR/RD
U23 PM Enable
U12 PM LEVL
U30
Reset U29
(Reset)
PROTECT AD
TUNE SYNC
U20 TEMP OUT TUNING BIAS
TUNE SCLK U18
(TEMP. DET) TUNE DIN (D/A) 2.5V
MAG CUR LVL U24
SHORT U3/21
2.5V
U12, 1
U19 TUNE SYNC
U13 TUNE
TUNE SCLK
(RFC CPU) TUNE DIN
(D/A)
Q13
TB J917
Motor ON
U3 IF
M30620FCNFP SDATA/CLK/DATAE
(03P9349) TX SIG
U11
VBW A/B
(03P9335)
J917 U21
BUZ OUT TUNE GAIN
TB803
TUNE AD TUNE IND TUNE

D MONI AD D MONI
CR9 (CPU RUN)

HEATER AD HEATER
HEATER VLT HEATER VLT

U3
HEATER OFF HEATER OFF
P12V AD P12V
U12
STC ATT(NC) ISTC ATT P5V AD P5V PWR(RF)
P32V AD P32V
N12V AD N12V
(03P9348)
N12V AD N12V
Fig. 7.2.2 Block Diagram of RFC board
7-7
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2.2 MD board (03P9244)

The MD boards have no compatibility because the part parameters are different
according to the types.
Table 7.2.2 Types of MD boards
Types of
Remarks
MD board
03P9244A For X-band, 12 kW (RTR-078)
03P9244B For X-band, 25 kW (RTR-079, 81)
03P9244E For S-band, 30 kW (RTR-080, 82)
TRIG
TRIG
TRIG
TX data TRIG TX-HV PULSE
RX data
RFC HEATER MD Transformer Mag.
(03P9346A) V TRIG (03P9244)
HEATER
TX-HV PROTECT
MAG. Current
Short
TX-HV
Fig. 7.2.3 Connection of RFC/MD board

TX-HV TX-HV
R1, 2 [J813-1]
[J811]
C1 - 4
+12V
R3, 4 +12V K1 K4
TX PROTECT
R41, 42
CR1, 2
L1
L4
[J812-10]
R40
Q5, 6 Q7, 8 TX-Pulse

Q1
TRIG. 1 [J813-2]
[J812-1]
TRIG. 1
+
Q9, 10 Q11, 12 TRIG. 2
Q2 +
TRIG. 2
TRIG. 3
[J812-2] +
TRIG. 4
=
Q13, 14 Q15, 16
Q3 TX Pulse
TRIG. 3
[J812-3]
Short Pulse Middle Pulse Long Pulse
Q17, 18 Q19, 20
Q4
TRIG. 4
[J812-4]
V TRIG
[J812-5]
+12V SW REG. VR1
(U1, Q23, U2/Q21
[J812-6] CR4, CR4)
S
Short Pulse(S1) [J812-9]
Short Pulse(S2) [J812-2]
HEATER [J812-12/13] L3 HEATER

(Filter)
[J814]
MAG. Current [J812-11]
Fig. 7.2.4 Block diagram of MD board
7-8
7.2 Antenna Unit
1. TX trigger
Four triggers different in pulse length to each drive circuit of the MD board. These
outputs are combined to create high-voltage TX pulses. The waveform of short and
middle TX pulses is a triangular wave. In signal processing, it allows suppressing
relatively weaker echoes such as sea clutter on short range. The photos below show
examples of waveforms of detected TX output of the X-band/25 kW radar.
The pulse length at the point 3 dB below the peak is defined as the pulse length.
0.18 us
0.5 us
40 ns/div 100 ns/div

(e.g.) Waveform of 25 kW S1 pulse TX output (e.g.) Waveform of 25 kW M1 pulse TX output
1.32 us
200 ns/div
Photo 7.2.3
(e.g.) Waveform of 25 kW L pulse TX output
7-9
7.2 Antenna Unit
2. Short pulse and V TRIG signal

U1 (MB3776AP) on the MD board is a switching power supply and generates the
power supply to the trigger amplifier circuits of the RFC board (Q1 -12) and MD board
(Q5-20). The adjustment of output voltage of U1 is made at VR1 on the MD board. This
is the adjustment of Magnetron current which has been set at the factory. There is no
need for this adjustment when the Magnetron is replaced in the field. The “SHORT
PULSE” signal controlling U1 from the RFC board increases voltage and TX output at
S1 pulse. This signal also turns on K1 on the MD board to make the pulse trailing edge
steep. This is achieved by short-circuiting L1 for a certain time and reducing the
residual voltage of the Magnetron. In a similar manner, K1 and K4 are controlled at S1
and S2 pulses on the S-band radar.
VR1
For adjustment of
Magnetron current at
VR1 on the MD board
(No need for adjustment
in the field)
Fig. 7.2.5 MD board (03P9244)

3. TX PROTECT signal
TX high voltage is divided (R1/2, R3/4, R40) on the MD board, and output to the RFC
board as TX-HV protect signal. If it is higher than the TX high voltage specified in the
“MODEL” setting of the INITIALIZE menu, the RFC board stops TX triggers. This
signal is also used as monitor signals for TX high voltage.
Tx-HV R1, 2 Mag.

Q1-4
R3, 4
From RFC p.c.b
Including HV monitor signal
TRIG 1-4 TRIG 1-4
R40
MD p.c.b
(03P9244)
R75
(CPU)
TX-HV PROTCT RF TXD/RXD

U19
R76
RFC p.c.b DATA/ADD.

(03P9346)
(GATE ARRY)
Compareter To MD p.c.b
R74
- TX-HV INHBIT N
U22 TRIG 1-4
R77 +
U17
REF 2P5
U4, 5
Fig. 7.2.6 Schematic diagram of TX protection circuit
7-10
7.2 Antenna Unit
4. RF circuit
Magnetron
While the Magnetron is not operating, TX high voltage (TX-HV) runs through R1/2,
and is changed on capacitor: C1-4. When trigger pulse is applied to MOS-FETs Q1 to
Q4, the FET is turned on and discharges C1 to C4. Voltage is increased on the primary
winding of the pulse transformer and high voltage of 6 kV to 8 kV is generated on the
secondary winding to make the Magnetron oscillate.
Limitter
MIC
Mag. Current
Tx-HV Pulase trans
Heater Heater
Magnetron
RF PWRp.c.b L3
Trigger
R34,35
Discharge Pulase trans

Tx-HV R1,2 Tx-HV 1 5 3
Circulator
HV-9017p.c.b Antenna
C1-4
R3,4,40
Charge
R41,42
CR1,2
K1
L1 2 6 4 C801
Short pulase CR802

K1 Magnetron
CR803
Trigger
Q1-4 R801
MDp.c.b MOS FET

Switching
Fig. 7.2.7 Block diagram of high frequency circuit
Major parts of TX circuit

- CR1, 2 (MD board)
CR1 and 2 serve to protect MOS-FET. When the TX trigger is switched from ON
to OFF, counter-electromotive force (overshoot) generated on the primary winding
of the pulse transformer is released to the TX-HV power supply.
- R41, 42 (MD board)
R41 and 42 serve to decrease the main bang. When the TX trigger is switched from
ON to OFF, there remains residual voltage on the primary winding of the pulse
transformer. R41 and 42 serve to consume this residual voltage.
- L1 (MD board)
When the pulse length is S1 (short pulse), the relay is turned on to connect L1 to
the TX-HV line. The coil impedance becomes low in a certain time after the pulse
trailing, shorting the primary winding of the pulse transformer, forcibly dissipates
residual voltage of the Magnetron to make the pulse trailing edge steep.
7-11
7.2 Antenna Unit
- CR802, 803
CR802 and 803 serve to protect the Magnetron. When the trigger is switched from
ON to OFF, counter-electromotive force (overshoot) generated on the Magnetron is
released to the GND line.
- L3 (MD board)
L3 serves to protect the heater power supply circuit. L3 prevents the leakage of
high voltage generated at the pulse transformer from flowing to the heater power
supply circuit.
Circulator
The radar antenna is used commonly for sending and receiving. The circulator performs
switching between sending and receiving. The circulator has three I/O ports and has a
permanent magnet and ferrite core arranged in the center. It serves to output
electromagnetic waves coming from one port to a particular direction. For instance,
electromagnetic waves coming from a port connected to the Magnetron are outputted to
the antenna connecting port and not outputted to a port connected to the MIC to protect
the receiving circuit from a large level of electromagnetic waves. During receiving
signals, receiving waves from the antenna are outputted to the MIC connecting port to
reduce the loss of receiving waves.
Receiving circuit
Receiving waves from the circulator are inputted to the MIC via a diode limiter or TR
limiterNote. If strong sending waves are inputted from other ship, there is a risk of the
MIC being damaged. To protect the MIC from damage, the diode limiter attenuates
strong sending waves. The MIC is comprised of a local oscillation circuit, a LNA circuit,
PIN ATT circuit and a frequency conversion circuit, which converts received signals to
IF signals of 60 MHz.
Note:
- Diode limiter: FAR-2xx7, FAR 2x37S
- TR limiter: FAR-2827W, FAR-2837SW
7-12
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2.3 IF board (03P9335)

The IF board has different parts in X-band and S-band radars and is not compatibly used
for different types of radars.
03P9335A 03P9335B
IF board for X-band radar IF board for S-band radar
The IF board is comprised of a video detection circuit and the semi-log amplifier circuit
of IF signals (60 MHz). IF signals of 60 MHz and video signals are superimposed and
outputted from the IF board to the Processor unit. Video signals are outputted to allow
connection to an existing type of a sub monitor.
RFC (03P9346A)
PIN ATT CONT
U10 FET ATT
TUNE GATE
TX data SAMPL HOLD
MSB ENABLE
TEST SIG ENABL TUNNING
RX data U17 TEST SIG
(FPGA) PIN ATT*
Data D0-7 U16 STC-CONT +5V* X/S band Echo
(D/A) MIC
DI-MONITOR
STC DETECT
Data D0-7 U7 IF(60MHz)
(A/D)
+12V / +5V / -12V
IF X band* S band*
2.5V (03P9335) PIN ATT none
TUNE SYNC U12, 1 +5V +9V
U13 TUNE
TUNE SCLK (D/A)
TUNE DIN
U19 U11 SDATA/CLK/DATAE

(CPU) VBW A/B
TUNE GAIN
TUNE AD TUNE IDN
D MONI AD D MONI
MIX Sig.
IF SIG.(60MHz)
and
Video SIG.
Fig. 7.2.8 Connection of RFC board IF board
7-13
7.2 Antenna Unit
TUNE GATE N
J821 1.SDATA Hi: Disale
2. CLK Lo: Enable
3. DATEN CR2 U6 TUNE IND
4, 7, 11. GND Q7,8 BPF U4 (DET) U5 U5
5. VBW B
6. VBW A
8. STC DETECT C28
9. TUNE GAIN Hi: SW ON
10. TUNE IND TUNE GAIN Lo: SW OFF
12. MSB ENABLE U23 S AMPLE HO LD
13. TUNE GATE N S
14. SAMPLE HOLD M, L
VBW A, B Video SIG.

U10
J822 1. D MONO OUT (B.W) U11 LPF
FET ATT N
2. PIN ATT CONT FET ATT N
3. TUNE TP1
4. FET ATT N PEDES TAL FET
5. STC CONT
6. -12V STC DETECT IF-VIDEO MIX
7, 9. GND U3
(0 - 3Vdc) [J823]
8. +5V LOG
10. +12V Q3
11. TEST ENABLE To RPU-013
12. TEST SIG
T5
Q1 U20 U21 CR10 Q4 U22
IF IN (60MHz)
U27 U28 U16 HPF
[J824]
60MHz IF SIG.
VGA
FET ATT N Q2 SDATA

TES T MBS ENAB LE CLK
STC CONT DATEN
U25
TES T ENAB LE SIG level
PIN ATT PIN ATT CONT
MIC U25 cable ATT ADJ.
[J825-5]
ATT CONT ATT CONT
D-MONI-IN D-MONI-OUT
(0 - 120mVdc) (0 - 2.5Vdc)
U18
[J825-7]
TUNNING TUNE
[J825-1]
Fig. 7.2.9 Block Diagram of IF board
IF signals of 60 MHz from the MIC are separated into the tuning amplifier Q7, 8 and
the IF amplifier on the Q1 side. IF signals are separated at U22 to the video detection
circuit on U3 side and the 60 MHz semi-log amplifier on T5 side. Respective outputs
video signals and 60 MHz IF signals are superimposed and sent to RPU-013. At the
input stage of SPU board, superimposed signals are separated at HPF and LPF.
Major control signals of IF board

- SDATA, CLK, DATEN, TEST SIG, TEST SIG ENABLE
SDATA, CLK and DATEN control signals from the RFC board control the gain of
U16. This control data is based on the setting value of [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> 2:Cable
ATT ADJ.
Purpose of the gain control;
Superimposed 60 MHz IF signals and video signals are sent to RPU-013 trough
the coaxial cable. IF signals of 60 MHz, in particular, inputted into RPU-013
have different levels according to cable length. The gain control is performed to
compensate the cable loss on the IF board side and allows inputs into RPU-013
at a constant level.
See page.4-13 for the adjusting method.
For TEST SIG and TEST SIG ENABLE control signals, dummy echo signals
are inputted into CR10 if [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> 2:Cable ATT ADJ is set to AUTO.
The gain correction is automatically performed based on these signals.
7-14
7.2 Antenna Unit
- VBW-A, B
Tuning circuits are switched to achieve the required bandwidth for improving S/N
of video signals. They are switched according to pulses of S1/2, M1/2/3 and L
pulse.
- STC DETECT
This is a signal to create the AUTO STC curve.
- MBS ENABLE
This is a signal to reduce main bang caused by leaked TX signal. The gain at Q4 is
reduced for the set time. This is the setting of the gate time in [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 ->
5:MBS. This operation starts a little earlier than the TX trigger.
- TUNE IND, TUNE GAIN /TUNE GATE /SAMPLE HOLD

TUNE IND signal generated from main bang is used for indicating TUNE bar and
AUTO TUNE function.
TUNE GATE signal activates U4 only during reception of main bang. SAMPLE
HOLD signals control U6 (analog switch) and C28, and detected signals are
sampled and outputted as TUNE IND signals. TUNE GAIN signals serve to
compensate the levels. Since the pulse height of the short pulse is lower than that
of the long pulse, the gain is increased during the period of short pulses.
- D MONI OUT
MONI OUT signals are monitor signals of the MIC. Self-test is executed by
[Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2 to check values in RF MONITOR.
- PIN ATT CONT

This is not used at present.
- TUNE
This is TUNE control signal inputted into MIC.
7-15
7.2 Antenna Unit
- FET ATT N
This is a control signal for adjusting the ring suppression. When the control time of
the MBS is complete, this signal starts to reduce the gain of Q1 to activate the ring
suppression. The larger is the setting value of [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> 0:Ring
Suppression, the more extended is the time for enabling the ring suppression.
- STC CONT
This is the STC control signal to control the gain of U27 and 28.
7.2.4 B.P GEN board (03P9347)

The B.P GEN board is commonly used for different types of radars. B.P (Bearing Pulse)
and HD (Head line) signals are sent as serial data from the RFC board to RPU-013.
U15 U30 U14 HD

RF RX data
SPU U17 BP GEN

RF TX data U15 (FPGA) (03P9347)
U30 U14 BP
RPU-013
U19
(RFC CPU)
RFC (03P9346A)
Fig. 7.2.10 Connection of B.P GEN board
1. B.P signal
B.P signals are created by passing the slits of timing disk through the photo-interrupter
on the B.P GEN board. The timing disk is mounted on the rotary joint shaft in case of
the S-band radar and on the drive gear shaft in case of the X-band radar. The number of
pulses generated from the B.P GEN board is 256 pulses/rev of the antenna on the
S-band radar and 360 pulses on the X-band radar. B.P signals outputted to Slave-1 and
Slave-2 are converted at SPU FPGA on the SPU board and outputted at 360 pulses both
on X-band and S-band radars. See page.4-68 and 4-76 for related information.
7-16
7.2 Antenna Unit
2. HD signal
HD signals are detected by turning on and off the lead switch by the magnet mounted on
the drive gear. This output pulse length varies with the antenna rotation. The period in
which the heading pulse is turned on is in a range of 0 to 90 degrees. The duty ratio is
1:4. See page.4-77 for related information.
Drive gear
Driven gear
HD detection lead SW Magnet for HD detection lead SW

B.P GEN board
Fig. 7.2.11 Installation of B.P GEN in Antenna unit of X-band Radar
J901
1. HD
2. GND
3. BP
4. N.C
5. +12V
+12V
Q3
BP
R4 R7 U1
R13
C4
R3
U3
Q4
R40 HD
[J902-2] [J902-1]
Heading SW
(Reed SW)
magnet
Antenna Motor
Fig. 7.2.12 Block Diagram and Layout of B.P GEN board
7-17
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2.5 PWR (RF) board (03P9348)

The PWR (RF) board has different parts for X-band and S-band radars and is not
compatibly used for different band radars.
Table 7.2.3 Differences of PWR(RF) board
Difference
Name of Applicable
Heater V Heater V
PWR(RF) radar type JP21 R29
(Short pulse) (Long pulse)
X band
03P9348A Open 2.2 k 7.5 V ----
6/12 kW
03P9349B X band 25 kW Open 2.2 k 8.3 V 7.0 V
03P9350C S band 30 kW Short 3.3 k 9.5 V 7.7 V
When supply voltages are supplied from the Processor unit, line voltages drop by the
antenna cable. It causes differences in potential on the ground between the Processor
unit and Antenna unit, thereby resulting in unstable voltage on the earth lines of cables.
For this reason, the power supply to the Antenna unit is featured as follows:
The power to the Antenna unit is supplied in +24 VDC alone except for the TX-HV and
motor line. Required voltage is generated in the Antenna unit based on this power
supply.
Connection of negative line for GND:

RPU-013 unit side TR unit side
For TR unit power supply: +24 VDC No Yes
For motor power supply:+24 VDC Yes No
(X-band radar)
For TX-HV power supply: 500V Yes No
RPU-013 ANT unit
PWR p.c.b RF PWR p.c.b

+24V
(L1)
SW REG. REC FILTER
-24V +5V
REG
Low
CR2 Voltage
(D4F60) Protect
HV p.c.b
TX HV MD p.c.b
SW REG. REC
Fig. 7.2.13 Earth Line of HV and +24 V Lines
7-18
7.2 Antenna Unit
L11,CR11,C14
CR2 L2
Q3(2SJ265) U11 TP3
(D4F60) (SI 8120) REC +12V
+24V +12V
VOLTAGE
(L1) 60kHz CONTROL R52,59
FILTER PR5V
-24V TP1 R13-16
PR+5V SS L5
U51 TP7
U12 IPk
(uPC317HF)
U41 CR52,C51
+5V
Vcc (MC34063AP1) SW +32V
U1 REG Q11,C13 REC Serise
(AN78L05) COMP VOLTAGE REG
Low -SOFT CONTROL
Voltage START
Protect - Output R62
CONT R57 Q41(2SJ256)
U2(M519578FP) TP6
Q1 CR41,C45
RT41 -12V
REC
L3
L21CR21,C24 TP4
U21 HEATER H
(SI 8015) REC
VOLTAGE R28 J833
CONTROL
HEATER V
125kHz
R32
SS
1. -12V
Q22 JP21
2,7,9,12. GND
C23
HEATER OFF 3. +5V
4,5. +12V
6. +32V
8. HEATER VLT
8. HEATER OFF
L31,CR31,C38 10. HEATER H
L4 U31 TP5
(SI 8010) REC +5V
VOLTAGE
CONTROL PR5V
R47,47
250kHz ss
U22
Q31,C33
-SOFT
START
- Output
CONT
Fig. 7.2.14 Block Diagram of PWR (RF) board
- Low voltage protection circuit

+24V inputs from RPU-013 enter Q3 via the power supply filter circuit. The gate
of Q3 is controlled by signals of the low voltage protection circuit U2 and turns off
Q3 when the input voltage is reduced to +16.8 VDC or less. The starting voltage is
19.5 V or more.
- +12 V power supply circuit

U11 is the switching power supply of +12 VDC/1.7 A and operates at 60 kHz. Q11
and C13 connected to the SS terminals of U11 are circuits for output control and
soft start. The soft start function is provided to suppress the supply rush current of
the load. R13 to R16 and U12 are output overcurrent protection detection circuits
which controls the SS terminals of U11 when the current of 2.5 A to 3 A runs on
the +12 VDC line and stops the output of this line. The overcurrent protection
circuit is automatically reset.
- +32 V, －12 V power supply circuits

The +12 VDC power supply also outputs to the switching power supply U41. U41
operated at 33 kHz. This output generates voltages of +32 VDC/10 mA and –12
VDC/0.3 A. The voltage of +32 VDC is generated at U51:REG and adjusted to
+32 VDC at R62. The voltage of –12 VDC is adjusted so as to achieve –12 VDC at
R57. When the current of 0.55 A or more runs through the –12 VDC line, the RT41
(Poly Switch) is activated to shut off the output.
7-19
7.2 Antenna Unit
- Heater power supply circuit

U21 is the switching power supply for the Magnetron heater outputting 7.5
VDC/1.3 A and operates at 125kHz. Q22 and C23 connected to the SS terminals of
U21 are circuits for output control and soft start. U21 is controlled by HEATER
VLT signals from the RFC board and changes heater voltage during “ST-BY” and
during “TX” in long pulses. This is intended to reduce the heater voltage during
“TX” in long pulses for extending the life of the Magnetron. The heater voltage is
adjusted at R28 during “ST-BY” and at R32 during “TX” in long pulses. Since the
heater voltage differs according to types (Magnetron), JP21 is provided to correct
different voltages.
Note: HEATER OFF signal is outputted from the RFC board to stop the heater
voltage but it is not used.
- +5 V power supply circuit
U31 is the switching power supply for +5 VDC/0.5 A and operates at 250 kHz.
Q31 and C33 connected to the SS terminals of U31 are circuits for output control
and soft start. The soft start function is provided to suppress the supply rush
current of the load. R47, R48 and U22 are output overcurrent protection detection
circuits which control the SS terminals of U31 and stops outputs when the current
of 0.8 A to 1.0 A runs through the +5 VDC line. This overcurrent protection circuit
is automatically reset.
7-20
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2.6 MSS board (MSS7497)

The MSS board is used for S-band radars and not compatibly used due to different part
by differences in antenna motor voltage.
MSS7497A MSS7497
ANT motor power supply: 380/440VAC ANT motor power supply: 200/220VAC
Since the antenna size of S-band radar is large, there is a risk that the antenna revolution
mechanism and motor may be damaged due to too large loads if the rated voltage is
applied to the antenna motor suddenly. To prevent this, the antenna revolution is
generally increased without applying the rated voltage onto the motor at the time of
power-on. After rotating loads are decreased, the rated voltage is applied. At the time of
power-on, only two phases of V and W are connected to the motor to make the motor
rotate slowly. The switching circuits of Q1, 2 and 3 are controlled by voltage generated
by full-wave rectification to change the conduction angle of the remaining one phase. S
Fig. 7.2.15 Circuit Diagram of MSS board
- At the time of power-on:

Q3 (junction transistor) is brought into conduction after waiting for delays by the
time constant of R6 and C3 and turns on the triacs CR2 and CR13 by way of the
photo triac couplers U1 and U2. When U1 and U2 are turned on, C4 is discharged
through Q3, and Q3 is turned off.
7-21
7.2 Antenna Unit
- When the stationary state of the antenna rotation has been achieved:
C3 is recharged and maintains about 7.5 VDC.
C4 is recharged through Q1 and Q2 -> Q3 is turned on -> U2 and U3 are turned on ->
C4 is discharged through Q3. In this way, pulses to control U2 and U3 are generated
at C4 and Q3.
200 msec
Power ON
2 6msec >1.2msec
At the time of Power-on (Slow start) Stationary state of the antenna rotation
Fig. 7.2.16 Current Detection Waveform of U Phase Line
7-22
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2.7 Turning operation

1. Automatic tuning operation
The automatic tuning operation includes full search and small search. In these automatic
tuning operations, a start command sent from the SPU board is executed on the RFC
board to control tuning voltage of the MIC. After searching is complete, tracking
operation starts to find the maximum tuning point at all times. Changing tuning voltage
changes local frequency in the MIC. The maximum point of tuning is where the output
frequency of the MIC is converted to the IF frequency of 60 MHz.
A start command, manual setting values, tuning indicator signal (TUNE IND), and MIC
monitor signal (D-MONI signal) presented in a self-test are sent and received using
serial data between the SPU board and RFC board.
Fig. 7.2.17 Schematic Diagram of TUNE Control
The tuning value obtained in full search and small search is saved at U27 (SRAM) of
the RFC board. Searching is performed based on TUNE IND signals.
Small
Tracking Small search
TUNE Initialize Tracking stop search Tracking Tracking
32V
ST-BY Tx
Tune Volt
5V
Changing
Pulse wide
5V
Time
TUNE IND
3V
1V
LP LP M3 M2 M1 S2 S1
Pulse wide
Time
Fig. 7.2.18 TUNE Control
7-23
7.2 Antenna Unit
- Full search
The full search is performed to find the tuning point where the tuning indicator
voltage (TUNE IND) becomes largest within a tuning voltage (TUNE) range
between about 5 V and 25 V. The full search starts by executing [Menu] -> 1 ->
3:TUNE INITIALIZE.
- Small search
The small search is performed to find the tuning point where the tuning indicator
voltage (TUNE IND) becomes largest within a range of +2.5 VDC with the tuning
point obtained in the full search at the center.
The small search is performed as follows:
1. [Menu] -> 1 -> 3:TUNE INITIALIZE is executed, and small searches are
repeated from long pulse to short pulses and respective tuning points are
saved.
2. When operation is switched from ST-BY to TX, two small searches are
repeated based on tuning points of pulse length saved in Step 1. Then the
tuning tracking operation starts.
3. When the pulse length is changed, one small search is performed based on the
tuning points of pulse length saved in Step 1. Then the tracking operation
starts.
- Tuning tracking
The tracking operation is performed every minute.
Tune voltage is changed.
2. Manual tuning
When the operation is changed from the Automatic tuning to the Manual tuning, the
voltage value manually set in the previous time is retrieved. The variable range for it is
5 VDC to 25 VDC. In the Manual tuning, the tuning tracking operation is not performed.
When the operation is changed form the Manual tuning to the Automatic tuning, two
small searches are performed for the pulse length based on the tuning value obtained in
[Menu] -> 1 -> 3:TUNE INITIALIZE.
3. Tuning indicator presentation

Tuning indicator is set at 80% against the maximum TUNE IND voltage at full search.
7-24
7.2 Antenna Unit
7.2.8 Automatic STC (SEA AUTO)

This signal processing is performed on the RFC board. This setting is switched by
ON/OFF of the [AUTO/MANU SEA] box. The automatic STC is a function to
automatically control the level of STC waveform corresponding to receiving levels. It
calculates an optimum sea clutter attenuation curve corresponding to signal levels of a
near range and creates STC voltage. Parameters to determine the curve are Model, STC
Condition SEA Condition, Default ANT height, and Near/Mid/Far STC curve in the
INITIALIZE menu. See page.4-15.
STC CONT signals inputted into the IF board are outputted by setting the STC bias so
as to give an optimum picture when the STC is set to AUTO and the STC control knob
is se at 50 %.
The figure below is the block diagram of the automatic STC processing. For the
receiving signal level, one rotation of the antenna is divided into 32 sectors, the
receiving level is averaged for each sector, and each sector divided into 32 is averaged
for 10 seconds, and the STC is created from the data.
STC CONT
IF board
STC DETECT
A/D RFC board
RFC FPGA
Average Average the STC CONT

each same STC Curve STC Gain
RFC CPU within sector
sector Off-set
(Sweep) Processing
(Scan)
Range Sweep
- Model
A sector - STC Condition
- SEA Condition A/C SEA VR
- Default ANT height
Average of each range - Near/Mid/Far STC curve
10 sec
A+1 sector
Average of each range
Fig. 7.2.19 Schematic Diagram of Automatic STC Processing-1
7-25
7.2 Antenna Unit
The figure below shows sea clutter and STC CONT voltage created by averaging the
sea clutter level. For instance, if a strong sea clutter signal ahead is erased by the manual
STC, weaker target echoes behind are also erased. If the STC is adjusted so as to leave
echoes behind, sea clutter signals ahead remain. In such a case, optimum pictures are
obtained on the whole by STC-controlling of sea clutter different by each bearing
according to each bearing.
STC Control signal

STC Control signal
Time STC Control signal
Far
STC Level
Mid
Near
STC Control signal

Sea clutter
Average of Sea clutter
STC Control signal STC Control signal
Fig. 7.2.20 Schematic Diagram of Automatic STC Processing-2
7-26
7.3 Processor Unit (RPU-013)

7.3.1 Overview
Processor unit is comprised of SPU, NET-100, PWR, TX-HV, TB and FIL boards. This
unit is used commonly to X-band and S-band radars and different outputs. However, the
power supply board and TX-HV board are different depending on the output power,
antenna resolution speed and TX output power. See page.4-64 to 4-71 for related
information. To connect with external monitors and VDR, the DVI IF board, RGB
buffer board and AD converter (GC-10 board) are available as option.
RFCp.c.b
HDG SENSOR (03P9346A)
LOG
TRACKBALL
PC (RCU-015)
NAV DATA
ECDIS
IF-VIDEO MIX
STD CONT
AIS (RCU-014)
RF TX Data
TRACK CONTROL
Slave Display 1
Slave Display 2
SYSTEM FAIL
AD-10
(FULL-LOG)
POWER SW
(SEM-LOG)
RF Rx Data
ALARM IN/OUT
KEY TX/RD
MOTOR
Master
TX HV
I/O port
+24V
+12V
TRK RD OPHD/BP/Trig/Video
TB EXT ALM ACK ANT 12V ON
EXT ALM1-4 GC LED/HOLD/UP/DOWN RSV1-3 TD
(03P9342) KEY TX/RXD AIS TD/RD NAV RD
RS232 TX/RX LOG RD ARPA TD
-12/Vcc RF Tx/Rx Data AD-10
GC 5V GYRO RD OP1, 2 HD/BP/Trig/Video
+12/-12/-5V
Processor unit
+24/+12V
(RPU-013)
MOTOR
DOWN
TX HV
AD-10
HOLD
LED
UP
ANT ON
ANT SPEED R/G/B
24V- BP H-SYNC
HV POWER V-SYNC
GC-10 TX-HV (AC: 03P9339) RGB
(64P1106A) (HV9017) DVI IF BUFFER
(DC: 03P9338) 5/+12/-12V
MON MOTOR VLT SPU
POWER FAIL LAN
(03P9337) NET-100
Ship’s Main (03P9332)
FIL
(AC: 03P9341) SXGA
(DC: 03P9352)
SXGA
Fig. 7.3.1 Block diagram of RPU-013
7-27
7.3.2 TB board (03P9342)

The TB board is for connection with external equipment. This board can be used
commonly for FAR-2xx7 series.
1. Block diagram
J651:HV
TX HV
TX-HV J613: SCANNER UNIT
+12V
J652: POWER
POWER SW
J602: KEY
PWRp.c.b +24V
MOTOR VOLT
J610: SCANNER UNIT
OP BP2
SPU RF D-A/B, RF SPU D-A/B

J610: SCANNER UNIT
J609: IF VIDEO
SPU AIS TD,RD-A/B AIS TD/RD

U14(LTC1535C) J611: AIS
Isolator
RS422 Driver
LOG RD-A/B LOG

U3 J607: LOG
U6/U5
Phot-coupler
SPU TRK RD-A/B TRK RD-A/B

U13 J620: TRACK CONTROL
Phot-coupler
TRK TD-A/B
GYRO RD-A/B U8(LTC1535C) HDG A/B

J605: HEADING SENSOR
Isolator
RS422 Driver
(03P9337)
SPUp.c.b
NAV RD-A/B U4 NAV

Phot-coupler J606: NAVIGATOR
U7
GYRO CLK, GYRO data U1,2 AD CLK/AD data

J608: AD CONVERTER
Phot-coupler
RSV1 TD-A/B, RSV2 TD-B

J621: SERIAL I/F
ARPA TD-A/B
J619: ECDIS
RS232C TX/RX
J601: RS-232C
OP HD1/BP1/TRIG1/VIDEO1
J617: SLAVE DISPLAY1
OP HD2/BP2/TRIG2/VIDEO2
J618: SLAVE DISPLAY2
OP HD IN/BP IN/TRIG IN/VIDE IN
J616: MASTER RADAR
EXT ALM-1,2,3,4 U9-12, Q1-4 ALM-1,2,3, 4

ALM Driver J612: EXT ALM
SYS FAIL
EXT ALM-ACK
CR11
SYS ACK
J622: KEY
KEY TXD/RXD-A/B
J602: KEY
ANT 12V ON Q5 ANT ON/+12V
J604: SPU-007
GC LED/HOLD/UP/DOWN
J603: GC-10
-12V Vcc(+5V) +12V
J614: CARD I/F POWER
+12V/+5V/-12V
J615: OPTION POWER
TB p.c.b(03P9342)
Fig. 7.3.2 Block diagram of TB board
7-28
The figure below shows the interface of the AIS and HEADING SENSOR ports. Inputs
and outputs are isolated by LC1535 both on the TX and RX lines. The resistor of the
RD line is the terminating resistor. Loads on the talker side set ON/OFF of the
resistance. See page.4-39.
TERMINAL p.c.b
GND2
Position for setting of
Floating
common terminating resistor
2 3 11 14
ST1 ST2 AIS port: [J656]
GND2 Vcc2
1 Vcc 420kHz HDG port: [J655]
A RDx-B
16
RD RO 3
28 R 330 x 3
B
1 2 RDx-A
AIS/HDG sensor
RE 15
27
RO2
17
IEC-61162-2
LTC1535
Y TDx-B
DE 13
26
TD DI D
TDx-A
25 Z 12
SLO COMMON
4 GND 18
GND
Logic common
Fig. 7.3.3 I/F of AIS and HEADING SENSOR ports
Alarm outputs are contact signals by MOS-FET contact and items to be outputted as
alarms can be selected in [Menu] -> 3 -> 6, 7, 8 and 9. The EXT ALARM terminal on
the TB board operates as follows.
- ALM-1, 2, 3: Normally closed and the driver is U10-12 (PS7241 1B).
Note: Closed during power-off and initializing.
- ALM-4 : Normally opened and the driver is U9 (TLP176G TP).
Note: Opened during power-off and initializing.
See page.4-58.
400V max.
100mA max.
4 ALARM OUT x-0

1
3 ALARM OUT x-1

Q1-4 2
U9-12
Terminal p.c.b
Fig. 7.3.4 I/F of ALM port
7-29
2. Connector
Table 7.3.1(1/2) Connector on the TB board
TB board (03P9342) Connector No. Overview

Input of MIX (Video Sig.,) 60 MHz IF receiving signal from
J609 (Terminal) IF VIDEO sig.
TR unit
J651 (2P-VH) HV HV input from TX high voltage board (HV-9017)
J652 (10P-VH) PWR For connecting to the PWR board
MIX: (Video Sig.,) 60 MHz IF receiving signal inputted into the
J653 (Mini-Pin) SPU
SPU board (1.5 D co-axial cable)
J654 (80P) SPU For connecting to the SPU board
J601 - Program updating port of RS-232C type
PC
(male: 9pin D-SUB) - ON/OFF switching of Shuttle Ferry function
For connecting control unit (RCU-014) or RCU-015. Not
J602 (10P-XH) KEY
connectable to RCU-016 because it has no power switch.
Connector to be used when GC-10 is incorporated
J603 (6P-XH) GC-10
(HDG setting is made in [HDG] -> AD-10)
Used with FAR-2x37S and connected to PSU-007 by antenna
J604 (2P-WAGO) PSU ON/OFF signal and turns on and off the antenna motor power
supply line by relay
Heading data input from IEC61162-1 and 2 types. Supports a
range between 4800 bps to 38.4 kbps according to input data
J605 (3P-WAGO) HEADING
speed and automatically switched (HDG setting is made in
[HDG] -> Serial)
Connector to navigator system of IEC61162-1 and 2 types.
J606 (3P-WAGO) NAVIGATOR Supports a range between 4800 bps to 38.4 kbps according to
input data speed and automatically switched
For connecting to log serial signal of IEC61162-1 and 2 types.
J607 (3P-WAGO) LOG Supports a range between 4800 bps to 38.4 kbps according to
input data speed and automatically switched
AD Heading data input in AD format. Set the input interval to 25
J608 (WAGO-4P)
CONVERTER msec. (HDG setting is made in [HDG] -> AD-10)
J610 (12P-WAGO) SCANNER Connected to the scanner unit
J611 (5P-WAGO) AIS AIS connection connector of IEC61162-2 type
Four alarm output ports. Contact signal by MOS-FET contact.
J612 (12P-WAGO) EXT. ALARM Polarity of ALM 4 is opposite to that of other ports.
Sys Fail x1 and EXT ALM Ack should be inputted.
J613 (2P-WAGO) SCANNER Connected to the TR unit by TX HV
J614 (2P-WAGO) CARD I/F +12 VDC power supply output of CARD I/F (CU-200)
Power supply output for DVI I/F and RGB Buff boards (+12 V,
J615 (5P-WAGO) OPTION
+5 V and –12 V)
Connector for Video, HD, B.P and Trig input signals from
J616 (8P-NH) MASTER Radar
master radar
Connector for Video, HD, B.P and Trigger output signals from
J617 (8P-NH) SUB DISPLAY-1
this radar. Video signal is in FULL-LOG.
7-30
Table 7.3.1(2/2) Connector on the TB board
TB board (03P9342) connector No. Overview

Connector for Video, HD, B.P and Trigger output signals from
J618 (8P-NH) SUB DISPLAY-2
master radar. Video signal is in SEMI-LOG.
TTM output of IEC61162-1 type. For outputting TTM, set
J619 (3P-WAGO) ECDIS [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 2:TTM OUTPUT to REL/TRUE and
[Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5:Other to OFF
Connector to INS. Set [Menu] -> 0-> 8 -> 5 to Serial.
TRACK IEC61162-1 and 2 type. Supports the TX and RX data speed
J620 (5P-WAGO)
CONTROL between 4800 bps to 38.4 kbps according to input data speed
and automatically switched.
J621 (6P-WAGO) SERIAL I/F Unassinged
J622 (2P-XH) KEY Connected in parallel like EXT ALM Ack of J612 (EXT. ALM)
7-31
7.3.3 SPU board (03P9337)

This board can be used commonly for FAR-2xx7 series.
1. Block diagram
The SPU board performs picture, LAN, video amplifier, ARPA and video plotter
processing in addition to the control over the whole radar. The CPU is comprised of
three components of Main CPU, ARPA CPU, DRW CPU.
+5V/+3.3V/+12V/-12V
TX ON U38
(From MAIN CPU) A/D
MON MOTOR
(From PWRpcb)) MONOTOR
U3
Display
MEMORY
U86:Video DET Echo Data U12 U2
U85 Echo
Echo MEMORY
IF-VIDEO-MIX 30M SEMI-LOG FPGA U1
U87
U83(Selecter)
HPF Trail
FULL-LOG MEMORY
30M U76
LPF A/D U46
FULL-LOG 8bit SPU
OP1-VIDEO OUT JP6 FPGA U15
OP-VIDEO IN
U78 FROM LAN

TEST Echo
To NET-100
SEMI-LOG JP5 DATA/ADD
OP2-VIDEO OUT JP4
U78
etc.
DATA/ADD
JP3 U19 CR6

TP58 DRW CPU
OP-VIDEO IN OP HD/BP/TRIG
U85
OP-1 HD/BP/TRIG U27
OP-2 HD/BP/TRIG SPU
R401 Controller U28
SDRAM
S1
U9
U64 SDRAM
CR8
FROM U22 To Display
SDRAM
U4
U48 DVI
DATA/ADD BUS
U74 Flash ROM

ARPA CPU (Program) U5
RF Tx/Rx U13 DVI
GYRO CLK/Data U56 U47 DRW FPGA
DATA ROM
SDRAM (Backup) U16
LOG RD DRW
SDRAM
GYRO RD
AIS RD
Serial I/O
CR4 U6
NAV RD FROM
U52
RSV1 TD
RSV2 TD
ARPA TD U21
MAIN CPU
AIS TD GC LED/UP/DOWN/HOLD
ANT ON
KEY TD/RD EXT ALM ACK
TRK TD/RD EXT ALM 1-4
Serial I/O
U73
RS232C Driver
RS232C Tx/Rx RS232C TTL Tx/Rx

U39
Fig. 7.3.5 Block diagram of the SPU board
7-32
The figure below shows the overview of functions of FPGA. See page.7-37 for specific
signal processing.
NET-100
(LAN I/F)
ARPA CPU
Echo select
- TX data GEN
(Correlation)
ACQ
processing
Echo data
Echo detct
- Inter SW
Tracking
- RX data
- LAN I/F
CPA/TCPT
Echo data
memory
QV echo
RO-XY converter
FULL LOG Video
Video Contrast
FTC processing
& ADD. GEN

processing
SEM LOG Video
Sampling
Selcter
Selcter
(Auto Rain)
8 8 8 8 8
ES
OP video signal AD Con.
IR
ARPA test echo
Trailing data
processing
Test echo/HD/BP/TRIG ARPA
test echo
Trailing data
memory
RO-XY converter
SAMPL TRIG
From/To TX TRG Trigger GEN
RS-422
& ADD. GEN

Encode EXT TRIG (Jamming)
RFC p.c.b RS-422
AZ counter
HD HD
Decode BP PLL BP(8192)
GYRO data
Display data
HD
To
processing
BP
External Display SAMPL TRIG
Display data
RF TXD
UART
RF RXD
(I/O)
memory
EXT TRIG
From EXT BP
RO-XY converter
External Radar EXT HD
& ADD. GEN

SPU FPGA
Echo FPGA
MAIN CPU
DVI driver
Display - Coler palette
Main CONT priority Display color
- Brilliance
Sync sig. GEN

Graphic data
Closs cursor
DVI driver
Closs cursor processing
Graphic data
data
processing
DRW CPU
Graphic data
Graphic data
processing
memory
Graphic data
108MHz Dot
ADD. GEN
CLK
DRW FPGA
Fig. 7.3.6 Block diagram of FPGA
7-33
Table 7.3.2 Major devices
Device model Application

U21 HD6417750RF240(SH4) MAIN CPU Data processing, control and operation
Memory for MAIN CPU. When the power
U22 EDS1232AATA-75 128 M SDRAM is on, the program from U48 is
decompressed and starts MAIN CPU
- MAIN, ARPA, DRW CPU programs are
compressed and stored.
Note: FPGA program is added on and
U48Note MBM29DDL640E90TN 64 M Flash ROM
after the SPU board Ver-22
- Decompression is performed by MAIN
CPU
U47 MBM29DDL640E90TN 64 M Flash ROM For backup of signal values and trail
U74 HD6417750RF240(SH4) ARPA CPU ARPA processing unit
Memory for ARPA CPU work
U56 EDS1232AATA-75 128 M SDRAM Decompress the program from U48 at the
time of power-ON and starts ARPA CPU
DRW CPU, drawing, reading, address
U19 HD6417750RF240(SH4) DRW CPU
generation
Memory for DRW CPU work
U9 EDS1232AATA 75 128 M SDRAM Decompress the program from U48 at the
time of power-ON and starts DRW CPU
U16 EDS1232AATA-75 128 M SDRAM Image memory for graphics
Signal processing, ARPA data processing
U46 XC2V500 4FG456C SPU FPGA
FPGA
SPU FPGA program
ISP PROM Includes the U46 (FPGA) circuit written on
U54Note XC18V04VD044C
(In System Programming) it. Program is sent to FPGA at the time of
power-ON and starts FPGA
Echo processing, drawing,
U13 XC2V250 4FG256C DRW FPGA
displaying FPGA
DRW FPGA program
U12 XC2V500 4FG456C Echo FPGA Graphics processing FPGA
ECHO FPGA program
U3 EOS1232AATA 75 128 M SDRAM Memory for displaying
U2 K4S561632D TC75 256 M SDRAM Memory for surface correlation
U1 K4S561632D TC75 256 M SDRAM Memory for trail
Dual port RAM between DRW CPU and
U28 IDT70V25S25PF Dual port RAM
MAIN CPU
Note:
Since the saving of FPGA is transferred to U48 on and after the SPU board Ver-22,
U6, U15 and U54 are eliminated.
7-34
2. IF-VIDEO MIX signal input

IF-VIDEO MIX signals in which video signals and 60 MHz IF signals from the TR unit
are superimposed and separated at HPF (30 MHz)/LPF (30 MHz), and outputted as
external monitor signals of Slave-Display-1 and Slave Display-2.
Slave-Display-1 is set as Full-Log signal and Slave Display-2 as Semi-Log signal but
the jumper setting of JP3 to JP6 can change the setting. Video signals are converted into
A/D (8bit) at U46 in the next stage and inputted to the U46, SPU FPGA.
RPU-013
SPU p.c.b
AD/DATA OP HD OUT-1
ARPA/MAIN CPU HD
U30
SPU FPGA
OP HD OUT-2
OP BP OUT-1
BP
U46
J617, J618
U41
OP BP OUT-2
RF Tx/Rx SUB Display-1, 2
RFC p.c.b OP TRIG OUT-1
TRIG
U40
OP TRIG OUT-2
Echo data
8bit
SEL VIDEO SEL A/D
(U83) (U76)
HD IN
TEST ECHO BP IN
RF unit TRIG IN J616
FULL LOG OUT
Master Radar
SEMI LOG VIDEO TP58 R401
OP VIDEO IN U85 OP VIDEO IN
LPF JP6 OP VIDEO OUT-1 (FULL LOG)

(L/C) JP5 U78 J617, J618
JP4 OP VIDEO OUT-2 (SEMI LOG) SUB Display-1, 2
Short Puls FIL JP3 U78
(BW: 35MHz)
IF AMP p.c.b
MIdle Puls FIL
Log AMP (BW: 10MHz)
(Video sig.)
IF input IF AMP MIX IF + Video MIX HPF Long Puls FIL DET
(60MHz) (L/C) (BW: 2.5MHz) (U86)
U85
U87
IF AMP
(Liner: 60MHz)
BW A/B sel
GAIN/STC CONT
Fig. 7.3.7 Input of IF-VIDEO MIX signal to the SPU board
The level of video signal from external radar can be adjusted by R401 so that the video
signal level of TP58 becomes 2.0 Vp-p.
See page.4-74 to 4-82 for information on connection of video signals to and from
external devices.
7-35
3. Structure of screen
The order of presentation of screen is as follows:
1. Color-filled chart, plotter
2. Radar echo, echo trail
3. Radar mark
4. ARPA, AIS
5. Characters: Menu, icon display, cross-cursor
The mask screen controlling the display area of the screen in [Menu] -> 1 -> 7:ECHO
AREA masks the screens 1 through 4 in Fig.7.3.8.
2
12 HDG 210 T
GAIN SPD 10.1Kt
STC
HEAD FTC COG 210 T
3 SOG 10.1Kt
MENU
Fig. 7.3.8 Order of priority of display screen output
7-36
7.3.4 Signal processing

Signal processing is performed on the SPU board. The figure below shows the concept
of the processing sequence.
STC control done on the RFC board is performed on the basis of the control data from
the SPU board. The processing of Echo Average and Echo Trail requires ship’s
heading/speed data or own ship position data. The ARPA requires ship’s heading/speed
data at the minimum.
RFC p.c.b
STC DETECT
STC STC CONT IF p.c.b
SPU p.c.b
AD CON
Setting parameter
- MODEL
- STC RANGE FTC(RAIN)
- SEA CONDITION
- ANT HIGHT
- NEAR/MID/FAR STC CARV
Heading data
Speed data(BT/WT)
ARPA
QV
SEL
NOISE REJ
INT REJECT
VIDEO CONTRAST
ECHO STRETCH
ECHO AVERAGE
WIPPER
Heading/Speed data
or
Own Pos. data
Heading/Speed data
or
Own Pos. data
TRAIL
ZOOM
presentation
Fig. 7.3.9 Signal processing sequence
7-37
１. Echo trail processing: [TRAIL] menu

See page.3-18 for related information on the [TRAIL] box menu. This menu allows the
setting of Trail Mode, Trail Grad, Narrow Trail, Trail Level, Trail Reset, Trail Copy and
OS Trail.
In the setting of echo trail, trail time can be selected as well as the selection between
“True” and “Relative”. The trail time can be set in a range between 30 seconds and 30
minutes at 0.5-minute intervals. Trail images are saved for each 7 seconds for a period
of 30 minutes.
- Trail gradation (TRAIL GRAD): Multi gradations

The trail gradation is updated for each 7 seconds in up to 32 gradations.
Accordingly, if the trail elapsed time is 15 seconds, trail is displayed in 2
gradations. If the elapsed time is 30 seconds, it is displayed in 4 gradations, and in
4 minutes or more, in 32 gradations.
- Trail copy
Turn on the setting of Trail Restart (linked with trail rage) and Trail Copy. If the
range change is 3 to 1/3 times relative to the range where the trail is started, all
trails can be displayed promptly. This is because the trail of the previous range is
copied.
Changing Range
Trail Copy
Start Trail at changing range
When about 10 seconds or more elapses after the range change, the trailing at the
range starts following the copy of the previous trail. If the range is changed to a
range exceeding 3 to 1/3 times the previous range, a new trailing process starts. If
the range is changed to move than 3 times the previous range, the range up to 3
times the previous range is saved. For the range exceeding 3 times or less than 1/3
times, a new trailing process starts. However, if it is returned to the previous range
within 10 seconds, the saved previous trail is displayed.
7-38
- Narrow trail
When the setting of Narrow Trail is turned on, a trail width is presented in one dot.
The narrow trail can be used when selecting the long trial time. This feature is not
available on the IMO and A type radars. The narrow trail is processed for relatively
strong and large echoes, the level of which is 8 to 32 and the signal on screen is 6
dots in azimuth direction and 3 dots in rage direction.
The narrow trail processing can be used for a echo which is in level 8 or higher for
echo level divided into 32 and has a size of 6 dots in a row in the bearing direction
and 3 dots in a row in the distance direction on the screen coordinates. To be more
specific, the narrow trail processing is not done for smaller echoes
2. Wiper processing (WIPER)

The setting of the wiper processing is performed in OFF/1/2 of [Menu] -> 1 -> 6:
WIPER.
To facilitate echo observation, the wiper processing manipulates the echo levels of
noises and weaker echoes due to sea clutter, rain and snow step-by-step for each block
(memory area) and displays them on the screen. The display by this processing gives
pictures as if viewed on the PPI radar screen.
Time required for rewriting one block is about 300 msec. Consequently, the number of
“steps” for processing differs according to antenna revolving speed. For instance, in
case that the antenna revolving speed is 24 rpm, one screen is processed in about 8 steps.
In case of 42 rpm, the number of processing steps is decreased to about 5
Changes of pictures vary for each memory area, not for each specific bearing interval.
This is because the wiper processing is performed by subjecting the input signal (r- θ )
according to the distance and bearing to X-Y conversion and then subjecting this to
wiper processing for each memory area. The wiper processing differs according to the
setting of EAV (Echo Average). See page.7-43 for the information on EAV.
Table 7.3.3 Relation between EAV setting and wiper processing
Wiper-OFF Wiper-1 Wiper-2

Wiper-OFF Performs EAV-OFF processing Performs EAV-OFF processing
EAV-OFF
EAV-OFF and then Wiper-1 processing and then Wiper-1 processing
Performs Wiper-2 processing is performed
Performs EAV-1 processing and
EAV-1 EAV-1 so that the final echo level
then Wiper-1 processing
processing becomes EAV-1.
7-39
- WIPER-1
The input signal is computed using the wiper coefficient K and the signal level is
gradually reduced. The smaller is the signal level, the smaller the wiper coefficient
is. Consequently, weaker signals disappear quicker than stronger signals.
Time
Signal Level:S
n+1 1
2 1
S x K1=S1
3
2
S1 x K2=S2
4 1.0
3
K
S2x K3=S3
0
4 Signal Level
n+1
Table 7.3.10 WIPER-1 processing
- WIPER-2
The processing of WIPER-2 operates basically in the same way as for WIPER-1
processing. However, wiper processing and EAV is performed in parallel and the
wiper processing is performed so that final echoes level is same level as EAV only
is used. For instance, if the echo level is set as medium level input in the EAV-2
setting and they are continuous echoes, the wiper-processed echo of the final block
is emphasized more than the previous echo.
7-40
3. Zoom
Zoom magnification can be selected in the setting of 4:ZOOM (OFF/2 TIMES/3
TIMES) of [Menu] -> 9 -> 2:DATA BOX menu.
For zoom processing, select “ZOOM” in the [CURSOR] menu. Place the cursor on the
picture to be zoomed and click the left button. The zoomed picture is displayed in the
data presentation area on the right of the screen. The picture in the normal picture
presentation area has a dotted frame showing a zoomed area.
Fig. 7.3.11 ZOOM processing
4. Signal processing of [PICTURE] menu

4-1. Interference rejection (INT REJECT)
The setting of interference rejection is made in OFF/1/2/3 of the [PICTURE] box menu.
This feature is intended to reduce radar interference form other ships by correlation
processing between previous and past sweeps.
- IR-1: Correlation between the current sweep and last one sweep
- IR-2: Correlation between the current sweep and last two sweeps
- IR-3: Correlation between the current sweep and last three sweeps
For instance, in IR-3 setting, when the same echo is present Output echo
on the current and last three sweeps, it is outputted as an n

echo. If the same echo is not detected in any sweep, it is n-1
not outputted.
n-2
If the TX interval of other ship and own ship are close to
n-3
each other, radar interference wave from other ship is
displayed at a similar position to the own ship’s. To avoid Sweep
this, in FAR-2xx7 the TX interval randomly varied within a Range
range of 10 ％ of the TX interval.
7-41
4-2 Video magnification (ECHO STRETCH)

This setting is made in OFF/1/2/3 of the [PICTURE] box menu.
- ES-1: An echo is stretched in the bearing direction.
- ES-2: An echo is stretched in the distance direction
- ES-3: An echo is stretched in the bearing direction and distance direction.
Example of video magnification in FAR-2837

The processing of 16 NM and other signals are set to OFF. The photos show the
setting values of video magnification in them.
ES1
ES2
Fig. 7.3.12(1/2) Examples of ES pictures
7-42
ES3
Fig. 7.3.12(2/2) Examples of ES pictures
4-3 Signal processing (EAV: ECHO AVERAGE)

This setting is in OFF/1/2/3 of [PICTURE] box menu.
Used for displaying target signals by distinguishing them from unwanted signals of
sea clutter, rain and others.
- EAV-1
Used for displaying target signals by distinguishing them from unwanted signals of
sea clutter, rain and others.
- EAV-2
Used for displaying target signals by distinguishing them from pictures of strong
sea clutter, rain and others. With its strong force to suppress the signal strength of
sea clutter, rain and others, it has a strong control force and may suppress weak
target signals. EAV-2 and EAV-1 should be selectively used depending on the
strength of unwanted signals.
- EAV-3
Used for displaying a target in highlight.
Since this feature allows displaying a weaker target by increasing its intensity, it is
used for enhancing the sensitivity particularly of a target in a long distance. Since
unwanted signals of sea clutter, rain and others are also emphasized, video
adjustment is required to remove unwanted signals.
7-43
EAV OFF
EAV1
EAV2 EAV3
Fig. 7.3.13 Examples of EAV pictures
Overview of EAV-1 and 2 processing

In EAV-1 and 2, correlation processing is performed by making comparisons between
the current screen and last screen. EAV-1 is for the past two correlation processing
and EAV-2 is for the past three correlation processing.
In this processing, the EAV output level is gradually raised if signals are detected in
consecutive scans while the level is gradually reduced if signals are intermittent
among scans. In this processing, outputs become weaker than input signals for a
high-speed boat. This tendency is particularly apparent in EAV-2.
7-44
The figures below show input signals and EAV output level in a simplified way.
Although there are 32 signal levels, they are shown in 0 to 7 levels in the figures.
EAV-1 EAV-２
n n+1 n+2 n+3 Scan n n+1 n+2 n+3 Scan
7(32) 7(32)
7(Max.) 32 level 6 6
Signal Level
Input
Signal Level
5 5
6 4
4 Output
3 3
5
2 2
4 1 1
0 0
3
2 Input-1 Input-1
0 0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
EAV out-1 EAV out-1
0(Min.) 0 0 0 0 1 4 7 7 7 7 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 4 7 7 7 4 3 2 1 0 0

7(32) 7(32)
6
Signal Level
6
Signal Level
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
Input-2 Input-2
0 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0
EAV out-2 EAV out-2

0 0 0 1 3 4 5 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 0

7(32) 7(32)
6
Signal Level
6
Signal Level
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
Input-3 Input-3
0 0 7 0 6 7 0 6 7 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 7 6
EAV out-3 EAV out-3
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 0
Fig. 7.3.14 I/O level of EAV-1 and 2
- Input-1
Shows the EAV output when the strongest signals are inputted in a row
- Input-2
Shows the EAV output when signals of medium intensity are inputted in a row.
EAV outputs become increasingly larger than inputted signals and a little
higher than the input level
- Input-3
Shows the EAV output when there is no signal input in a row. The EAV output
level is not so much increased.
7-45
Overview of EAV-3 processing

EAV-3 processing is not the correlation processing like EAV-1 and 2. In this
processing, unwanted signals that cannot be processed in FTC and STC are
emphasized.
At the maximum input signal level (level 32):
The previous signal is compared with the current signal. If the current signal is at
the maximum level, it is outputted at the level. If the current signal is weaker, it is
outputted at a level a little lower than the maximum level.
In the medium input signal level:
The previous signal is compared with the current signal and the output level is
gradually raised. If there is no signal, the output level is gradually reduced. The
rate of reducing of the signal level in EAV-3 is slower than in EAV-1 and 2.
The figures below show input signals of EAV-3 and EAV output level in a simplified
way. Although there are 32 signal levels, they are shown in 0 to 7 levels in the figures
below.
EAV-3
n n+1 n+2 n+3 Scan
7(32)
7(Max.) 32 level 6
Signal Level
5
6
4
5 3
2
4 1
0
3
2 Input-1
0 0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
EAV out-1
0(Min.) 0
0 0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n n+1 n+2 n+3 Scan
7(32)
6
Signal Level
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input-2
0 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0
EAV out-2
0 0 4 5 6 7 7 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n n+1 n+2 n+3 Scan

7(32)
6
Signal Level
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input-3
0 0 7 0 6 7 0 0 5 7 6 0 0 0 0
EAV out-3
0 0 7 6 6 7 6 5 5 7 7- 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fig. 7.3.１5 I/O level of EAV-3
7-46
- Input-1
Shows EAV outputs when the strongest signals are inputted in a row.
- Input-2
Shows EAV outputs when signals of the medium level are inputted in a row.
The EAV outputs become increasingly larger than inputted signals and finally
reach the highest level.
- Input-3
Shows EAV outputs when no signal is inputted in a row. EAV outputs serve to
maintain the input level and outputs are gradually reduced as signals become
less.
4-4 Noise rejection (NOISE REJ)

When white noises appear all over the radar screen, set ON in “4:NOISE REJ” of the
[PICTURE] box menu. The processing of noise rejection is based on a concept that
receiving signals are inputted into the delay circuit and outputted by averaging the
outputs of the delay terminal on the circuit. By averaging process, strong signals
become weaker and weaker signals like noises reduced their levels.
Input Signal
Input Signal
CLK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Output Signal
Clock
Short/Middle Pulse: 80MHz
+ Output Signal
Long Pulse: 40MHz Average Noise Rej. OFF Noise Rej. ON
Fig. 7.3 16 Schematic diagram of noise rejection processing
In long pulses, for instance, it is possible to receive echoes close to the pulse-length at
1.2 µ sec pulse. The shift lock frequency of the delay circuit is 40 MHz/25 nsec. Since
the delay circuit is comprised of 16 stages, the delay time is 16 x 25 nsec = 0.4 µ sec.
Consequently, there is a delay of 1.2 µ sec pulse + 0.4 µ sec since an echo of 1.2
µ sec pulse length is inputted into the delay circuit until the echo is completely
outputted, to make the echo a little extended. In the short and middle pulses, shift lock
frequency is set at 80 MHz since the pulse length is smaller. The pulse length in S1, for
instance, is 0.07 µ sec.
7-47
4-5 Automatic FTC (AUTO RAIN)

This setting is made in FTC OFF/1/2/3/4 of the [PICTURE] box menu.
A C
D
- STC
Processing
1
Range 2
Moving average
deviations xK
B
Target echo
Rain/snow echo
A
FTC setting
FTC effect
4
3
B C=A-B 2
1
OFF
C
FTC VR
(A/C RAIN VR)
D STC
Fig. 7.3.17 Schematic diagram of AUTO FTC
The input signal A is subjected to the processing of moving average deviation. In this
processing, the range of the distance to be extracted is deviated in one sweep and signal
levels of respective distances extracted are averaged.
Averaged signals are multiplied by the coefficient K determined by the FTC setting. The
signal B is subtracted from the input signal A to create the signal C. The signal C is
STC-processed (curve of 1/Square of distance) and outputted. The FTC control knob is
used for adjusting the STC level. The effect of FTC is larger as the FTC setting value is
larger and as FTC VR is turned clockwise.
Rang
n Sweep -----
-----
-----
~ -----
-----
~
+ Moving average
deviation Output
Fig. 7.3.18 Schematic diagram of moving average deviation processing
7-48
4-6 VIDEO CONTRAST (VIDEO CONTRAST)

The setting of VIDEO CONTRAST is made in A/B/C and 1/2/3/4 of the [PICTURE]
box menu.
This is the setting of the contrast of a displayed picture. The strength of a video signal is
set by combining its change width of the picture level and the curve of its change width.
Setting Setting
4 3 2 1
32 32
Picture Level
Picture Level
C
B
A
0 0
5dB
7dB
9dB
11dB
Fig. 7.3.19 Change width of picture level and change width curve
Setting of change width of picture level: In the setting of 1/2/3/4, if it is set to”2”, the
change width is 9 dB in the picture levels of 32. If the setting is “4”, the change
becomes steep with the change width of 5 dB. The change width curve “B” shows a
linear change. In case of the change width “C”, changes become smaller as the picture
levels become higher.
B-1 B-2(Default) B-3 B-4
A-1 B-1 C-1
A-4 B-4 C-4
Fig. 7.3.20 Comparison of VIDEO CONTRAST setting
7-49
Example of video contrast setting in FAR-2837S

The processing of 12 NM and other signals is set to OFF. The photos below show the
setting values of change width of the picture level and change width curve.
A-1 A-4
B-1 B-4
C-1 C-4
Fig. 7.3.21 Examples of video contrast pictures
7-50
5. Examples of factory setting for each “Picture”

5-1. FAR-2827 Noise REJ.:All OFF
Picture-1
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Video contrast: 2/B
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 2
Picture-2
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: 1
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
Fig. 7.3.22(1/12) Example of video contrast pictures
7-51
Picture-3
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: 2
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto STC (54)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 3
Picture-4
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: 2
- Video contrast: 2/A
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 2
7-52
NEAR
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 2
SHIP
FAR
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: 3
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto STC: ON (54)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Video contrast: 3/C
- Pulse: L
- Sea condition: 3
7-53
NEAR BUOY
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 1
- EAV: 1
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: L
- Sea condition: 2
FAR BUOY
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: 3
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Auto STC (64)
- Pulse: L
- Sea condition: 2
7-54
ROUGH SEA
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: 2
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Auto STC (54)
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 4
SHIP
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
7-55
HARBOR
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
COAST
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
7-56
5-2. FAR-2837S
Noise REJ.：All OFF
Picture-1
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 2
Picture-2
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: 1
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
7-57
Picture-3
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: 2
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto STC (54)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 3
Picture-4
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: 2
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 2
7-58
NEAR
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 2
FAR
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: 3
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto STC: ON (54)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: L
- Sea condition: 3
7-59
NEAR BUOY
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 1
- EAV: 1
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: L
- Sea condition: 2
FAR BUOY
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: 3
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Auto STC (64)
- Pulse: L
- Sea condition: 2
7-60
ROUGH SEA
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: 2
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Auto STC (54)
- Pulse: M2
- Sea condition: 4
SHIP
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: 2
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
Fig 7.3.22(11/12) Example of video contrast pictures
7-61
HARBOR
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: 2
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
COAST
- Range: 6NM
- IR: 2
- ES: OFF
- EAV: OFF
- STC: MAN (50)
- RAIN: MAN (50)
- Auto RAIN: OFF
- Pulse: M3
- Sea condition: 2
7-62
7.3.5 Power board

1. Power supply specifications
The power board differs according to the types of input power supply and antenna
revolving speed. See page.4-64 to 68.
Jumper setting inside the board performs switching between 100 to 115 VAC and 220 to
230 VAC power supply in a ship. Adjustments of input over voltage are required to do
this. Power supply outputs include + 24 VDC for the RF section, +24 VDC for the
TX-HV, +24 VDC for the antenna motor, +5 V, +12 V and –12 V power supply.
Table 7.3.4 Types of power boards
Model of power board Remarks

03P9339A 100 VAC, antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9339B 100 VAC, antenna speed: 42 rpm
AC PWR
03P9339C 220 VAC, antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9339D 220 VAC, antenna speed: 42 rpm
03P9338A Dedicated for 5 kW (Not shipped) 12-24 VDC, antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9338B Dedicated for 5 kW (Not shipped) 12-24 VDC, antenna speed: 42 rpm
DC PWR
03P9338C 24 VDC, antenna speed: 24 rpm
03P9338D 24 VDC, antenna speed: 24 rpm
Table 7.3.5 Input protection operating voltage of power board
Over voltage Low voltage

Power supply
F1: protection protection
Type Power Board starting
Fuse capacity operating operating
voltage
voltage voltage
100
03P9339A/B 10 A (125 VAC) 144 VAC 75 VAC 84 VAC
VAC
220
03P9339C/D 5 A (250 VAC) 288 VAC 159 V 181 VAC
VAC
24 VDC 03P9338A/B 20 A (125 VAC) 36 VDC 15 VDC 18.5 VDC
12 VDC 03P9338C/D 30 A (125 VAC) 36 VDC 8 VDC 9.8 VDC
Table 7.3.6 Over current protection operating current of power board
Operating
Protection Output line Remarks
current
+24 VDC TX-HV 5 to 7 A With delay of 0.1 s
Output short-circuit +24 VDC ANT
4 to 5 A With delay of 0.1 s
protection operating power supply
current 2.8 A or more: Turned of with a
ANT motor line 2.8/6.4 A
delay of 2 to 3.5 s
Output over current +12 VDC 5.5 A
protection operating -12 VDC 0.54 A
current +5 VDC 8.5 A
7-63
2. Block diagram of power board
U63
CUR PR4
R196-198
J108 +24V HV
100VAC:Short J103
220VAC:Open U62 CUR PR3
TP6/7 TP13
J181 CR26 C26/27
Dubler ON/OFF +24V R191-194 +24V
CR71, J105-9,10
100-220VAC L1 R40/124 L31/32 C77/78
-24V RT191
K1 C31/32 REC FAN 24V
Line FIL T2/3, J106
REC Q31-34
Q23 U31/32 TP12 U191: -12V -12V
L33/34 CR72/73, -14V uPC79N12H J104-15,15
PR12_A C79 -12V AVR
SW Reg. REC TP16
TP5
TP11
K1, Q21/1819/22 PR5V _C SW CONT +5V
CR1, C5 CR74, +12V UI131/132 CR133,
REC Triac, K1 Cont. C80 Q131/132 L132,C142 J104-6,7
REC SW Reg. REC
PWR ON2 PWR ON1
CUR PR1 +6.5V +12V
J105-8
CR7, C13 E1/2 +12V
R81 R88 J104-8,9
REC TP1 U21:RC9501 U25 +12V ADJ.
T1,Q1/2, +6.5V 2NINV SW Cont. U81 U23 Q141
CR5,C8,U1
CR2/3/4 PR12_A POWER FAIL
REC/AVR R48
ININV J104-1
SW Reg. TP3 45kHz ADJ.
100VAC:Short (Self OSC) CR6,C11/12,L2 +12V
PR12_A
220VAC:Open REC
Q13/14 Q41/42
J108
7-64
U11:RC9520 U12 DT Cont.
Soft start
Input Volt TP8/9 U24
Hi/Low DET. PR12_A
T4/5,U51/52
R21 Q51-54 TP14 TP19
RCU-014 PWR ON1 L51/52 CR101 Q181, CR181,L181,
Over VLT ADJ L53/54 +32V MOTOR
RCU-015 C51/52 C103/104 Q163-167 C183 J105-1,2
+6.5V SW Reg. REC
J105-7 REC REC
SW Reg. R88
PSW_H SW CONT R106 MON MOTOR VLT
- Q151,CR161
U4 U2 Q4 Q3 +32V SW CONT J104-2
+ CUR PR2 AVR
U112 R105 ADJ. E1/2
E1/2
Window +12V
U3 U161:MB3759PF
Comparator
- U22:RC9501 U27 SW Cont.
+ SW Cont. IN1
PR12_A 2NINV +6.5V IN2 TP17
U13 Q16 Q17 ININV U26 BP
Q43/44 U162:MB4206PF J105-5
POWER SW PR12_A ANT SPEED
DT Cont. F-V Converter J104-4
Soft start
CR23 JP161
PWR ON2
R168
CR4/62, U112
Q61/62/63/65 U61
PR12_A U151: R168:ANT Rotation
Over Current +6.5V Q153,C157
JP162
DET/Cont M51957BFP JP162:42rpm

PWR Reset ANT Soft Start
CR63 JP161:42rpm
CUR PR3 ANT ON
CR63:+32V Over Current J104-3
CR61:+24V Over Current CR61 Q66 Q154/155
CR65: HV Over Current CUR PR4
CR23: INPUT ERROR
CR65 Q67
Fig. 7.3.23 Block diagram of AC

power
U63
CUR PR4
R196-198 +24V HV
J103
U62 CUR PR3
TP6/7 TP13
J181 +24V R191-194 +24V
CR71, J105-9,10
L31-33 C77/78
24VDC -24V RT191
C31-36 REC FAN 24V
T2/3, J106
Line FIL Q31-34
U31/32 TP12 U191: -12V -12V
L33/34 CR72/73, -14V uPC79N12H J104-15,15
PR12_A C79 -12V AVR
REC TP16
SW Reg.
TP11
SW CONT +5V
CR1, C5 CR74, +12V UI131/132 CR133,
REC C80 Q131/132 L132,C142 J104-6,7
REC SW Reg. REC
CUR PR1 +6.5V +12V
J105-8
E1/2 +12V
R81 R88 J104-8,9
TP1 U21:RC9501 +12V ADJ.
U25
T1,Q1/2, +6.5V 2NINV SW Cont. U81 U23 Q141
CR5,C8,U1
CR2/3/4 PR12_A POWER FAIL
REC/AVR R48
ININV J104-1
SW Reg. TP3 45kHz ADJ.
(Self OSC) CR6,C11/12,L2 +12V
PR12_A
REC
Q21/22
DT Cont.
7-65
Soft start TP8/9 U24
PR12_A
T4/5,U51/52
RCU-014 Q51-54 TP14 TP19
L51/52 L53/54 CR101 Q181, CR181,L181,
C103/104 +32V Q163-167 C183 MOTOR
RCU-015 C51/52 J105-1,2
+6.5V SW Reg. REC
J105-7 REC REC
SW Reg. R88
PSW_H SW CONT R106 MON MOTOR VLT
JP1 Q151,CR161
- +32V SW CONT J104-2
+ U4 CUR PR2 AVR
U3 ADJ.
Q23/24 U112 R105 E1/2
E1/2
Window DT Cont. +12V
U3 U11:RC9528 U161:MB3759PF
Comparator Soft start
- INPUT Low/Hi U22:RC9501 U27 SW Cont.
+ Volt DET. SW Cont.
CR23 IN1
2NINV +6.5V IN2 TP17
U2 U26
ININV BP
Q4 Q3 U162:MB4206PF J105-5
POWER SW PR12_A ANT SPEED
F-V Converter J104-4
JP161
R168
CR4/62, U112
Q61/62/63/65 U61
PR12_A U151: R168:ANT Rotation
Over Current +6.5V Q153,C157
JP162
DET/Cont M51957BFP JP162:42rpm

JP1 PR12_A ANT Soft Start
PWR Reset JP161:42rpm
24VDC:Open CR63
12 - 24VDC:Short CUR PR3 ANT ON
CR63:+32V Over Current J104-3
CR61:+24V Over Current CR61 Q66 Q154/155
CR65: HV Over Current CUR PR4
CR23: INPUT ERROR
CR65 Q67
Fig. 7.3.24 Block diagram of AC

power
3. Block description of AC power board (03P9339)

Power supply interface
- POWER FAIL
This feature monitors the TP11 (+12 V) power supply line. POWER FAIL signal is
outputted when voltage is lowered on this line, and the switching power supply
become out of control.
When this signal is detected, this circuit generates an interrupt of MAIN CPU of
the SPU board, but this circuit is not used at present.
- MON MOTOR VLT
The voltage value can be monitored if the antenna motor is of a DC type. To monitor
the voltage value, execute [Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2: SELF TEST and check the value
on “SCANNER MOTOR”.
- BP
BP signals from the antenna are inputted from the SPU board and control the
revolutions of the DC antenna motor.
- ANT SPEED
This signal controls the antenna revolving speed when the antenna motor is of the
type of DC/42 rpm (RSB-097). This setting is made in [Menu] -> 0 -> 3 -> 4: ANT
REVOLUTION. In AUTO setting, the number of revolutions can be automatically
set according to pulse length (S1, S2 / M, L).
- ANT ON
This signal controls ON/OFF of the antenna power supply when the antenna motor
is of DC type.
This setting can be made in [Menu] -> 0 -> 3 -> 5: ANT SW.
Power-ON
1. Generating control voltage for power supply circuit
AC power supply inputs are rectified at CR1 and C5 and generates power supply of
+12 VDC, +6.5 VDC and +5 VDC for the power supply control circuits on the
power supply circuit of a self-excited oscillation type comprised of Q1, Q2 T1 and
CR2 to 4.
2. Detecting input low voltage and over voltage

Input low voltage and over voltage is detected for input power supply at U11.
Detection signals control U12 via Q13 and 14. If the input voltage is out of the
specified range, U12 is not turned on.
7-66
3. Turning the power ON

The status of power switch of RCU-014 and RCU-015 is detected at the window
comparator comprised of U3 and U4. The power switch is of a latch type and
opens when the power is ON and closes when the power is OFF. U4 output
switches +12 VDC power supply at Q3 via U2 and Q4 and generate “PR12_A”.
This power is supplied to the +32 VDC switching power supply circuit and the
+24VDC, +12 VDC and –14 VDC switching power supply circuits.
4. Tuning AC input circuit on by PWR ON1 signal

When the PR12_A power supply is turned on, U12 is turned on and PWR ON-1
signals control the triac and K1 control circuit.
First K1 is turned on, AC current runs through R40/124. Next the triac is turned on
and AC input power supply is connected to the rectifier circuit CR26. This circuit
is intended to reduce rush current. The rectifier circuit operates as a voltage
doubler rectifier circuit by the setting of J108 when 100 VAC is inputted
5. Turning on the switching power supply by PWR ON2 signal

PWR ON-2 signals from the triac and K1 control circuit drive two “DT Cont., Soft
start” circuits of Q41/42 and Q43/44 via U13, Q16, Q17 and control the HIC for
controlling the switching power supply of U21 and U22. The HIC incorporates
MB3759 for controlling the switching power supply of a pulse length modulation
type.
Control of antenna DC motor power supply

The antenna revolving speed differs according to the models of antenna motrs and
power boards. In case of the power board of 42 rpm type, the antenna revolving speed
can be changed by the setting according to 03Pxxxxx-B and 03Pxxxxx-D types.
ANT Motor
+24VDC 42rpm
MAIN CPU
ANT ON J610
BP ANT SPEED ANT +20VDC 36rpm
REG
Control (ANT Motor)
BP
U21
(Speed, ON/OFF) [SCANNER]
SPU-013 PWR
RPU-013
Fig. 7.3.25 Schematic diagram of antenna DC motor power supply
7-67
1. Turning on the antenna

ANT ON signals inputted from the SPU board control the switching power supply
IC of U161 via the “ANT Soft Start” circuit comprised of Q153 and C157.
2. Maintaining the antenna speed constant

To maintain the antenna speed constant, there is a feed-back circuit provided. In
this circuit, the number of revolutions (F) of B.P signals from the antenna is
converted into voltage (V) at U162. These signals control U161 and change the
switching power supply output voltage to maintain the antenna speed constant.
4. Block description of DC power board (03P9338)

The DC power board has no circuit corresponding to the input part of the AC power
supply. Other features of the switching power supply circuit are the same as for the AC
power supply. The HIC of U11 incorporates IC (MB3771PF) for monitoring power
supply. If the input is out of the range between the input over voltage 35 VDC and input
low voltage 15 VDC, the power supply is not turned on by controlling “DT Cont., Soft
Start” circuit for the switching power supply of +24 VDC, +12 VDC, -14 VDC and +32
VDC.
5. Power-on of monitor unit (MU-201CR, MU-231CR)

The signal for starting the power supply to the monitor unit is the signal of #14 pin (+5
V POWER) of DVI connector.
The figure below shows the schematic diagram of this line.
SPU board
DVI-D
J104- Vcc DVI-D
#4/5/6(+5V) MONITOR
PWR board (MU-201CR)
J201- J204-#14(+5V) (MU-231CR)
#4/5/6(+5V)
DVI-D
J205-#14(+5V) Ship’s Main

(AC or DC)
Fig. 7.3.26 Schematic diagram of monitor unit power supply control
7-68
7.3.6 TX-HV board (HV-9017)

The setting of JP1 and JP2 on the TX-HV board differs depending on the radar TX
output of 10 kW and 25 kW or more. See page.4-69 for the related setting.
T1 500V
REC
(CR11) J482
300V
MAIN INV TP3 TP1 SUB INB TP4
J481 JP2 1. Tx-HV
SW (45kHz) (+35V) SW (45kHz) 330V 500V JP1
1. +24V (Q1:2SK1420) (Q2:2SK1432)
300V REC 300V
REC
2. -24V (CR3) 260V (CR12) 2. GND
160V
-24V
160V
-10V
-24V
CONT.
CONT.
VR1 0
E1
IN1 SW CONT. CR21 U2

(U1:RC6220) CR21(Red):Over Current
IN2 CR23(Green): Power IND
E2 Over current
PMW DET
Vcc (MB3759)
+24V
-10V
RT CT DT OC CR23
R2/3 C7
CR6 C7
TP2 -24V
(RD10EB1) CR1
-10V
Fig. 7.3.27 Block diagram of TX-HV board
The TX-HV board is comprised of a main inverter and sub inverter. Each inverter is
controlled by U1 and the switching frequency is about 45 kHz and determined by R2, 3
and C7. U1 incorporates the IC for pulse length control of MB3757 with its peripheral
circuitry molded.
CR23 lights up when the power is supplied to this board and CR21 lights up when over
current of about 0.7 A is detected on the TX-HV. VR1 should be adjusted so that the
output voltage of the main inverter of TP-1 is 35 VDC. TX-HV voltage is set at JP1 and
JP2. The voltage setting is 310 to 350 VDC in case of a 10 kW –radar (FAR-2x17) and
520 to 580 VDC incase of radar of 25 kW or more (FAR-2x27).
7-69
7.3.7 NET-100 board (03P9332)

LAN is based on 100BASE-Tx standard.
NET-100 is the interface for I/O signals of the SPU board, pictures on the radar screen,
operating signals of control unit and LAN. CU-200 also has the same NET-100 board
and card data is exchanged through the LAN.
CR2 CR1
(DATA) (LINK)
J302
J207 U3
25MHz 1. Tx P
Tx data 2. Tx N
U1 LAN
ADD. / DATA LAN I/F Rx data 3. Rx P
6. Rx N
U2
EEPROM
Fig. 7.3.28 Block diagram of NET-100
The LAN cable between FAR-2xx7 radars, and between FAR-2xx7 and CU-200 is a
cross cable. When HUB-100 is used for the connection, either a straight cable or cross
cable can be used. All the ports of HUB-100 are provided with Auto-MDIX feature and
automatically recognize cable types.
SPU p.c.b SPU p.c.b

LAN 100Base-Tx LAN LAN
NET-100 NET-100 INS
cross cable
No.1 FAR-2xx7 No.2 FAR-2xx7
SPU p.c.b CARD CPUp.c.b

LAN 100Base-Tx LAN
NET-100 NET-100
cross cable
No.x FAR-2xx7 CU-200
SPU p.c.b
LAN
100Base-Tx NET-100
8 ports
SPU p.c.b No.x FAR-2xx7
LAN 100Base-Tx LAN 100Base-Tx
NET-100 HUB-100
CARD CPUp.c.b
or or
No.x FAR-xx7 straight cable
straight cable NET-100
LAN
CU-200
Fig. 7.3.29 Schematic diagram of LAN
7-70
7.4 Control Unit
7.4 Control Unit

Models RCU-014, RCU-015 and RCU-016 are available for the control units RCU-014
and RCU-015 have a power switch. RCU-016 does not have a power switch and is used
for a remote control unit for RCU-014 or RCU-015. They are connected in series. When
two control units are used, operation from each control unit is at the same level.
Table 7.4.1 Overview of control unit
RCU-014 RCU-015 RCU-016

Component
(STD CONTROL) (TRACKBALL) (REMOTE)
Power supply With With Without
With
Control key switch F1 to F4 only
all key switches
CONTROL board 03P9343 03P9344
BUZZER board 03P9362
TRACK BALL
TA4726N
model
Program Common
For connection between units, connect the [PROCESSOR] side with a higher-level unit.
The interface is RS-422 based on asynchronous communication method (19,200 bps).
Alarm sounds and panel brilliance data are outputted from RPU-013 to the control unit,
and key and control knob information and track ball data re outputted from the control
unit to RPU-013. The cable length from RPU-013 to the last control unit is 31 m at
longest taking supply voltage drop into consideration.
RCU-014 (STD CONTROL UNIT) RCU-015 (REMOTE UNIT)

TX/RX dat
SYS FAIL
J602 PWR SW J501 J502 TX/RX dat J521 J522
+12V +12V
KEY PROCESSOR REMOTE PROCESSOR REMOTE
TB p.c.b
RCU-015 (TRACKBALL UNIT)

RPU-013
(RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT) J521 J522
PROCESSOR REMOTE
Fig. 7.4.1 Overview of connection
7-71
7.4 Control Unit
The figure below is the block diagram of connection of RCU-013 and RCU-014. See
page.4-58 for information of System Fail.
RPU-013
RCU-014
PROCESSOR REMOTE
SPU KEY U6 U6
p.c.b J501 (RS422 I/F) (RS422 I/F) J502
RS422 I/F J602
SN751178NS
SN751178NS
KEY TXD H/C TD UP H/C TD DN H/C
1, 2 1, 2 TX/RX 0 TX/RX 1 1, 2
SN751178NS
PROCESSOR
KEY RXD H/C RD UP H/C RD DN H/C
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
PWR SW
PWR 5 5 S36
5
p.c.b GND (DIP SW) GND
6, 8 6, 8 POWER SW 6, 8 RCU-016
12V 12V IN 12V IN
U21 TERMINAL U8
7 7 7
MAIN CPU p.c.b CPU
U9
BZ REMOTE
SYS FAIL H SYS FAIL H
9 9 4 SOUND
9
1
SYS FAIL N
SYS FAIL C SYS FAIL C
10 10 10
3 2
U12
(PS7241 1B)
J622 RADAR OK
SYS FAIL H
1 1 1
GND SYS FAIL C GND
2 2 2
U14 J506
KEY
SYS ACK N
11 SYS ACK H KEY & EMRI
3 ILLUMI
12 GND
EXT ALARM ACK N 4
9
1 J507 Rotary
Encoder
ALARM 1 ALARM 2
to SYSTEM FAIL
ALARM 3 OPERATOR FITNESS 8
J612
EXT ALARM
Fig. 7.4.2 Block diagram of connection
The second control unit to be connected is RCU-016.

If RCU-014 or RCU-015 is connected as the second unit, the following operations are
disabled form the second unit.
- The power cannot be turned on and off
- A key beep does not sound.
- Key lighting cannot be used.
For these reasons, use RCU-016 to be connected as the second control unit.
7-72
7.5 Monitor Unit
7.5 Monitor Unit

7.5.1 Overview
See page.4-41 for the selecting and setting of a monitor unit to be connected.
See page.7-76 for connection with a monitor unit not given below.
- MU-201CR
This is an LCD of SGXA type. SXTA signals are inputted from RPU-013 by the
setting of S1-1/2 (OFF/OFF) of the SPU board.
- MU-231CR
This is an LCD of UXGA type. SXGA signals having a little larger width are
inputted from RPU-013 by the setting of S1-1/2 (ON/OFF) of the SPU board.
However, since these signals do not fit the LCD size, they are converted on the
DVI I/F board of MU-231CR so as to fit the LCD size.
Table 7.5.1 LCD monitor unit
MU-201CR MU-231CR
Remarks
(20. inches) (23.1 inches)
The number of output dots
Output signal differs according to the
1024 x 1280 dots 1024 x 1360 dots
from RPU-013 setting of S1 of the SPU
board.
Monitor display
1024 x 1280 dots 1200 x 1600 dots
process dots
Dots in radar
496 dots 496 dots
effective radius
Radar effective
308 mm 340 mm
radius
SPU board
OFF/OFF ON/OFF
S1-#1/2
7-73
7.5 Monitor Unit
7.5.2 Block diagram of monitor unit

1. MU-201CR
The power-on signal of the monitor unit is inputted into the DVI I/F board as signals of
#14 pin (+5 V POWER) of the DVI connecter. The DVI I/F board outputs “RC+/-”
signals based on these signals to control ON/OFF of the power supply unit
LCD panal
NL128102AC31-02
Power ON +5V DVI I/F Board

Data/CLOCK (SLB-FRN3-A)
DVI LCD I/F Board
(SXGA)
Power ON +5V
F1: 2A
+12V
100-240VAC +24V AC/DC power
FL1 RC+
(FL-205A) (RKW12-13RE) RC-
Ship’s Main
Inverter Board
TB1
Fig. 7.5.1 Block diagram of MU-201CR (AC)
LCD panal
NL128102AC31-02
DVI I/F Board

Power ON +5V (SLB-FRN3-A)
Data/CLOCK
DVI LCD I/F Board
(SXGA)
Power ON +5V
F1: 5A
+12V
24VDC +24V DC/DC Board
FL1 RC+
(MXB-1206-33) (03P9359) RC-
Ship’s Main
TB1 Inverter Board
Fig. 7.5.2 Block diagram of MU-201CR (DC)
7-74
7.5 Monitor Unit
2. MU-231CR
The power-on signal of the monitor unit is inputted into the DVI I/F board as signals of
#14 pin (+5 V POWER) of the DVI connecter. The DVI I/F board outputs DDC +5 V
signals based on these signals to control ON/OFF of the power supply unit and outputs
“RC+/-” signals via the filter board. The DVI I/F board also converts SXGA signals into
UXGA signals.
LCD panal
DVI I/F Board
(BSM501FN1) FLC59UXC8V-04
DVI SXGA -->

LVDS UXGA
Power ON +5V
Data/CLOCK
Power ON +5V
DVI LCD I/F Board
(SXGA)
+12V
F1: 2A
DDC+5V
VVR
VCNT
100-240VAC +24V AC/DC power
FL1
(LF 205A) (RKW12-13RE-P)
Ship’s Main +12V
TB1 Inverter Board
RC+
RC-
Filter Board
FAN (03P9360)
Fig. 7.5.3 Block diagram of MU-231CR (AC)
LCD panal
DVI I/F Board
(BSM501FN1) FLC59UXC8V-04
DVI SXGA -->
LVDS UXGA
Power ON +5V
Data/CLOCK
Power ON +5V
DVI LCD I/F Board

(SXGA)
+12V
F1: 6A
DDC+5V
VVR
24VDC +24V DC/DC Board VCNT
FL1
(MXB-1206-33) (03P9359)
Ship’s Main +12V
TB1 Inverter Board
RC+
RC-
Filter Board
FAN (03P9360)
Fig. 7.5.4 Block diagram of MU-231CR (DC)
7-75
7.5 Monitor Unit
7.5.3 List of monitor units

The table below shows color LCD monitors connectable with FAR-2xx7 series.
Table 7.5.2 Connection of LCD monitor
MU-201CR MU-231CR
Model MU-120C MC-155C MU-151C MU-201C
(Standard) (Standard)
Connection
Yes Yes Electrically connectable No Yes
with FAR
Picture size
20.1 23.1 12.1 15 15 20.1
(inch)
Monitor 1024 x 1280 1200 x 1600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 1280
resolution （SGXA）（UXGA） (SVGA) (XGA) (XGA) (SXGA)
- DVI-D
- RGB analog
- Mini D-SUB15 pin RGB analog
Input Mini D-SUB
DVI-D RGB analog Mini D-SUB
connector 15 pin
- RCA 15 pin
- DVI-D
NTSC/PAL
100-240
Power 100-240 VAC
12-24VDC VAC 100-240 VAC
supply /24 V
/24 VDC
SPU board
OFF/OFF ON/OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON
S1-#1/2
Note-1
Note-1, Note-2
Remaks Note-2
Note-3, Note-4
Note-3
Note-1
Set S1-#1/2 of the SPU board to OFF/ON. In this setting;
- Brilliance control signals included in DVI signals are not outputted.
- The [BRILL] icon bar is not displayed at the lower left of the screen.
Note-2
When connection with FAR is made by RGB analog signals, the connection should be
made by way of DVI I/F and RGB BUFF boards offered as option. See the
Installation Manual of FAR radar for the method of connection.
Note-3
For connection with the DVI-D connector, make connection directly. RCA signals are
not supported.
Note-4
Due to difference in monitor resolution, signals are omitted and this makes characters
illegible
7-76
Chapter 8. Q & QA& A
1. How to call up the INITIALIZE and FACTORY menus

Refer to page.4-1 for the setting.
- INITIALIZE menu: Press the [Menu] key 5 times while holding down the [1:
HL OFF] key.
- FACTORY menu: Press the [2], [3] and [4] keys in order while holding down
the [1: HL OFF] key.
2. How to change the language display (English/Japanese)

See page.4-2.
Make the setting in the FACTORY menu.
To call up this menu, press the [2], [3] and [4] keys in order while holding down
the [1: HL OFF] key.
3. Which cable should be used for LAN CA, Cross CA or Straight CA?
See page.3, 7-70 and the Operator’s Manual of “HUB-100”.
Use a cross cable for connection between FAR and FAR, and FAR and CU-200.
For connection of FAR and CU-200 via HUB-100, either a cross cable or straight
cable of Category 5 can be used. The LAN cable kit FR-FTPC-10/20/30 m,
armored cable is available as option. All the ports of HUB-100 are provided with
the Auto-MDIX function, and automatically recognize a connecting cable.
Note:
Use a straight cable in case a hub is not provided with the Auto-MDIX.
SPU p.c.b SPU p.c.b CARD CPUp.c.b

LAN 100Base-Tx LAN LAN LAN
NET-100 NET-100 NET-100 INS
cross cable
CU-200
No.1 FAR-2xx7 series No.2 FAR-2xx7 series
SPU p.c.b
LAN
100Base-Tx NET-100
8 ports
SPU p.c.b
LAN 100Base-Tx LAN 100Base-Tx No.x FAR-2xx7 series
NET-100 HUB-100
CARD CPUp.c.b
or or
straight cable straight cable NET-100
No.x FAR-xx7 series LAN
CU-200
8-1
Q&A
4. What is the maximum cable length usable between each unit?

See page.1-9.
- Between Processor unit and Control unit: Max. 30 m
Between Processor unit and TR unit: Max. 100 m
(FAR-2xx7 and 2xx7S: 300 m when used with RJB-001 and thicker
antenna cable)
- Between Processor unit and Monitor unit: Max. 10 m
(The cable length of 10 m is allowed for the cable supplied with the
equipment. The DVI standard specifies 5 m. For further extending the
cable length, DVI-DVI repeater is commercially available.)
LAN cable: The longest length of optional cables is 30 m.
Note:
For connecting with 100BASE-T(100 Mbps), use the LAN cable of category
5, and 100 m at the longest.
5. How can I extend the LAN CA to 30 m or longer? (What is the maximum

cable length?)
When connecting with 100BASE FX using optical cables, the cable length up to 2
km is allowed. When extending an optical cable, the media converter that can
process signals in real time is necessary.
6. Can antenna cables for FR-1425 and FR-2120 be used for FAR-2127 and
FAR-2137S?
Cables for older types of radars RW-4873 (armored-cable RW-6895) can be used
with new-type IMO radar. There will be no problem if the cable length is 30 m or
less. Re-install wiring.
Note:
- Two cables of the older type are required for 24 V+/‐ power supply which
was not used for older types of radars.
- Although the new cable RW-9600 has fewer cores, it allows a larger current
capacity than the older types of cables (available only in 0.5 and 1.25 sq. mm
sizes) since the new cable size is a 1.5 or 2.5 sq. mm.
7. What types of the color LCD monitor can be used for connection?
See page.4-41 and 7-76.
Monitors compatible with SXGA are MU-120C, MU-155C, MU-200C, MU-201C
and. MU-120C and MU-155C are not compatible in terms of the display size.
For connecting with these monitors, make the setting of the DIP switch S1 on the
SPU board. Set “S1-#1” to OFF and “#2” to ON.
8. Can any number be assigned for the radar in the setting of [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 ->
4: RADAR NO.? See page.4-19.
Assign 1 to 4 to let the unit serve as Radar.
Assign 5 to 8 to let the unit serve as a sub monitor. Information on radars
connected to the LAN can be checked on the [ANT-X] box menu.
8-2
Q&A
9. How many units can connect for the Inter-switch function?

See page.4-19, 4-21 and 4-23.
Up to four radars and up to four monitors can be connected. Make connections via
HUB-100. The related setting is made in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4: RADAR NO. To
make the unit serve as Radar, assign 1 to 4 to the radar number. It is required for
this setting to change the IP address of Radar. When the setting is changed, be sure
to restart other FARs, CU-200, and HUB-100 connected to the LAN.
10. What kinds of operations are allowed when switching to another radar
by the Inter-switch?
The setting of GAIN, STC and RANGE can be changed. Echo processing of ES,
EAV, Echo trail and etc. is performed on the switched side.
Operation such as ARPA acquisition and tracking is performed on the original
processor unit. The inter-switch can perform operations such as target acquisition,
vector mode/time, tracking interval and TCPA/CPA on the side of units.
11. How to connect the external alarm

See page. 4-58 to 4-63.
There are four alarm output ports. An alarm event for alarm output can select in
[Menu] ->3 -> 6/7/8/9. When OPERATOR FITNESS is selected, other alarms
cannot be selected at the same port. The polarity of ALM-4 is inverted from those
of ALM-1, 2 and 3.
- ALM-1 to 3: Normal close
- ALM-4: Normal open
12. Is there any specific order in the connection of RCU-014, 015 and 016.
See page.7-71.
Connect the processor unit (RPU-013) with RCU-014 or RCU-015. Since
RCU-016 does not have a power switch, it cannot be directly connected to
RCU-013. Connect RCU-016 to RCU-014 or RCU-015.
13. How to install the De-icer

The De-icer is installed at factory. Please give instructions for the installation of
the De-icer in your purchase order of the equipment.
14. Can the FAR-2xx7 serve as a sub monitor?

See page.4-20, 4-23 and 4-81.
Connect the Master radar (Video, B.P, HD and trigger) to MASTER (J616) on the
TB board. Adjust R401 on the SPU board so that the level of TP58 on the SPU
board should be 2Vp-p.
When ON is selected in the setting of “8. SUB MONITOR” on the [ANT] box
menu, ANT-X and SUB can be switched in the [ANT] box.
8-3
Q&A
15. Can the same ports be used for connecting a sub monitor?
See page.4-74.
There are two ports for connecting to the sub monitor, one for outputting semi-log
video signals and the other for full-log video signals. Select an appropriate port by
understanding the characteristics of each.
To use both ports for outputting same video signals semi-log or full-log, it is
required to modify the SPU board (03P9337).
To make the outputs of SUB DISPLAY-2 (SEMI-LOG: J618) same as the outputs
of SUB DISPLAY-1 (FULL-LOG: J617), follow the procedure below.
1) Remove the jumper (chip) of JP3 on the SPU board.

2) Jumper JP4 on the SPU board.
To increase the video level for the monitor:

SEMI-LOG output: Provide R356 (1 kohm) on the SPU board with a 1 kohm
resistor in parallel, and then the level will be increased by
50%.
FULL-LOG output: The applicable resistor is R364/1kohm but the level is not
increased so significantly.
16. Can the Radar-buoy connect?

No. Radar-buoy cannot be connected.
17. Which format should be used for HDG, AD format or NMEA format?
See page.4-42.
Either AD format or NMEA format can be used.
However, in case of AD format, input data to J608 on the TB board at the output
interval of 25 msec. In case of the NMEA format, input the HDT sentence to
J605 on the TB board at the speed of 38.4 kbps (IEC61162-2) and output interval
of 25 msec.
18. How many CU-200 can be connected?

See page. 4-48.
Two CU-200 can be connected via HUB-100. Setting is required for the 2nd
CU-200. This setting is for the IP address of CU-200. The drives of CU-200s are
automatically assigned. The drive of the 1st CU-200 is A (left slot)/B (right slot),
and the drive of the 2nd one is C (left slot)/D (right slot).
Note:
For temporary measures just for a purpose of display of the coastline chart, the
coastline can be displayed by inserting the chart data card into J206 on the SPU
board and restart the unit. However this operation make the lid of the processor
unit left open.
8-4
Q&A
19. Which chart card is read when 2 chart cards are inserted into CU-200?
- When two chart cards are inserted:
Priority is given to a card that includes Detailed Data of the chart and includes
the own ship position within the range of the chart.
- If both cards include Detailed Data of the chart, the card that was displayed
before updating is read.
Note:
- The FAR receives the chart data from CU-200 when the display is updated, for
example, the change of the range and others.
- Contents of Detailed Data: depth contour, place name, etc
20. Can the PSU-007 use commonly for different supply voltages?
See page.4-72.
As for the PSU-007, the supply voltages cannot use commonly. Four types of
the PSU-007 are available according to different types of gearboxes (antenna
motor). The models of thermal relays and their setting differ depending on the
motor power supply. The PSU-007 has a label showing a compatible gearbox on
its.
21. Is RPU-013 used commonly for X-band and S-band?

See page.4-69.
The RPU-013 cannot be used commonly for X-band and S-band. To distinguish
the type of RPU-013, check the name plate for the output power. It is indicated
the power type next to the power input terminal. And then, check the power
input terminal for indicating ship’s main. There are 8 types of the PWR boards
according to the differences in ship’s main and antenna speed, and 2 types of HV
boards for 12 kW and for 25 kW/30 kW according to the output power. The
initial setting includes the setting of MODEL.
Power type PWR board (ANT: rpm) FIL board TX-HV board
03P9339A (24 rpm)
100 VAC
03P9339B (42 rpm) 12 kW: HV-9017A
03P9341
03P9339C (24 rpm) - FAR-2x17
220 VAC
03P9339D (42 rpm) 25/30 kW: HV-9017B
03P9338C (24 rpm) - FAR-2x27
24 VDC - FAR-2827W
03P9338D (42 rpm) - FAR-2x37S
03P9352 - FAR-2837SW
03P9338A (24 rpm)
12 VDC
03P9338B (42 rpm)
8-5
Q&A
22. To change the power source type for temporary use.

See page.4-64.
To change the type of AC power supply:
Change the jumper setting of J108 on the PWR board (03P9339).
- 100 VAC: Jumper between 1-2, 4-7 and 5-8.
- 220 VAC: Open the jumper.
Note: After changing the setting of the AC power input type, it is required to
make adjustments of over voltage protection of R21 on the PWR board.
To change the type of DC power supply:
Change the jumper setting of JP1 on the PWR board (03P9338).
- 12-24 VDC: Jumper
- 24 VDC: Open
23. Give the information on the loss of a waveguide.

Arrange the units so as to minimize the loss of the waveguide.
Radar Item Loss Remarks

Minimum bending radius
High-frequency
S-band LHPX-20D 0.095 dB/m - Single: R15 mm
Co-axial cable
- Repeated: R250 mm
Minimum bending radius
- E side: 200 mm
FR-9 Rect-guide 0.086 dB/m
- H side: 400 mm
- Torsion: 10 deg./m or less
Rectangular
X-band WRJ-9 0.072 dB/m
waveguide tube
E bend 0.15 dB/piece
For WRJ-9 H bend 0.15 dB/piece
parts Twist
0.3 dB/piece
waveguide
24. Sometimes the setting is not saved.

See page.4-1.
When the setting is changed, wait for at least 6 seconds before turning off the
power. If the power is turned off within 6 seconds after changing the setting, the
setting may not be saved in the flash memory.
25. When the power is restarted immediately after turning the power off,
the ST-BY status starts within 3 minutes.
When the power is restarted in a short while after turning it off, the Magnetron
has still been warmed up. In this case, 3 minutes delay time is not necessary,
resulting in shortened delay time. Since the delay time is determined by
detecting the voltage of the capacitor C304 on the SPU board, the delay time
varies depending on the detected voltage.
8-6
Q&A
26. What is the difference among the IMO, A, B, C and W types?

See page. 4-25.
IMO: IMO type A: Semi IMO type B: Fish-boat type to the outside of
Japan C: Fish-boat type for Japan
W: Washington State Ferry type (special type with some special function added
to the B type)
Functions differ according to the type setting. For instance, the IMO type accepts
sentences of IEC611162 2nd ED (equivalent to NMEA Ver-3.0).
27. When the [1:HL OFF] key is pressed, the range ring and all marks
disappear. Is this normal?
It is a normal procedure. When the [1: HL OFF] key is pressed, HD lines and all
marks except radar echoes disappear to see echoes.
28. Where is the power switch of MU-201CR and MU-231CR located?

See page.7-74.
MU-201CR and MU-231CR do not have a power switch and power switch is
linked with the RPU-013. The power ON and OFF to MU-201CR and
MU-231CR is controlled by signals of #14 pin (+5 V POWER) of the DVI
connecter of the RPU-013.
29. The power cannot be turned on.

See page.6-25.
Check the LEDs on the PWR board. For instance, if CR23 (IN ER) on the PWR
board is ON, there is an error of over voltage or low voltage in the input voltage.
Make sure the ship’s main.
30. NAV data is not inputted.

See page. 4-27, 4-50, 6-9 to 6-16.
NAV data handling differs depending on the setting of the radar type (IMO, A, B
and C).
1) Check the wiring of input ports checked by the [OS POSN] box menu. A port
corresponding to the setting of GPS-1 is NAV (J606) on the TB board.
A port corresponding to the setting of the GPS-2 is a port other than J606 on
the TB board.
2) Monitor the NMEA data in “[Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2:SELF TEST”.
3) When the data is not inputted by above monitoring, conduct a loop-back test.
8-7
Q&A
31. Is there a priority order for NAV-data connecting ports on the TB

board?
See page.6-11.
For position data, the [OS POSN] box menu GPS-1 or GPS-2. Ports for
accepting data differ according to the setting. NAV data is accepted from J606
on the TB board when GPS-1 is selected, and there is a priority order for
connecting ports when GPS-2 is selected. There is a priority order for
connecting ports in terms of other data, too.
32. The position and speed data displayed in red.

When data is displayed in red, it shows that the data is undetermined, the display
in the POS and SPD box differs according to sentences used or the status.
33. Show the list of error message.

See page.6-31.
Error messages are displayed in the ALERT BOX. Note that more than one error
related to the cause of the problem is displayed. Error messages are kept
displayed until the error event is removed.
34. Show the manual method for CABLE ATT ADJ.

See page.4-13.
To adjust the cable attenuation manually, set 24 NM range, long pulse and GAIN
to “80”, STC to “0”, FTC/EAV/ES/ to OFF, and IR to “2”, and then make
adjustment so as to allow a slight amount of noises.
35. The sensitivity (gain) has become lower.

See page.3-15, 4-28, 6-42 and 7-51.
1) Have you changed the [PICTURE] setting? Reset the setting to “DEFAULT”
in each [PICTURE] box menu.
2) Initialize the setting in [Menu] -> 1 -> 3:TUNE INITIALIZE. Also execute
turning manually.
3) Check the gain in PM. (Performance Monitor)
4) Check the Magnetron current and R-MONITOR voltage in “RF UNIT
MONITOR” of [Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2:SELF TEST.
8-8
Q&A
36. ARPA targets are quickly lost.

See page.4-8.
1) Check that the TX output interval of the AD converter is 25 msec.
2) Check that the data of [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 8:TRACK PRESET is not changed
from the default. If the default setting is changed, execute [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 ->
0:DEFAULT to return the ARP preset setting to the default.
3) Check whether targets are displayed correctly in [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 5:QV
DISPLAY. If QV echoes are weaker than actual echo, try changing the set of
[Menu]-> 0 -> 6 -> 4:ECHO LEVEL.
4) If a target is lost in a particular direction, check whether pictures are presented

too large than the land size set by [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 7 -> 2: LAND SIZE.
5) When the ship speed data is inputted by the GPS and a target is lost by changes
of ship speed, remove the ship speed signal from the log.
6) Try re-adjustments of the setting of [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> -2:CABLE ATT ADJ.
37. The antenna does not rotate on FAR-2837SW.

See page. 4-24.
The power to the antenna motor is supplied via RTR-082. The signal to control
the relay of the antenna power line is “ANT ON” signal outputted from the RFC
board of this unit. If the setting of [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 6:MODEL is not
“30DOWN”, “ANT ON” signal is not outputted. Check this setting is correct.
38. The antenna rotation speed cannot be switched although RSB-097 is

installed.
See page.4-68.
When the gearbox RSB-097 (42 rpm/DC Motor: D8G-571) is used, the revolution
can be switched between 36 rpm and 42 rpm. For this purpose, the PWR board
must be 03PxxxxB or 03Pxxxx D board. It is also needed to make the setting of
[Menu] -> 0 -> 3 -> 4:ANT REVOLUTION. If this is set to “AUTO”, the antenna
revolving speed is automatically switched at the S1/S2 pulse and M/L pulse.
39. Screen is blank even if the RCU-015 is turned on.

This may be caused because brilliance is lowered. Press any key other than the
power key for longer than 4 seconds. This sets the medium brilliance.
8-9
Q&A
40. The [BRILL] box menu is not displayed. And the brilliance cannot be
adjusted even by turning the BRILL control.
Check the setting of S1 of the SPU board. The setting of S1 is set to the “BB”
type.
41. The monitor size and picture size does not match each other.
Check the setting of S1 of the SPU board.
42. NMEA data is shared in the LAN connection.

See page.4-51.
The setting to share NMEA data is as follows. However, the HDG data is
excluded from the shared use.
The radar setting on the sending side:
- Select “ON” in [OS POSN] -> 3. SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
- Select GPS-1 or GPS-2 for the GPS input port in [OS POSN] -> 1. NAV AID
For prevention of a collision, the radar setting on the receiving side is as follows:
- Select “OFF” in [OS POSN] -> 3. SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
- Select “LAN” in [OS POSN] -> 1.NAV AID
43. The number of mark points

The number of stored points of MARK and LINE is 20,000 and the number of
points of OWN TRACK is 20,000. Separate from these, the ARPA has a storage
area for TARGET TRACK. The number of stored points of ARPA are 15 targets
x 1,000 points.
44. Can marks and lines created on GD-280 and GD-680 be used?
It is possible by converting GD-200/680 data into the GD-3000 format using the
conversion software “GD8891wim”. All data cannot be converted and some marks
may be presented by different shape.
45. What can be saved on a memory card CU-200?

See page.6-45 to 6-47.
Select an item to be written in [Menu] -> 6. The character at the head of a file
name differs according to the selected item. If “MARK” is selected, the file name
is Mxxxxxxx. When the NAV LINE WPT is selected, the file name is Nxxxxxxx.
8-10
Q&A
46. How to erase the MARK

The MARK can be erased in [Menu] -> 5 -> 8:DATA ERASE.
To erase an entered mark individually, select “MARK DELETE” in the
[CURSOR] icon menu and place the cursor on the mark to be erased and click the
left button
47. How to display echoes in color

Echoes cannot be displayed in color on the IMO and A types.
To display echoes in color, select “COLOR” in “1. ECHO COLOR” of the
[BRILL] box menu.
48. How to create the NAV line

See Chapter 5 of the Operator’s Manual.
1) Register WPT in [Menu] -> 8 -> 6:WPT SET.
The registered WPT can be checked in [Menu] -> 8 -> 7:WPT LIST.
2) Register NAV LINE in [Menu] -> 8 -> 8:NAV LINE SET.
The registered NAV LINE can be checked in [Menu] -> 8 -> 9:NAV LINE
LIST.
3) Check to see that INTERNAL DATA is set in [Menu] -> 8 -> 2:NAV LINE
DATA.
4) Type the NAV LINE number registered in [Menu] -> 8 -> 3:NAV LINE
SELECT.
5) Make the setting of the NAV LINE WIDTH in [Menu] -> 8 -> 4:NAV
ARRIVAL WPT ALARM, [Menu] -> 8 -> 5:NAV LINE WIDTH.
Note:
To make the setting of NAV LINE from the external GPS,
1) Output WPL and RTE sentences from the GPS.
2) Select EXT DATA in [Menu] -> 8 -> 2:NAV LINE DATA.
49. The NAV LINE from GPS cannot be displayed.

Check the following items.
- Is the GPS outputting WPL and RTE sentences?
- RTE sentence must be “w” working route data.
- Number of main point included in RTE sentence is 30 or less.
- Is “EXT DATA” selected in the setting of [Menu] -> 8 -> 2:NAV LINE DATA
on the FAR side?
8-11
Q&A
50. Is it possible to make the setting of AIS static information and to send
AIS messages from the FAR?
See page.3-13.
It is possible in the setting of the [AIS] box menu.
- [AIS] -> 5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
AIS messages created here are sent by AI ABM and BBM sentences to the
AIS unit and sent as AIS messages.
ABM：MSG 12, MSG 6 BBM：MSG 14, MSG 8
- [AIS] -> 6 [VOYAGE DATA]
Voyage information set from the FAR to set in the AIS unit using AI SSD, and
VSD sentences.
Voyage information set from the AIS unit also displays the information of AI
VDO sentences, except the information of “CREW”.
For instance, voyage information set in the AIS unit is outputted to the serial
port as AI VDO in about 5 seconds and displayed.
- [AIS] -> 7 [STATIC DATA]
The own ship information (static information) outputted by AI VDO
sentences from the AIS unit is displayed.
AI VDO sentences are sent every 6 minutes from the AIS unit or outputted
when data is changed. Wait 6 minutes to check updating.
51. What are the conditions for the loss of AIS targets?
It is presented when the lost target is detected on the radar side. These conditions
differ from conditions for the loss of a target on the AIS unit.
The conditions for a lost target on the FAR are;
- When the target cannot be received 5 times in the report intervals of the target
- When the target cannot be received for 6 minutes
Note:
- Conditions of the lost target on the FA-100 side are;
When the target cannot be received for 3 minutes 20 seconds or more, the
target becomes a lost target and when it is not received for another 3 minutes
20 seconds or more, it is deleted from the reception file.
- Conditions of the lost target on the FA-150 side;

It depends on the ship speed. For instance, the target becomes a lost target in
10 minutes while the ship is a halt, and in 7 seconds when the speed is 23 kt
or more. When there is no reception for another 400 seconds or more after it
becomes a lost target, the target is deleted from the reception file.
8-12
Q&A
52. Show the symbol marks of the AIS and ARPA.

See the Operator’s Manual of the FAR.
AIS symbol
SOG Victor
& COG ROT
Heading
Sleeping Terget Lost Target Activated Target Target selected Dangerous Target
for data display
ARPA symbol
Automaticallty ACQ
Manually ACQ
flashing flashing
after acquistion
Initial stage Steady tracking CPA alarm CPA alarm ACK Lost Target
In 60 Scans, flashing
changes to Guard zone
1 R R On target passing
through operator-set
On selected target On reference target guard zone
53. How should the setting be made on radar side when the ECDIS is
connected?
See page.4-83.
Major settings are made in [Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 5:INS and [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 ->
2:TTM OUTPUT.
54. How to display the BARGE MARK

See page.4-38.
When “OFF” is set in [Menu] -> 0 -> 6 -> 2:TTM OUTPUT, the BARGE
MARK menu is displayed by [Menu] -> 2 -> 7:BARGE MARK. The BARGE
MARK setting is made in this box menu.
8-13
Q&A
55. How to connect the EG-3000

See page.6-49.
Make the setting as follows:
- Select “EG” in [Menu] -> 0 -> 8 -> 2:DEMO ECHO.
- Select a type other than “IMO” in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4 -> 7:TYPE.
- Adjust R401 so that the level of TP58 is 2 Vp-p.
In the DEMO, the GAIN and A/C SEA cannot adjust.
56. How to set “Video Channel” on the VDR side

The setting list of VDR is shown in page.4-57. The setting on the radar side
should be made on jumpers on the RGB BUFF board. DVI I/F board, RGB
BUFF board and BNC connector converter are required to connect the VDR.
57. How to update a program

See Chapter 5.
Never turn off the power during updating a program, and never cancel updating
halfway. Connect the PC to the RS-232C port of RPU-013 to update a program.
Use a 9 pin D-sub cross cable (female-female) to connect the PC to RPU-013.
All programs can be updated in the same procedure. Click an applicable batch
file and follow instructions displayed on the PC. COM-1 is specified as the
updating port in the program batch file. If the serial port of the PC is other than
COM-1, change the COM port number in the batch file and overwrite so that the
port number of the PC agrees with the port number specified in the batch file.
58. What boards can be used commonly for X-band and S-band?
See page.5-2 and 6-37 to 6-39.
The list of boards is shown in page.6-37 to 6-39. The SPU board can be
commonly used. For boards of Ver-22 or later, the SPU FPGA program can be
updated from the PC as well as the main program. Programs of the SPU Ver-014
or later support this function.
59. What are components needing periodic replacement?

See page.6-42, 6-48 and 2-14.
Magnetron, Antenna motor, Motor brush and Battery of GC-10 need periodic
replacement.
8-14
Q&A
60. How to determine the power cable size

Select a cable on which the supply voltage drop is 5% or less. The following
equation can be used for the calculation of the cable size.
- Voltage drop: Vd = K x r x I x L/1000

- Cable length: L = 1000 x Vd / K x I x r
K = Single phase DC, AC: 2 3 phase AC: 3
I = Amperage (A)
R = Resistance (ohm/km)
L = Cable length (m)
When TPYCY-2.5, for instance, is used a cable for power supply to the antenna
motor (220VAC/3 phase), the cable length that can contain the voltage drop
within 5% is:
Cable length: L = 1000 x Vd / K x I x r

L = 1000 x 11 / 3 x 3 x 7.41
L = 285 m
61. How to measure the frequency of the X-band radar

1) Select “TX” in [Menu] -> 0 -> 3 -> 6:ANT STOPPED.
2) Transmit by the long pulse and put a pickup antenna of the Cavity-frequency
meter closer to about 1 m to the front face of a slot antenna.
3) Turn the handle of the Cavity-frequency meter and find a point where the
indicator of the Cavity-frequency meter swings most.
4) Correct the direct-reading indication by means of a temperature compensating
cursor and read the frequency.
Note:
The maximum frequency error of the X-band radar is loss than ±55 MHz.
62. Can SC-60/120/50/110 be connected with the IMO-type radar for heading
data?
It can be connected to a ship in a range between 300 GT to 500 GT. Since it is
mandatory for a ship of 500 GT or more to be equipped with a gyrocompass,
input the data from the gyrocompass. It is OK to connect SC-60/120/50/110 for a
backup purpose.
8-15
Q&A
63. The trackball of the control unit does not move smoothly.
When the outer ring of the trackball is turned to the left, the trackball can be
removed. Clean the trackball, inside the ring and roller of the trackball in the
same manner to clean the mouse of the PC.
Trackball
Roller of trackball
Cleaning inside the ring
64. Proper menu setting is not known. How can the setting be reset to the
default?
See page.4-1.
Press the [2], [3] and [4] keys in order while holding down the [1:HL OFF] key
to call up FACTORY menu. Select “FACTORY DEFAULT” in this menu and
press the [ENT] key 5 times. Be sure to make the setting of the INITIALIZE
menu.
65. Although noise appears on the screen, echoes are not displayed.
See page.6-7.
Check TX high voltage, Magnetron heater voltage and Magnetron current in
[Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2:SELF TEST. If the overcurrent is detected on the PWR
(RF) board due to a failure in the Magnetron, the pulse transformer or the MD
board, try checking by disconnecting the connector of MD board and TX high
voltage line.
8-16
Q&A
66. Radar echo alignment is abnormal in azimuth direction.

See page.4-24.
Check the slit of the B.P disk of the gearbox for clogging and the B.P photo
interrupter for pollution. The antenna unit outputs 256 pulses for the B.P on the
S-band radar and 360 pulses on the X-band radar in one rotation of the antenna.
The number of pulses is computed according to the setting of [Menu] -> 0 -> 4
-> 6:MODEL. Check whether the setting of the model is correct.
67. A message related to a communication error between Processor and

TR or Control unit is displayed in the ALERT box. How can the lines
between the units be checked?
See page.6-2 and 6-31 to 6-36.
- Between Processor unit (SPU board) and TR unit (RFC board): RS-422/115.2
kbps
The ALERT BOX displays RF, TRIGGER, VIDEO, AZIMUTH and
HEADING errors are displayed together. The RFC program number is
displayed as “****” and RF UNIT MONITOR is displayed as blank in
[Menu] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2:SELF TEST.
Note:
When the CPU of the RFC board is communicating, CR9 on the RFC
board blinks every second.
- Between Processor unit (SPU board) and control unit (CONT board):
RS-422/19.2 kbps
The ALERT BOX displays a KEY error. The program numbers of connected
keys, REMOTE 1 and REMOTE 2 are displayed as “******” in [Menu] ->
9 -> 8 -> 2:SELF TEST.
Note:
When the CPU of the CONT board of the control unit is operated, CR10
(RCU-015), CR11 (RCU-015 and 016) on the CONT board blink every
second.
Waveform of RS-422 data line

between the processor unit
+2.2 V
(SPU board) and the TR unit
(RFC board)
0V
Note:
The data line level is the same
as for RS-422 between the
processor unit (SPU board) and
the control unit (CONT board).
8-17
Q&A
- LAN: 100BASE-Tx
When the communication is not enabled, restart all units connected to the LAN.
For the status of communication, check the LEDs on CU-200 and NET-100 of
RPU-013. CR-1 lights up when data is running over the LAN, and CR-2 blinks
when the unit is linked with the LAN. See page.6-24 for the layout of LEDs. For
another method for checking on the LAN communication, check [ANT] box menu
to see the communication between radars connected to the LAN. When [Menu] ->
6:CARD cannot be accessed, it means that communication is not being conducted
with CU-200.
68. The ALERT BOX displays VIDEO error.

This is the presentation of an error that IF/VIDEO signals from TR unit cannot be
detected on the SPU board. If the presentation of TUNE is normal, the TR unit can
be regarded as normal.
Check the connection of the co-axial cable on the IF-VIDEO line of the TB board
and the transceiver unit. Check also the video signal outputs of #8 (Video out) pin
of SLAVE-1 or SLAVE-2 on the TB board. If signals are outputted, the problem
lies on a circuit after the video circuit on the SPU board.
Waveform of IF/VIDEO signal

of TB board on processor unit
Condition:
24 NM GAIN: 80, STC: 80
ES, EAV AUTO FTC: OFF
0V IR: 2
1.5 V Note:
The level changes according to adjustments
in [Menu] -> 0 -> 2 -> 2: Cable ATT ADJ.
69. Give the information on SYSTEM FAIL alarm.

See page.4-58.
SYSTEM FAIL alarm is outputted from the control unit when control signals
from the processor unit cannot be received on the control unit. The setting of
SYSTEM FAIL is made on the DIP switch on the control unit. It includes the
setting whether to output an alarm or not and the setting on the polarity.
8-18
Q&A
70. Echoes are reversed left to right on the S-band radar.

Is not the antenna reversely rotating? The antenna should rotate leftward viewed
from underneath. Change the connection of one phase of 3-phase power supply of
the antenna motor.
71. How to adjust the Magnetron after being replaced.

See page.6-43.
Execute TUNE INITIALIZE of Magnetron current and Magnetron heater voltage.
8-19
Q&A
72. Give basic information on radars.

1) Comparison between S-band and X-band
Characteristics X-band S-Band

In relation to electric Large Small
wave transmission Loss due to raindrops 4 mm/h: 4 mm/h:
(Related to 0.064 dB/km 0.017 dB/km
meteorological
Sea returns Large Small
phenomena)
Size at the same gain and
Large Small
the same horizontal directivity
In relation to antenna Loss in waveguide tube Large Small
Size of waveguide tube Small Large
Detection range Small Large
Others Bearing and range resolution Large Small
Noise index of receiver Large Small
2) Range resolution:
The distance R is determined by the pulse length: ( τ ).
R (m)=150 x τ
For instance, if the pulse length is 0.07 µ s for S1 pulse
R = 150 x 0.07
R = 10.5 m
3) Minimum range:
The pulse length ( τ ) determines the minimum range R.
R (m)=150 x τ
In the actual situation, the relation between the antenna height and vertical beam
width produce a shadow sector (target is not located within the vertical beam
width). This makes it impossible to detect targets at a close range. If the antenna
height is lowered to make the minimum detection range shorter, this makes the
maximum detection range shorter.
The minimum detection range can be calculated in the following equation:
Rmin = H / tan ( θ v/2)
where Antenna height (m) and vertical beam width ( θ v deg.).
Assuming that the antenna height is 30 m and the vertical beam width is 20
degrees (in case of the antenna XN-24AF)
Rmin = 30 / tan (20/2)
Rmin = 170.1 m
8-20
Q&A
4) Bearing resolution
It refers to the limit of the bearing angle in which approaching targets at the
same range can be separately displayed on the screen. This is dependent on the
directivity of the antenna (beam width). The beam width of the antenna
(XN-24AF) is 0.95 degrees.
The relation between the antenna effective length D (m) and beam width θ
(deg.) is expressed in the following equation:
θ (deg.) = 70 x λ (m)/D (m)
5) Propagation distance (Radar horizon)

The range to the horizon for radar waves is about 10% longer than the range to
the optical horizon and expressed in the following equation.
D (NM) = 2.23 h h: Radar antenna height
D (NM) = 2.23 ( h1 + h 2 )
Radar antenna height: h1 Target height: h2
Assuming that the radar antenna height is 30 m, and target height is 5 m,

D (NM) = 2.23 ( 30 + 5 )
D = 17.2 NM
6) Equation of wave propagation

The equation of the radar wave propagation in the free space is expressed as
follows:
P×G A S1 = Received power G = Antenna gain
S１＝ ×σ × P = Sending power R = Distance
4×π × R 2
4×π × R 2
Generally speaking,
there is a relation shown by this equation: A = G× λ 2/(4× π )
P × G 2 × λ2 × σ
S１＝
(4 × π ) 3 × R 4
However, since there is a need to take composite waves created by direct waves
and sea-reflected waves into consideration in the equation of the radar wave
propagation over the sea, the actual value differs from the value obtained in the
equation above. The transmission output and antenna 3
area determines the detection range. For instance, when
TX output is doubled, the detection range is increased
2
by 1.19 times and the antenna area is doubled, the ANT
detection range is doubled. As is apparent from the

description above, to extend the detection range, it is 1 Power
more effective to increase the antenna area than
increasing TX output. The graph on the right shows the Range
relation among the detection range, TX output and 1 2 3
antenna area when their magnification is changed. Power / Antenna
8-21
Q&A
7) False echoes
False echoes are echoes that appear on the screen at a position where there is no
target as if there is a target. The causes and characteristics of the false echoes are:
- Echoes by secondary reflection:

Echoes appear in the direction that there is a mast, funnel or others.
- Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two
positions on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the
target and the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a
large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your
ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may
temporarily be seen on he screen.
- Multiple echoes:
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object
like a large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes
may be observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the
actual range of the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be
reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly
adjusting the A/C SEA control.
- Sidelobe echoes:
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each
side f the beam, called “sidelobes.” If a target exists where it can be detected
by the side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show
usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA
control.
- Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar
beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be
detected.
8-22
Q&A
For example: false echo
Target
Radar Antenna Port side X-band Radar ANT
e.g.; funnel, mast
S-band Radar ANT
False echoes
8-23
Appendix 1) Sentences
AP1.1 Overview of NMEA-0183 Ver-3.00
AP1.1 OVERVIEW of NMEA-0183 Ver-3.00

1.1.1 Overview of connection
1. Connection
Multiple LISTENER may be connected to single TALKER. The LISTENER receive
circuit shall consist of an opto-isolator and should have protective circuits to limit
current, reverse bias and power dissipation at the opto-diode as shown in Figure 1.1.1
The receive circuit shall be designed for operation with a minimum differential input
voltage of 2.0 Volts and shall not take more than 2.0 mA from the line at that voltage.
For reasons of the compatibility with equipment designed to earlier versions of this
standard, it is noted that the “idle, marking, logical “1”, OFF or stop bit state” had
previously been defined to be in the range –15 to +0.5 Volts. The “active, spacing,
logical “0”, ON or start bit state” was defined to be in the range +4.0 to +15 Volts while
sourcing not less than 15 mA.
Fig. 1.1.1 Overview of Connection
2. Data configuration
Data is transmitted in serial asynchronous form in accordance with ANSI standards. The
first bit is a start bit and is followed by data bits, least-significant-bit first as illustrated
by Figure 1.1.2. The following parameters are used:
- Baud rate 4800 - Data bits 8 (d7=0)

- Parity None - Stop bits One
Fig. 1.1.2 Data Configuration
AP1-1
The following sentences are used: e.g) the DTM sentence is:
$ -- DTM , ccc , a , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , ccc *hh <CR><LF>
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
1) “$” or “!” HEX 24 or HEX 21 – Start of sentence
2) <address field> TALKER identifier and sentence formatter
3) [“,”<data field>] Zero or more data fields
4) “*”<checksum field> Checksum field
5) <CR><LF> Hex 0D 0A – End of sentence
The first field shall be an address field containing the identity of the TALKER and the
sentence formatter which specifies the number of data fields in the sentence, the type of
data they contain and the order in which the data fields are transmitted. The remaining
portion of the sentence may contain zero or multiple data fields.
The maximum number of characters in a sentence shall be 82, consisting of a maximum
of 79 characters between the starting delimiter “$” or “!” and the terminating <CR>
<LF>.
A checksum field shall be transmitted in all sentences. The checksum field is the last
field in a sentence and follows the checksum delimiter character “*”.
The checksum is the 8-bit exclusive OR (no start or stop bits) of all characters in the
sentence, including “,” delimiters, between but not including the “$” and the “*”
delimiters. The hexadecimal value of the most significant and least significant 4 bits of
the result is converted to two ASCII characters (0-9, A-F (upper case)) for transmission.
The most significant character is transmitted first.
AP1-2
Note: Symbol Character of Data

A Status symbol; Yes; Data Valid; Warning Flag Clear, Auto; Ampere
a Alphabet character variable A through Z or a through z
B Bars (pressure, 1000 Mb=1 Std, Atm. =100 kPa); Bottom
C Celsius (Degrees); Course-up
c Valid character, Calculating
D Degrees (of Arc)
E Error, East; Engine
F Fathoms
f Feet
G Great Circle; Green
g Good
H Compass Heading; Head-up; Hertz; Humidity
h Hours; HEX number
I Inches
J Input operation completed
K Kilometers; km/hour
k Kilograms
L Left; Local; Lost Target
l Latitude; Liters; Liters/second
M Meters; Meters/second; Magnetic; Manual; Cubic Meters
m Minutes; message
N Nautical miles; Knots; North; North-up; Newton
n Numeral; address
P Purple; Proprietary (only when following $); Position sensor, Percent; Pascal (pressure)
Q Query; Target-Being-Acquired
R Right; Rhumb line; Red; Relative; Reference; Radar Tracking; Rev/min (RPM)
S South; Statute miles; Statute miles/hour; Shaft; Salinity in parts per thousand
s Seconds; Six bit number
T Time difference; True; Track; Tracked-Target
t Test
U Dead Reckoning Estimate
u Sign, if minus “-” (HEX 2D)
V Data invalid; No; Warning Flag Set; Manual; Volt
W West; Water; Wheelover
x Numeric character variable
y Longitude
Z Time
AP1-3
3. Talker names list

Table 1.1.1 Talker Names List
Talker Names Installation Name

AG Heading Track Controller (Autopilot): General
AP Heading Track Controller (Autopilot): Magnetic
AI Automatic Identification System
CD COMMUNICATIONS: Digital Selective Calling (DSC)
CR COMMUNICATIONS: Data Receiver
CS COMMUNICATIONS: Satellite
CT COMMUNICATIONS: Radio-Telephone (MF/HF)
CV COMMUNICATIONS: Radio-Telephone (VHF)
CX COMMUNICATIONS: Scanning Receiver
DE DECCA Navigator
DF Direction Finder
EC Electronic Chart System (ECS)
EI Electronic Chart Display & Information System (ECDIS)
EP Emergency Position Indicating Beacon (EPIRB)
ER Engine room Monitoring Systems
GL GLONASS Receiver
GN Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
GP Global Positioning System (GPS)
HC HEADING SENSORS: Compass, Magnetic
HE HEADING SENSORS: Gyro, North Seeking
HN HEADING SENSORS: Gyro, Non-North Seeking
II Integrated Instrumentation
IN Integrated Navigation
LC Loran C
P Proprietary Code
RA Radar and/or Radar Plotting
SD Sounder, depth
SN Electronic Positioning System, other/general
SS Sounder, scanning
TI Turn Rate Indicator
VD VELOCITY SENSORS: Doppler, other/general
VM VELOCITY SENSORS: Speed Log, Water, Magnetic
VW VELOCITY SENSORS: Speed Log, Water, Mechanical
VR Voyage Data Recorder
YX Transducer
ZA TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Atomic Clock
ZC TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Chronometer
ZQ TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Quarts
ZV TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Radio Update
WI Weather Instruments
AP1-4
AP1.2 Configuration of NMEA Ver-3.00 Sentence

The following each sentence is limited to FAR-2xx7 series.
INPUT
1.2.1 ACK - Acknowledge Alarm
$--ACK , xxx *hh<CR><LF>
1
Contents Data Note

Acknowledge device alarm.
This sentence is used to Acknowledge an 1 ID number of the alarm source
alarm condition reported by a device.
1.2.2 BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint

$--BWC, hhmmss.ss , llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , c—c , a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Note

1 UTC of observation
2 Waypoint latitude, N/S
Bearing and distance to
3 Waypoint longitude, E/W
waypoint
4 Bearing, degrees true
5 Bearing, degrees magnetic
Time (UTC) and distance
and bearing to, 6 Distance, nautical miles
and location of, 7 Way point ID
specified waypoints from Positioning system Mode indicator:
present position. A= Autonomous mode
BWR data is calculated D= Differential mode
along the rhumb line E= Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
from present position 8 Mode indicator M= Manual input mode
rather than along the great S= Simulator mode
cirele path. N= Data not valid
The position system Mode indicator field
shall not be a null field.
AP1-5
1.2.3 BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line

$--BWR, hhmmss.ss , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yy, a , x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , c—c , a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Note

1 UTC of observation
Bearing and distance to
waypoint – rhumb line
4 Bearing, degrees true
5 Bearing, degrees magnetic
Time (UTC) and distance
and bearing to, 6 Distance, nautical miles
and location of, 7 Way point ID Not used
specified waypoints from Positioning system Mode indicator:
present position. A= Autonomous mode
BWR data is calculated D= Differential mode
along the rhumb line E= Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
from present position 8 Mode indicator M= Manual input mode
rather than along the great S= Simulator mode
cirele path. N= Data not valid
shall not be a null field.
1.2.4 DTM - Datum reference

$--DTM, ccc , a , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , ccc *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contents Data Note

W84= WGS84
W72= WGS72
S85= SGS85
1 Local datum code P90= PE90
999= User defined
Datum reference IHO datum code
Local geodetic datum and 2 Local datum subdivision code

datum offset from a reference 3 Lat offset, minutes, N/S
datum. 4 Lon offset, minutes, E/W
5 Altitude offset, meters
W84= WGS84
W72= WGS72
6 Reference datum code
S85= SGS85
P90= PE90
AP1-6
1.2.5 DBS - Depth below surface

$--DBS , x.x , f , x.x , M , x.x , F *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

1 Water depth, feet
Depth below surface 2 Water depth, meters
3 Water depth, fathoms
1.2.6 DBT - Depth below transducer

$--DBT , x.x , f , x.x , M , x.x , F *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

1 Water depth, feet
Water depth referenced to
2 Water depth, meters
the transducer.
3 Water depth, fathoms
1.2.7 DPT - Depth

$--DPT , x.x , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

Water depth relative to the
1
transducer, meters
Note 1:
“positive”= distance from transducer to
Water depth relative to
water-line.
the transducer and
“-”= distance from transducer to keel.
offset of the measuring 2 Offset from transducer, meters
Note 2
transducer.
For IEC applications the offset should
always be applied so as to provide depth
relative to the keel.
3 Maximum range scale in use
AP1-7
1.2.8 GGA - Global positioning system fix data

$--GGA, hhmmss.ss, llll.lll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x , xx , x.x , x.x , M, x.x , M, x.x, xxxx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Note

1 UTC of position
2 Latitude, N/S
3 Longitude, E/W
0= fix not available or invalid
1= GPS SPS mode, fix valid
2= differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
3= GPS PPS mode, fix valid
4= Real Time Kinetic. System used in
RTK mode with fixed integers
4 GPS quality indicator 5= Float RTK. Satellite system used in
RTK mode with floating fingers
6= Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
Time, position and
7= Manual input mode
fix related data for a
8= Simulator mode
GPS receiver.
The GPS quality indicator shall not be a
null field.
Number of satellites in use, 00-12,
5 may be different from the number
in view
6 Horizontal dilution of precision
Altitude re: mean-sea-level (geoid),
7
meters
8 Geoidal separation, meters
9 Age of differential GPS data
Differential reference station ID,
10
0000-1023
AP1-8
1.2.9 GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude

$--GLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yy, a , hhmmss.ss , A , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

1 Latitude, N/S
2 Longitude, E/W
3 UTC of position
A=data valid
4 Status
V=data invalid
Positioning system Mode indicator:
A= Autonomous mode
D= Differential mode
Latitude and Longitude of E= Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
vessel position, time of M= Manual input mode
position fix and status. S= Simulator mode
N= Data not valid
5 Mode indicator
supplements the positioning system Status field,
the Status field shall be set to V= invalid for all
values of Indicator mode except for
A= Autonomous and D= Differential.
The positioning system Mode indicator and Status
field shall not be null fields.
1.2.10 HDT - Heading, true

$--HDT, x.x , T *hh<CR><LF>
1
Contents Data Note

Actual vessel heading in degrees
True produced by any device or 1 Heading, degrees true
system producing true heading.
1.2.11 MWV - Wind speed and angle

$--MWV, x.x , a , x.x , a , A *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

1 Wind angle, 0 to 359 (degrees)
R= relative
2 Reference
T= true
Water temperature
3 Wind speed
4 Wind speed units, K/M/N
5 Status A= data valid
AP1-9
1.2.12 MTW - Water temperature

$--MTW, x.x , C *hh<CR><LF>
1
Contents Data Note

Water temperature 1 Temperature, degrees C
1.2.13 RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information

$--RMB , A , x.x , a , c—c , c—c , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , x.x , x.x , x.x , A , a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Note

A= data valid
1 Data status
V= navigation receiver warning
If cross track error exceeds 9.99
2 Cross track error nautical miles
nautical miles, display 9.99.
3 Direction to steer L/R
4 Origin waypoint ID
5 Destination waypoint ID
Destination waypoint latitude,
6
Recommended minimum N/S
navigation information Destination waypoint longitude,
7
E/W
Range to destination, nautical If range to destination exceeds
Navigation data from 8
miles 999.9 nautical miles, display 999.9.
present position to a Bearing to destination, degrees
destination waypoint 9
true
provided by a Loran-C, Destination closing velocity,
GNSS, DECCA, 10
knots
navigation computer or A=arrival circle entered
other integrated navigation 11 Arrival status
or perpendicular passed
system. Positioning system Mode indicator:
This sentence always A= Autonomous mode
accompanies RMA or D= Differential mode
RMC sentences when a E= Estimated (dead reckoning)
destination is active when mode
provided by a Loran-C or M= Manual input mode
GNSS receiver, other S= Simulator mode
systems may transmit N= Data not valid
$--RMB without $--RMA The positioning system Mode
or $--RMC. 12 Mode indicator
indicator field supplements the
positioning system Status field, the
Status field shall be set to
V= invalid for all values of
Indicator mode except for
A=Autonomous and D=Differential.
The positioning system Mode
indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.
AP1-10
1.2.14 RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data

$--RMC , hhmmss.ss , A , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yy, a , x.x , x.x , xxxxxx , x.x , a , a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Note

1 UTC of position fix
Recommended minimum A=Data valid
specific GPS/TRANSIT 2 Status
V=Navigation receiver warning
data
3 Latitude, N/S
4 Longitude, E/W
Time, date, position,
5 Speed over ground, knots
course and speed data
provided by a GNSS 6 Course over ground, degrees true
navigation receiver. 7 Date: dd/mm/yy
This sentence is 8 Magnetic variation, degrees E/W
transmitted at intervals Positioning system Mode indicator:
not exceeding 2-seconds A = Autonomous mode
and is always D = Differential mode
accompanied by RMB E = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
when a destination M = Manual input mode
waypoint is active. RMC S = Simulator mode
and RMB are the N = Data not valid
recommended minimum 9 Mode indicator(see note) The Mode indicator field supplements
data to be provided by a the Status field. The Status field shall
GNSS receiver. All data be set to V= invalid for all values of
fields must be provided, Operating Mode except for
null fields uses only A= Autonomous and D= Differential.
when data is temporarily The positioning system Mode
unavailable. indicator and Status field shall not be
null fields.
1.2.15 RTE - Route

$--RTE , x.x , x.x , a , c—c , c—c , ..... , c—c *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

Total number of messages being
1
transmitted
2 Message number
c= complete route, all waypoints
Waypoint identifiers, listed
w= working route, first listed
in order with starting 3 Message mode:
waypoint is “FROM”, second is
waypoint first, for the
“TO” and remaining reset of route
identified route.
4 Route identifier
5 Waypoint identifier
6 Additional waypoint identifier
7 Waypoint “n” identifier
AP1-11
1.2.16 VBW - Dual ground/water speed

$--VBW , x.x , x.x , A , x.x , x.x , A , x.x , A , x.x , A *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents Data Note

1 Longitudial water speed, knots
2 Transverse water speed, knots
A= data valid
3 Status: water speed
V= data invalid
4 Longitudial ground speed, knots
5 Transverse ground speed, knots
Water referenced and ground A= data valid
6 Status: ground speed
referenced speed data. V= data invalid
7 Stern transverse water speed, knots
A= data valid
8 Status: stern water speed
V= data invalid
9 Stern transverse ground speed, knots
A= data valid
10 Status: stern ground speed
V= data invalid
1.2.17 VHW - Water speed and heading

$--VHW , x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , x.x , K *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
Contents Data Note

1 Heading, degrees true
The compass heading to which
2 Heading, degrees magnetic
the vessel point and the speed of
3 Speed, knots
the vessel relative to the water.
4 Speed, km/h
1.2.18 VDR - Set and drift

$--VDR , x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

1 Direction, degrees true
Set and drift 2 Direction, degrees magnetic
3 Current speed, knots
AP1-12
1.2.19 VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$--VTG , x.x , T, x.x , M , x.x , N, x.x , K , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

1 Course over ground, degrees true
2 Course over ground, degrees magnetic
3 Speed over ground, knots
4 Speed over ground, km/h
Positioning system Mode indicator:
A= Autonomous mode
The actual course and D= Differential mode
speed relative to the E= Estimated (dead reckoning)
ground. mode
5 Mode indicator M= Manual input mode
S= Simulator mode
N= Data not valid
The positioning system Mode
indicator field shall not be a null
field.
1.2.20 VWR - Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle

$--VWR , x.x , a , x.x , N , x.x , M , x.x , K *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
Contents Data Note

Measured wind angle relative to
1 the vessel, 0° to 180°, left/right
Relative (Apparent) wind speed L/R of vessel heading
and angle 2 Measured wind speed, knots
3 Wind speed, meters/second
4 Wind speed, Km/Hr
1.2.21 VWT - True wind speed and angle

$--VWT , x.x , a , x.x , N , x.x , M , x.x , K *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
Contents Data Note

Calculated wind angle relative to
1 the vessel, 0° to 180°, left/right
L/R of vessel heading
True wind speed and angle
2 Calculated wind speed, knots
3 Wind speed, meters/second
4 Wind speed, Km/Hr
AP1-13
1.2.22 WPL - Waypoint location

$--WPL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , c—c *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

latitude and longitude of
specified waypoint.
3 Waypoint identifier
1.2.23 ZDA - Time and date

$--ZDA , hhmmss.ss , xx , xx , xxxx , xx , xx *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contents Data Note

1 UTC
2 Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)
3 Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)
UTC, day month, year and
4 Year (UTC)
local time zone.
5 Local zone hours, 00 h to +-13 h
Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
6
as local hours
1.2.24 ALR - Set alarm state

$--ALR , hhmmss.ss , xxx , A , A , c—c *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

1 Time of alarm condition change, UTC
Local alarm condition and 2 Local alarm number (identifier)
status. This sentence is used to A= threshold exceeded
3 Alarm condition
report an alarm condition on a V= not exceeded
device and its current state of A= acknowledged
acknowledgment. 4 Alarm’s acknowledge state
V= unacknowledged
5 Alarm’s description text
AP1-14
1.2.25 VDM - UAIS VHF data-link message

!AIVDM , x , x , x , a , s—s , x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contents Data Note

VHF data-link message Total number of sentences needed
1
to transfer the message, 1 to 9
This sentence formatter is used to transfer 2 Message sentence number, 1 to 9
the entire contents of a received AIS Sequential message identifier, 0 to
message packet, as defined in ITU-R 3
9
M.1371 and as received on the VHF 4 AIS channel Number
Data Link (VDL), using the “six Bit” Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio
field type. The structure provider for the 5
message
transfer of long binary massages by
using multiple sentences. 6 Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
1.2.26 VDO - UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report

!AIVDO , x , x , x , x , s—s , x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contents Data Note

UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report Total number of sentences needed
1
to transfer the message, 1 to 9
This sentence formatter is used to transfer 2 Message sentence number, 1 to 9
the entire contents of an AIS unit’s 3 Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
broadcast message packet, as defined 4 AIS channel Number
in ITU-R M.1371 and as sent out by the Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio
AIS unit over the VHF Data Link (VDL), 5
message
using the “six Bit” field type.
The structure provider for the transfer of
long binary massages by using multiple 6 Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
sentences. The sentence uses the same
structure as the VDM sentence formatter.
AP1-15
Output sentences
1.2.27 AAM - Waypoint arrival alarm
$--AAM , A , A , x.x , N , c—c *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

A= arrival circle entered
1 Status
Status of arrival (entering V= arrival circle not entered
the arrival circle, or pass A= perpendicular passed at waypoint
2 Status
the perpendicular of the V= perpendicular passed not passed
course line) at waypoint 3 Arrival circle radius
c—c. 4 Units of radius, nautical miles
5 Waypoint ID
1.2.28 ABM - UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message

!--ABM, x , x , x , xxxxxxxxx , x, xx , s--s , x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Contents Data Note

Total number of sentences needed to
1
transfer the message, 1 to 9
2 Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3 Message sequence identifier, 0 to3
This sentence supports ITU-R
The MMSI of the destination AIS unit
M.1371 message 6 and 12 and 4
for the ITU-R M.1371 message 6 or 12
provides an external application
AIS channel for broadcast of the radio
with a means to exchange data 5
message
via an AIS transponder.
VDL message number (6 or 12), see
6
ITU-R M.1371
7 Encapsulated data
8 Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
AP1-16
1.2.29 BBM - UAIS Broadcast binary message

!--BBM, x , x , x , x, xx , s--s , x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

Total number of sentences needed to
1
transfer the message, 1 to 9
2 Message sentence number, 1 to 9
This sentence supports ITU-R
3 Message sequence identifier, 0 to3
M.1371 binary message 8, 14,
AIS channel for broadcast of the radio
19, 21 and provides an external 4
message
application with a means to
VDL message number (8, 14, 19, or 21),
broadcast data, as defined by 5
see ITU-R M.1371
the application only.
6 Binary data
7 Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
8
1.2.30 OSD - Own ship data

$--OSD, x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a, x.x , x.x , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Contents Data Note

1 Heading, degrees True
A= data valid
2 Heading Status
V= data invalid
3 Vessel course, degrees True
B= Bottom tracking log
M= Manually entry
4 Course reference, B/M/W/P/R W= Water referenced
R= Rader tracking (of fixed target)
Heading, course, speed, P= Positioning system ground reference
set and drift summary. 5 Vessel speed
B= Bottom tracking log
M= Manually entry
6 Speed reference, B/M/W/P/R W= Water referenced
R= Rader tracking (of fixed target)
P= Positioning system ground reference
7 Vessel set, degrees True Manual entry
8 Vessel drift (speed) Manual entry
9 Speed unit, K/N/S
AP1-17
1.2.31 RSD - Radar system data

$RARSD , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , a , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Contents Data Note

1 Origin 1 range, from own ship Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the
stated range and bearing from own ship
and provide for two independent sets of
variable range markers (VRM) and
2 Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 deg.
electronic bearing lines (EBL)
originating away from own ship
position.
3 Variable range maker 1(VRM1), range
4 Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0 deg.
5 Origin 2 range Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the
stated range and bearing from own ship
and provide for two independent sets of
variable range markers (VRM) and
6 Origin 2 bearing
electronic bearing lines (EBL)
Radar display
originating away from own ship
setting data.
position.
7 VRM2, range
8 EBL2, degrees
9 Cursor range, from own ship
Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from
10
0 deg.
11 Range scale in use
12 Range units, K/N/S
Display rotation:
C= course-up, course-over-ground up,
degrees true
13 Display rotation
H= head-up, ship’s heading
(center-line) 0 deg. up
N= north-up, true north is 0 deg. up
1.2.32 TLL - Target latitude and longitude

$--TLL , xx , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , c—c , hhmmss.ss , a , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

1 Target number 00 - 99
2 Target Latitude, N/S
3 Target Longitude, E/W
Target number, name, 4 Target name
position and time tag 5 UTC of data
for use in systems L= lost, tracked target has been lost
tracking targets. 6 Target status Q= query, target in the process of acquisition
T= tracking
R= Reference target,
7
null otherwise
AP1-18
1.2.33 TTM - Tracked target message

$--TTM , xx , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , c—c , a , a , hhmmss.ss , a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Note

1 Target number, 00 to 99
2 Target distance, from own ship
Bearing from own ship, degrees,
3
true/relative, T/R
4 Target speed
Target course, degrees true/relative,
5
T/R
6 Distance of closest-point-of -approach
7 Time to CPA, minutes, “-” increasing
Data associated with a 8 Speed/distance units, K/N/S
tracked target relative 9 Target name
to own ship’s position Target status:
L= lost, tracked target has been lost
10 Target status Q= query, target in the process of
acquisition
T= tracking
11 Reference target= R, null otherwise
12 UTC of data
A= automatic
13 Type of acquisition M= manual
R= reported
1.2.34 VSD - UAIS Voyage static data

$--VSD, x.x , x.x , x.x , c--c , hhmmss.ss, xx , xx , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Contents Data Note

1 Type of ship and cargo category, 0 to 255
Maximum preset static draught, 0 to 25.5
2
This sentence is used to enter meter
information about a ship’s 3 Person on-board, 0 to 8191
transit that remains relatively 4 Destination, 1-20 characters
static during the voyage. 5 Estimated UTC of arrival at destination
Estimated day of arrival at destination, 00
6
Point of this information are use to 31 (UTC)
in ITU-R- M.1371 message; 1, Estimated month of arrival at destination,
2, 3, 5, and 9 7
00 to 31 (UTC)
8 Navigational status, 0 to 5
9 Regional application flags
AP1-19
AP 1.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA(FAR)
ARPA(FAR) to ECDIS(FEA.)
AP 1.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA(FAR) to ECDIS(FEA.)
1.3.1 OSD - Own Ship Data

$RAOSD , x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , N *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Contents Data Reference

1 Heading, degrees true
2 Heading status, A= valid
3 Course
4 M= manually entered
W= water referenced
Course reference, B/M/W/R/P B= bottom tracking log
R= RADAR tracking of fixed target
- SPEED P= position system ground reference
- COURSE 5 Speed
- HEADING 6 M= manually entered
W= water referenced
Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P B= bottom tracking log
P= position system ground reference
7 Drift course, manually entered
8 Drift speed, manually entered
9 Speed units, N= knots
1.3.2 PAESP - Position Adjust

$PAESP , A , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Command

S= position adjust start
- POSITION ADJUST START 1 Command, S/E
E= position adjust end
- POSITION ADJUST END
2 Range
(RANGE, BEARING)
3 Bearing
AP1-20
1.3.3 TTM - Target

$RATTM , xx , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , c—c , a , a , hhmmss.ss , a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
*hh<CR><LF>
Contents Data Target status/Reference tgt./Acquisition

1 Target number, 00 to 99
2 Target distance from own ship
3 Bearing from own ship, True/Relative
4 Target speed
5 Target course, True/Relative
TARGET 6 CPA
- BEARING 7 TCPA, min., “-” increasing
- DIST 8 User data (e.g. name)
- SPD Q= query, target in the process of acquisition
- CRS T= tracking, perfect
- TCA 1= tracking, but 1 miss in last 10 scan
- CPA 2= tracking, but 2 misses in last 10 scan
- NUMBER 9 Target status
|
- STATUS 9= tracking, but 9 misses in last 10 scan
- REF_TARGET L= lost, target has been lost, 10 misses in last
- TIME 10 scan
- ACQ TYPE R= fix target, acquired by external computer
10 Reference tgt.= R
null= normal target
11 UTC time of data
A= automatic
12 Acquisition M= manual
R= reported
1.3.4 PFEC, RAssd - Antenna Location

$PFEC , RAssd , xxx , xx , xxx , xx , xxx , xx , x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Antenna Location

1 Length
2 Width
- VESSEL SIZE (LENGTH, WIDTH) 3 Antenna position, bow
- ANTENNA POSITION (BOW, PORT) 4 Antenna position, port
- CONNING POSITION (BOW, PORT) 5 Conning position, bow
- ANTENNA NUMBER 6 Conning position, port
7 Antenna number
AP1-21
1.3.5 RSD - Radar System Data

$RARSD , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , a , a *hh<CR>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Contents Data Disp. rota.

1 Origin1 range
- TRACK BALL 2 Origin1 bearing
BEARING 3 VRM1, range
RANGE 4 EBL1, degrees
- EBL 5 Origin2 range
BEARING 6 Origin2 bearing
- VRM 7 VRM2, range
RANGE 8 EBL2, degrees
- STATUS 9 Cursor range
DISPLAY, 10 Cursor bearing
TRANSMITTER, 11 Range scale
ANTENNA, 12 Range units
TRACKING, C= course up
ETC... 13 Disp. rota. H= head up
N= north up
AP1-22
AP1.4 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS(FEA)
ECDIS(FEA) to ARPA(FAR.)
ARPA(FAR.)
AP1.4 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS(FEA) to ARPA(FAR.)
1.4.1 GLL - Position

$IIGLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , hhmmss.ss , A *hh<CR>
1 2 3 4
Talker ID Data Disp. rota.

1 latitude, N/S
2 longitude, E/W
II or EC
3 UTC of position
4 status: A= valid
1.4.2 GGA - Position

$EIGGA ,, llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , x ,,,,,,, *hh<CR>
1 2 3
Talker ID Data quality=Pos quality indicator.

1 latitude, N/S
2 longitude, E/W
0: pos invalid
EI
1: pos valid
3 quality, 0..8
2: information from DGPS is included into position, pos valid
6: dead reckoning, pos valid
1.4.3 FUGLL - Future Position

$FUGLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , hhmmss.ss , A , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Talker ID/Contents Data Note

1 future latitude, N/S
Talker ID: fixed value FU
2 future longitude, E/W
3 UTC of future position
- FUTURE POSITION (LAT, LON)
4 status:A= valid
- FUTURE HEADING (COURSE)
5 future heading
AP1-23
ARPA(FAR.)
1.4.4 DTM - Datum

$ECDTM , aaa , xx.xxx , a , xx.xxx , a , xxxx.x , aaa *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Talker ID Data Note

1 local datum
2 latitude offset, N/S
EI or EC 3 longitude offset, E/W
4 altitude offset
5 reference datum e.g.) WGS84
1.4.5 OSD - Own Ship Data

$ECOSD , x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , N , x.x , A *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Talker ID/Contents Data Reference

1 heading, degrees true
2 heading status, A= valid
3 course
M= manually entered
W= water referenced
Talker ID: EC 4 course reference, B/M/W/R/P B= bottom tracking log
- SPEED P= position system ground reference
- COURSE
5 speed
- HEADING
M= manually entered
- HEADING
W= water referenced
- ERROR
6 speed reference, B/M/W/R/P B= bottom tracking log
(ANGLE)
- SIMULATION
P= position system ground reference
(VALID)
7 drift course (NOT USED)
8 drift speed (NOT USED)
9 speed units,N= knots
10 heading error
11 simulation: A = valid
1.4.6 ZDA - UTC Time

$ECZDA , hhmmss.ss , dd , mm , yyyy , hhh , mm *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4

Talker ID: EI or EC 1 UTC time
2 UTC date
- UTC TIME 3 local hours difference
- LOCAL TIME DIFFENRENCE 4 local minutes difference
AP1-24
ARPA(FAR.)
1.4.7 DPT - Depth

$IIDPT , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2

Talker ID: EI, II or EC 1 depth, meters
- DEPTH (DEPTH) 2 offset from transducer (NOT USED)
1.4.8 MWV - Wind

$IIMWV , x.x , T , x.x , N , A *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5

1 wind angle, 0 to 360 degrees
Talker ID: EI, II or EC
2 reference, T= true
3 wind speed
- WIND
4 wind speed units, N= knots
(TRUE SPEED, TRUE COURSE)
5 status: A= valid
1.4.9 PAESP - Position Adjust Acknowledge

$PAESP , A , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

1 command, A= acknowledge
- POSITION ADJUST
2 range
ACKNOWLEDGE
3 bearing
1.4.10 PAESC - Curved EBL

$PAESC , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , L *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Mode

1 latitude, N/S
- CURVED EBL
2 longitude, E/W
LAT
3 course
LON
4 radius [0.0 .. 2.0]
CRS
RAD 5 distance
DIST 6 next course
NEXT CRS L= LOCKED (curved ebl starts from given lat/lon position)
LOCKED M= MOVING
7 mode, L/M/N
VALID (curved ebl starts from own ship and own ship pushes it)
N= NO DATA (curved ebl is not defined)
AP1-25
ARPA(FAR.)
1.4.11 PAESF - Fix Target Acquire/Cancel

$PAESF , A , x , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
Contents Data Note

A= TARGET ACQUIRE
- FIX TARGET ACQUIRE 1 command type, A/C
C= TARGET CANCEL
(LAT, LON, NUMBER)
2 target number, 1 to 8
- FIX TARGET CANCEL
3 latitude, N/S
(NUMBER)
4 longitude, E/W
1.4.12 PLSPL - Chart Segment

$PLSPL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , a , xxx , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

1 start latitude, N/S
2 start longitude., E/W
3 end latitude, N/S
- CHART SEGMENT 4 end long., E/W
START LAT C= continuous
START LON O= dotted
END LAT 5 linetype D= dashed
END LON T= dot - dashed
LINETYPE E= erase
COLOR 1 -- 998: legal lines
NUMBER 6 number
999: erase all
B= blue G= green R= red
7 color C= cyan M= magenta
Y= yellow W= white L= black
1.4.13 PLSPS - Chart Symbol

$PLSPS , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , xxx , c—c , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

1 latitude, N/S
2 longitude, E/W
- CHART SYMBOL 1..998 legal symbols
3 number
LAT 999 erase all
LON ASCII string, 1 to 8 characters
LABE 4 label
legal ASCII values from hexadecimal 20h to 7Fh
NUMBER B= blue G= green R= red C= cyan
5 color M= magenta Y= yellow W= white L= black
E= erase
AP1-26
ARPA(FAR.)
1.4.14 PAESW - Waypoint List

$PAESW , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , c—c , x , x.x , x.x , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

1 latitude, N/S
2 longitude, E/W
- WAYPOINT LIST 3 waypoint identifier ASCII string, 1 to 8 characters
ARRAY OF 4 number, 1 to 6
[LAT, LON, RADIUS, 5 radius, 0.1 to 2.0
CHANNEL, NUMBER, 6 channel
MODE] A= valid
7 mode, C/L/E V= no waypoint
L= valid and last waypoint
1.4.15 PAESN - Notebook

$PAESN , A , c—c *hh<CR><LF>
1 2
Contents Data Note

NOTEBOOK 1 status: A= valid
(TEXT, VALID) 2 text string, 0 to 71 chars
AP1-27
Appendix 2) Specifications
1. ANTENNA RADIATORS
1. Type Slotted waveguide array
2. Beam width and sidelobe attenuation
X-band S-band
Radiator type
XN12AF XN20AF XN24AF SN30AF SN36AF
Length 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 10 ft 12 ft
Beam width(H) 1.8° 1.23° 0.95° 2.3° 1.8°
Beam width(V) 20° 20° 20° 25° 25°
Sidelobe within ±10° -24 dB -28dB -28 dB -24 dB -24 dB
Sidelobe outside ±10° -30 dB -32 dB -32 dB -30 dB -30 dB
3. Polarization Horizontal
4. Rotation FAR-2117/2127/2827: 24 rpm or 42 rpm
FAR-2137S/2837S: 21/26 rpm or 45 rpm
FAR-2827W: 24 rpm
FAR-2837SW: 21/26 rpm
2. RF TRANSCEIVER
1. Frequency X-band: 9410 MHz ±30 MHz, S-band: 3050 MHz ±30 MHz
2. Output power FAR-2117/2817: 12 kW FAR-2127/2827/2827W: 25 kW
FAR-2137S/2837S/2837SW: 30 kW
Unwanted emissions comply with ITU-R RR.
3. Pulselength, PL, PRF and range
Pulselength S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L
PL (µs) 0.07 0.15 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.2
PRF (Hz) 3000* 3000* 1500 1000 1000 600**
0.125, 6, 12, 24,
Range scale 0.5, 0.75, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 3, 6, 12,
0.25, 0.5, 48, 96,
(nm) 1.5, 3 3, 6 24 24
0.75, 1.5 120#
*: 2200 Hz with ARPA on, 32 nm range
**: 450 Hz on 96 and 120 nm ranges #: Non-IMO type only
4. IF 60 MHz
5. Noise figure 6 dB (typical)
6. Duplexer Ferrite circulator with diode limiter for
FAR-2117/2127/2137S/2817/2827/2837S
Ferrite circulator with TR limiter for FAR-2827W/2837SW
AP2-1
3. DISPLAY UNIT
1. Screen Yellow or green echoes in 32 levels. Rasterscan
non-interlace at 48.3kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical. Non-IMO
type has yellow or green monochrome plus 3-color display
according to echo strengths.
FAR-21x7 series FAR-28x7 series

20.1-inch color LCD, 23.1-inch color LCD,
Size, model
MU-201CR MU-231CR
Display area (mm) 399.36 x 319.49 470.4 x 352.8
Resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels 1280 x 1024 pixels
Effective radar diameter 308 mm 340 mm
2. Minimum range and

range discrimination 35 m
3. Range scales (nm), 0.125 (.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75 (0.25), 1 (0.25)*, 1.5
(0.25),
ring interval 3 (0.5), 4 (1)*, 6 (1), 8 (2)*, 12 (2), 16 (4)*, 24 (4), 32 (8)*, 48
(8), 96 (16), 120 (20)* *: Non-IMO type only
4. Range accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 30 m,
whichever is the greater
5. Bearing discrimination Better than 2.5°
6. Bearing accuracy ±1°
7. Presentation mode Head-up, Head-up TB, North-up, Course-up, True Motion
sea or ground stabilization
8. Plotting facilities Auto or Manual acquisition: 100 targets in 0.1-32 nm
(ARPA or ATA) Auto tracking on all acquired targets
9. Radar map Nav lines, coastlines, buoys, etc. produced by operator. 3000
pts in radar mode, 6000 pts on IC card in chart mode
10. Guard zone Two GZ anywhere
11. Parallel index line Choice of 2, 4 or 6 lines
12. AIS IMO SN Circ.217, IEC 60936-5
13. Chart cards FURUNO and NAVIONICS
4. INTERFACE
1. IEC 61162-1 Ed. 2 RSD, TTM, AIS related data, etc.
2. Compass Built-in interface (option) for sync signal (20-135 V, 50-400
Hz), or stepper signal (20-135 VDC), any polarity, for
gyrocompass, GPS compass SC-60/120 by IEC 61162-2
3. Speed log NMEA format data
4. Others Echo sounder, GPS navigator, water temperature, etc.
AP2-2
5. POWER SUPPLY
1. Display unit 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz
FAR-21x7: 24 VDC, 2.3 A; 100-230 VAC, 0.7A (100 V)
FAR-28x7: 24 VDC, 3.2 A; 100-230 VAC, 0.9 A (100 V)
440 VAC, 1 ø, 50/60 Hz with optional transformer RU-1803
2. Processor unit FAR-2117/2817/2117-BB:
1 2 1 2
24VDC: 7.6A /8.5A , 100-115 VAC: 2.6A /3.0A ,
1 2
220-230 VAC: 1.6A /1.7A
FAR-2127/2827/2127-BB:
1 2 1 2
24 VDC: 8.8A /9.7A , 100-115 VAC: 3.0A /3.4A ,
1 2
220-230 VAC: 1.8A /1.9A
1: 2:
24 rpm, 42 rpm
3. Antenna unit (S-band) 200/220/380/440 VAC 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 50 or 60 Hz
Antenna voltage input (100 kt)

- 200 VAC, - 380 VAC,
ø3, 50 Hz, - 220 VAC, - 220 VAC, - 220 VAC,
Model ø3, 50 Hz,
ø3, 50 Hz, ø3, 60 Hz ø3, 60 Hz
- 220 VAC, - 440 VAC,
(HSC) (HSC) (HSC)
ø3, 60 Hz ø3, 60 Hz
FAR-2137S(BB) 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
FAR-2837S 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
FAR-2837SW 3.0 A 1.5 A - - -
FAR-2137SW 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7A
4. Console 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 440 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz with
optional transformer RU-1803
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Ambient temperature (Complies with IEC 60945)
Indoor units -15°C to +55°C
Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage +70°C)
2. Relative humidity 95% at 40°C
3. Waterproofing Antenna unit: IPX6 (IEC 60529)
Indoor units: IPX0 (IEC 60529)
4. EMC Full compliance with IEC 60945 Ed. 4
(to 2 GHz cabinet radiation)
AP2-3
7. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SWITCHING HUB HUB-100
1. Access Format CSMA/CD
2. Switching Format Store and Forward
3. Transmission Speed Half-duplex: 10Mbps/100Mbps
Full-duplex: 20Mbps/200Mbps
4. Necessary Cabling 10BASE-T: Category 3 or higher STP cable
100 BASE-TX: Category 5 or higher STP cable
5. Max. Cable Length 100 m
6. Ports 8 ports
- All ports auto-MDIX compliant (straight or cross cable,
automatic recognition)
- All ports EMC compliant (STP cable port)
- All ports equipped with 3 LED injectors
(Link/Act, Full-duplex/Collision, 100Mbps/10Mbps)
7. Buffer Memory SRAM buffer
8. MAC Address Table 1024
9. Dimensions and Mass
Dimensions 47(H)x270(W)x1458(D) (mm) includes fixing screws
Mass Less than 1.6 kg
10. Environmental Conditions
Ambient Temperature -15 to +55°C
Relative Humidity 95% (at 40°C)
EMC IEC 60945
Waterproofing IPX0 (IEC 60529)
11.Power and Power Consumption
Power 100-230 VAC
Power Consumption 100mA/100 VAC
12. Coating and Color N3.0
Precautions for high speed targets

Assume your ship is making 40 kt and a target ship is approaching at 49 kt right toward you. Then
the relative speed is 80 kt. With the antenna rotating at 42 rpm, the target blip appears jumping to a
new location 59 m nearer. This jump corresponds to 19 mm on the display using the 0.25 nm range
scale. On such a short range you may lose the track of a target in the midst of sea clutter, random
noise or other targets. Use one step larger range scale.
ARPA can fail to track a target when the relative speed exceeds 100 kt.
AP2-4
(組)ｱﾝﾃﾅ部
ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
XN12AF
(008-485-250)
XN20AF
(008-485-260)
XN24AF
(008-485-270)
RSB-096/097-078 RF部 ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA

RF MODULE WASHER HEAD SCREW *A*
RTR-078 M4X15 (組)回転結合器
(008-535-440) ROTARY JOINT ASSEMBLY
RSB-096/097-079 RF部 RSB-096/097
RF MODULE (008-487-200)
RTR-079
(008-535-450)
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
CABLE CLAMP
CKS-10-L
-6ｶｸｾﾑｽA
(000-106-350)
HEX.WASHER HEAD BOLT *A*
M6X12 SS41 虹
標準 (組)ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ
SCANNER COVER ASSEMBLY RSB-096 (組)駆動部
RSB-096/097 DRIVING GEAR ASSY
(008-487-180) RSB-096
(008-535-380)
RSB-097 (組)駆動部
DRIVING GEAR ASSY
RSB-097
(008-535-400)
SM-XHｺﾈｸﾀ
SM-XH CONNECTOR
ｶﾊﾞｰﾖｳﾊﾟｯｷﾝ
03-2130(P2-3P)
PACKING
03-001-3263
(300-132-631)
(組)ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ
SCANNER COVER ASSEMBLY
RSB-096/097
(008-487-180)
ｶﾊﾞｰﾖｳﾊﾟｯｷﾝ
PACKING
03-001-3263
(300-132-631)
Ａ
PM付き (組)ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰPM
SCANNER COVER WITH PM31/ANT (組)ｱﾝﾃﾅ取付台
PM-31 RADIATOR BRACKET WITH BODY
(008-536-340) RSB-096/097 6ｶｸﾀｯﾋﾟﾝ
(008-537-160) HEX. TAPPING SCREW
4X8 SUSﾌﾗﾝｼﾞﾂｷ
Ａ矢視図ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
CABLE ASSEMBLY
SMAPS/PL-MSF358*L150
(000-147-436)
(組)SM-XHｺﾈｸﾀ
SM-XH CONNECTOR
03-2109(R6-6P)
(008-534-850)
AP P R OV E D T IT LE
F AR 2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-B B /2127-B B
D - 1
C HE C K E D R S B -096/097
2003.11.17
DR AWN DWG . NO. C 3519-E 02-A
T.Harazuka
ｺﾈｸﾀｸﾐﾋﾝ (組)MIC MDｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ組立品 D - 2
CONNECTOR ASSY
L-110 RTR-078 (P)MD ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB (組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD XH CONNECTOR
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
03P9244 A 03-2105(12-12P)
MIC (008-517-590) M3X8
(008-534-810) ﾀﾞｲｵｰﾄﾞﾘﾐｯﾀ
RTR-078 RU-9603 RTR-079 (P)MD DIODE LIMITER
(組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ (000-147-158) RTR-078 (P)PWR (P)RFC
XH CONNECTOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD RU-9099
RTR-079 RU-9601 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
03-2102(7P) 03P9244 B (000-126-369)
(000-147-156) 03P9348 A 03P9346
(008-517-600)
(008-536-280) (008-536-310)
ｶﾞｲﾄﾞｶﾅｸﾞ
RTR-079 (P)PWR J3ﾊﾘﾏｰｸ
W.G. GUIDE
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD J3 LABEL
03-001-5303
03P9348 B 03-154-5612
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA (008-536-290) (100-312-800)
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* ｻｰｷｭﾚｰﾀ
M4X12 CIRCULATOR
(組)ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽ
BL-SMｺﾈｸﾀ RC-3686
AMP CASE ASSEMBLY
BL-SM CONNECTOR (000-106-850)
RTR-078/079
03-2129(ﾌｧﾝ-R2P)
(008-536-690)
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB ｽｸｳｪｱﾌﾞｯｼｭ
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* BUSH RTR-079のみ
M3X8 SB-1909-F ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ組配品
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｱﾝﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ RTR-078 ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ

MINI CLAMP IF AMP COVER SHIELD CASE COVER
UAMS-03-0 03-154-5603 ｹｲｺｸﾊﾘﾏｰｸ 03-002-5303
ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ(25KW) CAUTION STICKER (300-253-030)
(組)BL-XHｺﾈｸﾀ SHIELD COVER (25KW) 14-055-4202 RTR-079 ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ(25KW)
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB FAN MOTOR 03-144-5109
03-2120(ﾌｧﾝ-2P) (100-245-221) 組配品
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* (100-266-810)
M3X8 (008-534-780)
(組)PHｺﾈｸﾀ
(組)PHｺﾈｸﾀ PH CONNECTOR RTR-078 ﾊﾟﾙｽﾄﾗﾝｽ
PH CONNECTOR PULSE TRANSFORMER
03-2106(14-14P) RT-9025
03-2107(12-12P) (000-123-823)
(P)IF ﾊﾟﾙｽﾄﾗﾝｽ配線品
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA RTR-079 ﾊﾟﾙｽﾄﾗﾝｽ
03P9335A PULSE TRANSFORMER
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* RT-9023
M4X12 (008-537-420) M4X15
(組)ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽ (000-123-394)
FETｵｻｴｲﾀｷﾝｿﾞｸｻﾝｶﾋﾏｸ配線品
ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽ AMP CASE ASSEMBLY SW
(組)MIC FET SUPPORTING PLATE
IF AMP CASE
MIC WITH XH CONNECTOR RTR-078/079 03-144-5107 蝶ﾅｯﾄ M4 PW
RTR-078/079 03-154-5602 (008-536-690) M4
M4
(008-535-540) (100-304-413) MDｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ組立品 N RTR-078 ﾏｸﾞﾈﾄﾛﾝ
M4 MAGNETRON
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA MAF1425B
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* (000-146-872)
回転板駆動ｷﾞﾔ M4X10 RTR-079 ﾏｸﾞﾈﾄﾛﾝ
DRIVE GEAR WITH TIMING DISK (組)VH-ELｺﾈｸﾀ MAGNETRON
03-001-3233-3/3232-5 VH-EL CONNECTOR MG5436
(300-132-334) 03-2103(2-R2P) (000-140-762)
ﾘｰﾄﾞSW取付板組立品 (008-534-790)
(P)BP
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (組)NH-XHｺﾈｸﾀ
03P9347 NH-XH CONNECTOR ｿﾄﾊTW +ﾅﾍﾞ
(008-536-250) 03-2104(13-13P) EXTERNAL TOOTH LOCK WASHER PAN HEAD SCREW (組)RF部 RTR-078/079
(008-534-800) M4 M4X20
RSB-096 ﾓｰﾀ
SCANNER MOTOR (24RPM)
D8G-51630W DC24V AP P R OV E D T IT LE
(000-631-715) (P)RFTB F AR 2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-B B /2127-B B
RSB-097 ﾓｰﾀ PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
03P9349A
C HE C K E D R S B -096/097,R T R -078/079
SCANNER MOTOR (42RPM)
D8G-571 (008-539-620) 2003.11.17
(000-136-566) DR AWN
T .Harazuka
DWG . NO. C 3519-E 03-A
(組)駆動部 RSB-096/097
D - 3
ｱﾝﾃﾅ ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

XN20AF
(008-485-260)
XN24AF
(008-485-270)
標準ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ
NORMAL SCANNER COVER ASSEMBLY
RSB-0074/75/92/96/97 ｶﾞｲﾄﾞｶﾅｸﾞ
(008-487-180) W.G. GUIDE ﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞﾘｯﾄﾞｼﾒﾂｹｸﾞﾗﾝﾄﾞｼﾒﾂｹｸﾞﾗﾝﾄﾞ
03-001-5303 LID GLAND GLAND
P.MONITOR ｽｷﾔﾅｶﾊﾞｰPM (300-153-032) -6ｶｸｾﾑｽB ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB JIS F8801 A20ﾖｳｼﾝﾁｭｳ JIS F8801 20ﾖｳｼﾝﾁｭｳ JIS F8801 30ﾖｳｼﾝﾁｭｳ
SCANNER COVER WITH PM31/ANT HEX. WASHER HEAD BOLT (B) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* (000-870-242) (000-870-194) (000-801-588)
PM-31 ﾄﾞｳﾊｶﾝ M4X20 SUS304 M4X8
(008-536-340) -6ｶｸｾﾑｽB WAVEGUIDE (000-882-041) (000-881-445)
03-023-3002 ｸﾞﾗﾝﾄﾞﾖｳｻﾞｶﾞﾈ
HEX. WASHER HEAD BOLT (B)
(100-112-981) ﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞﾌﾟﾚｰﾄ WASHER
M4X20 SUS304
SEALING PLATE JIS F8801 20C ｼﾝﾁｭｳ
(000-882-041)
03-023-3006 (000-870-211)
ﾂﾘｶﾅｸﾞ WGﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ(1) (100-120-881) ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA VAｺﾞﾑﾊﾟｯｷﾝﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞﾘｯﾄﾞ
HOOK ｶﾊﾞｰﾖｳﾊﾟｯｷﾝ W.G.FIXING PLATE(1) WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* RUBBER PACKING LID
03-001-3264-0 PACKING 03-023-3003 M4X15 VA-20 JIS F8801 A30 ｼﾝﾁｭｳ
03-001-3263 (100-112-991) (000-881-147) (000-870-244)
(000-801-402)
(300-132-631) Oﾘﾝｸﾞ
ｸﾞﾗﾝﾄﾞﾖｳｻﾞｶﾞﾈ
Eｺｰﾅ導波管 O-RING
ﾀｲ WASHER
ｶﾊﾞ-ﾖｳﾎﾞﾙﾄ E-CORNER WAVEGUIDE AS568-128 1115-70
CABLE GLAND BODY JIS F8801 A30B ｼﾝﾁｭｳ
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT 03-023-3001 (000-851-842)
JIS F8801 20ﾖｳｼﾝﾁｭｳ (000-870-204)
03-001-3262-2 (100-112-970)
(300-132-622) ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ (000-870-187)
WGﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ(2) WIRE CLIP VAｺﾞﾑﾊﾟｯｷﾝ
W.G.FIXING PLATE(2) NO.98-01 RUBBER PACKING
ﾀｲ
03-023-3004 (000-515-851) VA-30
ｽｷﾔﾅｶﾊﾞ- CABLE GLAND BODY
(100-113-001) (000-801-589)
SCANNER COVER (組)回転結合器 JIS F8801 A30 ｼﾝﾁｭｳ
03-001-3261 ROTARY JOINT ASSEMBLY (000-801-587)
-6ｶｸｾﾑｽB
RSB-103 ｶｲﾃﾝﾊﾞﾝ.ｸﾄﾞｳｷﾞﾔ
HEX. WASHER HEAD BOLT *B*
ﾛﾂｶ-ﾁｴ-ﾝ (008-487-200) ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA DRIVE GEAR WITH TIMING DISK
M4X12 SUS304
CHAIN WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* 03-001-3233/3232
(000-882-040)
ST-16 ｽﾃﾝ 13ﾘﾝｸ M4X8 (300-132-334)
(000-881-144)
-6ｶｸｾﾑｽB ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB SW-XHｺﾈｸﾀ -6ｶｸｾﾑｽA
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* SW-XH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY HEX.WASHER HEAD BOLT *A* BPﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
M8X20 SUS304 M3X15 03-2119(ﾘｰﾄﾞｽｲｯﾁ-2P) M6X12 SS41 虹 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
(000-862-147) (000-881-407) (008-534-720) (000-881-986) 03P9347
(008-536-250)
ﾘｰﾄﾞSWﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
-6ｶｸｾﾑｽB 03-154-3311-2
ｽﾗｲﾄﾞﾚｰﾙ NUT
(100-304-332) (J902)XHｺﾈｸﾀ
03-154-3345 HEX. WASHER HEAD BOLT M6 SUS304
03-2099(5-5P)
(100-308-181) M6X18 SUS304 FW ﾓ-ﾀﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀｶﾞｲﾄﾞ RFTBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
(008-534-730)
(000-800-461) M6 SUS304 MOTOR FIXING PLATE GUIDE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
SW 03-001-3291-0 03P9349A
M6 SUS304 (300-132-910) (008-539-620)
ｱﾝﾃﾅSWﾊﾘﾏｰｸ ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
ANTENNA SW LABEL WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
03-145-3111 M3X8
(100-270-041) (000-881-404) ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ
ﾓｰﾀｰﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
03-154-3321 SCANNER COVER ASSEMBLY
(100-304-341) ﾄﾞｳｼﾞｸｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ RSB-0074/75/92/96/97
COAX CLAMP
03-154-3322 (008-487-180)
ﾛｯｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ
(100-304-350)
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT ｱﾝﾃﾅﾄﾘﾂｹﾀﾞｲ ANTENNA BRACKET ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ
M6X40 SUS304
標準 RSB-103-N ﾓ-ﾀ TERMINAL BOARD
(000-862-178)
NORMAL (008-541-680) SCANNER MOTOR (24RPM) FP439AS
D8G-516 30W DC24V (000-147-217)
氷結防止 RSB-103-I
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) (000-631-715)
DE-ICER (008-541-690) ｺﾈｸﾀ(231)
CABLE ASSEMBLY
SMAPS/PL-MSF358*L150 MLP-02P CONNECTOR
231-311/026-FUR
(000-149-689)
ｽｷﾔﾅｰｶﾊﾞｰPM ｽｷｬﾅｰSW
03-154-3401 ｺﾈｸﾀ(231)
SCANNER SW CONNECTOR
RSB-096/97-N/I-A/103 ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB M-MLｺﾈｸﾀ 231-314/026-FUR
(008-539-150) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* 03-2010 (000-147-415)
(組)SM-XHｺﾈｸﾀ
M4X10 (008-504-820)
SM-XH CONNECTOR
(000-881-446)
03-2109(R6-6P)
ﾓｰﾀｰｶﾊﾞｰ 6ｶｸﾀｯﾋﾟﾝﾈｼﾞ
ｽｷｬﾅｰSWﾌﾀ
ﾎﾞｰﾙﾁｪｰﾝ MOTOR END COVER HEX. TAPPING SCREW
SCANNER SW COVER
SWITCH COVER CHAIN 03-001-3236 4X8 SUS304 ﾌﾗﾝｼﾞﾂｷ
03-154-3832
TM-14-2 L=150 (300-132-360) (000-867-561)
SWﾌﾀﾊﾟｯｷﾝ
SW GASKET
03-154-3833 SWﾒｲﾊﾞﾝ
SW NAMEPLATE
PERFORMANCE MONITOR MODULE 03-006-3217
PM-31 ｽｷｬﾅｰSWﾍﾞｰｽ MODEL FAR-2827W
(008-536-330) SCANNER SW BASE
03-154-3831
ｽｲｯﾁ(ﾄｸﾞﾙ) APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RSB-103 空中線部

TOGGLE SWITCH
ATK21-W
(000-479-243)
7 Feb.2005 7 Feb.2005 7 Feb.2005 SCANNER UNIT
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida T.Harazuka DWG.NO. C3527-E02-A
D - 4
ｱﾝﾃﾅ ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSEMBLY ｱﾝﾃﾅｶﾞｲﾄﾞ

ANTENNA GUIDE
SN30AF 6ｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ
(008-505-920) 03-163-3152
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT
(100-315-680)
M10X25 SUS316L
SN36AF (000-150-828) ｱﾝﾃﾅｱﾝｸﾞﾙ
(008-505-910) ANTENNA ANGLE BRACKET
SPRING WASHER 03-163-3151
M10 SUS316L (100-315-672)
(000-147-303)
FLAT WASHER
M10 SUS316L
(000-147-299)
ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ 6ｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ
SCANNER COVER HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT
RSB-098-102-080/104/5 M10X25 SUS316L
(008-538-710)
(000-150-828)
ｶﾊﾞｰﾖｳﾎﾞﾙﾄｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT SCANNER COVER
03-163-3161 ｶｲﾃﾝｹﾂｺﾞｳｷ
03-001-3262 ROTARY JOINT ASSEMBLY
ｱﾝﾃﾅｶﾞｲﾄﾞ
ﾎﾞﾙﾄﾖｳﾊﾟｯｷﾝ ANTENNA GUIDE RSB-098∼102-080
BOLT GASKET (008-539-870)
03-163-3152
03-163-3165 (100-315-680)
落下防止金具
SAFETY STRAP
03-163-3163
MSSﾎｼﾞｮｲﾀ 6ｶｸｱﾅﾂｷﾎﾞﾙﾄ
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB MSS SUPPORTING PLATE SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* 03-163-3562 M6X16 SUS304 ｺﾃｲｶﾅｸﾞ
M3X8 (100-319-740) ｶｲﾃﾝｹﾂｺﾞｳｷ
波形ｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞﾋﾟﾝ PWRFCｶﾅｸﾞ1(D) (000-809-035) DRIVE GEAR RETAINER
(000-881-404) PWRFC PLATE 1 (D) ROTARY JOINT ASSEMBLY
SPRING PIN 03-015-3228
4X28 SUS 03-163-5515 (100-090-680)
(100-317-670) SPRING WASHER
MSSﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ M6 SUS304
MSS MOUNTING PLATE ｸﾄﾞｳｷﾞﾔ
(000-864-260)
03-163-3561 DRIVE GEAR
ｽｷｬﾅﾊﾟｯｷﾝ (100-315-951) ｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀｰ RSB-104 ｷﾞﾔｰﾄﾞﾓｰﾀ MOTOR
03-163-3301
SCANNER GASKET ADAPTOR (100-315-750) RM7398
03-163-3162 03-012-5402 (000-113-840-05)
(301-254-020) RSB-105 ｷﾞﾔｰﾄﾞﾓｰﾀ MOTOR
ｲﾁｷﾞﾒﾎﾞﾙﾄ
POSITIONING BOLT RM7435
ﾍﾝｶﾝｷ 03-015-3231 (000-114-399-05)
RSB098-102-080/104/5 (100-090-700)
TRDﾊﾘﾏｰｸ
TRD LABEL
RSB-104 (P)MSS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 03-163-5516
MSS7497 (100-320-170) ﾛｯｷﾝｸﾞｴｯｼﾞｻﾄﾞﾙﾓｰﾀｰﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
(008-513-010) LOCKING EDGE SADDLE 標準ｱﾝﾃﾅﾄﾘﾂｹﾀﾞｲ RADIATOR BRACKET MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE
ｹｲｺｸﾊﾘﾏｰｸ 03-163-3311
WARNING LABEL LES-1017 NORMAL RSB-104/105-N
RSB-105 (P)MSS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (100-315-761)
03-160-1042 (000-150-111) (008-543-500)
MSS7497A
(008-513-020) (100-302-750) 氷結防止ｱﾝﾃﾅﾄﾘﾂｹﾀﾞｲ RADIATOR BLACKET
ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ DE-ICER RSB-104/105-I
SW
TERMINAL BOARD (008-544-900)
M10 SUS304
LC-02-30T6 3P FW (000-864-261)
(000-116-599) M12 SUS304 ｲﾁｷﾞﾒﾋﾟﾝ NUT
ｶｰﾘｰﾛｯｸ (000-864-132) POSITIONING PIN(M)
M10 SUS304
CABLE CLAMP SW 03-163-3115 (000-863-930)
KLBS-350-16-01A M12 SUS304 (100-315-610)
() (000-864-263)
TRDｲﾀ2 6ｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ 6ｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ

(PM無しのとき) PMﾌﾞﾊﾟﾂｷﾝ PLATE 2 FOR TR-DOWN TYPE HEXAGOANL BOLT HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT
03-163-5512 M12X20 SUS304
03-163-3106 M10X35 SUS304
(100-317-641) (000-868-770)
(100-319-681) ｽﾊﾟｲﾗﾙﾁｭｰﾌﾞ (000-862-175)
SPP-06A
(PM無しのとき) PMﾌﾞﾌﾀ 6ｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ
03-163-3105 HEXAGONAL BOLT
(100-315-561) M6X40 SUS (P)RFTB
(000-862-178) ｴﾝﾊﾞﾝ PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
SLOTTED DISK 03P9349A
03-163-3211 (008-539-620)
(100-316-292)
TBﾎｼﾞｮｲﾀﾄﾞｳｼﾞｸｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
+ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB ﾏｸﾞﾈｯﾄｶﾅｸﾞ
PM-Aﾊﾟｯｷﾝ MAGNET FIXTURE TB SUPPORTING PLATE COAX CLAMP
FIXING SCREW
PM-A GASKET 03-163-3212 03-163-3523 03-154-3322
M6X16 SUS
(000-800-420) 03-163-3734 (100-315-741) (100-315-832) (100-304-350)
(100-316-080)
PM-ANT ｺﾈｸﾀ(232)
PERFORMANCE MONITOR ANTENA ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
ｽｲｯﾁ(ﾄｸﾞﾙ) PM-51 FW CONNECTOR ｽｷｬﾅｶﾊﾞｰ
TOGGLE SWITCH -6ｶｸｾﾑｽB CABLE CLIP
(008-538-690) M6 SUS304 232-314/026-FUR SCANNER COVER
HEX.WASHER HEAD BOLT *B* No.1197
S-31 NUT (000-864-129) ﾏｸﾞﾈｯﾄ (000-149-670) RSB-098-102-080/104/5
(000-112-268) M6X12 SUS304 (000-515-870)
M6 SUS304 MAGNET (008-538-710)
(000-882-060) ｺﾈｸﾀ(232)
ｽｷｬﾅSWﾊﾟｯｷﾝ (000-863-109) 6GAL30709X +ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB
SCANNER SW GASKET (000-141-841) CONNECTOR XHｺﾈｸﾀ FIXING SCREW
WING NUT SW
03-163-3112 232-311/026-FUR 03-2144(6-6P) M6X16 SUS304
M6 SUS304 M6 SUS304
(100-315-580) (000-809-036) (000-864-260) (000-149-632) (008-538-390) (000-800-420)
ｽｷｬﾅSWｶﾅｸﾞｼｬｽｲﾊﾞﾝ
SCANNER SW FIXTURE SEALING PLATE PMﾎﾝﾀｲ
03-163-3111 03-163-3104 PERFORMANE MONITOR MODULE
(100-315-570) (100-315-551) TRDﾊﾘﾏｰｸ PM-51
ｽｷｬﾅSWｲﾀﾄﾞｳﾊｶﾝ TRD LABEL
TRDｶﾅｸﾞ2 (008-538-700)
SCANNER SW PLATE WAVEGUIDE 03-163-5516
03-016-3202 FIXTURE 2 FOR TR-DOWN TYPE (100-320-170) TBﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
03-163-3116 03-163-5514
(100-319-700) (100-091-170) (P)BP TB MOUNTING PLATE
(100-317-660) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 03-163-3524
FW
ｽｷｬﾅSWﾌﾀ TRDｶﾅｸﾞ1 03P9347 (100-315-840)
SCANNER SW COVER M8 SUS304
FIXTURE 1 FOR TR-DOWN TYPE (008-536-250)
03-163-3113 ﾒｸﾗﾌﾞﾀ (000-864-130)
BLIND PLATE 03-163-5513 P.MONITOR
(100-315-590) SW (100-317-650) PM-51/B3RX1012
03-030-0401 BPHPｲﾀ
(100-091-640) M8 SUS304 BP&HP MOUNTING PLATE (000-149-260)
Oﾘﾝｸﾞ TRDｲﾀ1 XHｺﾈｸﾀ
(000-864-262) PLATE 1 FOR TR-DOWN TYPE 03-163-3522
O-RING (100-315-821) PMﾎﾝﾀｲﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
ﾛｯｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄ 03-2138(5-5P) PM MOUNTING PLATE
ARP568-345 03-163-5511
(000-851-891) HEXAGONAL BOLT (100-317-630) +ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB ﾛｯｶｸｾﾑｽA ｽﾘﾜﾘ (008-538-320) 03-163-3711
M8X30 SUS304 FIXING SCREW SLOTTED WASHER HEAD BOLT SW-XHｺﾈｸﾀ
(000-862-187) M6X16 SUS304 M6X16 SUS304 REED SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(000-800-420) (000-881-921) 03-2137(ｽｲｯﾁ-2P)
(008-538-310)
MODEL FAR-2837SW
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RSB-104/105 空中線部
4 Feb.2005 4 Feb.2005 4 Feb.2005 SCANNER UNIT
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida N.nakanishi DWG.NO. C3528-E02-A
D - 5
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾅﾂﾄｻﾞｲ(RU-9099)
⑤ ｽｸｳｪｱﾌﾞｯｼｭ
BUSH ② ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ(25KW)組配品 CABLE CLAMP NUT
SHIELD COVER (25KW) ASSY. CKS-10-L 03-126-5324
(組)RF部 SB-1909-F ｱﾝﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA
(000-106-350) TRﾘﾐｯﾀ (100-246-470)
IF AMP COVER WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* TR LIMITER
RF UNIT (組)PHｺﾈｸﾀ 03-154-5603 M4X30
ﾛｯｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄｽﾘﾜﾘ
RU-9290 HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT
RTR-081 PH CONNECTOR (組)PHｺﾈｸﾀ (100-304-422) (000-881-156) (000-136-735)
03-2157(12-12P) PH CONNECTOR ① (組)ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽ
AMP CASE SW
M4X20 SUS304
(008-540-160) 03-2156(14-14P) M4 SUS
(000-862-115)
(008-540-220) RTR-081 ｻｰｷｭﾚｰﾀ
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA (008-540-210) PW (008-540-190)
M4 CIRCULATOR
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* (P)IF SW RC-3686
SW ﾛｯｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄｽﾘﾜﾘ
M4X12 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
① (000-881-146) 03P9335A N
M4 ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ(25KW)
SHIELD COVER (25KW)
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT M4 SUS (000-106-850)
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA
(008-537-420) M4X10 SUS304 WASHER HEAD SCREW *A*
M4 (組)BL-XHｺﾈｸﾀ 03-144-5109
③(組)MIC (100-266-810) (000-862-110) M4X20
(組)ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽ MIC WITH XH CONNECTOR ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽﾂｲｶｺｳｽﾞ FAN MOTOR ｱﾝﾌﾟｹｰｽﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ (000-881-110)
AMP CASE RTR-079/081
ADDITIONAL WORK FOR IF AMP 03-2120(ﾌｧﾝ-2P) AMP CASE MOUNTING PLATE ｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀｰ.2.ﾂｲｶｺｳ
RTR-081 (008-535-540) 03-154-5022 (008-534-780) 03-154-5021 ADOPTER (2)
(008-540-190) (100-317-601) ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ (100-317-591) 03-010-5310
CABLE CLAMP (301-053-100)
ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) ±ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽF ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1) (組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ CKS-07-H ﾌﾟﾘｾｯﾄﾗﾍﾞﾙ
CONNECTOR ASSY WASHER HEAD SCREW WARNING LABEL 1 XH CONNECTOR (000-570-259) RFｼﾔｰｼ PRE-SET LABEL
FX2B-40-L=360 M4X8 ｸﾛﾑ 86-003-1011 ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB RF CHASSIS 86-960-9001
03-2158(12-12P) 03-154-5601
(000-150-105) (000-806-407) (100-236-231) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* (000-801-747)
(008-540-230) (100-304-402)
(組)VHｺﾈｸﾀ M3X10 ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ
ﾌﾀ(X)
To
rem avo
par ove id ele WARN
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
ts cov
ING
ﾌｧｲﾊﾞｰW
ins er. ctrica
ide No
感電 . use l sho
r-s
サーの恐 erv ck, do
警
TERMINAL
ないビスれあ ice
abl not
数多で下マンり。
(000-881-405)
くあさい以外告 e
り、。内の方
万一部にはカ
VH CONNECTOR
さわは高バー
ると電圧を開
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
危険部分け
TRANSCEIVER UNIT LID(X)

ですが
CABLE CLAMP
。
(P)PWR STK-A8 FIBRE WASHER

WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* 03-2160(2-2P) 03-154-5002 CKS-13-L
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M3
M3X8 (008-540-250) (100-317-501) 03P9348 B (P)RFC (000-104-832) (000-135-509)
(000-881-404) ｹｲｺｸﾊﾘﾏｰｸ 000-864-921)
(008-536-290) RFC BOARD
ﾄﾞｳｼﾞｸｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾊﾘﾏｰｸ(X)
LABEL(X) J3ﾊﾘﾏｰｸ 03P9346A CAUTION STICKER ② ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ(25KW)組配品
COAX CLAMP J3 LABEL (008-545-220) 14-055-4202 SHIELD COVER (25KW) ASSY.
03-154-3322 03-154-5051 (100-245-221)
RFCｹｰｽ 03-154-5612 ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
(P)RFTB (100-317-612) +-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞA (組)ﾒｲﾃﾝﾛﾂｸｺﾈｸﾀ
(100-304-350) RFC CASE (100-312-800) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ﾊｲｾﾝｶﾊﾞｰ WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* MATE-N-LOKCONNECTOR
03-154-5611 M4X8
03P9349A WIRING COVER M4X8 03-1901(P2P)
(組)VH-ELｺﾈｸﾀ (100-304-430) (008-486-890) (000-881-445)
(008-539-620) 03-154-5007 PWRｹｰｽ (000-881-144) （組)VHｺﾈｸﾀ
VH-EL CONNECTOR
TB803
11 10
9 8
(100-317-550)
7 6
5 4 TB801
3 2
1 14 13
12 11
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA
10 9
VH CONNECTOR
8 7
TBﾎｺﾞｶﾊﾞｰ
6 5
4 3
PWR CASE
2 1
03-2159(3-P2P)
3 2
1
TB804 -
TB PROTECTION COVER ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB ｷﾔﾂﾌﾟｽﾍﾟ-ｻ 03-154-5615 WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* 03-1902(3P)
(008-540-240) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* ﾊﾟﾙｽﾄﾗﾝｽ
03-154-5023 CAP SPACER (100-304-450) M4X15 PULSE TRANSFORMER (008-486-900)
M4X10 CS-10S TFｺﾝ
(100-321-880) (000-881-145) RT-9023 TF CAPACITOR
(000-881-446) (000-809-335) FETｵｻｴｲﾀ
ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ (000-123-394) ECQ-V1H104JL3
TERMINAL BOARD ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) FET SUPPORTING PLATE
(000-129-126)
FP439AS CONNECTOR ASSY
TNC-PS-3C L430MM
③ (組)MIC
MIC WITH XH CONNECTOR
03-144-5107
(100-264-190）
000147217 ｺﾈｸﾀｸﾐﾋﾝｷﾝｿﾞｸｻﾝｶﾋﾏｸR
TBｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ(X) (000-150-109)
CONNECTOR ASSY ④ MDｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ組立品 METAL OXIDE FILM RESISTOR
TB PCB MOUNTING PLATE (X) ﾎｷｮｳｲﾀ MD PCB MOUNTING PLATE ASSY. BSR10HA1K OHMJ
REINFORCEMENT PLATE
L-110 +ﾅﾍﾞｺﾈｼﾞ
03-154-5006 (000-145-230)
ｿﾄﾊTW
ｴｯｼﾞｻﾄﾞﾙ 03-154-5005 (組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ PAN HEAD SCREW
(100-317-541) ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA TOOTH LOCK WASHER
EDGE SADDLE (100-317-530) XH CONNECTOR MIC M4X20
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* M3
+ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB EDS-3 03-2102(7P) RU-9601 (000-861-131)
FIXING SCREW M4X10
(000-108-152）
M6X16 SUS304 ⑤ (組)RF部 (000-147-156) (000-881-145) ﾏｸﾞﾈﾄﾛﾝ
(000-800-420) RF UNIT MAGNETRON
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｵｻｴｲﾀ(X)
④ MDｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ組立品
MD PCB MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.
(組)VH-ELｺﾈｸﾀ
VH-EL CONNECTOR WIRE CLIP MG5436
CABLE SUPPORTING PLATE (X) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* №98-01 (000-140-762)
03-2103(2-R2P)
03-154-5004 (008-534-790) (000-515-851)
M4X20
(100-317-520) (P)MD SW
(000-881-451) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (組)NH-XHｺﾈｸﾀｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ M4 N
03P9244 B NH-XH CONNECTOR CLAMP
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ(X) M4
CABLE CLAMP (X) (008-517-600) 03-2104(13-13P) CKS-10-H
ﾎﾞｳｽｲﾌｨﾙﾑ.RF. (008-534-800) (000-570-242)
03-154-5003 MDｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
ｹｰｽ(X) WATERPROOFING FILM RF
(100-317-510) MD PCB MOUNTING PLATE
CASE (X) 03-010-5123 MODEL FAR-2827W
PW 03-154-5001 (100-070-631） 03-144-5105
±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB M4 SUS (100-264-170)
WASHER HEAD SCREW*B* SW (100-317-491）ﾍﾝｶﾝWG
M4X25 M4 SUS ｱｰｽﾏｰｸ CONVERSION WAVEGUIDE ﾎｳﾈﾂｼｰﾄ
EARTH LABEL FET INSULATION SHEET APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RTR-081 送受信部
(000-881-452) ﾁﾖｳﾎﾞﾙﾄ 03-154-5011
03-144-1438 (100-317-570） 03-144-5106
WING BOLT
(100-266-480) (100-264-180） 22 DEC.2004 22 DEC.2004 22 DEC.2004 TRANSCEIVER UNIT
M4X10 SUS304
(000-862-516) H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3527-E01-A
D - 6
ｲﾁｷﾞﾒﾋﾟﾝ(C) ｻ-ｷﾕﾚ-ﾀｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｷﾊﾞﾝｼﾔｰｼ (組)MDｹｰｽ
POSITIONING PIN(C) CABLE CLAMP WIRE CLIP PCB CHASSIS
CIRCULATOR
NO.98-01 03-163-5017
MD PCB CASE ASSY.
03-163-3514 RC-4910S CKS-10-L
(100-315-801) (000-106-350) (000-515-851) (100-317-400)
(000-126-346)
ﾛﾂｶｸｾﾑｽB ｽﾘﾜﾘ
HEX.WASHER HEAD BOLT
ﾊﾘﾏｰｸ(S) (P)MD
M6X25 SUS304 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
Eｺ-ﾅWG ｻｰｷﾕﾚｰﾀﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ2 LABEL(S)
(000-802-771) CIRCULATOR MOUNTING PLATE2 03-163-5051 03P9244E
E CORNER WAVEGUIDE
03-163-5008 (100-317-473) (008-539-590)
03-016-5301 (P)PWR ﾎｳﾈﾂｼ-ﾄ
TRﾘﾐﾂﾀ (100-050-091) (100-317-321)
TR LIMITER PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FET INSULATION SHEET
SﾊﾞﾝﾄﾞMIC ｻｰｷﾕﾚｰﾀﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ1 (組)BL-SMｺﾈｸﾀ 03P9348C 03-144-5106
MIC TL378A CIRCULATOR MOUNTING PLATE1 BL-SM CONNECTOR
(000-149-672) (008-539-600) (100-264-180)
RU-9427 03-163-5007 ｼﾔｰｼ 03-2154(ﾌｧﾝ-R2P)
(000-141-059) (100-317-310) CHASSIS (008-540-660) FETｵｻｴｲﾀ(S)
+ｱﾌﾟｾｯｯﾄｾﾑｽB 03-163-5021 FET SUPPORTING PLATE (S)
WASHER HEAD SCREW ｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ (100-317-411) (P)RFC 03-163-5018
ADAPTER ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
M5X16 SUS304 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* (100-319-300)
(000-801-516) 03-163-5006 ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB 03P9346A
(100-317-300) M4X15
(組)ｼｬｰｼ (000-881-448)
M4X35
(組)MIC
② (組)ｷﾊﾞﾝｼｬｰｼ
(000-808-650) CHASSIS ASSY.
MIC ASSEMBLY
RTR-082-104/105 ｹｰｽﾌﾀ ③ PCB CHASSIS ASSY.
(008-540-540) CASE COVER
03-163-5026 (組)PHｺﾈｸﾀ
(100-317-460) PH CONNECTOR ±ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽF ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1)
ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) WARNING LABEL 1
CONNECTOR ASSY
03-2162(14-14P) WASHER HEAD SCREW MDｹｰｽ
(008-540-690) M4X8 86-003-1011 MD PCB CASE
TMP-1.5D-QEV L240 (組)PHｺﾈｸﾀ (100-236-231)
(000-806-407)
(000-150-107)
(組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ
PH CONNECTOR
03-2161(12-12P)
④ 03-163-5015
(100-317-381)
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｹｰｽｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾌﾀ(S)
XH CONNECTOR CABLE CASE CABLE CLAMP (008-540-680)
LID (S)
(組)ｻｰｷｭﾚｰﾀ/MIC
03-2146(7P)
(008-540-580)
03-163-5025
(100-317-451)
CKS-10-L
(000-106-350)
① CIRCULATOR/MIC
ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
CONNECTOR ASSY
IF-ﾌﾀ
IF AMP PCB COVER
03-163-5002
(100-317-260) ⑤ (P)IF
TNC-PS-3C L290MM 03-163-5024
(000-147-705) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞBK ｹｲｺｸﾊﾘﾏｰｸ +ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK (100-317-440)
（組）SM-XHｺﾈｸﾀ 03P9335B
WASHER-HEAD SCREW WARNING LABEL WASHERHEAD SCREW BK SM CONNECTOR
ﾎｺﾞｶﾊﾞｰ
M4X12 03-160-1042 M4X15 PROTECTION COVER (008-543-330)
03-2153(P2-2P) ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
(000-804-658) (100-302-750) (000-805-724) (008-540-650) 03-163-5028
ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ (組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ (100-319-290)
XH CONNECTOR
M4X10
⑤(組)IFｹｰｽ +ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB ±ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
ﾀﾝｼﾊﾞﾝ TERMINAL BOARD (000-881-446) FIXING SCREW
TERMINAL PLATE 03-2152(12-12P) IF AMP PCB CASE ASSY. WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
LC-02-30T6 2P (008-540-640) M6X20 SUS304
03-163-3553 M3X8
(000-116-597) (組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ (000-807-434)
(100-315-910) ｽｸｳｴｱﾌﾞﾂｼﾕ (000-881-404)
ｾﾞﾂｴﾝﾀﾞｲ XH CONNECTOR ③ (組)基板ｼｬｰｼﾏｸﾞﾈﾄﾛﾝ BUSH
INSULATION BOARD 03-2172(2-2P)
PCB CHASSIS ASSY. MAGNETRON
03-163-3552 (組)NH-XHｺﾈｸﾀ (008-544-930) SB-1909-F
ｺｳｱﾂﾏ-ｸ(2) MG5223F
(100-315-900) NH-XH CONNECTOR (000-109-081) (000-126-024)
HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABEL
ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
16-018-3206
ﾄﾗﾝｽﾀﾞｲ(2)
TRANS MOUNTING PLATE (2)
03-2150(13-13P)
(008-540-620) CONNECTOR ASSY
(組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ
④ ② (組)ｼｬｰｼ
(100-297-770) K2 ﾘﾚｰ XH CONNECTOR (組)MDｹｰｽ IFｹｰｽ
03-163-5014 FX2B-40-L=360 03-2149(3-2P) MD PCB CASE ASSY. CHASSIS ASSY.
RELAY IF AMP PCB CASE
(100-317-371) (000-150-105) K1 ﾘﾚｰ (008-540-610) RTR-082-104/105
TFｺﾝ -104 TR-0NH/3 1.7A ｹﾂﾛﾎﾞｳｼｻﾞｲ 03-163-5023
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK RELAY (008-540-560)
TF CAPACITOR ﾛﾂｶｸﾎﾞﾙﾄｽﾘﾜﾘ WEEP PROTECTION BLOCK (100-317-431)
(組)ﾒｲﾃﾝﾛｯｸ WASHERHEAD SCREW BK (000-137-509) HG3-DC12V AP6231 HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT
MATE-N-LOK M4X8 ECQ-V1H104JL3
(000-129-126)
-105 TR-0NH/3 0.8A (000-454-822) ⑧ﾊﾟﾙｽﾄﾗﾝｽ M6X16 SUS304
03-030-5206
(100-134-470)
03-2155(P2P) (000-149-950)
(000-137-508) XK1 ﾘﾚｰｿｹｯﾄ PULSE TRANSFORMER (000-862-129)
(008-540-670) (組)VHｺﾈｸﾀ
VH CONNECTOR RELAY SOCKET
03-2147(3P) AP68379
T801ﾄﾗﾝｽ(ﾊﾟﾙｽ) (組)VHｺﾈｸﾀ (000-145-343) ﾎﾞｳｽｲｼ-ﾄ(ｱﾝﾃﾅ)
(008-540-590)
PULSE TRANSFORMER VH CONNECTOR WATERPROOF SHEET (ANTENNA) ｷﾔﾂﾌﾟｽﾍﾟ-ｻ
ﾄﾗﾝｽﾀﾞｲ(1)
RT-9273 03-2148(2-2P) CAP SPACER
(000-136-734)
TRANSFORMER MOUNT (1)
(組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ (008-540-600)
03-002-4119
CS-10S
(組)IFｹｰｽ
03-163-5013 (100-093-860)
(100-317-361)
XH CONNECTOR ①（組)ｻｰｷｭﾚｰﾀ/MIC (000-809-335) IF AMP PCB CASE ASSY.
03-2151(4P) CIRCULATOR/MIC
ﾏｷｾﾝR ｿﾄﾊTW (008-540-630)
WIREWOUND RESISTOR TOOTH LOCK WASHER RTR-082-104/105 ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ
BGR10THA560J
(000-150-144)
M3
DIODE(RECTI) ⑦
(組)TB基板取付板(S) (008-540-530) ⑥ TERMINAL BOARD
MD-12N1 TB PCB MOUNTING PLATE (S) ASSY. ｹｰｽｱｼ(1) LC-02-30T6 3P
(000-133-735)
CASE BASE PLATE (1) (000-116-325)
ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ 03-163-5032
(100-321-200) ｹｲｺｸﾊﾘﾏｰｸ
TERMINAL ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ WARNING LABEL
STK-A8 保護ｶﾊﾞｰ2
PROTECTION COVER 2 CABLE CLAMP 03-160-1042
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* (000-135-509) +ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄｾﾑｽB CKS-13-L (100-302-750)
M3X10 ﾌｧｲﾊﾞｰW 03-163-5029 WASHER HEAD SCREW
(100-320-320) (000-104-832)
(000-881-405) FIBRE WASHER ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
M3
M6X12 SUS304
ﾊﾟﾙｽﾄﾗﾝｽ CABLE CLAMP
ｷﾝｿﾞｸｻﾝｶﾋﾏｸR
(000-808-428)
CKS-10-L
PULSE TRANSFORMER
⑧ RTR-082
METAL OXIDE FILM RESISTOR
BSR10HA1K OHMJ
⑥ (組)端子台板
TERMINAL BOARD BASE ASSY.
ﾒｸﾗﾌﾞﾀ
BLIND PLATE ｹｰｽｶﾅｸﾞ
(000-106-350)
(008-541-700) (000-145-230)
03-030-0401 CASE FIXING PLATE ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲｲﾀ
ｶﾊﾞｰ2 (100-091-640) 03-163-5003 TERMINAL BOARD BASE
COVER 2 (100-317-271)
ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ 03-163-5027
03-163-5005 (100-319-312)
TERMINAL BOARD +ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB (100-317-290)
FIXING SCREW ﾊﾘﾏｰｸ(S)
FP439AS
LABEL(S)
(000-147-217) M6X16 SUS304 (組)端子台板
(P)RFTB (000-800-420) ｹｰｽｱｼ(2) 03-163-5051
CASE BASE PLATE (2) (100-317-473) TERMINAL BOARD BASE ASSY.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｵｻｴｲﾀ(S)
03P9349A 03-163-5033
CABLE SUPPORTING PLATE (S)
(008-539-620) 03-163-5012
PW (100-321-210)
ｱｰｽﾊﾘﾏｰｸ
MODEL FAR-2837SW
M4 SUS304
TBｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ(S) (100-317-350) ｶﾊﾞｰ1 EARTH LABEL
TB PCB MOUNTING PLATE (S) SW COVER 1 10-044-4133
03-163-5022
M4 SUS304 03-163-5004
(100-317-281)
(100-304-060) APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RTR-082 送受信部
(100-317-420) ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ(S) ｹｰｽ(S)
ﾄﾞｳｼﾞｸｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
COAX CLAMP M4X25 CABLE CLAMP (S) 蝶ﾎﾞﾙﾄ 2種
WING BOLT
±ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽF
WASHER HEAD SCREW
CASE (S) 22 DEC.2004 22 DEC.2004 22 DEC.2004 TRANSCEIVER UNIT
03-163-5011 03-163-5001
03-154-3322 ⑦ (組)TBｷﾊﾞﾝﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ(S) (000-881-452) M4X10 SUS304 M4X8 C2700 MBCR2 (100-317-252)
(100-304-350) TB PCB MOUNTING PLATE (S) ASSY. (100-317-340)
(000-806-407)
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3528-E01-A
D - 7
RELAY ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1) +-ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽF

WARNING LABEL 1 SCREW
PSU-007-70-23 ﾘﾚｰ TR-0NH/3 1.7A
86-003-1011 M4X8 C2700 MBCR2
(000-137-509)
(100-236-231)
PSU-007-82-12 ﾘﾚ-(ｻ-ﾏﾙ) TR-0NH/3 0.95A
(000-150-836)
ｱｰｽﾏｰｸ PSUｶﾊﾞｰ
PSU-007-80-10 ﾘﾚ- TR-0NH/3 0.8A
EARTH LABEL PSU COVER
(000-137-508) PSUｾﾞﾂｴﾝｼｰﾄ
10-044-4133 03-163-9821
PSU-007-72-28-50/60 ﾘﾚ-(ｻ-ﾏﾙ) TR-0NH/3 2.2A (100-316-011) PSU INSULATION SHEET
(100-304-060)
(000-149-239) 03-163-9815
(100-319-881)
PSU007ﾊﾘﾏｰｸ
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK LABEL PSU007
SCREW BK 03-163-9822
M4X15 (100-319-891)
PSUﾊﾘﾏｰｸ
LABEL PSU
ﾘﾚｰ
03-163-9814
(100-319-781) ｺｳｱﾂﾏ-ｸ(2) RELAY
HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABEL HG3-DC12V AP6231
16-018-3206 (000-454-822)
(100-297-770)
PSUｼｬｰｼ
PSU CHASSIS
03-163-9811
(100-315-980)
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞBK
SCREW BK
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞBK M4X20
SCREW
M3X15
ﾘﾚｰｿｹｯﾄ
RELAY SOCKET
AP68379
ﾀﾝｼﾀﾞｲ (000-145-343)
TERMINAL BOARD
PSUｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｲﾀ
LK-2P
PSU CLAMPING PLATE
(000-533-501)
03-163-9813
(100-316-000)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB
SCREW MODEL FAR-2137S/2137S-BB/2837S
M4X10 +ｱﾌﾟｾﾂﾄUIｾﾑｽB PSUｸﾗﾝﾊﾟｰ
FIXING SCREW PSU CLAMPER APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT
M6X16 SUS PSU-007 電源制御部
03-163-9812
20 OCT.2004 20 OCT.2004 20 OCT.2004 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
(100-315-991)
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.kubota DWG.NO. C3521-E02-A
D - 8
ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1)
(P)NET100 ﾌｲﾝｶﾞ-ｶﾞ-ﾄﾞ (組)BL-SMｺﾈｸﾀ
WARNING LABEL 1 FINGER GUARD
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (P)SPU FAN
86-003-1011 FG-06ULB
03P9332 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 03-2082(ﾌｧﾝ-R2P)
(000-144-485) (008-534-870)
(008-536-210) 03P9337
ｶﾊﾞｰ
蝶番 (008-536-460)
COVER
HINGE
03-163-8001 ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
TH-TM-5 ｽｸｳｴｱﾌﾞｯｼｭ
(100-304-553) SPUｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ SPU取付板 CLUMP
(000-872-005) BUSH
SPU SHIELD CASE SPU MOUNTING PLATE SB-1909-F CKS-05-L
SPU取付板組立品
03-163-8025 ﾅｯﾄ材 03-163-8012
SPU MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.
(100-308-300) NUT
(100-304-573)
10-071-6308 ※
電源ｶﾊﾞｰ組立品 ※
ﾌｱﾝﾀﾞｸﾄ
POWER SUPPLY COVER ASSY. (100-289-380) ※
※ FAN DUCT
ﾌｧﾝﾀﾞｸﾄ組配品 03-163-8017
SPU取付板組立品ﾌｧﾝﾀﾞｸﾄ組配品
FAN DUCT ASSY. (100-304-621)
SPU MOUNTING PLATE ASSY. FAN DUCT ASSY.
電源ｶﾊﾞｰ組立品 (組)XHｺﾈｸﾀ
J3
平型ﾜﾝﾀｯﾁｽﾃｰ POWER SUPPLY COVER ASSY. 警告ﾊﾘﾏｰｸ J9 VH CONNECTOR ASSY.

STAY CAUTION STICKER 03-2094(13-10P)
(P)PWR HIC ｹｰｽ(上)組配品 J4
B-38-3-R ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ 14-055-4202 (008-534-710)

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (HIC) CASE (UPPER) ASSY.
(000-147-165) CABLE CLAMP (組)DVI-RGB
03P9340
(008-536-450) CKS-13-L 80-0667
ﾋｰﾄｼﾝｸ(R)組立品 (008-537-660) J3 J2
(P)RGB-BUFF
J1 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
HEAT SINK(R) ASSY. ｴｯｼﾞｻﾄﾞﾙ電源ｶﾊﾞｰ 03P9229B
P1
EDGE SADDLE POWER SUPPLY COVER (008-480-300)

EDS-2323U 03-163-8015 (P)TB
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ (100-304-601) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (組)GCｶﾊﾞｰ
(本図は03P9339A) CABLE CLAMP 03P9342A GYRO CONVERTER COVER
(P)PWR CKS-10-L (008-539-630) 80-0665
(008-537-030)
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY HVｶﾊﾞ- (P)HV
電源ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
HV COVER (P)演算
RPU-013/A-60R2 03P9339A POWER SUPPLY CLAMP COVER 03-163-8016 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
(008-536-390) RPU-013/A-12KW HV-9017A
03-163-8021 ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ (100-304-610) 64P1106A
RPU-013/A-60R4 03P9339B (008-517-320)
(100-304-650) CLUMP (004-410-120)
(008-536-400) CKS-05-L RPU-013/A-25KW HV-9017B
RPU-013/A-72R2 03P9339C (008-517-330)
ｽｸｳｴｱﾌﾞｯｼｭ (組)AC FIL
(008-536-410) ｹｰｽ取付板 BUSH ﾎｺﾞｺﾞﾑ(1)
AC FILTER ASSEMBLY
RPU-013/A-72R4 03P9339D CASE MOUNTING PLATE SB-1909-F (組)DC FIL PROTECTION RUBBER (1)
(008-536-420) 03-163-8052 ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ ****
**
DC FILTER ASSEMBLY 03-163-8061
(100-304-782) CABLE CLAMP (100-304-851)
RPU-013/A-2R2 03P9338C RPU-013/A-60 RPU-013/A *AC100V*
CKS-10-L
(008-536-430) (008-535-880)
RPU-013/A-2R4 03P9338D RPU-013/A-72 RPU-013/A *AC220V* 保護ｽﾎﾟﾝｼﾞ(2)
(008-535-890) PROTECTION SPONGE (2)
(008-536-440)
RPU-013-2 RPU-013 *DC* 03-163-8062
ｶﾊﾞｰｵｻｴｸﾞﾋｰﾄｼﾝｸ(R)組立品ｹｰｽ(下)組立品 (100-304-860)
COVER FIXTURE (008-535-900)
HEAT SINK(R) ASSY. ｹｰｽ(上) CASE (LOWER) ASSY.
03-163-8023 ｹｰｽ(下)組立品 CASE (UPPER)
CASE (LOWER) ASSY. MODEL FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB
03-163-8011 FAR-2137S/2137S-BB/2827W/2837S/2837SW
ﾋｰﾄｼﾝｸ(R) 抜き差し蝶番加工品 (100-304-561) ｽｸｳｪｱﾌﾞｯｼｭ
HINGE ASSY
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RPU-013/A 制御部
HEAT SINK (R) CABLE PROTECTOR
03-163-8022 03-163-8065 ｹｰｽ(上)組配品 05 NOV.2004 05 NOV.2004 05 NOV.2004 PROCESSOR UNIT
SB-2718
(100-304-664) (100-308-130) CASE (UPPER) ASSY. H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3519-E01-B
ﾏｸﾂｷｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ
GROMMET
ｶﾊﾞｰ MG-14
COVER ﾏｸﾂｷｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ
Ａ 03-163-7502 GROMMET GROMMET
(100-305-653) MG-16 G-39
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞ
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A*
M4X8
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｶﾅｸﾞ
CLAMP FIXTURE
03-163-7506
ｶﾊﾞｰ組立品
W1 ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) 矢視図
Ａ
COVER ASSY. CABLE ASSEMBLY ｶﾊﾞｰ組立品
RCU-014 XH10P-W-5P L=10M COVER ASSY.
(000-149-056)
RCU-014A XH10P-W-6P L=2.3M ﾚｸﾄﾗDｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞ
(000-150-000) LECTRA D SPRING
#6601-P
(000-802-139)
+ﾅﾍﾞSﾀｲﾄUIｻﾞﾂｷｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾀﾞｲｴﾝｺｰﾀﾞﾀﾞｲｱﾙ
PAN HEAD S-TIGHT SCREW CLAMP PLATE ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄ DIAL
03-163-7505 PROTECTION SHEET 03-163-7503
3X8 SWRM10 MFZN2-C
(000-804-539) 03-163-7507 (100-305-161)
(100-305-402)
(組)XH-PADｺﾈｸﾀ
XH-PAD CONNECTOR
03-2118(12-16P) +ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK ｴﾝｺｰﾀﾞﾀﾞｲｱﾙ組立
(008-534-740) WASHER HEAD SCREW DIAL ASSY.
M3X8
(000-804-626)
(P)PNL ﾚｸﾄﾗDｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞ
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD # LECTRA D SPRING
03P9343 #6601-P
(008-536-360) # # (000-802-139)
#
# ﾂﾏﾐ
ﾌﾞｻﾞｰｺﾃｲｺﾞﾑ KNOB
BUZZER FIXING RUBBER 03-163-7504
ﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(E) 03-163-7512 (100-305-171)
E RUBBER KEY (E) ﾎｳﾈﾂｼ-ﾄ(1) (P)BUZ
03-163-7551 HEAT SINK RUBBER(1) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ﾂﾏﾐ組立品
(100-305-441) 10-071-2007 03P9362 KNOB ASSY.
ﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(J) (008-536-370)
J RUBBER KEY (J)
03-163-7561
(100-306-270) ﾃﾞｲｽﾄﾚｽｶﾊﾞ-ﾌｸﾛ
DISTRESS SWITCH COVER
DSC-60
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB ｺｷｭｳｼｰﾄ (005-950-570)
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* RESPIRATION SHEET
03-163-7511 ｴﾝｺｰﾀﾞﾀﾞｲｱﾙ組
M3X8
DIAL ASSY.
ﾂﾏﾐ組
ｿｳｻﾊﾟﾈﾙ KNOB ASSY.
KEYBOARD PANEL
03-163-7501 ｽﾗｲﾄﾞｼｰﾄ
(100-305-645) SLIDE SHEET
03-163-7509
TB1
ﾄﾗｯｸﾎﾞｰﾙ
TRACK BALL
TA4726
(000-147-139)
MODEL FAR2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB
FAR2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB
D - 9
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RCU-014/A 操作部

27 OCT.2004 27 OCT.2004 27 OCT.2004 CONTROL UNIT
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3519-E04-B
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞA W1
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
M4X8 CABLE ASSEMBLY
RCU-015/016 XH10P-W-5P L=10M
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ (000-149-056)
CABLE CLAMP RCU-015A XH10P-W-6P L=2.3M
03-163-7804 (000-150-000)
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
CABLE CLAMP
CK-07H
ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽｽﾍﾟｰｻ
SHIELD CASE SPACER
03-163-7805 03-163-7806
(100-305-513)
SW +ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽF ｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ
M3 BINDER HEAD SCREW GROMMET
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB M3X8 ｸﾛﾑ G-49
M3X8
(組)XH-PADｺﾈｸﾀ
XH-PAD CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY ｽﾍﾟ-ｻ
SPACER
03-2123(12-16P)
SQ-8
(008-536-710) ｶﾊﾞｰ
COVER
03-163-7802
ｽﾍﾟ-ｻ (100-305-672)
SPACER ｽﾍﾟｰｻ
SQ-25 SPACER
CZ-413
(000-147-166)
PW
M3
ﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(E)
RUBBER KEY (E)
(P)KEYTB 03-163-7851
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (100-305-561)
03P9344
(008-536-380) ﾎﾞﾀﾝｶﾊﾞｰ
BUTTON COVER
ｺｷｭｳｼｰﾄ RCU-016 03-163-7841
ｽﾍﾟ-ｻ
SPACER RESPIRATION SHEET (100-305-571)
SQ-25 03-163-7511 ﾃﾞｲｽﾄﾚｽｶﾊﾞ-ﾌｸﾛ
DISTRESS SWITCH COVER
RCU-015
DSC-60
SW (005-950-570)
ｻﾝﾀﾝｼｵｻｴｲﾀ M3 操作ﾊﾟﾈﾙ
3-PORT CLAMP PLATE FRONT PANEL
03-163-7803 03-163-7801 操作ﾊﾟﾈﾙ
(100-305-661) FRONT PANEL
ｷﾞｬｯﾌﾟﾊﾟｯﾄﾞ
GAP PAD
GP1-0.5-011-016
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA
TB1
ﾄﾗｯｸﾎﾞｰﾙ WASHER HEAD SCREW *A*
TRACK BALL M4X8
TA4726 (000-881-144)
(000-147-139)
MODEL
FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB
FAR-2137S/2827W/2837S/2837SW/2137S-BB
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RCU-015/A/016
D - 10
操作部
29 OCT.2004 29 OCT.2004 29 OCT.2004 CONTROL UNIT
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3519-E05-B
D - 11
ﾊｲﾒﾝｶﾊﾞｰ(20) ｺﾈｸﾀｶﾊﾞｰ(20)
REAR COVER (20) ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1) CONNECTOR COVER (20)
03-163-1091 WARNING LABEL 1 03-163-1093
(100-305-083) 86-003-1011 (100-305-102)
ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ(20)
PCB ﾊﾘﾏｰｸAC(20)
LABEL AC (20) SHIELD CASE (20)
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AC 03-163-1031 03-163-1062
(本図はAC仕様)
03P9359 (100-305-011) (100-308-470)
(000-147-376）
ﾊﾘﾏｰｸDC(20)
(組)DCﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝ DC LABEL DC (20) ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
03-163-1041
DC POWER PACK (100-305-020) CONNECTOR ASSY.
AC
MU-231CR VH6P-XH2P
(008-543-580) PCB (000-150-738)
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ｺﾈｸﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
SLB-FRN3-A DC CONNECTOR ASSY.
(組)ACﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝ
(000-150-737) VH6P-VH6P
AC POWER PACK (本図はAC仕様)
(000-150-739)
MU-231CR ﾊｲﾒﾝﾊﾟﾈﾙ(20)
(008-543-560) REAR PANEL(20)
03-163-1023
(100-304-991)
ﾌｲﾙﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
AC FILTER ASSEMBLY
AC MU-201CRﾖｳ (ACｼﾖｳ)
(000-149-060)
ｼｬｰｼ(20)組立品ﾌｲﾙﾀ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
CHASSIS (20) ASSY. DC DC FILTER ASSEMBLY
MU-201CRﾖｳ (DCｼﾖｳ)
LCD一式の時 (000-149-061)
ﾌﾚｰﾑC(20)
FRAME C (20)
03-163-1022 LCD
(100-304-982) 201MU-1
(000-149-059）
ｼｬｰｼ(20)
CHASSIS (20)
03-163-1021
(100-304-972)
PCB(ｲﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ）
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ﾊﾞｯｸﾗｲﾄﾕﾆｯﾄ
201PW21F BACK LIGHT MODULE
(000-150-305) 201LHS2F
(000-150-304）
MODEL FAR-2117/2127/2137S
(組)ﾊﾟﾈﾙ APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT MU-201CR 表示部

ｼｬｰｼ(20)組立品 PANEL ASSY. 22 OCT.2004 22 OCT.2004 22 OCT.2004 MONITOR UNIT
CHASSIS (20) ASSY. H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3519-E06-B
D - 12
ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1) ｺﾈｸﾀｶﾊﾞｰ(23)
WARNING LABEL 1 CONNECTOR COVER (23)
86-003-1011 03-163-2062
(100-305-362)
ﾊｲﾒﾝｶﾊﾞｰ(23)
REAR COVER (23) PCB
03-163-2061 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
(100-305-353) 03P9359
(000-147-376）
(組)DVI I/F BOARD
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
MU-231CR ﾌｲﾝｶﾞｰｶﾞｰﾄﾞ
(008-536-530) FINGER GUARD
FG-06ULB (組)ACﾌｨﾙﾀ
(000-144-485) (組)DCﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝ
AC AC FILTER ASSEMBLY
(008-536-500) DC POWER PACK
ﾌｧﾝﾓｰﾀ
FAN MOTOR (組)DCﾌｨﾙﾀ MU-231CR
MMS-06C12DS-R02 DC DC FILTER ASSEMBLY (008-543-580)
(000-128-408) (008-536-510)
(P)FILTER (組)ACﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝ
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (本図はAC仕様) AC POWER PACK
03P9360 MU-231CR
(008-536-520) (008-543-560)
ﾌﾚｰﾑC(23)
FRAME C (23)
03-163-2022 ﾊｲﾒﾝﾊﾟﾈﾙ(23)
(100-305-301) REAR PANEL (23)
03-163-2023
(100-305-313)
ｼｬｰｼ(23) ｼｬｰｼ(23)組立品
CHASSIS (23) CHASSIS (23) ASSY. ﾚｲｲﾝｷﾖｸｶﾝ
03-163-2021 (組)LCD CCFL
(100-305-294) LCD FLCL-23
MU-231CR (000-149-467)
(008-536-490)
LCD関連部品
LCD SERVICE PARTS
ｼｬｰｼ(23)組立品
CHASSIS (23) ASSY.
MODEL FAR-2817/2827/2827W/2837S/2837SW
(組)ﾊﾟﾈﾙ/ﾌｨﾙﾀ APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT

FRONT BEZEL WITH FILTER MU-231CR 表示部
15 OCT.2004 15 OCT.2004 15 OCT.2004
MU-231CR MONITOR UNIT
(008-537-300) H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.KUBOTA DWG.NO. C3519-E07-B
D - 13
ｺﾌﾀ
SMALL LID
(P)NET100 03-163-9014
NET100 BOARD
(100-304-512)
03P9332
(008-536-210) ｶﾊﾞｰ
COVER
Oﾘﾝｸﾞ 03-163-9012
付属品 (100-305-633)
Accessovies (組)MJ-VHｺﾈｸﾀ
MJ-VH CONNECTOR
03-2095(R3-3P)
(008-534-680)
ｲﾀﾊﾞﾈ
ｺﾌﾀｳﾗｲﾀ PLATE SPRING
BACK LID 03-163-9016
03-163-9015 (100-306-080)
ｽﾍﾟ-ｻ (P)CARDCPU (100-304-523)
SPACER CARDCPU BOARD
SQ-16 03P9333
(000-801-854) (008-536-200)
ｺﾌﾀｳﾗｲﾀ組立品
BACK LID ASSY.
ｺﾌﾀｳﾗｲﾀ組立品
BACK LID ASSY.
ﾏｴﾊﾟﾈﾙ組立品
FRONT PANEL ASSY.
N
付属品ｹｼｮｳﾊﾟﾈﾙ
Accessovies COSMETIC PANEL
03-163-9021
ｼﾔｰｼ (100-304-531)
CHASSIS
03-163-9011
(100-304-482) ﾏｴﾊﾟﾈﾙ
FRONT PANEL
03-163-9013
(100-305-622)
(P)CARDCON
CARDCON BOARD
03P9345
(008-536-220)
ﾏｴﾊﾟﾈﾙ組立品
FRONT PANEL ASSY.
MODEL FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2137S/2837S/
2117-BB/2127-BB/2137S-BB
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT CU-100 ﾒﾓﾘｰｶｰﾄﾞｲﾝﾀｰﾌｪｲｽ
30 Sep.2004 30 Sep.2004 30 Sep.2004
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE UNIT
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.kubota DWG.NO. C3519-E08-B
Contents of Drawings
Name Type Drw. No. Page Remark

X band RCN001/002 C3519-C05 S-1
X band RCN003/004 C3519-C06 S-2
S band RCN001/002 C3521-C02 S-3
S band RCN003/004 C3521-C03 S-4
X band-W RCN003/004 C3527-C03 S-5
S band-SW RCN003/004 C3528-C04 S-6
X band-W RCN001 C3527-C02 S-7
S band-SW RCN001 C3528-C03 S-8
FAR-2117/2127 C3519-C01 S-9 AC set
Interconnection
FAR-2817/2827 C3519-C02 S-10 DC set
diagram
FAR-2117-BB C3519-C03 S-11 AC set
FAR-2127-BB C3519-C04 S-12 DC set
FAR-2137S/2837S
C3521-C01 S-13
FAR-2837S-BB
FAR-2827W C3527-C01 S-14
FAR-2837SW C3528-C01 S-15
Processor unit external
RPU-013 C3528-C02 S-16
interface
FAR-2127/2827 C3520-C01 S-17 Antenna cable extension
FAR-2107/2807/-BB Scanner unit
C3519-K01 S-18
series (X band 12/25kW/UP)
Scanner unit
C3527-K01 S-19
(X band-25kW/Down)
FAR-2827W
Transceiver unit
C3527-K02 S-20
(X bad 25kW/Down)
FAR-2137S/2837S/-BB Scanner unit
C3521-K01 S-21
series (S band-30kW/UP)
Transceiver unit
C3528-K02 S-22
(S bad 30kW/Down)
FAR-2837SW
Scanner unit
C3528-K01 S-23
Circuit diagram (RSB-104/105)
PSU-007 C3521-K02 S-24 Power supply unit
C3524-K01 S-25 23 inch LCD display (AC)
MU-231CR
C3524-K02 S-26 23 inch LCD display (DC)
C3519-K08 S-27 20 inch LCD display (AC)
MU-201CR
C3519-K09 S-28 20 inch LCD display (DC)
C3519-K02 S-29 AC set
RPU-013
C3519-K03 S-30 DC set
RCU-014 C3519-K10 S-31 STD control unit
RCU-015/16 C3519-K11 S-32 Trackball control unit
CU-200 C3519-K12 S-33 Card IF unit
HUB-100 C3519-K13 S-34 HUB unit
S-0
03P9342 (1/3) C3519-K20 S-35

RPU-013
03P9342 (2/3) C3519-K21 S-36
Terminal board
03P9342 (3/3) C3519-K22 S-37
03P9337 (14/15) C3519-K23 S-38 SPU board (ADC)
SPU board
03P9337 (15/15) C3519-K24 S-39
(IF Filter & LOG DTC)
03P9335 (1/3) C3519-K15 S-40
03P9335 (2/3) C3519-K16 S-41 IF AMP board
03P9335 (3/3) C3519-K17 S-42
03P9332 C3519-K25 S-43 NET-100 board
03P9338 (1/2) C3519-K06 S-44 RPU-013
03P9338 (2/2) C3519-K07 S-45 PWR (DC) board
03P9339 (1/2) C3519-K04 S-46 RPU-013
03P9339 (2/2) C3519-K05 S-47 PWR (AC) board
RPU-013
03P9341 C3519-K26 S-48
FIL (AC) board
RPU-013
03P9352 C3519-K27 S-49
FIL (DC) board
HV9017 C3352-K07 S-50 TX-HV board
03P9349 C3519-K18 S-51 RF Terminal board
03P9244 C3464-K14 S-52 MD board
03P9348 C3519-K14 S-53 PWR (RF unit) board
Circuit diagram
03P9347 C3519-K19 S-54 BP board
MSS7497 C3311-009 S-55
03P9362 C3519-K34 S-56 Buzzer board
03P9343 (1/6) C3519-K28 S-57
03P9343 (2/6) C3519-K29 S-58
03P9343 (3/6) C3519-K30 S-59 RCU-014
03P9343 (4/6) C3519-K31 S-60 Control board
03P9343 (5/6) C3519-K32 S-61
03P9343 (1/6) C3519-K33 S-62
03P9344 (1/5) C3519-K35 S-63
03P9344 (2/5) C3519-K36 S-64
RCU-015
03P9344 (3/5) C3519-K37 S-65
Control board
03P9344 (4/5) C3519-K38 S-66
03P9344 (5/5) C3519-K39 S-67
03P9229 C3464-K25 S-68 RGB buffer board
03P9364 C3519-K41 S-69 HUB-100 LED board
MU-201CR/231CR
03P9359 C3519-K40 S-70
DC/DC board
Filter PWB
03P9360 C3524-K03 S-71
(MU-231CR)
64P1106 (1/2) C4340-K01 S-72 AD-100
64P1106 (2/2) C4340-K02 S-73 GC-10/8/7
S-0A
D
C
B
A
110/115/220/230VAC,
03-2088(6-14P) DPYC-1.5 *1
2
1
14
13
1φ,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2
J1
DPYCY-1.5 *1
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
J5(VH)
03-2090(3P)
RW-4747
1
*4
GYRO
BRN GYRO_R2 J613(TB)
64P1106A
RW-9600,φ22.1,
BOARD
J680 RED 2 GYRO_R1 TX_HV 1
*2
3 NC 2 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
NC
3 NC
TB901
TB-801
チャチャ BRN
CONVERTER
1 1 TX_HV
1
アカ
J4(VH)
2 J610 2 NC
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
3 ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1 ダイ(太) ORG[B]

24V_PLUS 3 24V_PLUS
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
キ YEL 2 1 キ(太) YEL[B]
03-2091(5P) キ
4 GYRO_S2 4 24V_MINUS
J911
24V_MINUS 2
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
ダイ
アカ
チャ
5
4
3
2
1
5 ミドリ GRN 3 GYRO_S3 アオ(太) BLU[B]
*5
*1
*4
*3
*2
*1
MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T ハイ(太) GRY[B]
:
MPYC-7
:
:
:
:
MOTOR(+) 6 MOTOR(+)
5
SHIFT1-C 4
SHIFT1-H 3
2
1
4
NOTE
PPL
YEL
ORG
RED
BRN
ムラサキ 5 GYRO_FG ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
J7(NH)
GYROCOMPASS 7 MOTOR(-) 5 7 MOTOR(-)
1
2
3
4
5
6
03-2089(5P) シロ(太) WHT[B]

J/P922
MOTOR(-) 6 8 MOTOR(-)
アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A
SPU_RF_D_A 7
OPTION
J608(TB) J603(XH) SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B
AD_DATA_H クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A
1 RF_SPU_D_A 9
P
-12V
GND
+5V
GND
+12v
シロ WHT
USER SUPPLY
2 AD_DATA_C RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
空中線部
*1 ミドリ(太) GRN[B]
J615(TB)
3 AD_CLK_H SG 11 13 SG
5
4
3
2
1
TTYCS-4 P アカ(太) RED[B]
PM-31
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
RSB-096/097
A-D CONVERTER 4 AD_CLK_C GND 12 14 GND

ANTENNA UNIT
ミドリチャ
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
キ J609 TB-802
アカ
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
IF_VIDEO
BRN
ダイ IF_VIDEO
パフォーマンスモニター
GRN
RED
YEL
ORG
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
TOTAL : UP TO 31.5m
J4
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
合計 : 31.5m以下
+12V
+12V
03P9342
TB BOARD
XH10P-W-5P-A
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
XH10P-W-6P
-5/-12V
J3 1.5/10/20/
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
2.3m,φ9
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
2
DVI1TX2_N 1 30m,φ9
2 J602 J501/J521 J502/J522 J501
DVI1TX2_P
MAX. 100m (OVER 100m : REQUIRED RJB-001 )

KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B
*2
A_GND 3
4 KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A
NC
5 KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B
NC
6 KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A
NC
PASS THE AC LINE THROUGH A DOUBLE-CONTACT BREAKER

PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW
03P9229A
J9 NC 7
8 GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND
1
RGB BUFFER PCB

RGB ﾊﾞｯﾌｧ基板
DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 VS NC
J2 2 GND DVI1TX1_N 9 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V
VGA CABLE GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
RGB EXT. MONITOR 1 R_VIDEO 3 HS DVI1TX1_P 10
2 G_VIDEO J1 4 GND A_GND 11 SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC
3 1 5 12 SYS_FAIL_C 10 10 SYS_FAIL_C NC 10 10 NC
B_VIDEO R_VIDEO R NC
4 NC GND 2 6 GND NC 13
DVI-RGB CONVERSION BOARD

5 NC G_VIDEO 3 7 G VCC 14 J507/J527
*1 8 15
6 GND GND 4 GND GND 1
*2 操作部
RCU-016
COAXIAL 7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16 J622 2

操作部
RCU-015
RCU-014
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 8 GND GND 6 10 GND DVI1TXD_N 17 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H

または OR
VDR 9 NC H_SYNC 7 DVI1TXD_P 18 SYS_ACK_C 2 4 SYS_ACK_C

CONTROL UNIT
10 8 19
DSUB-BNC-1
GND GND SLB-FRN4-A A_GND
11 9 20
CONTROL UNIT
CONVERTOR *2
GND V_SYNC NC
BNCｺﾈｸﾀｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
13 H_SYNC VCC 11 A_GND 22
14 Y_SYNC GND 12 DVI1TXC_P 23 J605(TB)
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
P *1
*4
*3
*2
*1
3
HDG_B 2
TTYCS-1Q
:
:
:
:
HDG_GND 3
注記
HDG SENSOR
(IEC-61162-2)
J616(NH)
1 GND J607(TB)
*1
2 OP_HD_IN LOG_A 1
TTYCS-1
P
3 GND LOG_B 2
オプション
造船所手配
SPEED LOG
4 OP_BP_IN NC 3
ユーザー手配
(IEC-61162-1)
5 GND
6 OP_TRIG_IN
7 GND J606(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 *1
MASTER RADAR 8 OP_VIDEO_IN NAV_A 1
TTYCS-1
NAV_B 2 P
J617(NH)
NAVIGATOR
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1
3 GND J619(TB)
4 OP_BP_1
*1
ARPA_A 1
5 GND ARPA_B 2 P TTYCS-1
ECDIS
6 OP_TRIG_1 NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
SUB DISPLAY1 RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND
(FULL-LOG) 8 OP_VIDEO_1
J618(NH) J601
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
最長 100m ( 100mを超える場合はRJB-001が必要 )
GND
船内アラームシステム
4
NC 1 RS-232C CABLE
2 OP_HD_2 2
RXD PC
3 GND 3
TXD
*5 : 交流は両極切りブレーカ（造船所手配）を経由すること
4 OP_BP_2 4
NC
5 GND
GND 5
6 OP_TRIG_2
RS-232C
NC 6
*1 *5 SUB DISPLAY2 RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND 7
NC
BREAKER (SEMI-LOG) 8 OP_VIDEO_2
NC 8
*1 TB1 TB1
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 0.6m NC 9
H
1φ, 50-60Hz 1 1 H
SCALE
DRAWN
C
2 2 C
DWG.No.
CHECKED
APPROVED
J204 DVI-D MONITOR J611(TB)
*1
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
1 DVI0TX2_N 1
DPYC-1.5 AIS_TD_A
Feb. 2, '05 440VAC 2 DVI0TX2_P AIS_TD_B 2 P
RU-1803
1φ, 50-60Hz 3 A_GND AIS_RD_A 3

P *1
4
*2
NC AIS_RD_B 4
TTYCS-4
MASS
TRANSFORMER
5 NC AIS_GND 5 AIS
6 NC (IEC-61162-2)
7 NC
Y. Hatai
8 NC
RCN-001/002
C3519-C05- C
SLIM CONSOLE
9 DVI0TX1_N J620(TB)
TAKAHASHI.T
E. MIYOSHI
100-230VAC
kg
10 DVI0TX1_P TRK_TD_A 1
11 A_GND
スリムコンソール
TRK_TD_B 2 *1
5
12 NC TRK_RD_A 3
制御部
P TTYCS-1
13 TRK_RD_B 4
RPU-013
NC TRACK_CONTROL
14 VCC GND 5
(IEC-61162-1)
TTYCS-1
TB1 15
*1
1.3m GND
IV-1.25sq.
*1
1 16 NC
17 DVI0TXD_N
PROCESSOR UNIT
2 *1
18 DVI0TXD_P J612(TB)
3
2
1
TTYCS-7
19 A_GND ALARM1_0 1
ALARM1_1 2 P
20 NC
AC
AC
GND
21 NC ALARM2_0 3
DVI-D/D ALARM2_1 4 P
22 A_GND
J3 ALARM3_0 5
表示部
SINGLELINK5M,φ7 23 DVI0TXC_P P
ALARM3_1 6 *1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR
TMDS_DATA2(-) 1 24 DVI0TXC_N OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7
2 P FR-FTPC-CY, 10/20/30m, φ13
HUB-100
TMDS_DATA2(+) OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8
(8PORTS)
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 MPS588-C

MONITOR UNIT
4 P シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN TXP

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞﾊﾌﾞ
NC GND 10 ミドリ GRN 1

NAME
TYPE
DVI-D MONITOR P
名称
5 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
NC J205 SYS_FAIL_H 11 2
P シロ/ダイ WHT/ORG
DDC_CLOCK 6 1 DVI0TX2_N SYS_FAIL_C 12 3 RXP
アオ BLU
DDC_DATA 7 2 DVI0TX2_P 4 NC
シロ/アオ WHT/BLU P
*2
NC 8 3 A_GND 5 NC
ダイ ORG
TMDS_DATA(-) 9 4 NC 6 RXN
10 シロ/チャ WHT/BRN NC
7
MU-231CR (FR-2817/2827)
MU-201CR (FR-2117/2127)
TMDS_DATA(+) 5 NC チャ BRN
TMDS_DATA1/3_SHIELD 11 6 NC 8 NC
NC 12 7 NC
6
NC 13 8 NC
相互結線図
+5V_POWER 14 9 DVI0TX1_N
GND 15 10 DVI0TX1_P
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 11 NETWORK MPS588-C J302
A_GND P5E-4PTX-BL, 10m, φ6.3
TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 12 NC TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
TMDS_DATAB(+) 18 13 NC TXN 2 2 TXN

MARINE RADAR/ARPA
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19 14 VCC RXP 3 3 RXP

船舶用レーダー/ARPA
NC 20 15 NC 4 4 NC
LAN
GND
NC 21 NC 5 5 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
ｶｰﾄﾞ I/F ﾕﾆｯﾄ
16 NC
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 17 DVI0TXD_N RXN 6 6 RXN
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 1.5m 18 DVI0TXD_P NC 7 7 NC

TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 19 A_GND NC 8 8 NC
0.6m
20 NC
21 NC J614(TB) MJ-A3SPFD J1
MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
22 +12V 1 1 +12V
*2
*3 A_GND
ア−ス銅版 *1 23 DVI0TXC_P GND 2 2 GND
COPPER STRAP DVI CABLE 3 FG
24
S - 1
DVI0TXC_N
W=50 EXT. MONITOR
FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827 (RCN001/002)
D
C
B
A
*4
*3
*2
*1
*5
:
:
:
:
:
NOTE
A-D CONVERTER
OPTION
USER SUPPLY
TTYCS-4
*1
110/115/220/230VAC,
DPYC-1.5 *1
1φ,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
P
P
1
DPYCY-1.5 *1
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
4
3
2
1
03-2088(6-14P) *4
2
1
14
RW-9600,φ22.1,
J1
RW-4747
15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
J608(TB)
J603(XH)
AD_CLK_C
AD_CLK_H
AD_DATA_C
AD_DATA_H
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
BRN 1 J613(TB)
GYRO
GYRO_R2
64P1106A
TX_HV 1
BOARD
TB-801
TB901
3 NC
RED 2 GYRO_R1
J680 チャ BRN
*2
3 NC 2 1 TX_HV
NC
STRAIGHT CABLE BETWEEN CU-200 & HUB-100.

チャ
CONVERTER
1 J610(TB) 2 NC

ダイ(太) ORG[B]
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
2 アカ 24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS
J4(VH)
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
ORG 1 キ(太) YEL[B]
*7 : USE CROSS CABLE BETWEEN CU-200 & RPU-013 AND

ダイ GYRO_S1
IF ONE LINE OF AC IS GROUNDED, CONNECT IT TO

3 24V_MINUS 2 4 24V_MINUS
J911
アオ(太) BLU[B]
5
4
3
2
1
YEL
6
キ 2 GYRO_S2
03-2091(5P) キ
4 MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
ミドリ GRN 3 ハイ(太) GRY[B]
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
ダイ
アカ
チャ
GYRO_S3
SHIFT1-C
SHIFT1-H
*1 5 MOTOR(+) 4
6 MOTOR(+)
*6 : PASS THE AC LINE THROUGH A DOUBLE-CONTACT BREAKER

6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
MPYC-7 MOTOR(-) 5 7 MOTOR(-)
5
4
3
2
1
ムラサキ PPL 5
YEL
ORG
RED
BRN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 GYRO_FG シロ(太) WHT[B]
J7(NH)
GYROCOMPASS MOTOR(-) 6 8 MOTOR(-)
J/P922
03-2089(5P) アカ RED
"C" (COMMON) TERMINAL AND THE OTHER LINE TO "H" (HOT).

SPU_RF_D_A 7 9 SPU_RF_D_A
ミドリ GRN
SPU_RF_D_B 8 10 SPU_RF_D_B
J615(TB)
RF_SPU_D_A 9 クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A
チャ 1 +12V
RF_SPU_D_B
シロ WHT
10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
空中線部
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
アカ 2 GND ミドリ(太) GRN[B]
SG 11 13 SG
:
3 -5V
:
:
:
:
アカ(太) RED[B]
注記
PM-31
GND 12 14 GND
RSB-096/097
4 GND
2
ANTENNA UNIT
ミドリ 5 -12V TB-802

J609(TB)
キ IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
BRN
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
ダイ
GRN
RED
YEL
ORG
オプション
造船所手配
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ユーザー手配
J3
J4
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
03P9342
TB BOARD
XH10P-W-6P XH10P-W-5P-A
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
-5/-12V
J3 1.5/10/20/
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J501
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1 30m,φ9
J602 J501/J521 J502/J522
DVI1TX2_P 2
3 KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B
*2
A_GND
NC
KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B
NC 5
NC
PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW
03P9229A
J9 NC 7
1 VS NC
RGB BUFFER PCB

DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 J2 9 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V
3COX-2P-6C,5m 2 GND DVI1TX1_N
1 3 10 GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
RGB EXT. MONITOR R_VIDEO HS DVI1TX1_P
J1 11 SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC
2 G_VIDEO 4 GND A_GND
5 NC G_VIDEO 3 7 G VCC 14
*1 8 15
6 GND GND 4 GND GND J507/J527
*2 操作部
COAXIAL 7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16 1 SYS_FAIL_H

RCU-016
操作部
3
8 10 17 J622
C（コモン）端子に接続、他方はH(ホット)端子に接続。
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 GND GND 6 GND DVI1TXD_N
2
RCU-015
RCU-014
SYS_FAIL_C
または OR
VDR 9 NC H_SYNC 7 DVI1TXD_P 18 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H

10 GND GND 8 A_GND 19 SYS_ACK_C 2 4 SYS_ACK_C
DSUB-BNC-1
交流電源の片方がアースに落ちている場合は、そのラインを
CONTROL UNIT
SLB-FRN4-A
11 GND V_SYNC 9 NC 20
CONVERTOR *2
CONTROL UNIT
12 10 21
BNC CONNECTOR
NC GND NC
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
P *1
HDG_B 2
TTYCS-1Q
HDG_GND 3 HDG SENSOR
(IEC-61162-2)
*5,*6 J607(TB)
*1 TB1 TB4 TB1 *1
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 H LOG_A 1
1 1 1 H P TTYCS-1
1φ, 50-60Hz LOG_B 2 SPEED LOG
C
*7 : CU-200/RPU-013間はクロスケーブル、CU-200/HUB-100間はストレートケーブルを使用
2 2 2 C NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 DVI-D MONITOR
J204
4 1 DVI0TX2_N J606(TB)
*6 *1 5 2 *1
DVI0TX2_P
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
440VAC NAV_A 1
DPYC-1.5 6 3 A_GND NAV_B 2 P TTYCS-1
1φ, 50-60Hz 4 NAVIGATOR
コンソール
NC
RU-1803
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
RCN-003/004
5
スタンダード
NC
*2
6 NC
TRANSFORMER
7 NC J619(TB)
STANDARD CONSOLE
8 NC ARPA_A 1
*1
TB1 1.3m 9 TTYCS-1
DVI0TX1_N ARPA_B 2 P
4
1 10 DVI0TX1_P
ECDIS
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
2 11 A_GND
12 NC
13 NC
14 VCC J601
15
制御部
DVI-D/D GND NC 1
RPU-013
16 RS-232C CABLE
NC RXD 2
J3 SINGLELINK5M,φ7 PC
表示部
17 DVI0TXD_N
1 TXD 3
TMDS_DATA2(-) 18 DVI0TXD_P
2 NC 4
TMDS_DATA2(+) 19 A_GND GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 20 NC
MONITOR UNIT
6
RS-232C
NC
SCALE
DRAWN
NC 4 21 NC NC 7
DWG.No.
CHECKED
NC 5 22
APPROVED
A_GND NC 8
DDC_CLOCK 6 23 DVI0TXC_P
7 NC 9
DDC_DATA 24 DVI0TXC_N
Nov. 2, '04 NC 8
TMDS_DATA(-) 9
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
DVI-D MONITOR J611(TB)
MU-231CR (FAR-2817/2827)
MU-201CR (FAR-2117/2127)
TMDS_DATA1/3_SHIELD 11 J205
MASS
NC 12 AIS_TD_A 1
1 DVI0TX2_N P
NC 13 AIS_TD_B 2
2 DVI0TX2_P AIS_RD_A 3
+5V_POWER 14 3 P *1
A_GND AIS_RD_B 4
15
Y. Hatai
GND 4 NC 5
TTYCS-4
AIS_GND AIS
C3519-C06- C
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 5
TAKAHASHI.T
NC
E. MIYOSHI
kg
TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 6
(IEC-61162-2)
NC
TMDS_DATAB(+) 18 7 NC
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19 8 NC J620(TB)
5
NC 20 9 DVI0TX1_N
NC 21 TRK_TD_A 1
10 DVI0TX1_P
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 TRK_TD_B 2 *1
11 A_GND TRK_RD_A 3
TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 12 P TTYCS-1
NC TRK_RD_B 4 TRACK_CONTROL
TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 13 NC GND 5
14 VCC
(IEC-61162-1)
15 GND
16 NC
*1 17
*1
ア−ス銅板 DVI0TXD_N J612(TB) SHIP'S ALARM
3
2
1
18 DVI0TXD_P
TTYCS-7 SYSTEM
ALARM1_0 1
COPPER STRAP 19 ALARM1_1 2 P
A_GND 船内アラーム
W=50
AC
AC
20
GND
NC ALARM2_0 3 システム
ALARM2_1 4 P
*3 21 NC
DVI CABLE 22 A_GND ALARM3_0 5
EXT. MONITOR ALARM3_1 6 P
23 DVI0TXC_P
24 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7
DVI0TXC_N P NR203PF-VVS1.25
HUB-100
OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8
(8PORTS)
*3 J616(NH) MPS588-C
NAME
TYPE
EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 P5E-4PTX-BL
名称
1 GND P 1 TXP
GND 10
2
LAN
OP_HD_IN 2 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
SYS_FAIL_H 11
3 P
TXN
TXP
GND
NC
RXN
NC
RXP
RXP
NC
NC
SYS_FAIL_C 12 3
NETWORK
4 OP_BP_IN 4 NC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
*2
5 GND 5 NC
6 OP_TRIG_IN 6 RXN
7 GND 7 NC
RW-4864,φ9.5
MASTER RADAR 8 OP_VIDEO_IN 8 NC
J617(NH)
6
相互結線図
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1
3 GND
P5E-4PTX-BL MPS588-C J302
4 OP_BP_1
1 TXP
5 GND
CU-200
2 TXN
6 OP_TRIG_1
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
SUB DISPLAY1 RW-4864,φ9.5 3 RXP

7 GND
4 NC
5 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
*7
J618(NH) 6 RXN
7 NC
1 GND
2 8 NC
OP_HD_2
3 GND J614(TB)
4 MJ-A3SPFD J1
OP_BP_2 MJ-A3SPF0015 シロ WHT
+12V 1 1 +12V
*2
5 GND クロ BLK
GND 2 2 GND
SUB DISPLAY2 RW-4864,φ9.5 6 OP_TRIG_2
7 GND 3 FG
(SEMI-LOG)
S - 2
8 OP_VIDEO_2
FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827 (RCN003/004)
D
C
B
A
（空中線部用） FOR ANTENNA UNIT
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
TPYC-2.5 *1
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 *2
:
:
:
:
:
GND
NOTE
TPYC-2.5 *1
IV-8sq. *1
220VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-6522 *2
保護アース PE
200VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC-2.5 *1
440VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5466-1 *2
220VAC,3φ,60Hz
OPTION
K2
380VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC-2.5 *1
1 3φ(U)
440VAC,3φ,60Hz 3 3φ(V)
USER SUPPLY
PSU-007
（高速回転用）FOR HSC(45RPM) 5 3φ(W)

1
電源制御部
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
220VAC,3φ,50Hz
220VAC,3φ,60Hz
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
440VAC,3φ,60Hz
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
TB1
03-2088(6-14P) J604 DPYC-1.5 *1
2
1
14
13
ANT_12V_ON 1 1 ANT_12V_ON
J1
2 2 GND
GND NC
3φ(W) 9
3φ(V) 6
3φ(U) 4
XK1
03-2090(3P)
GYRO
J5(VH)
64P1106A
BRN 1 GYRO_R2
2
110/115VAC,1φ,
RED GYRO_R1 *1
DPYC-1.5
CONVERTER
BOARD *2
J680 3 NC 220/230VAC,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2

03P9342
1 チャ DPYCY-1.5 *1
TB BOARD
NC
GYRO_CLK-C
GYRO_CLK-H
GYRO_DATA-C
GYRO_DATA-H
アカ 100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
TPYCY-2.5
*1
J4(VH)
2
J7(NH)
3 ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1
5
4
3
2
1
4 キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2 J613(TB) *4

5 ミドリ GRN 3 GYRO_S3 TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,
*1
キ
15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
RW4747
MPYC-7 6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T NC 2 TB-801

ムラサキ PPL 5 GYRO_FG チャ BRN
3 NC
GYROCOMPASS 7 1 TX_HV
03-2089(3P)
03-2091(5P)
チャ BRN
ダイ ORG
アカ RED
YEL
J610(TB) 2 NC
TB-902
3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS

24V_PLUS 1
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
24V_MINUS 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V_MINUS

J608(TB)
アオ(太) BLU[B]
*5
*3
*4
*2
*1
1 AD_DATA_H J603(XH) 3 5
P ハイ(太) GRY[B]
2
:
:
:
:
:
-12V
GND
+5V
GND
+12v
4 6
注記
*1 2 AD_DATA_C
5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7
3 AD_CLK_H
J615(TB)
TTYCS-4 P シロ(太) WHT[B]
5
4
3
2
1
A-D CONVERTER 4 AD_CLK_C 6 8
SPU_RF_D_A 7 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A
空中線部
ミドリチャ SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B

PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
キアカ RF_SPU_D_A 9 クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A

J911
BRN
6
5
4
3
2
1
ダイシロ WHT
造船所手配
オプション
RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
RED
GRN
YEL
ORG
SG 11 ミドリ(太) GRN[B] 13 SG
ユーザー手配
アカ(太) RED[B]
6
5
4
3
2
1
14 GND
3
2
1
GND 12
J3
J4
TB-802
NC
NC
J609
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
PM-51
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
モニター
MONITOR
ANTENNA UNIT RSB-098/099
-5/-12V
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J3
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
TB 03P9349
RSB-100/101/102(FOR_45RPM)
PERFORMANCE
DVI1TX2_N 1
パフォーマンス
DVI1TX2_P 2
A_GND 3
*2
NC 4 TOTAL : UP TO 31.5m
NC 5 合計 : 31.5m以下
03P9229A
NC 6 XH10P-W-6P XH10P-W-5P-A
J9 2.3m,φ9
RGB-BUFF基板
NC 7 J602(XH) J501/J521 J502/J522 1.5/10/20/ J501
DVI-RGB変換基板
30m,φ9
*3 1 VS NC 8 KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B
J2 2 GND DVI1TX1_N 9 2 2
RGB BUFFER BOARD

VGA CABLE KEY_TXD_A 2 KEY_TXD_A KEY_TXD_A 2 KEY_TXD_A
RGB EXT. MONITOR 1 R_VIDEO 3 HS DVI1TX1_P 10 KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B
2 G_VIDEO J1 4 GND A_GND 11 KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A
3 B_VIDEO R_VIDEO 1 5 R NC 12 PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW
4 NC GND 2 6 GND NC 13 GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND
3
5 NC G_VIDEO 3 7 G VCC 14 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V

*1 6 GND GND 8 GND GND 15
交流は両極切りブレーカ（造船所手配）を経由すること
COAXIAL 7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16 SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 8 GND GND 6 10 GND DVI1TXD_N 17 10 10 SYS_FAIL_C NC 10 10 NC
SYS_FAIL_C
*2
VDR 9 NC H_SYNC 7 DVI1TXD_P 18
DSUB-BNC-1
10 GND GND 8 A_GND 19
CONVERTOR *2
SLB-FRN4-A
J507/J527
または
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
操作部
操作部
RCU-015
RCU-014
1
RCU-016

OR
14 Y_SYNC GND 12 DVI1TXC_P 23 J622 2

15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
SYS_ACK_C 2 4 SYS_ACK_C
J616(NH)
1 GND J605(TB)
2 OP_HD_IN HDG_A 1
3 GND P *1
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
4 OP_BP_IN HDG_GND 3 HDG SENSOR
5 GND
6 OP_TRIG_IN
(IEC-61162-2)
7 GND J607(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 LOG_A *1
MASTER RADAR 8 OP_VIDEO_IN 1
LOG_B P TTYCS-1
2 SPEED LOG
J617(NH) NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1
4
3 GND J606(TB)
4 OP_BP_1 *1
NAV_A 1
5 GND P TTYCS-1
NAV_B 2 NAVIGATOR
6 OP_TRIG_1 NC 3
SUB DISPLAY1 7 GND (IEC-61162-1)
RW-4864,φ9.5
J619(TB)
J618(NH) *1
1 ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
GND P
2 ARPA_B 2 ECDIS
OP_HD_2
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 GND
SCALE
DRAWN
4 OP_BP_2
DWG.No.
CHECKED
5 GND
APPROVED
J601
6 OP_TRIG_2
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
NC 1
SUB DISPLAY2 7 GND

RS-232C CABLE
*1 *5 RW-4864,φ9.5 RXD 2
Feb. 2, '05
8 OP_VIDEO_2
PC
BREAKER (SEMI-LOG) TXD 3
*1 TB1 TB1 NC 4
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 H 0.6m GND 5
1φ, 50-60Hz 1 1 H NC 6
MASS
C
2 2 C NC 7
J204 DVI-D MONITOR NC 8
NC 9
C3521-C02- C
1
Y. Hatai
*1 DVI0TX2_N
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
2 DVI0TX2_P
TAKAHASHI.T
DPYC-1.5
E. MIYOSHI
440VAC 3 A_GND
kg
RU-1803
1φ, 50-60Hz 4 NC J611(TB)

5 NC AIS_TD_A 1
*2
2 P
5
6 NC AIS_TD_B
TRANSFORMER
100-230VAC
7 NC AIS_RD_A 3 *1
RCN-001/002
8 NC AIS_RD_B 4 P
SLIM CONSOLE
TTYCS-4
9 DVI0TX1_N AIS_GND 5 AIS
10 DVI0TX1_P (IEC-61162-2)
11 A_GND
J620(TB)
制御部
12 NC
TTYCS-1
*1
RPU-013
13 NC TRK_TD_A 1
IV-1.25sq.
*1
14 VCC TRK_TD_B 2 *1
15 GND TRK_RD_A 3
P TTYCS-1
16 NC TRK_RD_B 4
3
2
1
TRACK_CONTROL
TB1 17 DVI0TXD_N GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
1.3m (IEC-61162-1)
18 DVI0TXD_P
AC
AC
1
GND
19 A_GND
2 20 NC J612(TB) *1
21 TTYCS-7
NC ALARM1_0 1
VIDEO IN DVI-D DVI-D/D 22 A_GND ALARM1_1 2 P
ﾓﾆﾀｰ部
23 DVI0TXC_P ALARM2_0 3 *1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR

NAME
TYPE
HUB-100
SINGLELINK5M,φ7
(8PORTS)
名称
TMDS_DATA2(-) 1 24 DVI0TXC_N ALARM2_1 4 P FR-FTPC-CY, 10/20/30m, φ13 MPS588-C

シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN
TMDS_DATA2(+) 2 ALARM3_0 5 1 TXP

P ミドリ GRN
SWITCHING HUB
P
MONITOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 ALARM3_1 6 2 TXN

J205 DVI-D MONITOR
NC 4 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7 シロ/ダイ WHT/ORG RXP
1 DVI0TX2_N 3
NC 5 OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 P アオ BLU NC
*2
2 DVI0TX2_P 4
DDC_CLOCK 6 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 シロ/アオ WHT/BLU P NC
3 A_GND 5
DDC_DATA 7 GND 10 P ダイ ORG RXN
6
MU-231CR (FAR-2837S)
NC 8 4 NC シロ/チャ WHT/BRN
SYS_FAIL_H 11 7 NC
TMDS_DATA(-) 9 5 NC P チャ BRN
6 SYS_FAIL_C 12 8 NC
6
TMDS_DATA(+) 10 NC
相互結線図
NC 12 8 NC
NC 13 9 DVI0TX1_N
+5V_POWER 14 10 DVI0TX1_P NETWORK
11 A_GND MPS588-C J302
GND 15 P5E-4PTX-BL, 10m,φ6.3
TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
12 NC
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 TXN 2 2 TXN

TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 13 NC
3 RXP
14 VCC RXP 3
TMDS_DATAB(+) 18 NC 4 4 NC
15
CARD I/F UNIT
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19 GND
16 NC NC 5 5 NC
NC 20 RXN 6 6 RXN
21 17 DVI0TXD_N
*2
NC NC 7 7 NC
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 18 DVI0TXD_P
19 NC 8 8 NC
TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 1.5m A_GND
TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 20 NC J614(TB) MJ-A3SPFD J1
FAR-2137S/2837S (RCN001/002)
0.6m 21 NC MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
+12V 1 1 +12V
*3 22 A_GND
GND 2 2 GND
DVI CABLE 23 DVI0TXC_P
*1 3 FG
S - 3
ア−ス銅版 24 DVI0TXC_N
COPPER STRAP
EXT. MONITOR
W=50
D
C
B
A
TPYC-2.5 *1
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 *2
TPYC-2.5 *1
（空中線部用） FOR ANTENNA UNIT 220VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-6522 *2
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
TPYC-2.5 *1
440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1 *2
:
:
:
:
:
NOTE
K2
TPYC-2.5 *1
PSU-007
200VAC,3φ,50Hz 1 1 3φ(U)
2 3 3φ(V)
電源制御部
220VAC,3φ,60Hz
3 5 3φ(W)
OPTION
380VAC,3φ,50Hz
TB2
440VAC,3φ,60Hz
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
USER SUPPLY
（高速回転用）FOR HSC(45RPM)
220VAC,3φ,50Hz
1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
A-D CONVERTER
220VAC,3φ,60Hz
440VAC,3φ,60Hz TB1
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
1 ANT_12V_ON
TTYCS-4
2 GND
*1
3φ(W) 9
3φ(V) 6
3φ(U) 4
XK1
P
P
3
2
1
TB3
4
3
2
1
03-2088(6-14P) 110/115VAC,1φ, DPYC-1.5 *1
2
1
14
2 GND
220/230VAC,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2
J1
J608(TB)
J604(TB)
*1
J603(XH)
AD_CLK_C
AD_CLK_H
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz DPYCY-1.5
TPYCY-2.5

AD_DATA_C
AD_DATA_H
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
1 ANT_12V_ON

J613(TB) *4
*1
BRN 1 RW4747
GYRO
GYRO_R2 RW-9600,φ22.1,
64P1106A
TX_HV 1
BOARD
RED 2

GYRO_R1 2 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
*2
J680 3 NC NC
チャチャ BRN
TB-801
CONVERTER
1
3 NC
アカ 1 TX_HV

2 J610(TB)
J4(VH)
ダイ 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 2 NC
03-2091(5P)
ORG GYRO_S1
TB-902
3
3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
キ 24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS
YEL 2
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
4 GYRO_S2 キ(太) YEL[B]
キ
24V_MINUS 2 4 24V_MINUS
ミドリアオ(太) BLU[B]

GRN 3
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
ダイ
アカ
チャ
*1 5 GYRO_S3 MOTOR(+) 3 5 NC
空中線部
アオ BLU 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B]

MPYC-7 6 GYRO_T MOTOR(+) 4 6 NC
ムラサキ
5
SHIFT1-C 4
SHIFT1-H 3
2
1
PPL 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
YEL
ORG
RED
BRN
7 GYRO_FG MOTOR(-) 5
J7(NH)
GYROCOMPASS 03-2089(5P) シロ(太) WHT[B]
7 NC
MOTOR(-) 6 8 NC
アカ RED
ミドリ GRN
2
*3
*5
*4
*1
*2
SPU_RF_D_B 8 クロ BLK 10 SPU_RF_D_B
RF_SPU_D_A 9 11 RF_SPU_D_A
J615(TB)
:
:
:
:
J911
シロ WHT
注記
PM TRIG 5
GND 4
-12V 3
+12V 2
PM LEVEL 1
PM ENABLE 6
チャ 1 +12V RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B

ミドリ(太) GRN[B]
アカ 2 GND SG 11 アカ(太) RED[B] 13 SG
GND 12 14 GND
3 -5V
RSB-100/101/102(FOR_45RPM)
4 GND TB-802
ミドリ 5 -12V J609(TB)
PM-51
キ IF_VIDEO
モニター
MONITOR
IF_VIDEO
BRN
造船所手配
オプション
ダイ
GRN
RED
YEL
ORG
PERFORMANCE
ユーザー手配
TB 03P9349
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J4
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
03P9342
TB BOARD
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
-5/-12V
J3 1.5/10/20/
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J501
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1 30m,φ9
2 J602 J501/J521 J502/J522
DVI1TX2_P KEY_TXD_B
3 KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1
*2
A_GND
NC
NC
NC
J9 PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW
03P9229A
NC 7
1 8 GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND
VS NC
RGB BUFFER PCB

DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 J2 9 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V

GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
2 J1 4 11 SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC
G_VIDEO GND A_GND
4 2 6 13
3
NC GND GND NC
*1
6 GND GND 4 8 GND GND 15 J507/J527
*2 操作部
COAXIAL 7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16
1 SYS_FAIL_H
RCU-016
操作部
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 8 GND GND 6 10 GND DVI1TXD_N 17 J622 2

RCU-015
RCU-014
SYS_FAIL_C
または OR
DSUB-BNC-1
CONTROL UNIT
SLB-FRN4-A
CONVERTOR *2
CONTROL UNIT
C（コモン）端子に接続し、他方はH(ホット)端子に接続します。
12 10 21
BNC CONNECTOR
NC GND NC
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
P *1
HDG_B 2
TTYCS-1Q
(IEC-61162-2)
*5,*6 J607(TB)
*1 TB1 TB4 TB1 *1
100-120/200-240VAC LOG_A 1
DPYC-2.5 H 1 H P TTYCS-1
1 1 LOG_B 2 SPEED LOG
1φ, 50-60Hz C
2 2 2 C NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 J204 DVI-D MONITOR
*6 4 1 DVI0TX2_N
*1 J606(TB)
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
440VAC 5 2 DVI0TX2_P *1
DPYC-1.5 NAV_A 1
1φ, 50-60Hz 3 A_GND P TTYCS-1
6 NAV_B 2
RU-1803
4 NC
NAVIGATOR
NC 3
コンソール
5 NC
(IEC-61162-1)
*2
RCN-003/004
スタンダード
TRANSFORMER
NC
7 NC J619(TB)
4
8 NC *1
STANDARD CONSOLE
TB1 ARPA_A 1
9 DVI0TX1_N ARPA_B 2 P TTYCS-1
1 10 DVI0TX1_P
ECDIS
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
2 11 A_GND
12 NC
表示部
13 NC
14 VCC J601
15
制御部
GND 1
DVI-D/D NC
RPU-013
RS-232C CABLE
MONITOR UNIT
16 NC
J3 SINGLELINK5M,φ7 RXD 2 PC
17 DVI0TXD_N
1 TXD 3
TMDS_DATA2(-) 18 DVI0TXD_P
2 NC 4
TMDS_DATA2(+) 19 A_GND
SCALE
DRAWN
GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 20
DWG.No.
CHECKED
NC
MU-231CR (FR-2837S)
MU-201CR (FR-2137S)
6
RS-232C
NC
APPROVED
NC 4 21 NC
5 NC 7
NC 22 A_GND
6 NC 8
DDC_CLOCK 23
Nov. 4, '04
DVI0TXC_P 9
7 NC
NC 8
TMDS_DATA(-) 9
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
J611(TB)
MASS
11 DVI-D MONITOR
TMDS_DATA1/3_SHIELD J205
NC 12 AIS_TD_A 1
1 DVI0TX2_N P
NC 13 AIS_TD_B 2
2
C3521-C03- C
DVI0TX2_P
Y. Hatai
14 AIS_RD_A 3 *1
+5V_POWER 3 A_GND P
AIS_RD_B 4
TAKAHASHI.T
GND 15 TTYCS-4
E. MIYOSHI
4 NC AIS_GND 5 AIS
16
kg
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 5 NC
TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 (IEC-61162-2)
6 NC
5
NC 20 9 DVI0TX1_N
NC 21 TRK_TD_A 1
10 DVI0TX1_P
11 A_GND TRK_RD_A 3
TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 13 NC GND 5 (IEC-61162-1)
14 VCC
15 GND
16 NC
*1 *1
17 DVI0TXD_N J612(TB) SHIP'S ALARM
ア−ス銅板
3
2
1
18 DVI0TXD_P
TTYCS-7 SYSTEM
ALARM1_0 1
COPPER STRAP 19 A_GND ALARM1_1 2 P
船内アラーム
AC
AC
W=50 20
GND
NC ALARM2_0 3
ALARM2_1 4 P システム
*3 21 NC
ALARM3_1 6 P
EXT. MONITOR 23 DVI0TXC_P
HUB-100
(8PORTS)
J616(NH) MPS588-C
NAME
TYPE
1 GND P
名称
1 TXP
GND 10
2 OP_HD_IN
LAN
2 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
SYS_FAIL_H 11
3 P
TXN
TXP
GND
NC
RXN
NC
RXP
RXP
NC
NC
SYS_FAIL_C 12 3
NETWORK
4 OP_BP_IN 4 NC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
*2
5 GND 5 NC
6 OP_TRIG_IN 6 RXN
7 GND 7 NC
RW-4864,φ9.5
J617(NH)
6
1 GND
相互結線図
2 OP_HD_1
3 GND P5E-4PTX-BL
MPS588-C J302
4 OP_BP_1
1 TXP
5 GND
CU-200
2 TXN
6 OP_TRIG_1
3 RXP
7 GND
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
SUB DISPLAY1 RW-4864,φ9.5 4 NC

8 OP_VIDEO_1
(FULL-LOG) 5 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
*7
J618(NH) 6 RXN
1 GND 7 NC
2 OP_HD_2 8 NC
3 GND
J614(TB) MJ-A3SPFD J1
4 OP_BP_2 MJ-A3SPF0015 シロ WHT
+12V 1 1 +12V
*2
5 GND クロ BLK
6 OP_TRIG_2 GND 2 2 GND
FAR-2137S/2837S (RCN003/004)
SUB DISPLAY2 RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND 3 FG

8 OP_VIDEO_2
S - 4
(SEMI-LOG)
D
C
B
A
*1
TB901
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
*8 DPYCY-1.5
1 100VAC_H
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
NOTE
J911
2 100VAC_C 5
4
3
2
1
6
氷結防止用
*1 3 NC
DE-ICER DPYC-1.5
RSB-103
110/115/220/230VAC, RU-3305 *2
空中線部
OPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
PM-31
MONITOR
モニター
J/P922
1φ,50-60Hz
ANTENNA UNIT
USER SUPPLY
PERFORMANCE
*1
保護ｱｰｽ PE
IV-3.5sq.
WITH DE-ICER
氷結防止あり
1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
MOTOR_C 8
MOTOR_C 7
MOTOR_H 6
MOTOR_H 5
GND 9
GND 8
PM-ENABL 7
PM-LEVEL 6
PM-TRIG 5
-12V 4
BP 3
HD 2
+12V 1
NC 11
NC 10
RW-4747
TB801
TB803
NO DE-ICER
A-D CONVERTER
氷結防止なし
TTYCS-4
OR WRJ-9
MAX.30m
MPYCY-19
P
P
*1

*8 : USE 3A BREAKER IN SHIP'S MAINS SWITCH BOX.

導波管 WAVEGUIDE
4
3
2
1

03-2088(6-14P)
1
TB803
14
TB804
11 NC
10 NC
3 BP
2 HD
2 NC
J1
9 GND
8 GND
J608(TB)
4 -12V
1 +12V
FR-9-20/30/50(20/30/50m)

J603(XH)
AD_CLK_C
AD_CLK_H
AD_DATA_C
AD_DATA_H
03-2090(3P) J613(TB)
J5(VH)
5 PM-TRIG
3 MOTOR_C
1 MOTOR_H
7 PM-ENABL
6 PM-LEVEL
BRN 1
GYRO
GYRO_R2 TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,
64P1106A
BOARD

RED 2 GYRO_R1 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
NC 2 TB-801
*2
J680 3 NC チャ BRN
チャ 1 TX_HV
CONVERTER
1 J610(TB) 2 NC
2 アカダイ(太) ORG[B]
J4(VH)
ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1 24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS
3 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V_MINUS
キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2 24V_MINUS 2
2
03-2091(5P) キ
4 アオ(太) BLU[B]
ミドリ GRN 3 MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
ダイ
アカ
チャ
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
*1 5 GYRO_S3
アオ BLU 4 MOTOR(+) 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6 MOTOR(+)
MPYC-7 6 GYRO_T
ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
5
SHIFT1-C 4
SHIFT1-H 3
2
1
ムラサキ PPL 5 7 MOTOR(-)
YEL
ORG
RED
BRN
GYROCOMPASS 7 GYRO_FG MOTOR(-) 5
J7(NH)
03-2089(5P) MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR(-)
RTR-081

送受信部
*3
*5
*1
*4
*2
SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B
J615(TB)
クロ BLK
:
:
:
:
注記
チャ 1 +12V シロ WHT
アカ 2 GND ミドリ(太) GRN[B]
-5V
SG 11 13 SG
3 アカ(太) RED[B]
GND GND 12 14 GND
4
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
ミドリ 5 -12V TB-802

キ J609(TB)
IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
BRN
造船所手配
オプション
ダイ
GRN
RED
YEL
ORG
ユーザー手配
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J4
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
03P9342
TB BOARD
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
-5/-12V
*1
J3 1.5/10/20/
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J501
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1 30m,φ9
2 J602 J501/J521 J502/J522
IV-8sq.
DVI1TX2_P KEY_TXD_B
3 KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1
*2
A_GND
NC
NC
NC
*8 : 船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用
03P9229A
NC 7
VS NC
RGB BUFFER PCB

DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V

3
3COX-2P-6C,5m J2 2 GND DVI1TX1_N 9

GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
RGB EXT. 1 R_VIDEO 3 HS DVI1TX1_P 10
MONITOR G_VIDEO GND A_GND
*1
*2 操作部

RCU-016
操作部

RCU-015
RCU-014
SYS_FAIL_C
C（コモン）端子に接続し、他方はH(ホット)端子に接続
または OR

DSUB-BNC-1
CONTROL UNIT
SLB-FRN4-A
CONVERTOR *2
CONTROL UNIT
12 10 21
BNC CONNECTOR
NC GND NC
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
HDG_B 2 P *1
HDG_GND 3
TTYCS-1Q
HDG SENSOR
(IEC-61162-2)
*5,*6 *1 J607(TB)
TB1 TB4 TB1 *1
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 H LOG_A 1
1 1 1 H LOG_B 2 P TTYCS-1
1φ, 50-60Hz C SPEED LOG
2 2 2 C NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 DVI-D MONITOR
J204
*6 *1 4 1 DVI0TX2_N
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
J606(TB)
440VAC DPYC-1.5 5 2 DVI0TX2_P NAV_A 1
*1
TTYCS-1
RU-1803
1φ, 50-60Hz 3 A_GND NAV_B 2 P
6 NAVIGATOR
4 NC
*2
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
4
コンソール
5 NC
TRANSFORMER
RCN-003/004
スタンダード
6 NC
7 NC J619(TB)
8 NC ARPA_A 1
*1
TB1
STANDARD CONSOLE
9 DVI0TX1_N ARPA_B 2 P TTYCS-1

1 10 DVI0TX1_P
ECDIS
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
2 11 A_GND
表示部
12 NC
MU-231CR
13 NC
14 VCC J601
15
制御部
GND
MONITOR UNIT
DVI-D/D NC 1
RPU-013
16 RS-232C CABLE
NC RXD 2
J3 SINGLELINK5M,φ7 17
PC
SCALE
DRAWN TMDS_DATA2(-) 1 18
DVI0TXD_N TXD 3
DWG.No.
CHECKED
DVI0TXD_P
APPROVED
2 NC 4
TMDS_DATA2(+) 19 A_GND GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 20 NC 6
RS-232C
4 NC
NC 21
Nov. 4, '04
NC NC 7
NC 5 22 A_GND
6 NC 8
DDC_CLOCK 23 DVI0TXC_P
7 NC 9
MASS NC 8
TMDS_DATA(-) 9
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
Y. Hatai
C3527-C03- B NC 12 AIS_TD_A 1
1 DVI0TX2_N P
NC 13 AIS_TD_B 2
2
TAKAHASHI.T
DVI0TX2_P AIS_RD_A 3
E. MIYOSHI
+5V_POWER 14 3 P *1
A_GND 4
kg
15 AIS_RD_B TTYCS-4
GND 4 NC AIS_GND 5
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 5
AIS
NC
TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 6
(IEC-61162-2)
5
NC
NC 20 9 DVI0TX1_N
NC 21 TRK_TD_A 1
10 DVI0TX1_P
11 A_GND TRK_RD_A 3
14 VCC
(IEC-61162-1)
15 GND
16 NC
*1 *1
ア−ス銅板 17 DVI0TXD_N J612(TB) SHIP'S ALARM
3
2
1
18 DVI0TXD_P
TTYCS-7 SYSTEM
ALARM1_0 1
船内アラーム
AC
AC
W=50 20
GND
NC ALARM2_0 3
*3 ALARM2_1 4 P システム
21 NC
ALARM3_1 6 P
DVI0TXC_N P
HUB-100
OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 NR203PF-VVS1.25
(8PORTS)
J616(NH) MPS588-C
NAME
TYPE
名称
1 GND P 1 TXP
GND 10
2 OP_HD_IN
LAN
2 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
SYS_FAIL_H 11
P
6
3
TXN
TXP
GND
NC
RXN
NC
RXP
RXP
NC
NC
SYS_FAIL_C 12 3
NETWORK
4 OP_BP_IN 4 NC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
*2
5 GND 5 NC
6 OP_TRIG_IN 6 RXN
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND 7 NC
J617(NH)
1 GND
相互結線図
2 OP_HD_1
3 GND
4 OP_BP_1
1 TXP
5 GND
CU-200
2 TXN
6 OP_TRIG_1
3 RXP
4 NC
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
5 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
6 RXN
*7
J618(NH)
1 GND 7 NC
2 OP_HD_2 8 NC
FAR-2827W (RCN003/004)
3
GND J614(TB)
4 MJ-A3SPF0015 MJ-A3SPFD J1
OP_BP_2 シロ WHT
+12V 1 1 +12V
*2
5 GND クロ BLK
GND 2 2 GND
6 OP_TRIG_2
(SEMI-LOG) 8 OP_VIDEO_2
S - 5
D
C
B
A
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
:
:
:
:
:
NOTE
*8 DPYCY-1.5 *1
氷結防止用 100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
TB901
DE-ICER DPYC-1.5 *1
110/115/220/230VAC, RU-3305 *2 1 100VAC_H
OPTION
1φ,50-60Hz 2 100VAC_C RSB-105
RSB-104
3 NC
空中線部
200VAC,3φ,50Hz
USER SUPPLY
空中線部モーター用 220VAC,3φ,60Hz J911
1 PM LEVEL
(380/440VAC)
(200/220VAC)
ANTENNA UNIT
FOR MOTOR IN ANTENNA UNIT TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
380VAC,3φ,50Hz
2 +12V
モニター
MONITOR
440VAC,3φ,60Hz 3
1
-12V
PM-51
WITH DE-ICER
氷結防止あり
*1
保護ｱｰｽ PE
IV-3.5sq.
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1 4 GND
PERFORMANCE
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 *2 5
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1 PM TRIG
220VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-6522 *2 6 PM ENABLE
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1
440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1 *2
TB 03P9349
NC
NC
GND
GND
PM-ENABL
PM-LEVEL
PM-TRIG
-12V
BP
HD
+12V
RW-4747
NO DE-ICER
TB803
氷結防止なし
3φ(W) 3
3φ(V) 2
TTYCS-4 *1 3φ(U) 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
TB902
A-D CONVERTER
P
P

20/30m
MAX.30m

MPYCY-12

*1
TPYCY-2.5 *1

4
3
2
1
LHPX-20D-ASSY
03-2088(6-14P) TB911
2
1
14
3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)

J1
J608(TB)
11 NC
10 NC
3 BP
2 HD
J603(XH)
AD_CLK_C
AD_CLK_H
TB912
TB803
9 GND
8 GND
AD_DATA_C
AD_DATA_H
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
4 -12V
1 +12V
J613(TB)
3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
BRN 1 *4
GYRO
GYRO_R2

5 PM-TRIG
64P1106A
TX_HV 1
BOARD
7 PM-ENABL
6 PM-LEVEL
RED 2 GYRO_R1 RW-9600,φ22.1,
*2
3 NC 2 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
J680 NC TB-801
チャチャ BRN
CONVERTER
1 1 TX_HV
2 アカ J610(TB) 2 NC
J4(VH)
3 ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
24V_PLUS 1
キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2 キ(太) YEL[B]
03-2091(5P) キ
4 24V_MINUS 2 4 24V_MINUS
ミドリ GRN 3
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
ダイ
アカ
チャ
*1 5 GYRO_S3 MOTOR(+) 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5 NC
2
6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T ハイ(太) GRY[B]

MPYC-7 MOTOR(+) 4 6 NC
5
SHIFT1-C 4
SHIFT1-H 3
2
1
ムラサキ PPL 5
YEL
ORG
RED
BRN
GYROCOMPASS 7 GYRO_FG ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
J7(NH)
MOTOR(-) 5 7 NC
03-2089(5P) シロ(太) WHT[B]
MOTOR(-) 6 8 NC
RTR-082
*3
*5
*4
*1
*2
送受信部
:
ミドリ GRN
:
:
:
:
注記
J615(TB)
クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A
チャ 1 +12V RF_SPU_D_A 9 シロ WHT
アカ GND RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
2 ミドリ(太) GRN[B]
-5V SG 11 13 SG
3 アカ(太) RED[B]
GND GND 12 14 GND
4
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
ミドリ 5 -12V TB-802

J609(TB)
キ
造船所手配
オプション
IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
BRN
ダイ
ユーザー手配
GRN
RED
YEL
ORG
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J4
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
03P9342
TB BOARD
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
-5/-12V
J3 1.5/10/20/
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J501
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1 30m,φ9
J602 J501/J521 J502/J522
IV-8sq.
DVI1TX2_P 2
3
*2
A_GND
NC
保護アース PE

NC
NC
03P9229A
NC 7
*3 1 8 GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND
VS NC
RGB BUFFER PCB

DVI-RGB変換基板
J2 9 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V

RGB EXT. 10 GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
1 R_VIDEO 3 HS DVI1TX1_P
3
MONITOR J1 11 SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC

2 G_VIDEO 4 GND A_GND
10 10
交流電源の片方がアースに落ちている場合は、
3 B_VIDEO R_VIDEO 1 5 R NC 12 SYS_FAIL_C 10 10 SYS_FAIL_C NC NC
*1 5 NC G_VIDEO 3 7 G VCC 14
COAXIAL
*2 操作部
7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16 1 SYS_FAIL_H

RCU-016
操作部
RCU-015
RCU-014
SYS_FAIL_C
または OR

DSUB-BNC-1
SLB-FRN4-A
CONTROL UNIT
CONVERTOR *2
CONTROL UNIT
12 10 21
BNC CONNECTOR
NC GND NC
そのラインをC（コモン）端子に接続し、他方はH(ホット)端子に接続
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
HDG_B 2 P *1
HDG_GND 3
TTYCS-1Q
HDG SENSOR
(IEC-61162-2)
*5,*6 *1 TB1 TB4 TB1 J607(TB)
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 H LOG_A 1
*1
1φ, 50-60Hz 1 1 1 H P TTYCS-1
C LOG_B 2 SPEED LOG
2 2 2 C NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 DVI-D MONITOR
*6 J204
*1 4 1
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
440VAC DVI0TX2_N J606(TB)
DPYC-1.5 5 2 DVI0TX2_P *1
1φ, 50-60Hz NAV_A 1
RU-1803
6 3 A_GND NAV_B 2 P TTYCS-1
4 NAVIGATOR
コンソール
NC
*2
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
RCN-003/004
5 NC
TRANSFORMER
スタンダード
6 NC
4
7 NC J619(TB)
*1
STANDARD CONSOLE
8 NC ARPA_A 1
TB1 9 TTYCS-1
DVI0TX1_N ARPA_B 2 P
1 10 DVI0TX1_P
ECDIS
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
2 11 A_GND
表示部
12 NC
MU-231CR
13 NC
14 VCC J601
MONITOR UNIT
15
制御部
DVI-D/D GND NC 1
RPU-013
16 RS-232C CABLE
NC RXD 2
J3 SINGLELINK5M,φ7 17
PC
DVI0TXD_N TXD 3
TMDS_DATA2(-) 1 18 DVI0TXD_P
SCALE
DRAWN TMDS_DATA2(+) 2 19 A_GND
NC 4
DWG.No.
CHECKED
GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
APPROVED
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 20 NC 6
RS-232C
4 NC
NC 21 NC
5 NC 7
NC 22 A_GND 8
Nov. 2, '04
6 NC
DDC_CLOCK 23 DVI0TXC_P
7 NC 9
NC 8
TMDS_DATA(-) 9
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
MASS
NC 12 AIS_TD_A 1
1 DVI0TX2_N P
NC 13 AIS_TD_B 2
Y. Hatai
C3528-C04- B 2 DVI0TX2_P AIS_RD_A 3

+5V_POWER 14 3 P *1
A_GND AIS_RD_B 4
TAKAHASHI.T
GND 15 4 TTYCS-4
E.MIYOSHI
NC AIS_GND 5 AIS
16
kg
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 5 NC
TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 6
(IEC-61162-2)
NC
5
NC 20 9 DVI0TX1_N
NC 21 TRK_TD_A 1
10 DVI0TX1_P
11 A_GND TRK_RD_A 3
14 VCC
(IEC-61162-1)
15 GND
16 NC
*1 *1
17 DVI0TXD_N J612(TB) SHIP'S ALARM
3
2
1
ア−ス銅板 18 DVI0TXD_P
TTYCS-7 SYSTEM
ALARM1_0 1
船内アラーム
AC
AC
20
GND
NC ALARM2_0 3
W=50 ALARM2_1 4 P システム
*3 21 NC
ALARM3_1 6 P
HUB-100
(8PORTS)
J616(NH) MPS588-C
1 GND P 1 TXP
GND 10
NAME
TYPE
2 OP_HD_IN
LAN
名称
2 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
SYS_FAIL_H 11
3 P
TXN
TXP
GND
NC
RXN
NC
RXP
RXP
NC
NC
SYS_FAIL_C 12 3
NETWORK
4 OP_BP_IN NC
6
4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
*2
5 GND 5 NC
6 OP_TRIG_IN 6 RXN
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND 7 NC
J617(NH)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1
3 GND
相互結線図

4 OP_BP_1
1 TXP
5 GND
CU-200
2 TXN
6 OP_TRIG_1
3 RXP
4 NC
5 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
*7
J618(NH) 6 RXN
1 7 NC
GND
2 OP_HD_2 8 NC
3 GND J614(TB)
4 OP_BP_2 MJ-A3SPFD J1
MJ-A3SPF0015 シロ WHT
FAR-2837SW (RCN003/004)
+12V 1 1 +12V
*2
5 GND クロ BLK
GND 2 2 GND
6 OP_TRIG_2
(SEMI-LOG) 8 OP_VIDEO_2
S - 6
D
C
B
A
*1
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
TB901
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
DPYCY-1.5
:
:
:
:
:
J911
NOTE
6
5
4
3
2
1
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz 1 100VAC_H
氷結防止用 2 100VAC_C
*1 3 NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
DE-ICER
OPTION
DPYC-1.5
PM-31
MONITOR
モニター
J/P922
110/115/220/230VAC, RU-3305 *2
1φ,50-60Hz PERFORMANCE
USER SUPPLY
1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
RSB-103
空中線部
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
ANTENNA UNIT
MOTOR_C 8
MOTOR_C 7
MOTOR_H 6
MOTOR_H 5
GND 9
GND 8
PM-ENABL 7
PM-LEVEL 6
PM-TRIG 5
-12V 4
BP 3
HD 2
+12V 1
NC 11
NC 10
TB801
TB803
03-2088(6-14P)
2
1
14
13
OR WRJ-9
J1
MAX,30m
GYRO
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
MPYCY-19
64P1106A
*1
BRN 1 GYRO_R2
RED 2 GYRO_R1
導波管 WAVEGUIDE
CONVERTER
BOARD *2
J680 3 NC

1 チャ
NC
GYRO_CLK-C
GYRO_CLK-H
GYRO_DATA-C
GYRO_DATA-H
TB803
アカ
03P9342
J4(VH)
2
TB804
J7(NH)
ダイ 1
11 NC
10 NC
3 BP
2 HD
ORG GYRO_S1
TB BOARD
FR-9-20/30/50(20/30/50m)
2 NC
3
9 GND
8 GND
5
4
3
2
1
4 -12V
1 +12V
4 キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2

ミドリ GRN 3 GYRO_S3
5 PM-TRIG
5
3 MOTOR_C
1 MOTOR_H
*1 J613(TB) *4
7 PM-ENABL
6 PM-LEVEL
キ
MPYC-7 6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,
GYROCOMPASS 7 ムラサキ PPL 5 GYRO_FG 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
NC 2 TB-801
03-2089(3P)
03-2091(5P)
チャ BRN
チャ BRN
ダイ ORG
アカ RED
YEL
1 TX_HV
J610(TB) 2 NC
J608(TB) 24V_PLUS 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
*5
*3
*4
*2
*1
1 AD_DATA_H J603(XH) 24V_MINUS 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V_MINUS
P
2
:
:
:
:
:
-12V
GND
+5V
GND
+12v
アオ(太) BLU[B]
注記
*1 2 AD_DATA_C MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
3 AD_CLK_H ハイ(太) GRY[B]
J615(TB)
TTYCS-4 MOTOR(+) 4 6 MOTOR(+)
5
4
3
2
1
P ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
A-D CONVERTER 4 AD_CLK_C MOTOR(-) 5 7 MOTOR(-)
MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR(-)
RTR-081
ミドリチャアカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A

SPU_RF_D_A 7
送受信部
キアカミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B

SPU_RF_D_B 8
BRN
ダイ
造船所手配
オプション
クロ BLK
RED
GRN
YEL
ORG
シロ WHT
ユーザー手配
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
SG 11 13 SG
アカ(太) RED[B]
J3
J4
GND 12 14 GND
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
TB-802
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
J609
-5/-12V
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J3 IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1
DVI1TX2_P 2
A_GND 3
*2
03P9229A
*1
J9 2.3m,φ9
RGB-BUFF基板
NC 7 J602(XH) J501/J521 J502/J522 1.5/10/20/ J501
DVI-RGB変換基板
30m,φ9
IV-8sq.
RGB BUFFER BOARD

3

VDR SYS_FAIL_C
9 NC H_SYNC 7 DVI1TXD_P 18
DSUB-BNC-1
CONVERTOR *2
11 GND V_SYNC 9 NC 20 J507/J527
SLB-FRN4-A
BNC CONNECTOR
または
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
操作部
操作部
1
RCU-016
RCU-015
RCU-014

OR
J622 2
*2
14 Y_SYNC GND 12 DVI1TXC_P 23

15 13 24 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
NC -5_-12V DVI1TXC_N
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
J616(NH)
1 GND J605(TB)
2 OP_HD_IN HDG_A 1
3 GND P *1
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
5 GND
6 OP_TRIG_IN
(IEC-61162-2)
7 GND J607(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 LOG_A *1
LOG_B P TTYCS-1
2 SPEED LOG
J617(NH) NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1
4
3 GND J606(TB)
4 OP_BP_1 *1
NAV_A 1
5 GND P TTYCS-1
NAV_B 2 NAVIGATOR
6 OP_TRIG_1 NC 3
7 GND (IEC-61162-1)
RW-4864,φ9.5
SUB DISPLAY1 8 OP_VIDEO_1
(FULL-LOG) J619(TB)
J618(NH) *1
1 ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
GND P
2 ARPA_B 2 ECDIS
OP_HD_2
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 GND
SCALE
DRAWN
4 OP_BP_2
DWG.No.
CHECKED
5 GND
APPROVED
J601
6 OP_TRIG_2
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
NC 1
7 GND
RS-232C CABLE
*1 *5 SUB DISPLAY2 RW-4864,φ9.5 RXD 2
Feb. 2, '05
8 OP_VIDEO_2
PC
BREAKER (SEMI-LOG) TXD 3
*1 TB1 TB1 NC 4
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 H 0.6m GND 5
1φ, 50-60Hz 1 1 H NC 6
MASS
C
2 2 C NC 7
Y. Hatai J204 DVI-D MONITOR NC 8
NC 9
C3527-C02- C
*1 1 DVI0TX2_N
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
2 DVI0TX2_P
TAKAHASHI.T
DPYC-1.5
E. MIYOSHI
440VAC 3 A_GND
kg
RU-1803
1φ, 50-60Hz 4 NC J611(TB)

5 NC AIS_TD_A 1
*2
RCN-001
2 P
5
6 NC AIS_TD_B
TRANSFORMER
100-230VAC
7 NC AIS_RD_A 3 *1
8 NC AIS_RD_B 4 P
TTYCS-4
SLIM CONSOLE

10 DVI0TX1_P (IEC-61162-2)
11 A_GND
J620(TB)
制御部
12 NC
TTYCS-1
*1
RPU-013
13 NC TRK_TD_A 1
IV-1.25sq.
*1
15 GND TRK_RD_A 3
P TTYCS-1
16 NC TRK_RD_B 4
3
2
1
TRACK_CONTROL
PROCESSOR UNIT
1.3m (IEC-61162-1)
18 DVI0TXD_P
AC
AC
1
GND
19 A_GND
2 20 NC J612(TB) *1
21 TTYCS-7
NC ALARM1_0 1
ﾓﾆﾀｰ部

NAME
TYPE
HUB-100
SINGLELINK5M,φ7
(8PORTS)
名称
MU-231CR
TMDS_DATA2(-) 1 24 DVI0TXC_N ALARM2_1 4 P FR-FTPC-CY, 10/20/30m, φ13

MPS588-C

P ミドリ GRN
SWITCHING HUB
P
MONITOR UNIT

J205 DVI-D MONITOR
1 DVI0TX2_N 3
*2
2 DVI0TX2_P 4
3 A_GND 5
DDC_DATA 7 GND 10 P ダイ ORG
6 RXN
SYS_FAIL_H 11 7 NC
6
TMDS_DATA(+) 10 NC
相互結線図
NC 12 8 NC
NC 13 9 DVI0TX1_N
TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
12 NC
MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FAR-2827W (RCN001)
3 RXP
14 VCC RXP 3
15
CARD I/F UNIT
16 NC NC 5 5 NC
NC 20 RXN 6 6 RXN
21 17 DVI0TXD_N
*2
NC NC 7 7 NC
19 NC 8 8 NC
0.6m 21 NC MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
+12V 1 1 +12V
*3 22 A_GND
GND 2 2 GND
DVI CABLE 23 DVI0TXC_P
*1 3 FG
S - 7
COPPER STRAP EXT. MONITOR

W=50
D
C
B
A
TB901
DPYCY-1.5 *1
氷結防止用 1 100VAC_H
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
2 100VAC_C
:
:
:
:
:
NOTE
DE-ICER DPYC-1.5 *1
RSB-105
110/115/220/230VAC, RU-3305 *2 3 NC RSB-104
空中線部
200VAC,3φ,50Hz 1φ,50-60Hz
空中線部モーター用 220VAC,3φ,60Hz J911
OPTION
1
(380/440VAC)
(200/220VAC)
ANTENNA UNIT
FOR MOTOR IN ANTENNA UNIT TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1 PM LEVEL

380VAC,3φ,50Hz 2
モニター
+12V
MONITOR
440VAC,3φ,60Hz 3
PM-51
-12V
USER SUPPLY
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1 4
PERFORMANCE
GND
TB
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 *2 5
1
PM TRIG
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1
220VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-6522 *2 6 PM ENABLE
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
03P9349
440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1 *2 NC
NC
GND
GND
PM-ENABL
PM-LEVEL
PM-TRIG
-12V
BP
HD
+12V
TB803
3φ(W) 3
3φ(V) 2
3φ(U) 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
TB902
03-2088(6-14P)
2
1
14
13
J1
GYRO
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
64P1106A
20/30m
MAX,30m
MPYCY-12
BRN 1
TPYCY-2.5
GYRO_R2
*1
RED 2
*1
GYRO_R1
CONVERTER
BOARD *2
LHPX-20D-ASSY
TB911
J680 3 NC

チャ
3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
1
NC
GYRO_CLK-C
GYRO_CLK-H
GYRO_DATA-C
GYRO_DATA-H
アカ
03P9342
J4(VH)
2
J7(NH)
ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1
TB BOARD
3
11 NC
10 NC
3 BP
2 HD
5
4
3
2
1
TB912
TB803
9 GND
8 GND
4 キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2
4 -12V
1 +12V

3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
*1 5 J613(TB) *4
5 PM-TRIG
キ
アオ BLU 4
7 PM-ENABL
6 PM-LEVEL
MPYC-7 6 GYRO_T TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,

NC 2 TB-801
03-2089(3P)
03-2091(5P)
チャ BRN
チャ BRN
ダイ ORG
アカ RED
YEL
1 TX_HV
J610(TB) 2 NC
J608(TB) 24V_PLUS 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
*5
*3
*4
*2
*1
P
2
:
:
:
:
:
-12V
GND
+5V
GND
+12v
アオ(太) BLU[B]
注記
*1 2 AD_DATA_C 3 5
J615(TB)
TTYCS-4 P 4 6
5
4
3
2
1
A-D CONVERTER 4 AD_CLK_C 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7
6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8
RTR-082
ミドリチャアカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A

SPU_RF_D_A 7
送受信部
キアカミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B

SPU_RF_D_B 8
BRN
ダイ
造船所手配
オプション
クロ BLK
RED
GRN
YEL
ORG
シロ WHT
ユーザー手配
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
SG 11 13 SG
アカ(太) RED[B]
J3
J4
GND 12 14 GND
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
TB-802
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
J609
-5/-12V
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1
DVI1TX2_P 2
A_GND 3
*2
03P9229A
*1
J9 2.3m,φ9
RGB-BUFF基板
NC 7 J602(XH) J501/J521 J502/J522 1.5/10/20/ J501
DVI-RGB変換基板
30m,φ9
IV-8sq.
RGB BUFFER BOARD

3

VDR SYS_FAIL_C
DSUB-BNC-1
CONVERTOR *2
11 GND V_SYNC 9 NC 20 J507/J527
SLB-FRN4-A
BNC CONNECTOR
または
12 NC GND 10 NC 21 1
操作部
操作部
RCU-016
RCU-015
RCU-014
13 H_SYNC VCC 11 A_GND 22 J622 2

OR
*2
14 Y_SYNC GND 12 DVI1TXC_P 23 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H

15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 SYS_ACK_C 2 4 SYS_ACK_C
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
J616(NH)
1 GND J605(TB)
2 OP_HD_IN HDG_A 1
3 GND P *1
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
5 GND
6 OP_TRIG_IN
(IEC-61162-2)
7 GND J607(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 LOG_A *1
LOG_B P TTYCS-1
2 SPEED LOG
J617(NH) NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1
4
3 GND J606(TB)
4 OP_BP_1 *1
NAV_A 1
5 GND P TTYCS-1
NAV_B 2 NAVIGATOR
6 OP_TRIG_1 NC 3
7 GND (IEC-61162-1)
RW-4864,φ9.5
(FULL-LOG) J619(TB)
J618(NH) *1
1 ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
GND P
2 ARPA_B 2 ECDIS
OP_HD_2
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
3 GND
SCALE
DRAWN
4 OP_BP_2
DWG.No.
CHECKED
5 GND
APPROVED
J601
6 OP_TRIG_2
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
NC 1
7 GND
RS-232C CABLE
*1 *5 RW-4864,φ9.5 RXD 2
Feb. 2, '05
8 OP_VIDEO_2
PC
BREAKER SUB DISPLAY2 TXD 3
*1 TB1 TB1 NC 4
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 (SEMI-LOG) H 0.6m 5
GND
1φ, 50-60Hz 1 1 H NC 6
MASS
C
2 2 C NC 7
NC 9
C3528-C03- C
Y. Hatai
*1 1 DVI0TX2_N
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
2 DVI0TX2_P
TAKAHASHI.T
DPYC-1.5
E. MIYOSHI
440VAC 3 A_GND
kg
RU-1803
1φ, 50-60Hz 4 NC J611(TB)

5 NC AIS_TD_A 1
*2
2 P
5
6 NC AIS_TD_B
TRANSFORMER
100-230VAC
RCN-001
7 NC AIS_RD_A 3 *1
8 NC AIS_RD_B 4 P
TTYCS-4
SLIM CONSOLE
10 DVI0TX1_P (IEC-61162-2)
11 A_GND
J620(TB)
制御部
12 NC
TTYCS-1
*1
RPU-013
13 NC TRK_TD_A 1
IV-1.25sq.
*1
15 GND TRK_RD_A 3
P TTYCS-1
16 NC TRK_RD_B 4
3
2
1
TRACK_CONTROL
PROCESSOR UNIT
1.3m (IEC-61162-1)
18 DVI0TXD_P
AC
AC
1
GND
19 A_GND
2 20 NC J612(TB) *1
21 TTYCS-7
NC ALARM1_0 1
ﾓﾆﾀｰ部

NAME
TYPE
HUB-100
SINGLELINK5M,φ7
(8PORTS)
名称
MU-231CR

MPS588-C

P ミドリ GRN
SWITCHING HUB
P
MONITOR UNIT

J205 DVI-D MONITOR
1 DVI0TX2_N 3
*2
2 DVI0TX2_P 4
3 A_GND 5
DDC_DATA 7 GND 10 P ダイ ORG
6 RXN
SYS_FAIL_H 11 7 NC
6
TMDS_DATA(+) 10 NC
相互結線図
NC 12 8 NC
NC 13 9 DVI0TX1_N
TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
12 NC
MARINE RADAR/ARPA

3 RXP
FAR-2837SW (RCN001)
14 VCC RXP 3
15
CARD I/F UNIT
16 NC NC 5 5 NC
NC 20 RXN 6 6 RXN
21 17 DVI0TXD_N
*2
NC NC 7 7 NC
19 NC 8 8 NC
0.6m 21 NC MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
+12V 1 1 +12V
*3 22 A_GND GND 2 2 GND
23
S - 8
DVI CABLE DVI0TXC_P 3

*1 FG
COPPER STRAP EXT. MONITOR
W=50
D
C
B
A
110/115/ *1
*7 220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 *2
*7
RU-3305
*6
*5
1φ,50-60Hz
*4
*3
*2
*1
氷結防止用
TB901
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
注記
DE-ICER 100VAC,1φ, DPYCY-1.5 *1 1 100VAC_H
*1
PE
440VAC,1φ, DPYC-1.5 トランス 50-60Hz 2 100VAC_C
50-60Hz TRANSFORMER 3 NC
空中線部
RU-1803 *2
IV-3.5sq.
*1
保護アース
RSB-096/097
オプション
造船所手配
*1 *5
ANTENNA UNIT
*3
ユーザー手配
100-120/ *4 BREAKER *1 J1 J603(XH) J613 RW-9600,15/30/40/50m,
1
200-240VAC TB1 9 03-2088(6-14P) 1 GC_LED TX_HV 1 φ22, (MAX.100m) TB-801

DPYC-2.5 10 2 GC_HOLD 1
BOARD
1φ,50-60Hz 1 H NC 2 チャ BRN TX_HV
2 C 03-2090(3P) J5(VH) 11 3 GC_UP J610 2 NC
1 GYRO_R2 12 4 GC_DOWN 24V_PLUS 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
*1 2 13 5 GC_0V 4
J680 GYRO_R1 24V_MINUS 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 24V_MINUS
64P1106A *2
MPYC-7 1 チャ BRN 3 14 6 5
GYROCOMPASS NC GC_5V MOTOR(+) 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] MOTOR(+)
GYRO CONVERTER
2 アカ RED J4(VH) J7(NH) 03-2091(5P) J608 MOTOR(+) 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6 MOTOR(+)
3 ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1 DATA1-H 1 チャ BRN 1 AD_DATA_H MOTOR(-) 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7 MOTOR(-)
P
4 キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2 DATA1-C 2 アカ RED 2 AD_DATA_C MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR(-)
PM-31
5 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN 3 GYRO_S3 SHIFT1-H 3 ダイ ORG 3 AD_CLK_H SPU_RF_D_A 7 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A
船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用
P
6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T SHIFT1-C 4 キ YEL 4 AD_CLK_C SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B
7 ﾑﾗｻｷ PPL 5 GYRO_FG FG 5 RF_SPU_D_A 9 クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A
03-2089(5P) RF_SPU_D_B 10 シロ WHT 12 RF_SPU_D_B
*1 11
SG 11 ミドリ(太) GRN[B] SG
TTYCS-4
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
A-D CONVERTER GND 12 アカ(太) RED[B] 12 GND

J609 TB-802
IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
03P9342
*1
TB BOARD
J2 J1 J9 J3
VGA CABLE
RGB EXT. MONITOR 1 R_VIDEO R_VIDEO 1 5 R 1
2 G_VIDEO GND 2 6 GND 2 TOTAL : UP TO 31.5m
3 B_VIDEO G_VIDEO 3 7 G 合計 : 31.5m以下
4 NC GND 4 8 GND XH10P-W-5P-A
XH10P-W-6P
RW-4747
5 NC B_VIDEO 5 9 B 1.5/10/20/
*1 6 GND GND 6 10 GND 1.5/10/20/
SLB-FRN4-A
CO-AX(75Ω)ｘ5 30m,φ9 30m,φ9
2
VDR 7 GND H_SYNC 7 3 HS J602 J501/J521 J502/J522 J501
03P9229A
8 GND GND 8 4 GND KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B
DVI-RGB変換基板
DSUB-BNC-1
9 NC V_SYNC 9 1 VS 23 KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A
CONVERTOR *2
10 GND GND 10 2 GND 24 KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B
RGB BUFFER PCB

BNC CONNECTOR
11 GND VCC 11 KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A
12 NC GND 12 PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW
13 H_SYNC -5/-12V 13 GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND

14 Y_SYNC +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V
CU-200/RPU-013間はクロスケーブル、CU-200/HUB-100間はストレートケーブルを使用
15 NC GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC
NC
NC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
-5/-12V
GND
VCC
J3
J4
10 10
*5
DVI-RGB-1 *2
*4
*3
SYS_FAIL_C 10 10 SYS_FAIL_C NC NC
*2
*1
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
RGB VIDEO CONVERTOR
:
:
:
:
:
*2
NOTE
RCU-016
操作部 CONTROL UNIT
100-240VAC
1φ,50-60Hz
J507/J527
J615 1 SYS_FAIL_H
チャ BRN 1 +12V
J622 2 SYS_FAIL_C
OPTION
操作部
アカ RED 2 GND
RCU-015
RCU-014
SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
ダイ ORG 3 +5V
キ YEL 4 GND
USER SUPPLY
5
BREAKER
*1 *5
ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN -12V
CONTROL UNIT
IV-8sq. *1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
保護アース PE
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
J601
NC 1
RXD 2
DPYC-2.5
*1
TXD 3 *1
3
DVI-D MONITOR NC 4
RS-232C CABLE
2 C
1 H
J3 J204 GND 5 PC
TB1
1
DVI-D/DSINGLELINK5M/10M, 1
TMDS_DATA2(-) DVI0TX2_N NC 6
RS-232C
TMDS_DATA2(+) 2 5/10m,φ7 2 DVI0TX2_P NC 7

TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 3 A_GND NC 8
NC 4 4 NC NC 9
NC 5 5 NC
DDC_CLOCK 6 6 NC *1
J605
TTYCS-1Q HDG SENSOR

DDC_DATA 7 7 NC HDG_A 1

NC 8 8 NC P (IEC-61162-2)
HDG_B 2
TMDS_DATA(-) 9 9 DVI0TX1_N HDG_GND 3
TMDS_DATA(+) 10 10 DVI0TX1_P
制御部
RPU-013
11 11

TMDS_DATA1/3_SHIELD A_GND
NC 12 12 NC *1
J606
NC 13 13 NC NAV_A 1
TTYCS-1
+5V_POWER 14 14 VCC P NAVIGATOR
NAV_B 2 (IEC-61162-1)
GND 15 15 GND
PROCESSOR UNIT
NC 3
16 16
表示部 MONITOR UNIT

HOT_PLUG_DETECT NC
TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 17 DVI0TXD_N
*1
MU-231CR (FR-2817/2827)
MU-201CR (FR-2117/2127)
TMDS_DATAB(+) 18 18 DVI0TXD_P J607
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19 19 A_GND LOG_A 1
TTYCS-1 SPEED LOG
NC 20 20 NC P
LOG_B 2 (IEC-61162-1)
IV-8sq.
21 21
*1
NC NC NC 3
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 22 A_GND
TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 23 DVI0TXC_P
保護アース PE
*1
4
TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 24 DVI0TXC_N J619

ARPA_A 1
TTYCS-1
P ECDIS
ARPA_B 2 (IEC-61162-1)
DVI-D MONITOR NC 3
*2
J205
DVI CABLE 1 J620
EXT. MONITOR SAME AS AVOBE
TRK_TD_A 1
*6 : USE CROSS CABLE BETWEEN CU-200 & RPU-013 AND STRAIGHT CABLE BETWEEN CU-200 & HUB-100.
2 *1
TRK_TD_B 2
TRK_RD_A 3
TTYCS-1
P TRACK_CONTROL
24 TRK_RD_B 4
GND 5 (IEC-61162-1)
J621
J1 MJ-A3SPFD J614
MJ-A3SPF0015,10m,φ6 シロ WHT RSV1_TD_A 1
SCALE
DRAWN 1 +12V
+12V 1 RSV1_TD_B 2 NOT USED
DWG.No.
CHECKED
クロ BLK
APPROVED
GND 2 2 GND GND 3
CU-200
FG 3 RSV2_TD_A 4
RSV2_TD_B 5
J302 MPS588-C NETWORK
P5E-4PTX-BL,10m,φ6.3 GND 6
Feb. 2, '05
TXP 1 1 TXP
CARD I/F UNIT
TXN 2 2 TXN *1
J611
3 3 TTYCS-4
MASS
RXP RXP AIS_TD_A 1
*2
NC 4 4 NC P AIS
AIS_TD_B 2
LAN
NC 5 5 NC (IEC-61162-2)
AIS_RD_A 3
RXN 6 *6 6 RXN P
Y. Hatai
AIS_RD_B 4
C3519-C01- K
NC 7 7 NC AIS_GND 5
5
*1
kg
TAKAHASHI. T
E. MIYOSHI
NC 8 8 NC
IV-1.25sq.
*1
LAN CABLE(CAT5) OR J612
*1
MPS588-C FR-FTPC-CY,10/20/30m,φ13 TTYCS-7
ALARM1_0 1 ALARM SYSTEM
TXP 1 シロ/ﾐﾄﾞﾘ WHT/GRN P
P ALARM1_1 2
TXN 2 ミドリ GRN ALARM2_0 3
RXP 3 シロ/ダイ WHT/ORG P
ALARM2_1 4
4 アオ BLU
HUB-100
NC ALARM3_0 5
P P
NC 5 シロ/アオ WHT/BLU ALARM3_1 6
6 ダイ ORG
RXN OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7
NC 7 シロ/チャ WHT/BRN P
SWITCHING HUB
NC 8 チャ BRN EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9
P
03-163-6001-4
GND 10
*2
AC 1 100-230VAC SYS_FAIL_H 11
AC 2 *1 P
NR203PF-VVS1.25, SYS_FAIL_C 12
*1
GND 3
3.5m, φ8.6
IV-1.25sq.
J616(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1
保護アース PE
MASTER RADAR
OP_HD_IN 2
NAME
TYPE
名称
GND 3
OP_BP_IN 4
GND 5
OP_TRIG_IN 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_IN 8
6
J617(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY1
相互結線図
OP_HD_1 2
GND 3
(FULL-LOG)
OP_BP_1 4
GND 5
OP_TRIG_1 6
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_1 8
J618(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY2

OP_HD_2 2
GND 3
(SEMI-LOG)
OP_BP_2 4
S - 9
GND 5
OP_TRIG_2 6
GND 7
FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827 (AC SET)
OP_VIDEO_2 8
D
C
B
A
*6
氷結防止用
*1 TB1
110/115/220/230VAC,
03-2088(6-14P) DPYC-1.5 *1 DE-ICER
2
1
14
13
DPYC-6 1φ,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2
12-24VDC 1 U
PE
*1
2 V DPYCY-1.5 *1
J1
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
J5(VH)
03-2090(3P)
保護アース
*1 *4
IV-3.5sq.
BRN 1 GYRO_R2
64P1106A
J613(TB)
GYRO
100/110/115 DPYC-2.5 RED 2
RW-9600,φ22.1,
GYRO_R1 TX_HV 1
BOARD
1 U + 5 J680
*2
200/220/230VAC 3 NC 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
整流器
2 V - 6 NC 2 TB-801
TB901
チャ BRN 3 NC
RU-3424
1 チャ
1 TX_HV
CONVERTER
1
アカ
RECTIFIER
2
J4(VH)
J610 2 NC
ダイ ORG 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B]
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
3 GYRO_S1
3 24V_PLUS
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
キ YEL 2 24V_PLUS 1
キ
4 24V_MINUS
J911
24V_MINUS 2
5
4
3
2
1
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
5 ミドリ GRN 3 GYRO_S3 アオ(太) BLU[B]
*1 MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
アオ BLU 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B]
IV-8sq. *1
MPYC-7 6 GYRO_T 6 MOTOR(+)
MOTOR(+)
5
SHIFT1-C 4
SHIFT1-H 3
2
1
4
YEL
03-2091(5P) ダイ ORG
アカ RED
チャ BRN
GYROCOMPASS 7 ムラサキ PPL 5 GYRO_FG ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
J7(NH)
1
2
3
4
5
6
03-2089(3P) MOTOR(-) 5 7 MOTOR(-)

シロ(太) WHT[B]
J/P922
アカ RED
ミドリ GRN
*2
*1
J608(TB)
*4
*3
*5
J603(XH) SPU_RF_D_B 8 10 SPU_RF_D_B
クロ BLK
:
:
1
:
:
:
AD_DATA_H 9 11 RF_SPU_D_A
NOTE
P RF_SPU_D_A
2 シロ WHT
AD_DATA_C RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
空中線部
*1 ミドリ(太) GRN[B]
J615(TB)
-12V 5
GND 4
+5V 3
GND 2
+12v 1
PM-31
4 AD_CLK_C 12 14 GND
RSB-096/097
GND
OPTION
A-D CONVERTER
ANTENNA UNIT
ミドリチャ
キ J609 TB-802
アカ
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
USER SUPPLY
BRN
ダイ IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
GRN
YEL
RED
ORG
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J4
TOTAL : UP TO 31.5m
NC
NC
GND
GND
GND
VCC
+12V
+12V
03P9342
TB BOARD
RW-4747
XH10P-W-5P-A
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
XH10P-W-6P
-5/-12V
J3
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
1.5/10/20/ 1.5/10/20/
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
2
DVI1TX2_N 1
J602 30m,φ9 J501/J521 J502/J522 30m,φ9 J501
DVI1TX2_P 2
IV-8sq. *1
3 KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B 1 1 KEY_TXD_B
A_GND
NC
NC
NC
5 5 5 5
03P9229A
J9 7 PWR_SW PWR_SW PWR_SW PWR_SW

NC


1
RGB BUFFER PCB

VS NC
DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V
J2 9
USE CROSS CABLE BETWEEN CU-200 & RPU-013 AND

VGA CABLE 2 GND DVI1TX1_N
1 3 10 GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
RGB EXT. MONITOR R_VIDEO HS DVI1TX1_P
J1 SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 SYS_FAIL_H NC 9 9 NC
*2
2 G_VIDEO 4 GND A_GND 11


*1 8 15 J507/J527
6 GND GND 4 GND GND
操作部

RCU-016
操作部
8 10 17 J622 2 SYS_FAIL_G
RCU-015
RCU-014
または OR
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 GND GND 6 GND DVI1TXD_N

10 8 19 SYS_ACK_C 2 4 SYS_ACK_C
DSUB-BNC-1
GND GND A_GND
CONTROL UNIT
CONVERTOR *2
11 9 20
CONTROL UNIT
GND V_SYNC NC
SLB-FRN4-A
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
*4
*3
*2
*1
*5
:
:
:
:
:
15 13 24
注記
NC -5_-12V DVI1TXC_N HDG_A 1 *1
P
3
HDG_B 2
TTYCS-1Q
(IEC-61162-2)
J616(NH)
1 GND J607(TB)
オプション
造船所手配
*1
2 OP_HD_IN LOG_A 1
ユーザー手配
P TTYCS-1
3 GND LOG_B 2 SPEED LOG
4 OP_BP_IN NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
5 GND
*2 6 OP_TRIG_IN
7 GND J606(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 *1
MASTER RADAR 8 OP_VIDEO_IN NAV_A 1 TTYCS-1
NAV_B P
2 NAVIGATOR
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
J617(NH)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1 J619(TB)
*6 : 船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用。
CU-200/RPU-013間はクロスケーブル、
*1
3 GND ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
4 OP_BP_1 ARPA_B 2 P
ECDIS
5 GND NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
*2 6 OP_TRIG_1
7 GND
CU-200/HUB-100間はストレートケーブルを使用。
RW-4864,φ9.5
J601
24VDC
100-240VAC
(FULL-LOG)
4
NC 1 RS-232C CABLE
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
J618(NH) RXD 2 PC
*1 1 GND TXD 3
2 OP_HD_2 NC 4
3 GND GND 5
RS-232C
4 OP_BP_2 NC 6
DPYC-1.5
5 GND NC 7
*2 6 OP_TRIG_2 NC 8
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND NC 9
8 OP_VIDEO_2
2 V
1 U
SUB DISPLAY2
SCALE
DRAWN
DWG.No.
CHECKED
(SEMI-LOG)
APPROVED
1 DVI0TX2_N AIS_TD_A 1
整流器
Dec. 2, '04 2 DVI0TX2_P AIS_TD_B 2 P

RU-3423
3 A_GND AIS_RD_A 3
*1
RECTIFIER
P
IV-8sq. *1
4 NC AIS_RD_B 4
TTYCS-4
AIS_GND 5
MASS
5 NC AIS
- 6
+ 5
6 NC (IEC-61162-2)
7 NC
Y. Hatai
8 NC
C3519-C02- J
TAKAHASHI.T
100-230VAC
kg
10
E. MIYOSHI
DVI0TX1_P TRK_TD_A 1
11 TRK_TD_B 2
*1
A_GND *1
5
12 TRK_RD_A 3
*1
NC TTYCS-1
TRK_RD_B 4 P
13 NC
制御部
GND 5
TRACK_CONTROL
RPU-013
14 VCC (IEC-61162-1)
3.5m, φ8.6
15
DPYC-2.5
GND
IV-1.25sq.
*1
16 NC
保護アース PE
NR203PF-VVS1.25,
17 DVI0TXD_N
J612(TB)
*1
18
PROCESSOR UNIT
DVI0TXD_P
3
2
1
TTYCS-7
19 A_GND ALARM1_0 1
P
2 -
1 +
20 NC ALARM1_1 2
AC
AC
TB1
GND
21 NC ALARM2_0 3
03-163-6001-4
22 ALARM2_1 4 P
DVI-D/D A_GND
J3 23 DVI0TXC_P ALARM3_0 5
SINGLELINK5M/10M,φ7 ALARM3_1 6 P *1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR
TMDS_DATA2(-) 1 24 DVI0TXC_N
2 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7 FR-FTPC-CY, 10/20/30m, φ13
HUB-100
TMDS_DATA2(+) P
(8PORTS)
3 OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 MPS588-C
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9
J205 DVI-D MONITOR シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN
4 TXP
NC P ミドリ GRN 1
NAME
TYPE
GND 10 P
名称
5 1 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
NC DVI0TX2_N SYS_FAIL_H 11 2
DDC_CLOCK 6 2 DVI0TX2_P 3 RXP
SYS_FAIL_C 12 アオ BLU
DDC_DATA 7 3 A_GND 4 NC
表示部
*2
NC 8 4 NC 5 NC
ダイ ORG
シロ/チャ WHT/BRN
TMDS_DATA(+) 10 6 NC 7 NC
チャ BRN
MONITOR UNIT
NC 12 8 NC
6
NC 13 9 DVI0TX1_N
相互結線図
IV-8sq. *1
+5V_POWER 14 10 DVI0TX1_P
GND 15 11 A_GND
NETWORK
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 12 NC MPS588-C J302
P5E-4PTX-BL *10m*,φ6.3
MU-231CR (FR-2817/2827)
MU-201CR (FR-2117/2127)
CU-200
TMDS_DATAB(+) 18 14 VCC TXN 2 2 TXN

MARINE RADAR/ARPA
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19 15 GND RXP 3 3 RXP

NC 20 16 NC NC 4 4 NC
NC 21 17 DVI0TXD_N NC 5 5 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
*5
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 18 DVI0TXD_P RXN 6 6 RXN

TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 19 A_GND NC 7 7 NC
*2
TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 20 NC NC 8 8 NC
21 NC
22 A_GND J614(TB) MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6 MJ-A3SPFD J1
*3 シロ WHT
23 DVI0TXC_P +12V 1 1 +12V
DVI CABLE クロ BLK
EXT. MONITOR 24 DVI0TXC_N GND 2 2 GND
3 FG
S - 10
FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827 （DC SET)

IV-1.25sq.
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
*1 *5 *7
BREAKER 氷結防止用
*1 110/115/220/230VAC,
TB1 03-2088(6-14P) DPYC-1.5 *1
DPYC-2.5 DE-ICER
2
1
100-120/200-240VAC
14
13
1φ,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2
1 H
1φ, 50-60Hz
PE
DPYCY-1.5 *1
*1
2 C 100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
J1
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
保護アース
*1 *4
IV-3.5sq.
BRN 1 J613(TB)
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
GYRO_R2
GYRO
64P1106A
DPYC-1.5 RW-9600,φ22.1,
BOARD
440VAC J680 RED 2 GYRO_R1 TX_HV 1
*2
3 NC 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
1φ, 50-60Hz NC 2 TB-801
TB901
チャチャ BRN 3 NC
CONVERTER
1 1 TX_HV
アカ
RU-1803 *2
1
TRANSFORMER
J4(VH)
2 J610(TB) 2 NC
ダイ 1
03-2091(5P)
ORG ダイ(太) ORG[B]
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
3 GYRO_S1
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
キ YEL 2 24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS

キ(太) YEL[B]
キ
GYRO_S2
*5
*6
*4
*3
*2
*1
4
J911
4 24V_MINUS
5
4
3
2
1
24V_MINUS 2
ダイ
チャ
ミドリ GRN 3
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
アカ
GYRO_S3 アオ(太) BLU[B]
:
:
:
:
SHIFT1-C
SHIFT1-H
:
:
*1 5 MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
NOTE
アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T ハイ(太) GRY[B]
MPYC-7 6 MOTOR(+) 4 6 MOTOR(+)
5
4
3
2
1
YEL
ORG
BRN
ムラサキ 5
RED
GYROCOMPASS 7 PPL GYRO_FG ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
J7(NH)
1
2
3
4
5
6
03-2089(3P) MOTOR(-) 5 7 MOTOR(-)

シロ(太) WHT[B]
J/P922
8 MOTOR(-)
OPTION
MOTOR(-) 6
アカ RED
J608(TB) J603(XH) ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B
SPU_RF_D_B 8 クロ BLK
USER SUPPLY
1 AD_DATA_H RF_SPU_D_A 9 11 RF_SPU_D_A
P シロ WHT
*1 2 AD_DATA_C RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
空中線部
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
J615(TB)
-12V 5
GND 4
+5V 3
GND 2
+12v 1
PM-31
4 AD_CLK_C GND 12 14 GND

RSB-096/097
A-D CONVERTER
ANTENNA UNIT
ミドリチャ
キ J609 TB-802
アカ
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
BRN
GRN
YEL
RED
ORG
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J4
TOTAL : UP TO 31.5m
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
-12V
+12V
+12V
TB BOARD
03P9342
RW-4747
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
J3 XH10P-W-6P XH10P-W-5P-A
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
1.5/10/20/ 1.5/10/20/

DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
1
2
DVI1TX2_N

J602(XH) 30m,φ9 J501/J521 J502/J522 30m,φ9 J501

DVI1TX2_P 2
IV-8sq. *1
1 1 1 1

3 KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B KEY_TXD_B
*2
A_GND
保護アース PE
NC
NC
NC
J9 7 PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW PWR_SW 5 5 PWR_SW
RGB-BUFF基板
NC
03P9229A
DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 VS NC
J2 9 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V
2 GND DVI1TX1_N
RGB BUFFER BOARD

G_VIDEO GND A_GND
*2
PASS THE AC LINE THROUGH A DOUBLE-CONTACT BREAKER ( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )

*1 8 15
6 GND GND 4 GND GND
COAXIAL 7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16 J507/J527
操作部
操作部
8 10 17
RCU-016
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 6 1
RCU-015
RCU-014
GND GND GND DVI1TXD_N SYS_FAIL_H

または OR
VDR 9 NC H_SYNC 7 DVI1TXD_P 18 J622 2 SYS_FAIL_C

10 GND GND 8 A_GND 19 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
DSUB-BNC-1
11 9 20
CONTROL UNIT
2 4
CONTROL UNIT
GND V_SYNC NC SYS_ACK_C SYS_ACK_C
CONVERTOR *2
*3
*4
*1
*5
*2
SLB-FRN4-A
*6
12 10 21
BNC CONNECTOR
NC GND NC
:
:
:
:
:
:
注記
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
P *1
3
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
造船所手配
オプション
(IEC-61162-2)
J616(NH)
ユーザー手配
1 GND J607(TB)
*1
2 OP_HD_IN LOG_A 1 TTYCS-1
3 GND LOG_B 2 P
SPEED LOG
4 OP_BP_IN NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
5 GND
*2 6 OP_TRIG_IN
7 GND J606(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 *1
2 P
NAV_B NAVIGATOR
3
NC (IEC-61162-1)
J617(NH)
CU-200/RPU-013間はクロスケーブル、
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1 J619(TB)
*1
4 OP_BP_1 ARPA_B P
CU-200/HUB-100間はストレートケーブルを使用
2 ECDIS
5 GND NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
*2 6 OP_TRIG_1
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND
J601
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
(FULL-LOG)
4
NC 1 RS-232C CABLE
J618(NH) RXD 2 PC
1 GND TXD 3
2 OP_HD_2 NC 4
3 GND GND 5
4 6
RS-232C
OP_BP_2 NC
5 GND NC 7
*2 6 OP_TRIG_2 NC 8
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND NC 9
SCALE
DRAWN
DWG.No.
CHECKED
(SEMI-LOG)
APPROVED
Feb. 2, '05 2 DVI0TX2_P AIS_TD_B 2 P
3 A_GND AIS_RD_A 3 *1
AIS_RD_B 4 P
4 NC TTYCS-4
AIS_GND 5
MASS
5 NC AIS
6 NC (IEC-61162-2)
7 NC
8 NC
Y. Hatai
C3519-C03- K
TAKAHASHI.T
100-230VAC
kg
E. MIYOSHI
11 A_GND
*1
TRK_TD_B 2 *1
12
5
NC TRK_RD_A 3 TTYCS-1
制御部
13 P
RPU-013
14 VCC GND 5 (IEC-61162-1)
3.5m, φ8.6
15 GND
IV-1.25sq.
*1
16 NC
保護アース PE
NR203PF-VVS1.25,
17 DVI0TXD_N
PROCESSOR UNIT
J612(TB)
*1
18 DVI0TXD_P
3
2
1
TTYCS-7
19 A_GND ALARM1_0 1
20 ALARM1_1 2 P
NC
AC
AC
GND
21 NC ALARM2_0 3
03-163-6001-4
ALARM2_1 4 P
ﾓﾆﾀｰ
DVI-D/D 22 A_GND
23 ALARM3_0 5
SINGLELINK5M/10M,φ7 DVI0TXC_P ALARM3_1 6 P
*1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR
MONITOR *3
2 P FR-FTPC-CY, 10/20/30m, φ13

HUB-100
TMDS_DATA2(+) OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8
(8PORTS)

J205
DVI-D MONITOR P シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN
4 1 TXP
NC GND 10 ミドリ GRN P

NAME
TYPE
名称
5 1 2 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
NC DVI0TX2_N SYS_FAIL_H 11
DDC_CLOCK 6 2 DVI0TX2_P SYS_FAIL_C 12 3 RXP
アオ BLU
*2
NC 8 4 NC 5 NC
ダイ ORG
チャ BRN
NC 12 8 NC
13 9
6
NC DVI0TX1_N
相互結線図
GND 15 11 A_GND NETWORK
CU-200

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

NC 20 16 NC NC 4 4 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
22 18 RXN
*6
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD DVI0TXD_P RXN 6 6

23 19 NC
ｶｰﾄﾞ I/F ﾕﾆｯﾄ *2
TMDS_CLOCK(+) A_GND NC 7 7
21 NC
22 A_GND J614(TB) MJ-A3SPFD J1
FAR-2117-BB/2127-BB (AC SET)
*3 シロ WHT MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
23 DVI0TXC_P +12V 1 1 +12V
3 FG
S - 11
IV-1.25sq.
D
C
B
A
*6
氷結防止用
*1 110/115/220/230VAC,
TB1 03-2088(6-14P) DPYC-1.5 *1 DE-ICER
2
1
14
13
DPYC-6 1φ,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2
12-24VDC 1 +
PE
*1
DPYCY-1.5 *1
J1
2 - 100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
J5(VH)
03-2090(3P)
保護アース
*4
IV-3.5sq.
*1 PPL 1 GYRO_R2 J613(TB)
64P1106A
GYRO
100/110/115 DPYC-2.5 BLU 2 GYRO_R1
RW-9600,φ22.1,
1
BOARD
1 U + 5 J680 TX_HV
*2
200/220/230VAC 3 NC 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m
整流器
NC 2
TB901
3 NC
2 V - 6 TB-801
1 ムラサキチャ BRN
CONVERTER
1 TX_HV
1
アオ
RECTIFIER
J4(VH)
2
RU-3424 *2
GRN J610(TB) 2 NC
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
3 ミドリ 1 GYRO_S1 ダイ(太) ORG[B]

PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
PM LEVEL
24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS
キ
キ YEL 2
*4
*3
*2
*1
*5
J911
5
4
3
2
1
24V_MINUS 2 4 24V_MINUS
F.G.
DATA1-C
DATA1-H
ダイ ORG 3
:
:
:
:
:
SHIFT1-C
SHIFT1-H
*1 5 GYRO_S3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5 MOTOR(+)
NOTE
アカ RED 4 GYRO_T MOTOR(+) 3
6 ハイ(太) GRY[B]
IV-8sq. *1
MPYC-7 6 MOTOR(+)
03-2091(5P)
5
4
3
2
1
YEL
MOTOR(+) 4
ダイ ORG
アカ RED
チャ BRN
チャ BRN 5 GYRO_FG ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
J7(NH)
GYROCOMPASS 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
03-2089(3P) MOTOR(-) 5 7 MOTOR(-)

シロ(太) WHT[B]
J/P922
OPTION
アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A
SPU_RF_D_A 7
J608(TB) J603(XH) SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B
USER SUPPLY
1 AD_DATA_H
クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A
P RF_SPU_D_A 9
シロ WHT
空中線部
*1 2 AD_DATA_C RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
J615(TB)
3 AD_CLK_H 13 SG
-12V 5
GND 4
+5V 3
GND 2
+12v 1
TTYCS-4 P SG 11
RSB-096/097
アカ(太) RED[B]
PM-31
ANTENNA UNIT
A-D CONVERTER 4 AD_CLK_C GND 12 14 GND

ミドリチャ
キ J609 TB-802
アカ
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
BRN
GRN
YEL
RED
ORG
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J4
TOTAL : UP TO 31.5m
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
-12V
+12V
+12V
03P9342
RW-4747
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
XH10P-W-5P-A
TB BOARD
J3 XH10P-W-6P
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
1.5/10/20/

DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
1.5/10/20/
2

DVI1TX2_N 30m,φ9
J602(XH) J501/J521 J502/J522 J501

DVI1TX2_P 2 30m,φ9
IV-8sq. *1

*2
A_GND 3
NC
KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B
*3
*4
*1
*2
*6
*5
NC 5
KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A KEY_RXD_A 4 4 KEY_RXD_A
:
:
:
:
:
:
6
注記
NC
RGB-BUFF基板
NC 7
03P9229A
DVI-RGB変換基板
*3 1 VS NC
J2 9 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V
2 GND DVI1TX1_N
RGB BUFFER BOARD

*2
G_VIDEO GND A_GND
造船所手配
オプション
ユーザー手配

*1 8 15
6 GND GND 4 GND GND
操作部
RCU-016
COAXIAL 7 GND B_VIDEO 5 9 B NC 16 J507/J527

操作部
8 6 10 17 1
RCU-015
RCU-014
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 GND GND GND DVI1TXD_N SYS_FAIL_H

または OR
VDR 9 NC H_SYNC 7 DVI1TXD_P 18 J622 2 SYS_FAIL_C

CONTROL UNIT
10 8 19 1 3
DSUB-BNC-1
GND GND A_GND SYS_ACK_H SYS_ACK_H
11 9 20 2 4
CONTROL UNIT
GND V_SYNC NC SYS_ACK_C SYS_ACK_C
CONVERTOR *2
SLB-FRN4-A
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24 HDG_A 1
P *1
3
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
(IEC-61162-2)
J616(NH)
1 GND J607(TB)
*1
2 OP_HD_IN LOG_A 1 TTYCS-1
3 2 P
GND LOG_B SPEED LOG
4 OP_BP_IN NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
5 GND
*2 6 OP_TRIG_IN
7 GND J606(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 *1
P
NAV_B 2 NAVIGATOR
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
J617(NH)
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1 J619(TB)
*1
4 OP_BP_1 ARPA_B P
2 ECDIS
5 GND NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
CU-200/RPU-013間はクロスケーブル、CU-200/HUB-100間はストレートケーブルを使用
*2 6 OP_TRIG_1
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND
J601
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
(FULL-LOG)
4
NC 1 RS-232C CABLE
J618(NH) RXD 2 PC
1 GND TXD 3
2 OP_HD_2 NC 4
3 GND GND 5
RS-232C
4 OP_BP_2 NC 6
5 GND NC 7
*2 6 OP_TRIG_2 NC 8
RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND NC 9
SCALE
DRAWN
DWG.No.
CHECKED
(SEMI-LOG)
APPROVED
Dec. 2, '04 2 DVI0TX2_P AIS_TD_B 2 P
3 A_GND AIS_RD_A 3
P *1
4 NC AIS_RD_B 4
TTYCS-4
MASS
5 NC AIS_GND 5 AIS
6 NC (IEC-61162-2)
7 NC
Y. Hatai
8 NC
C3519-C04- J
TAKAHASHI.T
100-230VAC
kg
E. MIYOSHI
*1
11 A_GND TRK_TD_B 2 *1
5
12 NC TRK_RD_A 3
制御部
P TTYCS-1
13
RPU-013
14 VCC GND 5
3.5m, φ8.6
(IEC-61162-1)
15 GND
IV-1.25sq.
*1
16 NC
保護アース PE
NR203PF-VVS1.25,
17 DVI0TXD_N
PROCESSOR UNIT
J612(TB)
*1
18 DVI0TXD_P
3
2
1
TTYCS-7
19 A_GND ALARM1_0 1
20 ALARM1_1 2 P
NC
AC
AC
GND
21 NC ALARM2_0 3
03-163-6001-4
P
ﾓﾆﾀｰ
DVI-D/D 22 ALARM2_1 4
A_GND
23 ALARM3_0 5
SINGLELINK5M/10M,φ7 DVI0TXC_P ALARM3_1 6 P
*1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR
MONITOR *3
2 FR-FTPC-CY, 10/20/30m, φ13

HUB-100
TMDS_DATA2(+) OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 P
(8PORTS)

J205
DVI-D MONITOR P シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN
4 TXP
NC GND 10 ミドリ GRN 1

NAME
TYPE
P
名称
5 1 TXN
SWITCHING HUB
NC DVI0TX2_N SYS_FAIL_H 11 2
DDC_CLOCK 6 2 DVI0TX2_P SYS_FAIL_C 12 3 RXP
アオ BLU
*2
NC 8 4 NC 5 NC
ダイ ORG
チャ BRN
NC 12 8 NC
6
NC 13 9 DVI0TX1_N
相互結線図
GND 15 11 A_GND NETWORK
CU-200

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

NC 20 16 NC NC 4 4 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
*5
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 18 DVI0TXD_P RXN 6 6 RXN

ｶｰﾄﾞ I/F ﾕﾆｯﾄ *2
TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 19 A_GND NC 7 7 NC
21 NC
22 J614(TB) MJ-A3SPFD J1
FAR-2117-BB/2127-BB (DC SET)
*3 A_GND MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
23 シロ WHT
DVI0TXC_P +12V 1 1 +12V
3 FG
S - 12
IV-1.25sq.
D
C
B
A
（空中線部用） FOR ANTENNA UNIT
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
TPYC-2.5 *1
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 *2
:
:
:
:
:
GND
NOTE
TPYC-2.5 *1
220VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-6522 *2
200VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC-2.5 *1
440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1 *2
220VAC,3φ,60Hz
OPTION
K2
380VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC-2.5 *1
1 3φ(U)
440VAC,3φ,60Hz 3 3φ(V)
USER SUPPLY
PSU-007
（高速回転用）FOR HSC(45RPM) 5 3φ(W)

1
電源制御部
220VAC,3φ,50Hz
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
220VAC,3φ,60Hz
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
440VAC,3φ,60Hz
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
*1 *5
TB1
BREAKER
*1 TB1 03-2088(6-14P) J604(TB) DPYC-1.5 *1
2
1
14
13
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5 +12V 1 1 ANT_12V_ON
J1
1 H ANT ON N 2 2 GND
1φ, 50-60Hz
2 C 氷結防止用
3φ(W) 9
3φ(V) 6
3φ(U) 4
XK1
03-2090(3P)
GYRO
J5(VH)
64P1106A
*1 BRN 1 DE-ICER *7
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
GYRO_R2 110/115VAC,1φ,
DPYC-1.5 RED 2 GYRO_R1 *1
DPYC-1.5
CONVERTER
440VAC
BOARD *2
RU-1803
J680

3 NC 220/230VAC,50-60Hz RU-3305 *2

1φ, 50-60Hz チャ
03P9342

1 DPYCY-1.5 *1
*2
TRANSFORMER
TB BOARD
アカ 100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
NC
GYRO_CLK-C
GYRO_CLK-H
GYRO_DATA-C
GYRO_DATA-H

TPYCY-2.5
2
*1
J4(VH)
J7(NH)
RW-4747
3 ダイ ORG 1 GYRO_S1
5
4
3
2
1
4 キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2 J613(TB) *4

5 ミドリ GRN 3 GYRO_S3 TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,
*1
キ
6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T NC 2 15/30/40/50m MAX.100m TB-801
MPYC-7
7 ムラサキ PPL 5 GYRO_FG チャ BRN
3 NC
GYROCOMPASS 1 TX_HV
03-2089(3P)
03-2091(5P)
チャ BRN
ダイ ORG
アカ RED
YEL
J610(TB) 2 NC
TB-902
ダイ(太) ORG[B]
3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS
2 100VAC_C
1 100VAC_H
24V_MINUS 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V_MINUS

J608(TB)
アオ(太) BLU[B]
*3
*5
*4
*1
*2
1 AD_DATA_H J603(XH) 3 5
P ハイ(太) GRY[B]
2
:
:
:
:
2 AD_DATA_C 4 6
注記
*1 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
3 AD_CLK_H 5 7
J615(TB)
TTYCS-4 P シロ(太) WHT[B]
-12V 5
GND 4
+5V 3
GND 2
+12v 1
空中線部
ミドリチャ SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B

キアカ RF_SPU_D_A 9 クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D_A
J911
BRN
PM TRIG 5
GND 4
-12V 3
+12V 2
PM LEVEL 1
シロ WHT
PM ENABLE 6
ダイ RF_SPU_D_B 10 12 RF_SPU_D_B
造船所手配
オプション
RED
GRN
YEL
ORG
SG 11 ミドリ(太) GRN[B] 13 SG
ユーザー手配
アカ(太) RED[B]
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND 12 14 GND
3
2
1
J3
J4
TB-802
NC
NC
J609
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
PM-51
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
モニター
MONITOR
-5/-12V
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J3
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
TB 03P9349
RSB-100/101/102(FOR_45RPM)
DVI1TX2_N 1
PERFORMANCE
DVI1TX2_P 2
IV-8sq. *1
A_GND 3
保護アース PE
*2
03P9229A
J9 NC 7 J602(XH) 1.5/10/20/ 1.5/10/20/
J501/J521 J502/J522 J501
RGB-BUFF基板
DVI-RGB変換基板
30m,φ9 30m,φ9
J2 2 GND DVI1TX1_N 9 KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A
RGB BUFFER BOARD

VGA CABLE
IV-3.5sq.
1 R_VIDEO 3 HS DVI1TX1_P 10
*1
RGB EXT. MONITOR KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B KEY_RXD_B 3 3 KEY_RXD_B

2 G_VIDEO J1 4 GND A_GND 11 4 4
KEY_RXD_A 4 KEY_RXD_A KEY_RXD_A 4 KEY_RXD_A
保護アース PE

7
3
5 NC G_VIDEO 3 G VCC 14 +12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12V

*1 6 GND GND 4 8 GND GND 15 GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 8 GND GND 10 GND DVI1TXD_N 17
(氷結防止あり w/DE-ECER)
6 SYS_FAIL_C 10 10 SYS_FAIL_C NC 10 10 NC
VDR
*2
DSUB-BNC-1
CONVERTOR *2
SLB-FRN4-A
J507/J527
または
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
操作部
操作部
1 SYS_FAIL_H
RCU-015
RCU-014
13 11 22
RCU-016
H_SYNC VCC A_GND

OR
14 12 23 J622 2 SYS_FAIL_C
Y_SYNC GND DVI1TXC_P
15 13 24 SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
2
CONTROL UNIT
4 SYS_ACK_C
CONTROL UNIT
SYS_ACK_C
J616(NH)
1 GND J621(TB)
J605(TB)
2 OP_HD_IN HDG_A 1
3 GND P *1
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
5 GND
6
(IEC-61162-2)
*2 OP_TRIG_IN
7 GND J607(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 LOG_A *1
LOG_B P TTYCS-1
2 SPEED LOG
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
J617(NH)
1 GND
4
2 OP_HD_1 J606(TB)
*1
3 GND NAV_A 1
P TTYCS-1
4 OP_BP_1 NAV_B 2 NAVIGATOR
5 GND NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
*2 6 OP_TRIG_1
7 GND
RW-4864,φ9.5 J619(TB)
SUB DISPLAY1 8 OP_VIDEO_1 *1
ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
(FULL-LOG) 2 P
ECDIS
ARPA_B
J618(NH) NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
1 GND
SCALE
DRAWN
2 OP_HD_2
DWG.No.
CHECKED
J601
APPROVED
3 GND
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
4 NC 1 RS-232C CABLE
OP_BP_2
5 RXD 2 PC
Feb. 2, '05
GND
*2 6 OP_TRIG_2 TXD 3
7 GND NC 4
RW-4864,φ9.5 GND 5
NC 6
MASS
100-240VAC
(SEMI-LOG) NC 7
9
Y. Hatai
1 NC
C3521-C01- H
DVI0TX2_N
2 DVI0TX2_P
TAKAHASHI.T
3 A_GND
E. MIYOSHI
kg
4 NC J611(TB)
5 NC AIS_TD_A 1
*1 *5
BREAKER
6 NC AIS_TD_B 2 P
5
100-230VAC
7 NC AIS_RD_A 3 *1
P
*1
8 NC AIS_RD_B 4 TTYCS-4
*1

10 DVI0TX1_P (IEC-61162-2)
11 A_GND
DPYC-2.5
J620(TB)
3.5m, φ8.6
12 NC
制御部
RPU-013
2
1
13 NC TRK_TD_A 1
IV-1.25sq.
*1
14 VCC TRK_TD_B 2
NR203PF-VVS1.25,
保護アース PE
*1
TB1
15 GND TRK_RD_A 3
P TTYCS-1
16 NC TRK_RD_B 4 TRACK_CONTROL
3
2
1
03-163-6002-1
17 DVI0TXD_N GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
(IEC-61162-1)
18 DVI0TXD_P
AC
AC
GND
19 A_GND
20 J612(TB) *1
NC
21 TTYCS-7
NC ALARM1_0 1
ﾓﾆﾀｰ部
SINGLELINK5M/10M,φ7 23 DVI0TXC_P ALARM2_0 3 *1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR

HUB-100
NAME
TYPE
(8PORTS)
名称

TMDS_DATA2(+) 2 シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN
J205 DVI-D MONITOR ALARM3_0 5 1 TXP

P ミドリ GRN P
SWITCHING HUB
MONITOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 1 DVI0TX2_N ALARM3_1 6 2 TXN

2 DVI0TX2_P 3
3 A_GND 4
*2

4 NC 5
5 NC 6
NC 8 6 シロ/チャ WHT/BRN 7 NC
NC SYS_FAIL_H 11
TMDS_DATA(-) 9 P チャ BRN NC
7 NC SYS_FAIL_C 12 8
6
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
IV-8sq. *1
8 NC
相互結線図
TMDS_DATA1/3_SHIELD 11 9 DVI0TX1_N
保護アース PE
USER SUPPLY FOR FAR-2137S-BB
NC 12 10 DVI0TX1_P
NC 13 11 A_GND
+5V_POWER 14 NETWORK MPS588-C J302
12 NC
GND 15 P5E-4PTX-BL *10m*,φ6.3
13 NC TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 14 VCC TXN 2 2 TXN

TMDS_DATAB(-) 17 15 GND RXP 3 3 RXP
TMDS_DATAB(+) 18 16 NC NC 4 4 NC
CARD I/F UNIT
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19 17 DVI0TXD_N NC 5 5 NC
NC 20 18 DVI0TXD_P RXN 6 6 RXN
*6
NC 21
*2
7 NC
FAR-2137S/2837S/2837S-BB
19 A_GND NC 7
TMDS_CLOCK_SHIELD 22 20 NC NC 8 8 NC
TMDS_CLOCK(+) 23 21 NC
TMDS_CLOCK(-) 24 22 A_GND J614(TB) MJ-A3SPFD J1
*3 シロ WHT MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
23 DVI0TXC_P +12V 1 クロ BLK
1 +12V
DVI CABLE GND 2 2 GND
EXT. MONITOR 24 DVI0TXC_N
3 FG
S - 13
IV-1.25sq.
D
C
B
A
*1
TB901
*7 DPYCY-1.5
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
1 100VAC_H
PM ENABLE
PM TRIG
GND
-12V
+12V
100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz PM LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
J911
2 100VAC_C
NOTE
5
4
3
2
1
6
氷結防止用
*1 3 NC
DE-ICER DPYC-1.5
RSB-103
110/115/220/230VAC, RU-3305 *2
空中線部
1
2
3
4
5
6
OPTION
PM-31
MONITOR
モニター
J/P922
1φ,50-60Hz
ANTENNA UNIT
PERFORMANCE
USER SUPPLY
*1
保護ｱｰｽ PE
IV-3.5sq.
WITH DE-ICER
氷結防止あり
1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
MOTOR_C 8
MOTOR_C 7
MOTOR_H 6
MOTOR_H 5
GND 9
GND 8
PM-ENABL 7
PM-LEVEL 6
PM-TRIG 5
-12V 4
BP 3
HD 2
+12V 1
NC 11
NC 10
RW-4747
TB801
TB803
NO DE-ICER
氷結防止なし
*1 *5
BREAKER
*1 TB1 03-2088(6-14P)
2
1
14
13
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5
J1
1 H
1φ, 50-60Hz
MAX,30m
2 C
OR WRJ-9
MPYCY-19
14-19:
03-2090(3P)
GYRO
J5(VH)
64P1106A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
*1
NOT USED
*1 BRN 1
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
GYRO_R2

DPYC-1.5 RED 2 GYRO_R1

CONVERTER
440VAC
BOARD *2
RU-1803

J680 3 NC
導波管 WAVEGUIDE

1φ, 50-60Hz 1 チャ
*2
TRANSFORMER
アカ
NC
GYRO_CLK-C
GYRO_CLK-H
GYRO_DATA-C
TB803
GYRO_DATA-H
2
03P9342
J4(VH)
TB804
J7(NH)
ダイ ORG 1
11 NC
10 NC
3 BP
2 HD
GYRO_S1
TB BOARD
2 NC

9 GND
8 GND
5
4
3
2
1
YEL
4 -12V
1 +12V
4 キ 2 GYRO_S2
FR-9-20/30/50(20/30/50m)
5 ミドリ GRN 3 GYRO_S3
5 PM-TRIG
J613(TB) *4
3 MOTOR_C
1 MOTOR_H
*1
7 PM-ENABL
6 PM-LEVEL
キ
MPYC-7 6 アオ BLU 4 GYRO_T TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,
NC 2 TB-801
03-2089(3P) チャ BRN
03-2091(5P)
チャ BRN
ダイ ORG
アカ RED
YEL
1 TX_HV
J610(TB) 2 NC
*3
*5
*4
*1
*2
J608(TB) ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
24V_PLUS 1
2
:
:
:
:
注記
P アオ(太) BLU[B]
*1 2 AD_DATA_C MOTOR(+) 3 5 MOTOR(+)
3 AD_CLK_H ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6 MOTOR(+)
J615(TB)
TTYCS-4 P MOTOR(+) 4
-12V 5
GND 4
+5V 3
GND 2
+12v 1
A-D CONVERTER 4 AD_CLK_C MOTOR(-) 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7 MOTOR(-)
MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR(-)
RTR-081
ミドリチャ SPU_RF_D_A 7 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A

送受信部
造船所手配
オプション
キアカ SPU_RF_D_B 8 ミドリ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D_B
BRN
ユーザー手配
ダイクロ BLK
RED
GRN
YEL
ORG
RF_SPU_D_B 10 シロ WHT 12 RF_SPU_D_B
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
SG 11 13 SG
アカ(太) RED[B]
J3
J4
GND 12 14 GND
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
TB-802
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
J609
IF_VIDEO
-5/-12V
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
J3 IF_VIDEO
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1
DVI1TX2_P 2
IV-8sq. *1
A_GND 3
保護アース PE
*2
03P9229A
*1
J9 NC 7 1.5/10/20/ 1.5/10/20/
J602(XH) J501/J521 J502/J522 J501
RGB-BUFF基板
DVI-RGB変換基板
30m,φ9 30m,φ9
IV-8sq.
J2 2 GND DVI1TX1_N 9 KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A KEY_TXD_A 2 2 KEY_TXD_A
RGB BUFFER BOARD

VGA CABLE
2 G_VIDEO J1 4 GND A_GND 11 4 4
KEY_RXD_A 4 KEY_RXD_A KEY_RXD_A 4 KEY_RXD_A
3

VDR SYS_FAIL_C
DSUB-BNC-1
CONVERTOR *2
J507/J527
SLB-FRN4-A
または
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC GND 10 NC 21
操作部
操作部
1 SYS_FAIL_H
RCU-015
RCU-014
13 11 22
RCU-016
H_SYNC VCC A_GND

OR
J622 2 SYS_FAIL_C
*2

15 13 24 SYS_ASK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
CONTROL UNIT
2 4 SYS_ACK_C
CONTROL UNIT
SYS_ACK_C
J616(NH)
1 GND J605(TB)
2 OP_HD_IN HDG_A 1
3 GND P *1
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
5 GND
6
(IEC-61162-2)
*2 OP_TRIG_IN
7 GND J607(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 LOG_A *1
LOG_B P TTYCS-1
2 SPEED LOG
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
J617(NH)
4
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1 J606(TB)
*1
3 GND NAV_A 1
P TTYCS-1
5 GND NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
*2 6 OP_TRIG_1
7 GND
RW-4864,φ9.5 J619(TB)
ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
(FULL-LOG) 2 P
ECDIS
ARPA_B
J618(NH) 3 (IEC-61162-1)
SCALE
DRAWN
NC
DWG.No.
CHECKED
1 GND
APPROVED
2 OP_HD_2
3 GND J601
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
Feb. 2, '05
4 NC 1 RS-232C CABLE
OP_BP_2
5 GND RXD 2 PC
6 OP_TRIG_2 TXD 3
*2
7 GND NC 4
RW-4864,φ9.5 GND 5
MASS
NC 6
100-240VAC
(SEMI-LOG) NC 7
C3527-C01- G
Y. Hatai
1 DVI0TX2_N NC 9
TAKAHASHI.T
2 DVI0TX2_P
kg
E. .MIYOSHI
3 A_GND
4 NC J611(TB)
5
5 NC AIS_TD_A 1
*1 *5
BREAKER
6 NC AIS_TD_B 2 P
100-230VAC
7 NC AIS_RD_A 3 *1
8 NC AIS_RD_B 4 P
TTYCS-4
*1
*1

10 DVI0TX1_P (IEC-61162-2)
11 A_GND
DPYC-2.5
12 J620(TB)
制御部
NC
3.5m, φ8.6
RPU-013
2
1
13 NC TRK_TD_A 1
IV-1.25sq.
*1
14 VCC TRK_TD_B 2
保護アース PE
*1
NR203PF-VVS1.25,
TB1
15 GND TRK_RD_A 3
03-163-6003-0
P TTYCS-1
16 NC TRK_RD_B 4 TRACK_CONTROL
3
2
1
17 DVI0TXD_N GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
(IEC-61162-1)
18 DVI0TXD_P
AC
AC
GND
19 A_GND
20 J612(TB) *1
NC
21 TTYCS-7
NC ALARM1_0 1
P
NAME
TYPE
VIDEO IN DVI-D DVI-D/D 22 A_GND ALARM1_1 2

名称
ﾓﾆﾀｰ部
SINGLELINK5M/10M,φ7 23 DVI0TXC_P ALARM2_0 3 *1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR

HUB-100
MU-231CR
(8PORTS)

MPS588-C
TMDS_DATA2(+) 2 シロ/ミドリ WHT/GRN
J205 DVI-D MONITOR ALARM3_0 5 1 TXP

P ミドリ GRN P
SWITCHING HUB
MONITOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 1 DVI0TX2_N ALARM3_1 6 2 TXN

2 DVI0TX2_P 3
3 A_GND 4
*2

4 NC 5
5 NC 6
NC 8 シロ/チャ WHT/BRN NC
FAR-2827W
6 NC SYS_FAIL_H 11 7
6
TMDS_DATA(-) 9 P チャ BRN
相互結線図
7 NC SYS_FAIL_C 12 8 NC
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
IV-8sq. *1
8 NC
TMDS_DATA1/3_SHIELD 11 9 DVI0TX1_N
保護アース PE
NC 12 10 DVI0TX1_P
NC 13 11 A_GND
12 NC
MARINE RADAR/ARPA

13 NC TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16
14 VCC TXN 2 2 TXN

CARD I/F UNIT
TMDS_DATA0/5_SHIELD 19
17 DVI0TXD_N NC 5 5 NC
NC 20 RXN
*6
18 DVI0TXD_P RXN 6 6
NC 21
*2
19 A_GND NC 7 7 NC
*3 シロ WHT MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
23 DVI0TXC_P +12V 1 クロ BLK
1 +12V
3 FG
S - 14
IV-1.25sq.
D
C
B
A
*7 DPYCY-1.5 *1
氷結防止用 100VAC,1φ,50-60Hz
TB901
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
DE-ICER DPYC-1.5 *1
:
:
:
:
:
110/115/220/230VAC, 1 100VAC_H
NOTE
RU-3305 *2
1φ,50-60Hz 2 100VAC_C
RSB-105
RSB-104
3 NC
空中線部
OPTION
200VAC,3φ,50Hz J911
1
(380/440VAC)
(200/220VAC)
ANTENNA UNIT
空中線部モーター用 220VAC,3φ,60Hz PM LEVEL

2
USER SUPPLY
モニター
+12V
MONITOR
FOR MOTOR IN ANTENNA UNIT 380VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1 3
WITH DE-ICER
氷結防止あり
PM-51
-12V
保護ｱｰｽ PE
*1
IV-3.5sq.
440VAC,3φ,60Hz
1
SHIPYARD SUPPLY
PERFORMANCE
GND
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1 5 PM TRIG
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 *2
( SHIPYARD SUPPLY )
6 PM ENABLE
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1
220VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-6522 *2
TB 03P9349
TPYC(Y)-2.5 *1
NC
NC
GND
GND
PM-ENABL
PM-LEVEL
PM-TRIG
-12V
BP
HD
+12V
RW-4747
NO DE-ICER
TB803
440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1 *2
氷結防止なし
3φ(W) 3
3φ(V) 2
3φ(U) 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
TB902
*1 *5
BREAKER
*1 TB1 03-2088(6-14P)
2
1
14
13
100-120/200-240VAC DPYC-2.5
J1
1 H
1φ, 50-60Hz
2 C
GYRO
03-2090(3P)
J5(VH)
64P1106A
20/30m
MAX,30m
3
2
1
BRN
MPYCY-12
ﾄﾗﾝｽ
1
TPYCY-2.5
*1 GYRO_R2

*1
DPYC-1.5 RED 2
*1
10-12:NOT USED

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GYRO_R1
CONVERTER
BOARD *2

RU-1803
440VAC
LHPX-20D-ASSY
TB911
J680 3 NC

1φ, 50-60Hz チャ
3φ(W)
3φ(V)
3φ(U)
1
*2
TRANSFORMER
NC
GYRO_CLK-C
GYRO_CLK-H
GYRO_DATA-C
GYRO_DATA-H
アカ
03P9342
J4(VH)
2
J7(NH)
ダイ ORG 1
TB BOARD
3 GYRO_S1

11 NC
10 NC
3 BP
2 HD
5
4
3
2
1
TB912
TB803
9 GND
8 GND
4 キ YEL 2 GYRO_S2
4 -12V
1 +12V

3 3φ(W)
2 3φ(V)
1 3φ(U)
*1 5 J613(TB) *4
5 PM-TRIG
キ
アオ 4
7 PM-ENABL
6 PM-LEVEL
MPYC-7 6 BLU GYRO_T TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22.1,

NC 2 TB-801
03-2089(3P)
03-2091(5P)
チャ BRN
ダイ ORG
チャ BRN
YEL
アカ RED
1 TX_HV
2 NC
*5
*3
*4
*2
*1
J610(TB) ダイ(太) ORG[B]
J608(TB) 24V_PLUS 1 3 24V_PLUS
2
:
:
:
:
:
注記
P アオ(太) BLU[B]
*1 2 AD_DATA_C 3 5
J615(TB)
TTYCS-4 4 6
-12V 5
GND 4
+5V 3
GND 2
+12v 1
P ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B]
6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8
RTR-082
ミドリチャ SPU_RF_D_A 7 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D_A

送受信部
造船所手配
オプション
キアカミドリ GRN
BRN
ユーザー手配
ダイクロ BLK
RED
GRN
YEL
ORG
RF_SPU_D_B 10 シロ WHT 12 RF_SPU_D_B
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
SG 11 13 SG
アカ(太) RED[B]
J3
J4
GND 12 14 GND
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
NC
NC
GND
VCC
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
TB-802
ｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ
J609
-5/-12V
RGBﾋﾞﾃﾞｵ
ストレートケーブルを使用
DVI-RGB-1
CONVERTOR
RGB VIDEO
DVI1TX2_N 1
DVI1TX2_P 2
IV-8sq. *1
A_GND 3
保護アース PE
*2
03P9229A
J9 1.5/10/20/ 1.5/10/20/
RGB-BUFF基板
NC 7 J602(XH) J501/J521 J501
DVI-RGB変換基板
30m,φ9 J502/J522 30m,φ9

RGB BUFFER BOARD

IV-8sq. *1
保護アース PE

3

*6 : CU-200/RPU-013間はクロスケーブル、CU-200/HUB-100間は
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 8 GND GND 6 10 GND DVI1TXD_N 17 SYS_FAIL_C 10 10 SYS_FAIL_C NC 10 10 NC
VDR 9 NC 7 18
H_SYNC DVI1TXD_P
DSUB-BNC-1
CONVERTOR *2
SLB-FRN4-A
または
BNC CONNECTOR
12 NC 10 21 J507/J527
GND NC
操作部
操作部
1 SYS_FAIL_H
RCU-015
RCU-014
RCU-016
13 H_SYNC VCC 11 A_GND 22 J622

OR
2 SYS_FAIL_C
*2

SYS_ACK_H 1 3 SYS_ACK_H
15 NC -5_-12V 13 DVI1TXC_N 24
2 4 SYS_ACK_C
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
SYS_ACK_C
J616(NH)
J621(TB)
1 GND J605(TB)
2 OP_HD_IN HDG_A 1
3 GND P *1
HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1Q
5 GND
*2 6 OP_TRIG_IN
(IEC-61162-2)
7 GND J607(TB)
RW-4864,φ9.5 *1
MASTER RADAR 8 OP_VIDEO_IN LOG_A 1
LOG_B P TTYCS-1
2 SPEED LOG
NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
J617(NH)
4
1 GND
2 OP_HD_1 J606(TB)
*1
3 GND NAV_A 1
P TTYCS-1
5 GND NC 3 (IEC-61162-1)
6 OP_TRIG_1
*2 7 GND
RW-4864,φ9.5 J619(TB)
ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
(FULL-LOG) 2 P
ARPA_B ECDIS
3
SCALE
DRAWN
J618(NH) NC (IEC-61162-1)
DWG.No.
CHECKED
1 GND
APPROVED
2 OP_HD_2
3 GND J601
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
Feb. 2, '05
NC 1
4 OP_BP_2 RS-232C CABLE

5 GND RXD 2 PC
*2 6 OP_TRIG_2 TXD 3
7 GND NC 4
RW-4864,φ9.5
MASS
8 OP_VIDEO_2 GND 5
SUB DISPLAY2 NC 6
100-240VAC
(SEMI-LOG) NC 7
Y. Hatai
C3528-C01- G
NC 9
TAKAHASHI.T
1 DVI0TX2_N
2 DVI0TX2_P
kg
E. MIYOSHI
3 A_GND
4 NC J611(TB)
5
5 NC AIS_TD_A 1
*1 *5
BREAKER
6 NC AIS_TD_B 2 P
100-230VAC
7 NC AIS_RD_A 3 *1
P
*1
8 NC AIS_RD_B 4 TTYCS-4
*1

10 DVI0TX1_P (IEC-61162-2)
11 A_GND
DPYC-2.5
3.5m, φ8.6
J620(TB)
制御部
12 NC
RPU-013
2
1
13 NC TRK_TD_A 1
IV-1.25sq.
*1
14
保護アース PE
NR203PF-VVS1.25,
VCC TRK_TD_B 2 *1
TB1
15 GND TRK_RD_A 3
03-163-6004-0
P TTYCS-1
16 NC TRK_RD_B 4
3
2
1
TRACK_CONTROL
17 DVI0TXD_N GND 5
PROCESSOR UNIT
(IEC-61162-1)
18 DVI0TXD_P
AC
AC
GND
19 A_GND
20 NC J612(TB) *1
21 NC TTYCS-7
ALARM1_0 1
P
NAME
TYPE
VIDEO IN DVI-D DVI-D/D 22 A_GND ALARM1_1 2

名称
ﾓﾆﾀｰ部
23 DVI0TXC_P *1 LAN CABLE (CAT5) OR

HUB-100
SINGLELINK5M/10M,φ7 ALARM2_0 3
MU-231CR
(8PORTS)

TMDS_DATA2(+) 2 J205 DVI-D MONITOR ALARM3_0 5 1 TXP

ミドリ GRN
SWITCHING HUB
P
MONITOR UNIT
TMDS_DATA2/4_SHIELD 3 1 ALARM3_1 6 P 2 TXN

DVI0TX2_N
2 DVI0TX2_P 3
*2
3 A_GND 4
4 NC 5
5 NC 6
NC 8 6 シロ/チャ WHT/BRN 7 NC
6
NC SYS_FAIL_H 11
P チャ BRN
相互結線図
FAR-2837SW
TMDS_DATA(-) 9 7 NC 8 NC
SYS_FAIL_C 12
TMDS_DATA(+) 10
IV-8sq. *1
8 NC
保護アース PE
9 DVI0TX1_N
NC 12 10 DVI0TX1_P
NC 13 11 A_GND
12 NC
MARINE RADAR/ARPA

13 NC TXP 1 1 TXP
CU-200
HOT_PLUG_DETECT 16 14 VCC TXN 2 2 TXN

CARD I/F UNIT
17 DVI0TXD_N NC 5 5 NC
NC 20
*6
18 DVI0TXD_P RXN 6 6 RXN

21
*2
NC 19 A_GND NC 7 7 NC
*3 シロ WHT MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6
23 DVI0TXC_P +12V 1 クロ BLK 1 +12V
S - 15
3 FG
IV-1.25sq.
1 2 3
S - 16
制御部
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-013 IEC-61162-2
J605(TB)
HDG_A 1 *1
J3 HDG_B 2 TTYCS-1T
RGB ﾊﾞｯﾌｧ基板 HDG_GND 3 HDG SENSOR
RGB BUFFER PCB DVI1TX2_N 1
03P9229A DVI1TX2_P 2 (IEC-61162-2)
3
A DVI-RGB
A_GND
NC 4
J607(TB)
LOG_A 1
*1
TTYCS-1
NC 5
変換基板 6
LOG_B 2 LOG
NC NC 3
DVI-RGB NC 7 (IEC-61162-2)
CONVERSION NC 8
*5 J2 9
VGA CABLE BOARD DVI1TX1_N J606(TB)
RGB EXT. MONITOR 1 R_VIDEO DVI1TX1_P 10 *1
NAV_A 1 TTYCS-1
2 G_VIDEO A_GND 11 NAV_B
12
2 NAVIGATOR
3 B_VIDEO SLB-FRN4-A NC NC 3
4 NC NC 13 (IEC-61162-2)
5 NC VCC 14
6 GND GND 15 J619(TB)
*1 COAXIAL BNC CONNECTOR 7 GND NC 16 *1
CABLE(75Ω) ｘ 5 ARPA_A 1 TTYCS-1
CONVERTOR 8 GND DVI1TXD_N 17 ARPA_B
VDR 9 18 2 ECDIS
BNCｺﾈｸﾀｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀ *5 NC DVI1TXD_P NC 3
*5 10 GND A_GND 19 (IEC-61162-2)
DSUB-BNC-1 11 GND NC 20
12 NC NC 21
13 H_SYNC A_GND 22
14 23 RS-232C
Y_SYNC DVI1TXC_P
15 NC DVI1TXC_N 24 J601
NC 1
RXD 2
TXD 3
NC 4
GND 5
NC 6
J616(NH) NC 7
B 1 GND NC 8
9
2 OP_HD_IN NC PC
3 GND
4 OP_BP_IN
5 GND IEC-61162-2
6 OP_TRIG_IN J611(TB)
7 GND AIS_TD_A 1
RW-4864,φ9.5
MASTER RADAR 8 OP_VIDEO_IN AIS_TD_B 2
AIS_RD_A 3 *1
AIS_RD_B 4 TTYCS-4
J617(NH) AIS_GND 5 AIS
1 GND (IEC-61162-2)
2 OP_HD_1
3 GND
SHIP'S ALARM SYSTEM
4 OP_BP_1 J620(TB)
5 GND RSV3_TD_A 1
6 OP_TRIG_1 RSV3_TD_B 2 *1
SUB DISPLAY1 RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND TRK_RD_A 3 TTYCS-1
8 OP_VIDEO_1 TRK_RD_B 4 TRACK_CONTROL
(FULL-LOG)
GND 5
J618(NH)
1 GND 電源
J612(TB) *1 POWER SUPPLY
2 OP_HD_2 TTYCS-7
3 GND ALARM1_0 1
4 OP_BP_2 ALARM1_1 2
5 GND ALARM2_0 3
6 OP_TRIG_2 ALARM2_1 4
C SUB DISPLAY2 RW-4864,φ9.5 7 GND ALARM3_0 5
(SEMI-LOG) 8 OP_VIDEO_2 ALARM3_1 6
ALARM4_0 7
ALARM4_1 8
ALM_ACK_IN_0 9
DVI-D MONITOR ALM_ACK_IN_1 10 ﾈｯﾄﾜｰｸﾊﾌﾞ
FR-FTPC-CY, NETWORK HUB
*5 J205 SYS_FAIL_N 11
DVI-D/D SINGLELINK5M SYS_FAIL_C 12 10/20/30m, φ13 MPS588-C
EXT. MONITOR 1 DVI0TX2_N *5
ｼﾛ/ﾐﾄﾞﾘ WHT/GRN
2 DVI0TX2_P ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN 1 TXP
P
3 A_GND 2 TXN
ｼﾛ/ﾀﾞｲ WHT/ORG
4 NC 3 RXP
ｱｵ BLU
5 NC 4 NC
ｼﾛ/ｱｵ WHT/BLU P
6 NC 5 NC
ﾀﾞｲ ORG
注記 7 NC ｼﾛ/ﾁｬ WHT/BRN
6 RXN
8 NC 7 NC
＊１）造船所手配 9 DVI0TX1_N
ﾁｬ BRN
8 NC
10 DVI0TX1_P
＊２）コネクタは工場にて取付済み。 11 A_GND ｶｰﾄﾞ I/F ﾕﾆｯﾄ
12 NC
＊３）オプション。 13 NC
P5E-4PTX-BL CARD I/F UNIT
NETWORK *10m*,φ6.3 CU-200
＊４）コネクタクランプでアースに落とす。 14
15
VCC MPS588-C J302 *3
GND
TXP 1 1 TXP
＊５）ユーザー手配 16 NC
TXN 2 2 TXN
17 DVI0TXD_N
18 RXP 3 3 RXP
DVI0TXD_P
19 NC 4 4 NC
A_GND
NC 5 5 NC
D NOTE
20
21
NC
NC RXN 6 6 RXN
NC
22 A_GND NC 7 7
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. 23 DVI0TXC_P NC 8 8 NC
24 DVI0TXC_N
*2: CONNECTOR PLAG FITTED AT FACTORY. J614(TB) MJ-A3SPF0015-100,10m,φ6 MJ-A3SPFD J1
+12V 1 1 +12V
*3: OPTION. GND 2 2 GND
3 FG
*4: GROUNDING THRU CONNECTOR CLAMP
*5: USER SUPPLY
DRAWN TITLE
Mar. 30 '04 K.MIYAZAWA RPU-013
CHECKED 名称
TAKAHASHI.T 制御部外部信号接続
APPROVED
Y. Hatai 相互結線図
SCALE MASS NAME
kg PROCESSOR UNIT EXTERNAL INTERFACE
DWG.No.
C3528-C02- A 03-163-6004-0 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4
制御部防水接続箱防水接続箱空中線部

PROCESSOR UNIT JUNCTION JUNCTION ANTENNA UNIT
BOX BOX
A RPU-013 RSB-097
J613 RW-9600,30m TB1 TB1
DPYCY-6 *1
TR-HV 1 チャ BRN 1 1 RW-9600,30m TB-801
NC 2 2 2 チャ BRN 1 TR-HV
J610 3 3 2 NC
24V+ 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 4 DPYCY-6 *1 4 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V+
24V- 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 5 5 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V-
MOTOR-H 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 6 DPYCY-6 *1 6 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5 MOTOR-H
MOTOR-H 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 7 7 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6 MOTOR-H
MOTOR-C 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 8 8 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7 MOTOR-C
MOTOR-C 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 9 9 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR-C
TTYCYS-4 *1
SPU_RF-A 7 アカ RED 10 10 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF-A
P P
SPU_RF-B 8 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN 11 11 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN 10 SPU_RF-B
RF_SPU-A 9 クロ BLK 12 12 クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU-A
P P
RF_SPU-B 10 シロ WHT 13 13 シロ WHT 12 RF_SPU-B
SIG_GND 11 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) GRN[B] 14 14 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) GRN[B] 13 SIG_GND
GND 12 アカ(太) RED[B] 15 15 アカ(太) RED[B] 14 GND
J609 TB2 TB2 TB-802
RG-12/UY *1
IF_OUT 1 ﾄﾞｳｼﾞｸ COAX. 1 1 ﾄﾞｳｼﾞｸ COAX. 1 IF_VIDEO
GND 2 2 2 2 GND
B
MAX.300m
C
DRAWN TITLE
注記 Sep. 17 '04 T.YAMASAKI FAR-2127/2827
CHECKED 名称
＊１）造船所手配。 Sep. 17 '04 T.TAKENO 空中線ケーブル延長
APPROVED
NOTE Sep. 25 '04 相互結線図
NAME
*1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY. ANTENNA CABLE EXTENTION
DWG.No.
S - 17
C3520-C01- A INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

S - 18
S - 19
S - 20
S - 21
S - 22
S - 23
S - 24
S - 25
S - 26
S - 27
S - 28
S - 29
S - 30
S - 31
S - 32
S - 33
S - 34
S - 35
S - 36
S - 37
S - 38
S - 39
S - 40
S - 41
S - 42
S - 43
S - 44
Ｓ - 45
S - 46
S - 47
S - 48
S - 49
S - 50
S - 51
S - 52
S - 53
S - 54
S - 55
S - 56
S - 57
S - 58
S - 59
S - 60
S - 61
S - 62
S - 63
S - 64
S - 65
S - 66
S - 67
S - 68
S - 69
S - 70
S - 71
S - 72
S - 73

Sme35190b Far2x07ser

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sme35190b Far2x07ser

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Back

FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan

Model Code Number

1. 12 kW/25 kW X-band Radar

1.2 Modification procedure

Fig. 1.1 RFC cover

Necessary parts Q’ty Modification No.

2.1 Addition of RFC cover

Fig. 2.1 RFC cover

2. Replace the fixing screws with the spacer.

Fig. 2.2 Add EMI core

5. Fix the RFC cover by the screws.

Cable tie is not

Cable ties in photo are

2.2 Jumper to magnetron and ground line of MD board

2.3 Addition of EMI core to the interconnection cable between

Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7

2.4 Adhere the microwave absorbent inside the MD cover as in Fig. 8

Fig. 2.8 MD cover

Necessary parts Q’ty Modification No.

3.1 Addition of RFC cover

Fig. 3.1 RFC cover added

3.2 Shielding to IF-RFC interconnection cable

Fig. 3.2 shield to IF-RFC cable

3.3 EMI gasket for IF amp case

EMI gasket 175 mm

Fig. 3.3 EMI gasket

3.4 Jumper to magnetron and MD board GND

3.5 Soldering of magnetron heater cable to the pulse transformer

Before modification After modification

3.6 Addition of microwave absorbent

Fig. 3.6 RT cover (inside view)

Changes to be made on Ver. 2.22 SPU

Changes to be made on Ver. 1.03 DRAW FPAG (0005 in selftest screen)

Changes to be made on Ver. 1.20 RFC

Changes to be made on Ver. 01.22 RFC

How to read program versions

FPGA and RFC

0009 001F Version of RFC program and FPGA on RFC board

History of RFC board

As of March 2005, the current RFC board is 03P9346-33A.

When RFC 03P9346-33A (with J806) is used:

When RFC 03P9346-11 (without J806) is used:

J806 (2p) is added here on

Table 1 History of RFC Board

RFC board 03P9346-00 03P9346-00A 03P9346-11A 03P9346-33A

Fig. 1 MU-231CR, Rear view Fig. 2 MU-231CR, Cover removed

Fig. 3 DVI I/F board Two Hex screws

How to check modification on Inverter board

1. Take steps 1 and 2 on the previous page.

DVI I/F board

Fig. 5 03P9360 and DVI I/F boards enlarged

Fig. 6 D23 and D24 on Inverter board

8) NORMAL/12H/24H is added in TRAIL menu > 8 TRAIL LENGTH. When 12H

11) Track can be erased by selecting a color. - RADAR type: A/B/C/W

12) For W (Washington ferry) type only

Chapter 1. Configuration ........................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Configuration ...........................................................................................................1-5

1.3 Specifications ...........................................................................................................1-16

1.4 List of Functions ......................................................................................................1-20

Chapter 2. Location of Parts ......................................................... 2-1

2.2.4 FAR-2827SW scanner unit ............................................................................2-30